Mercedes - C-Class Sedan - Brochure - 2022 - 2022

C-Class Sedan Vehicle document wallet Here you can find comprehen‐ sive information about operating your vehicle and about services and guarantees in printed form. É20658413030ËÍ 2065841303 Order no. P206 0103 13 Part no. 206 584 13 03 Edition B-2022 Mercedes-Benz Digital – in the vehicle Familiarize yourself with the con‐ tents of the Operator's Manual directly via the vehicle's multi‐ media system (menu item "Vehi‐ cle information"). Start with the quick guide or broaden your knowledge with practical tips. C-Class Sedan Operator's Manual Mercedes-Benz Front passenger airbag warning & WARNING Risk of injury or death if the co-driver airbag is enabled If the co-driver airbag is enabled, a child on the co-driver seat may be struck by the codriver airbag during an accident. NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat with an ENABLED FRONT AIRBAG; DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur. Observe the chapter "Children in the vehicle". Publication details Internet Further information about Mercedes-Benz vehi‐ cles and about Mercedes‑Benz AG can be found on the following websites: https://www.mbusa.com (USA only) https://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canada only) Documentation team AG: Not to be reprinted, trans‐ lated or otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part, without written permission from Mercedes‑Benz AG. ©Mercedes‑Benz Vehicle manufacturer Mercedes‑Benz AG Mercedesstraße 120 70372 Stuttgart Germany Airbag warning sticker for USA and Canada As at 11.12.20 Thank you for buying Mercedes-Benz Before you first drive off, read this Operator's Manual carefully and familiarize yourself with your vehicle. For your own safety and a longer operating lifespan of the vehicle, follow the instructions and warning notices in this Opera‐ tor's Manual. Disregarding them may lead to damage to the vehicle or injury to people. Damage to the vehicle resulting from the disre‐ gard of the instructions is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. The standard equipment and product description of your vehicle may vary and depends on the fol‐ lowing factors: R Model R Order R National version R Availability Mercedes-Benz reserves the right to introduce changes in the following areas: R Design R Equipment R Technical features The equipment in your vehicle may therefore dif‐ fer from that shown in the descriptions and illus‐ trations. The following documents are integral parts of the vehicle: R Digital Operator's Manual R Printed Operator's Manual R Maintenance Booklet R Equipment-dependent Supplements Keep these documents in the vehicle at all times. If you sell the vehicle, always pass all of the documents on to the new owner. Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. A Daimler Company 2065841303 2065841303 2 Contents Symbols ........................................................ 5 At a glance .................................................... 6 Cockpit ........................................................... 6 Indicator and warning lamps ........................... 8 Overhead control panel ................................ 10 Door operating unit and seat adjustment ..... 12 Emergencies and breakdowns ...................... 14 Digital Operator's Manual ......................... 16 Calling up the Digital Operator's Manual ...... 16 General notes ............................................. Protection of the environment ...................... Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts ...................... Operator's Manual ........................................ Touch-sensitive controls ............................... Service and vehicle operation ....................... Operating safety ........................................... Declaration of conformity for vehicle installed radio components .......................... Diagnostics connection ................................ Qualified specialist workshop ....................... 17 17 17 18 19 19 20 22 23 24 Correct use of the vehicle ............................. Notes for persons with electronic medi‐ cal aids ......................................................... Problems with your vehicle ........................... Reporting safety defects ............................... Limited Warranty .......................................... QR code for rescue card ............................... Data storage ................................................. Copyright ...................................................... 24 25 25 26 26 27 27 31 Occupant safety ......................................... Restraint system ........................................... Seat belts ..................................................... Airbags ......................................................... PRE-SAFE® system ....................................... Automatic measures after an accident ......... Safely transporting children in the vehi‐ cle ................................................................ Notes on pets in the vehicle ......................... 33 33 35 39 46 48 Opening and closing .................................. SmartKey ...................................................... Doors ............................................................ Trunk ............................................................. 63 63 67 71 48 62 Side windows ............................................... Sliding sunroof ............................................. Roller sun blinds ........................................... Anti-theft protection ..................................... 77 80 84 85 Seats and stowing ..................................... 89 Notes on the correct driver's seat posi‐ tion ............................................................... 89 Seats ............................................................ 89 Steering wheel .............................................. 99 Easy entry and exit feature ......................... 102 Memory function ........................................ 103 Stowage areas ............................................ 105 Sockets ....................................................... 114 Wireless charging of the mobile phone and connection with the exterior antenna ... 116 Installing/removing the floor mats .............. 117 Light and visibility .................................... Exterior lighting ........................................... Interior lighting ........................................... Windshield wiper and windshield washer system ........................................................ Mirrors ........................................................ 119 119 130 132 134 Contents Area permeable to radio waves on the windshield ................................................... 137 Climate control ........................................ 138 Overview of climate control systems .......... 138 Operating the climate control system ......... 140 Driving and parking .................................. Driving ........................................................ DYNAMIC SELECT button ........................... Automatic transmission .............................. Function of the 4MATIC .............................. Refueling ..................................................... Parking ....................................................... Driving and driving safety systems .............. Vehicle towing instructions ......................... 147 147 159 161 165 166 168 176 236 Driver display ........................................... Notes on the driver display ......................... Operating the driver display ....................... Driver display menus .................................. Head-up Display ......................................... 238 238 238 239 240 Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical system ........................................................ 242 Overview of status displays on the driver display ........................................................ 242 MBUX multimedia system ....................... Overview and operation .............................. System settings .......................................... Navigation and traffic ................................. Telephone ................................................... Mercedes me and apps .............................. Mercedes-Benz emergency call system ...... Radio & media ............................................ Sound settings ........................................... 244 244 252 257 266 270 277 280 286 Maintenance and care ............................. ASSYST PLUS service interval display ........ Engine compartment .................................. Cleaning and care ....................................... 287 287 288 294 Breakdown assistance ............................ 301 Emergency .................................................. 301 Flat tire ....................................................... 302 3 Battery (vehicle) ......................................... 308 Tow starting or towing away ........................ 314 Electrical fuses ............................................ 319 Wheels and tires ...................................... Notes on noise or unusual handling char‐ acteristics ................................................... Notes on regularly inspecting wheels and tires ............................................................ Notes on snow chains ................................ Tire pressure .............................................. Loading the vehicle .................................... Tire labeling ................................................ Definition of terms for tires and loading ..... Changing a wheel ....................................... Emergency spare wheel .............................. 322 Technical data .......................................... Notes on technical data .............................. Vehicle electronics ..................................... Regulatory radio identification and notes ... Vehicle identification plate, VIN and engine number overview ............................ Operating fluids .......................................... 353 353 353 355 322 322 323 323 330 334 339 342 351 355 357 4 Contents Vehicle data ................................................ 365 Display messages and warning/indi‐ cator lamps ............................................... 367 Display messages ....................................... 367 Warning and indicator lamps ...................... 424 Index .......................................................... 441 Symbols In this Operator's Manual, you will find the fol‐ lowing symbols: & DANGER Danger due to not observing the warning notices Warning notices draw your attention to haz‐ ards that may endanger your health or life, or the health or life of others. # Observe the warning notices. + ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to failure to observe envi‐ ronmental notes Environmental notes include information on environmentally responsible behavior or envi‐ ronmentally responsible disposal. # Observe environmental notes. * NOTE Damage to property due to failure to observe notes on material damage Notes on material damage inform you of risks which may lead to your vehicle being damaged. # Observe notes on material damage. % These symbols indicate useful instructions or further information that could be helpful to you. # Instruction (/ page) Further information on a topic Display in the central display Display 4 Highest menu level, which is to be selected in the multimedia system 5 Relevant submenus, which are to be selected in the multimedia system * Indicates a cause 5 6 At a glance – Cockpit Left-hand-drive vehicles At a glance – Cockpit 1 Steering wheel gearshift paddles → 164 a Switches sound on/off → 244 2 Combination switch → 120 ø Adjusts the volume → 244 3 Driver display → 238 A £ Hazard warning light system → 121 4 DIRECT SELECT lever → 161 246 5 ü Start/stop button → 148 B Control panel for the MBUX multimedia sys‐ tem → → 157 C Adjusts the steering wheel → 100 → 244 → 101 7 Glove box → 107 8 Storage compartment → 107 Driver display → 238 Cruise control → 184 H Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC → 188 è ECO start/stop function 6 Central display 9 Switch panel for: ÷ DYNAMIC SELECT button → 160 c Active Parking Assist → 231 \ Quick vehicle access ú Fingerprint sensor → 244 Ü Switches the MBUX multimedia system on/off → 244 ý Switches the steering wheel heater on/off D Control panel: E Diagnostics connection → 23 F Opens the hood → 288 G ! Electric parking brake → 172 H Light switch → 119 7 8 At a glance – Indicator and warning lamps Driver display At a glance – Indicator and warning lamps 1 #! Turn signal lights → 120 2 ä Indicator lamp inoperative 3 # Electrical malfunction → 428 4 Ù Power steering (red) → 427 → 427 → Ù Power steering (yellow) Ù Rear-axle steering (yellow) E ! Electric parking brake (yellow) → 432 F Electric parking brake (red) → 432 → 432 F USA only ! Canada only G Brakes (red) 427 $ USA only 5 6 Restraint system → 426 J Canada only 6 ü Seat belt → 426 é Recuperative Brake System, USA only → 432 7 L Distance warning → 435 J Brakes (yellow), Canada only → 432 8 ! ABS → 436 → 428 9 h Tire pressure monitoring system → 439 A ; Check Engine → 428 B å ESP® OFF → 436 → 120 ÷ ESP® → 436 L Low beam → 119 → 428 T Parking lights → 119 K R Rear fog light → 120 L H Mercedes-Benz emergency call system → 438 C ÿ Coolant temperature D Coolant temperature display H 8 Reserve fuel with fuel filler flap location indicator I Fuel level J K High beam 9 10 At a glance – Overhead control panel At a glance – Overhead control panel 1 Sun visors (folding, available in extendable design as an optional extra) 7 Switches the right-hand reading lamp on/off → 130 → 80 → 80 → 44 A Inside rearview mirror → 136 B Switches the left-hand reading lamp on/off → 130 2 c Switches the front interior lighting on/off → 130 8 3 Opens/closes the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel 3 u Switches the rear interior lighting on/off → 130 3 Opens/closes the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel roller sunblind 4 ; me button → 270 5 | Switches automatic interior lighting con‐ trol on/off → 130 6 G SOS button → 270 9 PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps 11 12 At a glance – Door operating unit and seat adjustment At a glance – Door operating unit and seat adjustment 1 ß Ü Locks/unlocks the vehicle → 68 2 Opens the door → 67 3 Adjusts the seats electrically → 92 4 w Switches the seat heating on/off → 97 5 s Switches the seat ventilation on/off → 98 6 V Operates the memory function → 104 7 W Opens/closes the rear left side window → 77 8 W Opens/closes the left side window → 77 9 Í Operates the outside mirrors → 134 A p Opens/closes the trunk lid → 71 B W Opens/closes the right side window → 77 C W Opens/closes the rear right side win‐ dow → 77 D D Rear window roller sunblind → 85 E S Child safety lock for the rear side win‐ dows → 61 F Adjusts the head restraints → 93 G Seat adjustment using the multimedia system → 95 H Adjusts the seat fore-and-aft position → 89 I Adjusts the 4-way lumbar support → 92 J Adjusts the seat height → 89 K Adjusts the seat backrest inclination → 89 13 14 At a glance – Emergencies and breakdowns At a glance – Emergencies and breakdowns 1 B-pillar with: → 121 Information label on fuel type → 166 325 27 8 £ Hazard warning light system → 27 2 Safety vests → 301 3 ; me button → 270 Information label on tire pressure → → 270 QR code for accessing the rescue card → QR code for accessing the rescue card G SOS button 9 Fuel filler flap with: 4 Checking and refilling operating fluids → 357 A Tow-starting or towing away → 315 5 Tow-starting or towing away → 315 B First-aid kit (soft sided) → 302 6 Flat tire → 302 C Warning triangle → 301 7 Starting assistance → D TIREFIT kit → 304 312 15 16 Digital Operator's Manual Calling up the Digital Operator's Manual Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Info 5 Operator's Manual 5 Open Digital Operator's Manual The Digital Operator's Manual describes the functions and operation of the vehicle and the multimedia system. # Select one of the following menu items in the Digital Operator's Manual: R Quick start: find the first steps towards adjusting your seat (driver's side). R Tips: find information that prepares you for certain everyday situations with your vehicle. R Animations: watch animations of the vehicle functions. R Messages: receive additional information about the messages in the driver's display. R Language: select the language for the Digital Operator's Manual. You can search for keywords using the search field Search, in order to find quick answers to questions about the operation of the vehicle. 1 2 3 4 Menu Search Back Contents section Some sections in the Digital Operator's Manual, such as warning notes, can be expanded and collapsed. Additional methods of calling up the Digital Operator's Manual: Driver display: call up brief information as dis‐ play messages in the driver's display MBUX Voice Assistant: call up via the voice control system Global search: call up search results for con‐ tents of the Digital Operator's Manual on the home screen For safety reasons, the Digital Operator's Man‐ ual is deactivated while driving. General notes Protection of the environment + ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to operating conditions and personal driving style The pollutant emission of the vehicle is directly related to the way you operate the vehicle. Operate your vehicle in an environmentally responsible manner to help protect the envi‐ ronment. Please observe the following rec‐ ommendations on operating conditions and personal driving style. Operating conditions: # Make sure that the tire pressure is cor‐ rect. # Do not carry any unnecessary weight (e.g. roof luggage racks once you no longer need them). # Adhere to the service intervals. A regularly serviced vehicle will contrib‐ ute to environmental protection. # Always have maintenance work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Personal driving style: # Do not depress the accelerator pedal when starting the engine. # Do not warm up the vehicle while sta‐ tionary. # Drive carefully and maintain a suitable distance from the vehicle in front. # Avoid frequent, sudden acceleration and braking. # Change gear in good time and use each gear only up to Ô of its maximum engine speed. # Switch off the vehicle in stationary traf‐ fic, e.g. by using the ECO start/stop function. # Drive in a fuel-efficient manner. Observe the ECO display for an eco‐ nomical driving style. 17 Environmental issues and recommendations It is recommended that you re-use or recycle materials instead of just disposing of them. The relevant environmental guidelines and regu‐ lations serve to protect the environment and must be strictly observed. Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts + ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to not using recycled recon‐ ditioned components Mercedes‑Benz AG offers recycled recondi‐ tioned components and parts with the same quality as new parts. The same entitlement from the Limited Warranty is valid as for new parts. # Use recycled reconditioned compo‐ nents and parts from Mercedes‑Benz AG. 18 General notes * NOTE Impairment of the operating effi‐ ciency of the restraint systems from installing accessory parts or from repairs or welding Airbags and Emergency Tensioning Devices, as well as control units and sensors for the restraint systems, may be installed in the fol‐ lowing areas of your vehicle: R Doors R Door pillars R Door sills R Seats R Cockpit R Instrument cluster R Center console R Lateral roof frame # # # Do not install accessory parts such as audio systems in these areas. Do not carry out repairs or welding. Have accessory parts retrofitted at a qualified specialist workshop. You could jeopardize the operating safety of your vehicle if you use parts, tires and wheels as well as accessories relevant to safety which have not been approved by Mercedes-Benz. Safety-rele‐ vant systems, e.g. the brake system, may mal‐ function. Only use genuine Mercedes-Benz parts or parts of equal quality. Only use tires, wheels and accessory parts that have been specifically approved for your vehicle model. Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subject to strict quality inspections. Each part has been specially developed, manufactured or selected for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and adapted to them. Therefore, only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts should be used. More than 300,000 different genuine MercedesBenz parts are available for Mercedes-Benz mod‐ els. All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers maintain a supply of genuine Mercedes-Benz parts for necessary service and repair work. In addition, strategically located parts delivery centers pro‐ vide for quick and reliable parts service. Always specify the vehicle identification number (VIN) (/ page 355) when ordering genuine Mercedes-Benz parts. Operator's Manual This Operator's Manual and the Digital Opera‐ tor's Manual in the vehicle describe all models and all standard and special equipment for your vehicle at the time of this Operator's Manual going to press. Country-specific differences are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This is also the case for systems and functions relevant to safety. Therefore, the equipment on your vehicle may differ from that in the descriptions and illus‐ trations. The original purchase agreement for your vehicle contains a list of all of the systems in your vehi‐ cle. Should you have any questions concerning equipment and operation, please consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. General notes The Operator's Manual and Maintenance Booklet are important documents and should be kept in the vehicle. Touch-sensitive controls In addition to conventional switches and but‐ tons, your vehicle is equipped with touch-sensi‐ tive controls. These are located in the following areas of your vehicle: R Roof and door control panel R Climate control R Steering wheel R MBUX multimedia system The controls have touch-sensitive user interface surfaces. The surfaces are controlled by press‐ ing or swiping to adjust settings or to trigger functions, for example. When handling touch-sensitive user interface surfaces, observe the following points to avoid problems operating: R Do not affix stickers or similar objects on the surfaces R Keep the surfaces protected from moisture and wet conditions R Keep the surfaces free of dust and dirt Some touch-sensitive control elements have a symbol and integrated indicator lamps. When operating, make sure to press on the symbol of the control element. Service and vehicle operation Vehicle operation outside the USA or Canada When you are abroad with your vehicle, observe the following points: R Service points or replacement parts may not be available immediately. R Unleaded fuel may not be available for vehi‐ cles with a catalytic converter. Leaded fuel may cause damage to the catalytic converter. R 19 The fuel may have an extremely low octane number. Unsuitable fuel can cause engine damage. Some Mercedes-Benz models are available in Europe through our European Delivery Program. For more information, please consult an author‐ ized Mercedes‑Benz service center, or write to one of the following address: In the USA: Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC European Delivery Department One Mercedes-Benz Drive Sandy Springs, GA 30328 In Canada: Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. European Delivery Department 98 Vanderhoof Avenue Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9 20 General notes Maintenance Your customer advisor confirms the service in the service report. Roadside Assistance The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Pro‐ gram offers technical help in the case of a breakdown. Your calls to the toll-free Roadside Assistance Hotline are answered by our agents 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) (USA) 1-800-387-0100 (Canada) You can find further information in the Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program brochure (USA) or the "Roadside Assistance" section in the Service and Warranty booklet (Canada). You will find both in the vehicle docu‐ ment wallet. Change of address or change of ownership In the event of a change of address, please send us the "Notification of address change" in the Service and Guarantee booklet or simply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (USA) on the hotline number 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or Cus‐ tomer Service (Canada) on 1-800-387-0100. We can then reach you in a timely fashion, if neces‐ sary. If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all litera‐ ture in the vehicle so that it is available to the next owner. If you have purchased a used vehi‐ cle, please send us the "Notice of Purchase of Used Car" in the Service and Guarantee booklet or simply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (USA) at the hotline number 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or Cus‐ tomer Service (Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. Possible danger due to substances hazard‐ ous to health In compliance with Proposition 65 ("Prop65"), the following detachable label has been added to each vehicle sold in California: Operating safety & WARNING Risk of accident due to mal‐ functions or system failures To avoid malfunctions or system failures: # Always have the prescribed service and maintenance work as well any required repairs carried out at a qualified spe‐ cialist workshop. General notes & WARNING Risk of accident or injury due to incorrect modifications on electronic component parts & WARNING Risk of fire due to flammable materials on hot parts of the exhaust system Modification of electronic components, their software or wiring could impair their function and/or the function of other networked com‐ ponent parts or safety-relevant systems. This can endanger the operating safety of the vehicle. # Never tamper with the wiring and elec‐ tronic component parts or their soft‐ ware. # You should have all work on electrical and electronic components carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Flammable material such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite if they come into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system. # When driving on unpaved roads or offroad, regularly check the vehicle under‐ side. # Remove trapped plants or other flam‐ mable material, in particular. # If there is damage, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Observe the "On-board electronics" section in "Technical data". 21 * NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to driv‐ ing too fast and due to impacts to the vehicle underbody or suspension compo‐ nents In the following situations, in particular, there is a risk of damage to the vehicle: R The vehicle becomes grounded, e.g. on a high curb or an unpaved road R The vehicle is driven too fast over an obstacle, e.g. a curb, speed bump or pot‐ hole R A heavy object strikes the underbody or suspension components In situations such as these, damage to the body, underbody, suspension components, wheels or tires may not be visible. Compo‐ nents damaged in this way can unexpectedly fail or, in the case of an accident, may no lon‐ ger absorb the resulting force as intended. If the underbody paneling is damaged, flam‐ mable materials such as leaves, grass or twigs can collect between the underbody and 22 General notes the underbody paneling. These materials may ignite if they come into contact with hot parts of the exhaust system. # Have the vehicle checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. or # If driving safety is impaired while con‐ tinuing your journey, pull over and stop the vehicle immediately, while paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and contact a qualified specialist work‐ shop. If you modify component parts of these highvoltage components or touch damaged com‐ ponent parts, you may be electrocuted. High voltage components may be damaged in an accident, although the damage may not be visible. # Never perform modifications to compo‐ nent parts of high-voltage components. # Never touch damaged component parts of high-voltage components. # Never touch component parts of highvoltage components after an accident. Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical sys‐ tem Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical system contain high voltage components. These compo‐ nents are marked with a high voltage label: & DANGER Risk of fatal injury by touching damaged high-voltage components Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical sys‐ tem contain individual high-voltage compo‐ nents. These high-voltage components are under high voltage. All work on high voltage components must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Declaration of conformity for vehicle instal‐ led radio components USA: "Radio based devices of this vehicle com‐ ply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1) These devices may not cause harmful interference, and 2) These devices must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause General notes undesired operation.Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment." Canada: "This vehicle contains licence-exempt transmitter(s)/receiver(s) that comply with Inno‐ vation, Science and Economic Development Can‐ ada’s licence-exempt RSS(s). Operation is sub‐ ject to the following two conditions: (1) These devices may not cause interference. (2) These devices must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the devices." "Les émetteurs/récepteurs dans cette véhicule sont conforme aux CNR d’Innova‐ tion, Sciences et Développement économique Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L’exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes : 1) Ces appareils ne doi‐ vent pas produire de brouillage; 2) Ces appareils doivent accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d’en compromettre le fonctionnement." Diagnostics connection The diagnostics connection is a technical inter‐ face in the vehicle. It is used, for example, within the scope of repair and maintenance work or for reading out vehicle data by a specialist work‐ shop. Diagnostic devices should therefore only be connected by a qualified specialist workshop. & WARNING Risk of accident due to con‐ necting devices to the diagnostics con‐ nection If you connect devices to the diagnostics connection of the vehicle, the function of vehicle systems and operating safety may be impaired. # For safety reasons, we recommend that you only use and connect products approved by your authorized MercedesBenz Center. & WARNING Risk of accident due to objects in the driver's footwell Objects in the driver's footwell may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardizes the operating and road safety of the vehicle. # Stow all objects in the vehicle securely so that they cannot get into the driver's footwell. # Always install the floor mats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always sufficient room for the pedals. # Do not use loose floor mats and do not place floor mats on top of one another. * NOTE Battery discharging from using devices connected to the diagnostics connection Using devices at the diagnostics connection drains the battery. # Check the charge level of the battery. 23 24 # General notes If the charge level is low, charge the battery, e.g. by driving a considerable distance. Please also note the information about the 12 V battery and short-distance trips in the "Driving and Parking" chapter (/ page 152). Connecting and using another device with the diagnostics connection can have the following effects: R Malfunctions in the vehicle system R Permanent damage to vehicle components Please refer to the warranty terms and condi‐ tions for this matter. Moreover, connecting equipment to the diagnos‐ tics connection can lead to emissions monitor‐ ing information being reset, for example. This may lead to the vehicle failing to meet the requirements of the next emissions inspection during the main inspection. Qualified specialist workshop An authorized Mercedes-Benz Center is a quali‐ fied specialist workshop. It has the necessary special skills, tools and qualifications to cor‐ rectly carry out the work required on your vehi‐ cle. This particularly applies to safety-relevant works. For the following, always have your vehicle checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen‐ ter: R Safety-relevant works R Service and maintenance work R Repair work R Modifications as well as installations and conversions R Work on electronic components R Vehicles with 48 V on-board electrical system: work on the high-voltage compo‐ nent of the 48 V on-board electrical system Mercedes‑Benz recommends a Mercedes‑Benz service center. Correct use of the vehicle If you remove any warning stickers, you or others could fail to recognize certain dangers. Leave warning stickers in position. General notes Observe the following information in particular when driving your vehicle: R The safety notes in this manual and respec‐ tive Supplements R Technical data for the vehicle R Traffic rules and regulations R Laws and safety standards pertaining to motor vehicles Notes for persons with electronic medical aids Mercedes-Benz AG cannot, despite carefully developing vehicle systems, completely rule out the interaction of vehicle systems with electronic medical aids such as cardiac pacemakers. In addition, there are components installed in the vehicle that, regardless of the operating sta‐ tus of the vehicle, can generate magnetic fields on a par with permanent magnets. These fields can be found, for example, in the area around the multimedia and sound system or also in the area of the seats, depending on the vehicle equipment. For this reason, the following can occur in isola‐ ted cases, depending on the aids used: R Medical aids malfunctioning R Adverse health effects Observe the notes and warnings of the manufac‐ turer of the medical aids; if in doubt, contact the device manufacturer and/or your doctor. If there is continuing uncertainty concerning the possi‐ bility of medical aids malfunctioning, MercedesBenz AG recommends using only few electrical vehicle systems and/or maintaining a distance from the components. Only have repairs and maintenance work in the area of the following components carried out by a qualified specialist workshop: R Vehicle components carrying live voltage R Transmission antenna R Multimedia system and sound system If you have any queries or suggestions, consult a qualified specialist workshop. 25 Problems with your vehicle If you should experience a problem with your vehicle, particularly one that you believe may affect its safe operation, we urge you to contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immedi‐ ately to have the problem diagnosed and recti‐ fied. If the problem is not resolved to your satis‐ faction, please discuss the problem again with an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or, if nec‐ essary, contact us at one of the following addresses: In the USA: Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC Customer Assistance Center One Mercedes-Benz Drive Sandy Springs, GA 30328 In Canada: Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. Customer Relations Department 98 Vanderhoof Avenue Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9 26 General notes Reporting safety defects USA only: The following text is published as required of manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Fed‐ eral Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the "National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966". If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to the https:// www.safercar.gov/; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590,: USA. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from: https:// www.safercar.gov Canada only: The following text is published as required of manufacturers under subsection 18.4 (4) of the Motor Vehicle Safety Regulations. If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform Trans‐ port Canada in addition to notifying MercedesBenz Canada Inc. If Transport Canada received similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, Transport Canada cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer or Mercedes-Benz Canada Inc. To contact Transport Canada, you may call the Defect Investigations and Recalls Division tollfree in Canada at 1-800-333-0510 or 819-994-3328in the Gatineau-Ottawa area or internationally; you may also go to the following websites for more information: R English: https://www.tc.gc.ca/recalls R French: https://www.tc.gc.ca/rappels Limited Warranty * NOTE Damage to the vehicle arising from violation of these operating instruc‐ tions. Damage to the vehicle can arise from viola‐ tion of these operating instructions. This damage is not covered either by the Mercedes-Benz implied warranty or by the New‑ or Used-Vehicle Warranty. # Follow the instructions in these operat‐ ing instructions on proper operation of your vehicle as well as on possible vehi‐ cle damage. General notes QR code for rescue card QR codes are attached in the fuel filler flap and on the opposite side on the B-pillar. In the event of an accident, rescue services can use the QR code to quickly find the appropriate rescue card for your vehicle. The current rescue card con‐ tains the most important information about your vehicle in a compact form, e.g. the routing of the electric lines. Further information can be obtained at https:// www.mercedes-benz.de/qr-code. Data storage Data processing in the vehicle Electronic control units Electronic control units are installed in your vehi‐ cle. Control units process data which, for exam‐ ple, they receive from vehicle sensors, generate themselves or exchange between themselves. Some control units are required for the safe operation of your vehicle, some assist you when driving, such as driver assistance systems, while others enable convenience or infotainment func‐ tions. The following provides you with general informa‐ tion regarding data processing in the vehicle. Additional information regarding exactly which data in your vehicle are collected, saved and transmitted to third parties, and for what pur‐ pose, can be found in the information directly related to the functional characteristics in ques‐ tion in their respective Operator's Manual. This information is also available online and, depend‐ ing on the vehicle equipment, digitally. Personal data Every vehicle is identified by a unique vehicle identification number. Depending on the coun‐ try, this vehicle identification number can be used by, for example, governmental authorities to determine the identity of the owner. There are other possibilities to use data collected from the vehicle to identify the owner or driver, such as the license plate number. Therefore, data generated or processed by con‐ trol units may be attributable to a person or, under certain conditions, become attributable to 27 a person. Depending on which vehicle data are available, it may be possible to make inferences about, for example, your driving behavior, your location, your route or your use patterns. Legal requirements regarding the disclosure of data If legally required to do so, manufacturers are, in individual cases, legally obliged to provide gov‐ ernmental entities, upon request and to the extent required, data stored by the manufac‐ turer. For example, this may be the case during the investigation of a criminal offense. Governmental entities are themselves, in individ‐ ual cases and within the applicable legal frame‐ work, authorized to read out data from the vehi‐ cle. In the case of an accident, information that can help with an investigation can, therefore, be taken from the airbag control unit, for example. Operational data in the vehicle This is data regarding the operation of the vehi‐ cle, which have been processed by control units. This includes the following data, for example: R Vehicle status information such as the speed, longitudinal acceleration, lateral accelera‐ 28 R General notes tion, number of wheel revolutions or the fas‐ tened seat belts display Ambient conditions, such as temperature, rain sensor or distance sensor Generally, the use of these data is temporary; they will not be stored beyond the period of operation and will only be processed within the vehicle itself. Control units often contain data memories for vehicle keys, for example. Their use permits the temporary or permanent docu‐ mentation of technical information about the vehicle's operating state, component loads, maintenance requirements and technical events or malfunctions. Depending on the vehicle equipment, the follow‐ ing data are stored: R Operating status of system components, such as fill levels, tire pressure or battery status R Malfunctions or faults in important system components, such as lights or brakes R System reactions in special driving situa‐ tions, such as airbag deployment or the inter‐ vention of stability control systems R Information on events leading to vehicle damage In certain cases, it may be required to store data that would have otherwise been used only tem‐ porarily. This may be the case if the vehicle has detected a malfunction, for example. If you use services, such as repair services and maintenance work, stored operational data as well as the vehicle identification number can be read out and used. They can be read out by service network employees, such as workshops and manufacturers or third parties, such as breakdown services. The same is true in the case of warranty claims and quality assurance measures. In general, the readout is performed via the legally prescribed port for the diagnostics con‐ nection in the vehicle. The operational data that are read out document technical states of the vehicle or of individual components and assist in the diagnosis of malfunctions, compliance with warranty obligations and quality improvement. To that end, these data, in particular information about component loads, technical events, mal‐ functions and other faults may be transmitted along with the vehicle identification number to the manufacturer. Furthermore, the manufac‐ turer is subject to product liability. For this rea‐ son the manufacturer also uses operational data from the vehicle, for example, for recalls. These data can also be used to examine the custom‐ er's warranty and guarantee claims. Fault memories in the vehicle can be reset by a service outlet or at your request as part of repair or maintenance work. Convenience and infotainment functions You can store convenience settings and individ‐ ual settings in the vehicle and change or reset them at any time. Depending on the vehicle equipment, this includes the following settings, for example: R Seat and steering wheel positions R Suspension and climate control settings R Individual settings, such as interior lighting Depending on the selected equipment, you can import data into vehicle infotainment functions yourself. General notes Depending on the vehicle equipment, this includes the following data, for example: R Multimedia data, such as music, films or pho‐ tos for playback in an integrated multimedia system R Address book data for use in connection with an integrated hands-free system or an inte‐ grated navigation system R Entered navigation destinations R Data about the use of Internet services These data for convenience and infotainment functions may be saved locally in the vehicle or they may be located on a device which you have connected to the vehicle, such as a smartphone, USB flash drive or MP3 player. If you have entered these data yourself, you can delete them at any time. This data is transmitted from the vehicle to third parties only at your request. This applies, in par‐ ticular, when you use online services in accord‐ ance with the settings that you have selected. Smartphone integration (e.g. Android Auto or Apple CarPlay®) If your vehicle is accordingly equipped, you can connect your smartphone or another mobile end device to the vehicle. You can then control them by means of the control elements integrated in the vehicle. Images and audio from the smart‐ phone can be output via the multimedia system. Certain information is simultaneously transfer‐ red to your smartphone. Depending on the type and integration, this includes position data, day/ night mode and other general vehicle statuses. For more information please consult the Opera‐ tor's Manual of the vehicle/infotainment system. This integration allows the use of selected smartphone apps, such as navigation or music player apps. There is no further interaction between the smartphone and the vehicle; in par‐ ticular, vehicle data is not directly accessible. The type of additional data processing is deter‐ mined by the provider of the app being used. Which settings you can make, if any, depends on the specific app and the operating system of your smartphone. 29 Online services Wireless network connection If your vehicle has a wireless network connec‐ tion, it enables data to be exchanged between your vehicle and additional systems. The wire‐ less network connection is made possible by the vehicle's own transmitter and receiver or by a mobile end device that you have brought into the vehicle, for example, a smartphone. Online func‐ tions can be used via the wireless network con‐ nection. This includes online services and appli‐ cations/apps provided to you by the manufac‐ turer or by other providers. Manufacturer's services Regarding the manufacturer's online services, the individual functions are described by the manufacturer in a suitable place, for example, in the Operator's Manual or on the manufacturer's website, where the relevant data protection information is also given. Personal data may be used for the provision of online services. Data are exchanged via a secure connection, such as the manufacturer's designated IT systems. Any personal data which are collected, processed 30 General notes and used, other than for the provision of serv‐ ices, is done so exclusively on the basis of legal permission. This is the case, for example, for a legally prescribed emergency call system, a con‐ tractual agreement or when consent has been given. You can have services and functions, some of which are subject to a fee, activated or deactiva‐ ted. This excludes legally prescribed functions and services, such as an emergency call system. Third party services If you use online services from other providers (third parties), these services are the responsi‐ bility of the provider in question and subject to that provider's data protection conditions and terms of use. As a general rule, the manufac‐ turer has no influence on the content exchanged. For this reason, when services are provided by third parties, please ask the service provider in question for information about the type, extent and purpose of the collection and use of per‐ sonal data. Data protection rights Depending on your country or the equipment and range of functions of your vehicle as well as the services you use and the services on offer, you are entitled to different data protection rights. Further information on data protection and your data protection rights can either be found on the manufacturer's website or you will receive this information as part of the various services and service offers. There you will also find the contact information for the manufac‐ turer and its data protection officers. At a workshop, for example, with the support of a specialist and possibly for a fee, you can have data read out which is stored only locally in the vehicle. MBUX multimedia system/Mercedes me connect If the vehicle is equipped with the MBUX multi‐ media system or Mercedes me connect, addi‐ tional data about the vehicle's operation, the use of the vehicle in certain situations, and the loca‐ tion of the vehicle may be compiled by the MBUX multimedia system or Mercedes me con‐ nect. For additional information, please refer to the "MBUX multimedia system" section and/or the Mercedes me connect Terms and Conditions. Event data recorders USA only: This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like sit‐ uations, such as an airbag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in under‐ standing how a vehicle's systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: R How various systems in your vehicle were operating R Whether or not the driver and front passenger seat belts were buckled/fastened General notes R R How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal and How fast the vehicle was traveling This data can help provide a better understand‐ ing of the circumstances in which accidents and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data is recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g. name, gender, age and accident location) is recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation. To read data recorded by an EDR, special equip‐ ment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties that have the special equipment, such as law enforcement, can read the information by accessing the vehicle or the EDR. EDR data may be used in civil and criminal mat‐ ters as a tool in accident reconstruction, acci‐ dent claims and vehicle safety. Since the Crash Data Retrieval (CDR) tool that is used to extract data from the EDR is commercially available, Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC ("MBUSA") expressly disclaims any and all liability arising from the extraction of this information by unauthorized Mercedes-Benz personnel. MBUSA will not share EDR data with others with‐ out the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the vehicle is leased, without the consent of the les‐ see. Exceptions to this representation include responses to subpoenas by law enforcement; by federal, state or local government; in connection with or arising out of litigation involving MBUSA or its subsidiaries and affiliates; or, as required by law. Warning: The EDR is a component of the Restraint System Module. Tampering with, alter‐ ing, modifying or removing the EDR component may result in a malfunction of the Restraint Sys‐ tem Module and other systems. State laws or regulations regarding EDRs that conflict with federal regulation are pre-empted. This means that in the event of such conflict, the federal regulation governs. As of December 31 2016, 17 states have enacted laws relating to EDRs. Copyright Free and open source software Information on license for free and open-source software used in your vehicle can be found on the data carrier in your vehicle document wallet and with updates on the following website: https://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource Registered trademarks R R R R R Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of Blue‐ tooth SIG, Inc. DTS™ is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc. Dolby® and MLP™ are registered trademarks of DOLBY Laboratories. ESP® and PRE-SAFE® are registered trade‐ marks of Daimler AG. HomeLink® is a registered trademark of Gen‐ tex Corporation. 32 R R R R R R R General notes iPod® and iTunes® are registered trademarks of Apple Inc. Burmester® is a registered trademark of Burmester Audiosysteme GmbH. Microsoft® and Windows Media® are regis‐ tered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. SIRIUS® is a registered trademark of Sirius XM Radio Inc. HD Radio™ is a registered trademark of iBiq‐ uity Digital Corporation. Gracenote® is a registered trademark of Gracenote, Inc. ZAGAT Survey® and related brands are regis‐ tered trademarks of Zagat Survey, LLC. Occupant safety Restraint system Protection provided by the restraint system The restraint system includes the following com‐ ponents: R Seat belt system R Airbags R Child restraint system R Child seat securing systems The restraint system can help prevent the vehi‐ cle occupants from coming into contact with parts of the vehicle interior in the event of an accident. In the event of an accident, the restraint system can also reduce the forces to which the vehicle occupants are subjected. A seat belt can only provide the best level of pro‐ tection if it is worn correctly. Depending on the detected accident situation, Emergency Tension‐ ing Devices and/or airbags supplement the pro‐ tection offered by a correctly worn seat belt. Emergency Tensioning Devices and/or airbags are not deployed in every accident. In order for the restraint system to provide the intended level of protection, each vehicle occu‐ pant must observe the following information: R Fasten seat belts correctly. R Sit in an almost upright seat position with their back against the seat backrest. R Sit with their feet resting on the floor, if pos‐ sible. R Always secure persons under 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in an additional restraint system suitable for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. However, no system available today can com‐ pletely eliminate injuries and fatalities in every accident situation. In particular, the seat belt and airbag generally do not protect against objects penetrating the vehicle from the outside. It is also not possible to completely rule out the risk of injury caused by the airbag deploying. 33 Reduced restraint system protection & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to modifications to the restraint system Vehicle occupants may no longer be protec‐ ted as intended if alterations are made to the restraint system. # Never alter the parts of the restraint system. # Never tamper with the wiring or any electronic component parts or their software. If it is necessary to modify the vehicle to accom‐ modate a person with disabilities, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for details. USA only: for details, contact our Customer Assistance Center on 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1‑800‑367‑6372). Restraint system functionality When the vehicle is switched on, a self-test is performed, during which the 6 restraint sys‐ 34 Occupant safety tem warning lamp lights up. It goes out no later than a few seconds after the vehicle is started. The components of the restraint system are then functional. Malfunctioning restraint system A malfunction has occurred in the restraint sys‐ tem if: R The 6 restraint system warning lamp does not light up when the vehicle is switched on R The 6 restraint system warning lamp lights up continuously or repeatedly during a journey & WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunc‐ tions in the restraint system Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as planned in an accident. # Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified spe‐ cialist workshop. Function of the restraint system in an acci‐ dent How the restraint system works depends on the severity of the impact detected and the apparent type of accident: R Frontal impact R Rear impact R Side impact R Rollover The activation thresholds for the components of the restraint system are determined based on the evaluation of the sensor values measured at various points in the vehicle. This process is preemptive in nature. The triggering/deployment of the components of the restraint system must take place in good time at the start of the colli‐ sion. Factors which can only be seen and measured after a collision has occurred cannot play a deci‐ sive role in airbag deployment. Nor do they pro‐ vide an indication of airbag deployment. The vehicle may be deformed significantly with‐ out an airbag being deployed. This is the case if only parts which are relatively easily deformed are affected and the rate of vehicle deceleration is not high. Conversely, an airbag may be deployed even though the vehicle suffers only minor deformation. If very rigid vehicle parts such as longitudinal members are hit, this may result in sufficiently high levels of vehicle decel‐ eration. Depending on the detected deployment situa‐ tion, the components of the restraint system can be activated or deployed independently of each other: R Emergency Tensioning Device: frontal impact, rear impact, side impact, rollover R Driver's airbag, front passenger airbag: fron‐ tal impact R Knee airbag: frontal impact R Side airbag: side impact R Window curtain airbag: side impact, rollover, frontal impact R PRE-SAFE® Impulse Side: side impact The front passenger airbag can only be deployed in an accident if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF Occupant safety indicator lamp is off. If the front passenger seat is occupied, make sure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct (/ page 44). & WARNING Risk of burns from hot air bag components The air bag parts are hot after an air bag has been deployed. # Do not touch the air bag parts. # Have a deployed air bag replaced at a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop after an accident. Take this into account, partic‐ ularly if an Emergency Tensioning Device is trig‐ gered or an airbag deployed. If the Emergency Tensioning Devices are trig‐ gered or an airbag is deployed, you will hear a bang, and a small amount of powder may also be released: R The bang will not generally affect your hear‐ ing. R In general, the powder released is not haz‐ ardous to health but may cause short-term breathing difficulties to persons suffering from asthma or other pulmonary conditions. Provided it is safe to do so, leave the vehicle immediately or open the window in order to prevent breathing difficulties. Airbags and pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices contain perchlorate material, which may require special handling or environmental pro‐ tection measures. National guidelines regarding waste disposal must be observed. In California, see https://dtsc.ca.gov/. Using the search function, you will find information on perchlo‐ rate, for example. 35 Seat belts Protection provided by the seat belt Always fasten your seat belt correctly before starting a journey. A seat belt can only provide the best level of protection if it is worn correctly. & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to incorrectly fastened seat belt If the seat belt is not worn correctly, it can‐ not perform its intended protective function. In addition, an incorrectly fastened seat belt can also cause injuries, for example, in the event of an accident or when braking or changing direction suddenly. # Always ensure that all vehicle occu‐ pants have their seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting properly. Always observe the instructions about the cor‐ rect driver's seat position and adjusting the seat (/ page 89). 36 Occupant safety In order for the correctly worn seat belt to pro‐ vide the intended level of protection, each vehi‐ cle occupant must observe the following infor‐ mation: R The seat belt must not be twisted and must fit tightly and snugly across the body. R The seat belt must be routed across the cen‐ ter of the shoulder and as low down across the hips as possible. R The shoulder section of the seat belt should not touch your neck nor be routed under your arm or behind your back. R Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter coat. R Push the lap belt down as far as possible across your hips and pull tight with the shoul‐ der section of the belt. Never route the lap belt across your abdomen. Pregnant women must also take particular care with this. R Never route the seat belt across sharp, poin‐ ted, abrasive or fragile objects. R R Only one person should use each seat belt at any one time. Never allow babies and chil‐ dren to travel sitting on the lap of another vehicle occupant. Never secure objects with a seat belt if the seat belt is also being used by one of the vehicle's occupants. Always observe the instructions for loading the vehicle when securing objects, luggage or loads (/ page 105). Also ensure that no objects, e.g. a cushion, are ever placed between a person and the seat. The seat belts on the following seats are equip‐ ped with a special seat belt retractor: R Front passenger seat R Rear seats Activate or deactivate the special seatbelt retractor (/ page 52). If children are traveling in the vehicle, be sure to observe the instructions and safety notes on "Children in the vehicle" (/ page 49). Limitations of the protection provided by the seat belt & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to an incorrect seat position The seat belt does not offer the intended level of protection if you have not moved the seat backrest to an almost vertical position. In particular, you could slip beneath the seat‐ belt and become injured. # Adjust the seat properly before begin‐ ning your journey. # Always ensure that the seat backrest is in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder belt is routed across the center of your shoulder. & WARNING Risk of injury or death when additional restraint systems are not used for persons with a smaller stature Persons under 5 ft (1.50 m ) tall cannot wear the seat belt correctly without a suitable additional restraint system. Occupant safety # Always secure persons under 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in a suitable restraint sys‐ tem. & WARNING Danger of injury or death due to blocked seat belt anchorage The restraint effect of the seat belt is impaired if objects between the front seat and the door are blocking the movable seat belt anchorage on the front seat. # Before starting a journey, make sure that there are no objects between the front seat and the door. & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to damaged or modified seat belts Seat belts cannot provide protection in the following situations: R The seat belt is damaged, has been modi‐ fied, is extremely dirty, bleached or dyed R R The seat belt buckle is damaged or extremely dirty Modifications have been made to the Emergency Tensioning Device, seat belt anchorage or seat belt retractor Seat belts may sustain non-visible damage in an accident, e.g. due to glass splinters. Modified or damaged seat belts could tear or fail in the event of an accident, for example. Modified Emergency Tensioning Devices could accidentally trigger or fail to function as intended. # Never modify the seat belt system, for example the seat belt, seat belt buckle, Emergency Tensioning Device, seat belt anchorage and seat belt retractor. # Make sure that the seat belts are undamaged, not worn and clean. # Always have the seat belts checked immediately after an accident at a qualified specialist workshop. 37 Only use seat belts which have been approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. & WARNING Risk of injury or death from deployed pyrotechnic Emergency Ten‐ sioning Devices Pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices that have been deployed are no longer opera‐ tional and are unable to perform their inten‐ ded protective function. # Therefore, have deployed pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices immedi‐ ately replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop after an accident. * NOTE Damage caused by trapping the seat belt If an unused seat belt is not fully retracted, it may become trapped in the door or in the seat mechanism. 38 # Occupant safety Always ensure that an unused seat belt is fully retracted. Fastening and adjusting seat belts If the seat belt is pulled quickly or sharply, the seat belt retractor locks. The seat belt strap can‐ not be pulled out any further. Always engage seat belt tongue 2 of the seat belt into seat belt buckle 1 of the cor‐ responding seat. # Press and hold the seat belt outlet release and slide seat belt outlet 3 into the desired position. # Let go of the seat belt outlet release and ensure that seat belt outlet 3 locks into position. % A seat belt can only provide the best level of protection if it is worn correctly. Observe the notes on fastening the seat belt (/ page 35). # * NOTE Deployment of components of the restraint system when the front passenger seat is unoccupied and a seat belt is buckled When the front passenger seat is unoccupied and the seat belt tongue of the seat belt is engaged in the seat belt buckle, components of the restraint system may deploy unneces‐ sarily on the front passenger side, e.g. the Emergency Tensioning Device. # Only buckle the seat belts as intended. % Observe the notes on correctly fastening the seat belt (/ page 35) and stowage options (/ page 105). Information on installing a child restraint sys‐ tem and on children traveling in the vehicle can be found in the "Children in the vehicle" section (/ page 52). Seat belt adjustment function Vehicles with PRE-SAFE®: After a front seat belt has been fastened, the automatic seat belt adjustment may apply a certain tightening force. Do not hold the seat belt tightly while it is adjusting. You can activate and deactivate the seat belt adjustment function using the multimedia sys‐ tem (/ page 39). Occupant safety Activating/deactivating seat belt adjustment via the multimedia system Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Occupant Protection # Activate or deactivate Belt adjustment. Releasing seat belts # Press the release button in the seat belt buckle and guide the seat belt back with the seat belt tongue. Seat belt warning function for the driver and front passenger The ü seat belt warning lamp in the driver's display is a reminder that all vehicle occupants must wear their seat belts correctly. The ü seat belt warning lamp lights up for six seconds every time the vehicle is started. In addition, a warning tone may sound. When the driver's and front passenger's doors are closed and the driver and front passenger have fastened their seat belts, the seat belt warning goes out. In the following cases, the seat belt warning lights up during a journey if: R The vehicle speed exceeds 15 mph (25 km/h) and the driver's or front passenger seat belt is not fastened. R The driver or front passenger unfastens their seat belt while the vehicle is in motion. 39 Airbags Overview of airbags 1 2 3 4 5 Knee airbag Driver's airbag Front passenger airbag Window curtain airbag Side airbag The installation location of an airbag is identified by the AIRBAG symbol. An additional arrow sym‐ bol M indicates the installation location for cer‐ tain airbags. 40 Occupant safety When enabled, an airbag can provide additional protection for the respective vehicle occupant. Potential protection provided by each airbag: R Knee airbag: thigh, knee and lower leg R Driver's airbag, front passenger airbag: head and ribcage R Window curtain airbag: head R Side airbag: ribcage, also pelvis for front seat occupants Information on child restraint systems on the front passenger seat & WARNING Risk of injury or death if the co-driver airbag is enabled If the co-driver airbag is enabled, a child on the co-driver seat may be struck by the codriver airbag during an accident. NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat with an ENABLED FRONT AIRBAG; DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur. When installing a child restraint system on the front passenger seat, observe the vehicle-spe‐ cific information (/ page 59). Also, always observe the notes on rearward-facing or forward-facing child restraint systems on the front passenger seat (/ page 58). Information on automatic front passenger airbag shutoff The front passenger airbag can only be deployed in an accident if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off. If the front passenger seat is occupied, make sure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct (/ page 44). * NOTE Deployment of components of the restraint system when the front passenger seat is unoccupied In an accident, the components of the restraint system may deploy unnecessarily on the front passenger side if: R There are heavy objects on the front passenger seat. R The seat belt tongue is engaged in the seat belt buckle of the front passenger seat and the front passenger seat is unoccupied. # Store objects in a suitable place. Only one person should use each seat belt at any one time. # Depending on the detected accident situation, the window curtain airbag on the front passenger side may deploy. The airbag is deployed regardless of whether the front passenger seat is occupied. Protective capacity of the airbags Depending on the accident situation, an airbag may supplement the protection offered by a cor‐ rectly fastened seat belt. Occupant safety & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to an incorrect seat position If you deviate from the correct seat position, the airbag cannot perform its intended pro‐ tective function. Each vehicle occupant must make sure of the following: R Fasten seat belts correctly. Pregnant women must take particular care to ensure that the lap belt never lies across the abdomen. R Adopt the correct seat position and keep as far away as possible from the airbags. R Observe the following information. # Always make sure that there are no objects between the airbag and vehicle occupant. To avoid the risks resulting from the deployment of an airbag, each vehicle occupant must observe the following information in particular: R Before starting your journey, adjust your seat correctly; the driver's seat and front R R R R R passenger seat should be moved as far back as possible. When doing so, always observe the informa‐ tion on the correct driver's seat position (/ page 89). Only hold the steering wheel by the steering wheel rim. This allows the airbag to be fully deployed. Always lean against the seat backrest when the vehicle is in motion. Do not lean forwards or against the door or side window. You may otherwise be in the deployment area of the airbags. The occupants must always keep their feet on the floor. Do not put your feet on the cockpit, for example. Your feet may other‐ wise be in the deployment area of the airbag. If children are traveling in the vehicle, observe the additional notes (/ page 49). Always store and secure objects correctly. 41 Objects in the vehicle interior may prevent an airbag from functioning correctly. Each vehicle occupant must always make sure of the follow‐ ing in particular: R There are no people, animals or objects between the vehicle occupants and an air‐ bag. R There are no objects between the seat, door and door pillar (B-pillar). R There are no hard objects, e.g. coat hangers, hanging on the grab handles or coat hooks. R There are no accessory parts, such as mobile navigation devices, mobile phones or cup holders, within the deployment area of an air‐ bag, e.g. on the cockpit, on the door, on the side window or on the side trim. In addition, no connecting cables, tensioning straps or retaining straps must be routed or attached to the vehicle within the deploy‐ ment area of an airbag. Always comply with the accessory manufacturer's installation instructions and, in particular, the notes on suitable places for installation. 42 R Occupant safety There are no heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objects in the pockets of your clothing. Store such objects in a suitable place. Limitations of the protection provided by air‐ bags & WARNING Risk of injury due to modifi‐ cations to the cover of an airbag If you modify the cover of an airbag or affix objects such as stickers to it, the airbag may no longer function correctly. # Never modify the cover of an airbag and do not affix objects to it. The installation location of an airbag is identified by the AIRBAG symbol (/ page 39). & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to the use of unsuitable seat covers Due to unsuitable seat covers, the airbags cannot protect vehicle occupants as inten‐ ded. In addition, the operation of the automatic front passenger airbag shutoff could be restricted. # You should only use seat covers that have been approved for the correspond‐ ing seats by Mercedes-Benz. & WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunc‐ tioning sensors in the door The function of the airbags can be impaired due to modifications or incorrect work per‐ formed on the doors or door trim, or if the doors are damaged. # Never modify the doors or parts of the doors. # Always have work on the doors or door trim carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. & WARNING Risk of injury due to deployed airbag A deployed airbag no longer offers any pro‐ tection. # Have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop in order to have the deployed airbag replaced. Have deployed airbags replaced immediately. Status of the front passenger front airbag Function of the automatic front passenger airbag shutoff The automatic front passenger airbag shutoff is able to detect whether the front passenger seat is occupied by a person or a child restraint sys‐ tem. The front passenger airbag is enabled or disabled accordingly. & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to objects under the co-driver seat Objects trapped under the co-driver seat can interfere with the function of the automatic co-driver airbag shutoff or damage the sys‐ tem. # Do not store any objects under the codriver seat. Occupant safety # When the co-driver seat is occupied, make sure that no objects are trapped under the co-driver seat. When installing a child restraint system on the front passenger seat, observe the vehicle-spe‐ cific information (/ page 59). Also, always observe the notes on rearward-facing or forward-facing child restraint systems on the front passenger seat (/ page 58). A person on the front passenger seat must observe the following information: R Fasten seat belts correctly (/ page 35). R Sit in an almost upright seat position with their back against the seat backrest. R Sit with their feet resting on the floor, if pos‐ sible. The front passenger airbag may otherwise be disabled by mistake, for example, in the follow‐ ing situations: R The front passenger transfers their weight by supporting themselves on a vehicle armrest. R The front passenger sits in such a way that their weight is raised from the seat surface. & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to a disabled front passenger airbag The front passenger airbag is disabled when the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit. A person in the front passenger seat could then, for example, come into contact with the vehicle interior, especially if the person is sitting too close to the cockpit. If the front passenger seat is occupied, always ensure that: R The classification of the person in the front passenger seat is correct and the front passenger airbag is enabled or disa‐ bled in accordance with the person in the front passenger seat. R The front passenger seat has been moved as far back as possible. R The person is seated correctly. # 43 Both before and during the journey, ensure that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct. If the front passenger seat is occupied, the clas‐ sification of the person or child restraint system on the front passenger seat takes place after the front passenger airbag shutoff self-test. The PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps display the status of the front passenger airbag. Always observe the notes on the function of the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps (/ page 44). 44 Occupant safety Function of the PASSENGER AIR BAG indica‐ tor lamps Self-test of automatic front passenger airbag shutoff When the vehicle is switched on, a self-test is performed during which the two PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and OFF indicator lamps light up simultaneously. The status of the front passenger airbag is dis‐ played via the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps after the self-test: R ON is lit: the front passenger airbag may deploy during an accident. The indicator lamp goes out after 60 sec‐ onds. R ON and OFF are not lit: the front passenger airbag may deploy during an accident. R OFF is lit: the front passenger airbag is disa‐ bled. It will then not be deployed in the event of an accident. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is off, only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp shows the status of the front passenger airbag. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp may be lit continuously or be off. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp and the 6 restraint system warning lamp light up simultaneously, the front passenger seat may not be used. Also in this case, do not install a child restraint system on the front passenger seat. Have the automatic front passenger airbag shutoff checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. Status display If the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure, both before and during the journey, that the sta‐ tus of the front passenger airbag is correct for the current situation. After installing a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat: PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF must be lit con‐ tinuously. & WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury when using a rearward-facing child restraint system while the co-driver air‐ bag is enabled If you secure a child in a rearward-facing child restraint system on the co-driver seat and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off, the co-driver airbag can deploy in the event of an accident. The child could be struck by the airbag. Occupant safety # # Always ensure that the co-driver airbag is disabled. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit. NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat with an ENA‐ BLED FRONT AIRBAG; DEATH or SERI‐ OUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur. When installing a child restraint system on the front passenger seat, observe the vehicle-spe‐ cific information (/ page 58). Depending on the child restraint system and the stature of the child, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp may be off. In this case, do not install the rearward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat. Instead, install the rearward-facing child restraint system on a suitable rear seat. After installing a forward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat: depending on the child restraint system and the stature of the child, PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF may be lit continuously or be off. Always observe the following information. & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to incorrect positioning of the forwardfacing child restraint system If you secure a child in a forward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat that is positioned too close to the cockpit, in the event of an accident, the child could: R come into contact with the vehicle inte‐ rior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi‐ cator lamp is lit, for example R be struck by the airbag if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off. # Always move the front passenger seat as far back as possible and fully retract the seat cushion length adjustment. While doing so, always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the seat belt outlet of the vehicle to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed forwards and downwards from the seat belt outlet. If necessary, adjust the seat belt outlet # 45 and the front passenger seat accord‐ ingly. Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. When installing a child restraint system on the front passenger seat, observe the vehicle-spe‐ cific information (/ page 58). If a person is sitting on the front passenger seat: PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF may be lit con‐ tinuously or be off, depending on the person's stature. A person on the front passenger seat must always observe the following information: R If the front passenger seat is occupied by an adult or a person with a stature correspond‐ ing to that of an adult, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be off. This indicates that the front passenger airbag is enabled. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit continuously, an adult or person 46 R Occupant safety with a build corresponding to that of an adult must not use the front passenger seat. Instead, they should use a rear seat. If the front passenger seat is occupied by a person of smaller stature (e.g. a teenager or small adult), the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is either lit continuously or remains off, depending on the classification. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off: move the front passenger seat as far back as possible, or the per‐ son of smaller stature should use a rear seat. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit continuously: the person of smaller stature should not use the front passenger seat. & WARNING Risk of injury or death when the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit after the self-test, the front passenger airbag is disabled. If the front passenger seat is occupied, always ensure that: R The classification of the person in the front passenger seat is correct and the front passenger airbag is enabled or disa‐ bled in accordance with the person in the front passenger seat. R The person is seated properly with a cor‐ rectly fastened seat belt. R The front passenger seat has been moved as far back as possible. Be sure to also observe the following further related subjects: R Child restraint system on the front passenger seat (/ page 58) PRE-SAFE® system Function of PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occu‐ pant protection) PRE-SAFE® is able to detect certain critical driv‐ ing situations and implement pre-emptive meas‐ ures to protect the vehicle occupants. PRE-SAFE® can implement the following meas‐ ures independently of each other: R Tightening the seat belts on the driver's seat and front passenger seat. R Closing the side windows. R Vehicles with sliding sunroof: close the sliding sunroof. R Vehicles with memory function: move the front passenger seat to a more favorable seat position. R Vehicles with multicontour seat: increase the air pressure in the seat side bolsters of the seat backrest. R PRE-SAFE® Sound: provided that the multi‐ media system is switched on, generates a Occupant safety brief noise signal to stimulate the innate pro‐ tective mechanism of a person's hearing. * NOTE Damage caused by objects in the footwell or behind the seat The automatic adjustment of the seat posi‐ tion may result in damage to the seat and/or the object. # Stow objects in a suitable place. Reversing the PRE-SAFE® system measures If an accident did not occur, the pre-emptive measures that were taken are reversed. You will need to perform certain settings your‐ self. # If the seat belt pre-tensioning is not reduced, move the seat backrest back slightly. The locking mechanism releases. Function of PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection plus) PRE-SAFE® PLUS can detect certain impacts, particularly an imminent rear impact, and take pre-emptive measures to protect the vehicle occupants. These measures cannot necessarily prevent an imminent impact. PRE-SAFE® PLUS can implement the following measures independently of each other: R Tightening the seat belts on the driver's seat and front passenger seat. R Increasing brake pressure when the vehicle is stationary. This brake application is can‐ celed automatically when the vehicle pulls away. If an accident did not occur, the pre-emptive measures that were taken are reversed. System limits The system will not initiate any action in the fol‐ lowing situations: R When backing up 47 The system will not initiate any braking applica‐ tion in the following situations: R Whilst driving or R When entering or exiting a parking space while using Active Parking Assist Function of PRE-SAFE® Impulse Side If an imminent side impact is detected, PRESAFE® Impulse Side can pre-emptively move the front seat vehicle occupant's upper body towards the center of the vehicle. It does this by rapidly inflating an air cushion in the outer seat side bolster of the seat backrest on the side on which the impact is anticipated. This increases the distance between the door and the vehicle occupant. If PRE-SAFE® Impulse Side has been deployed or is faulty, the PRE-SAFE Impulse Side Inoperative See Operator's Manual display message appears (/ page 368). 48 Occupant safety Automatic measures after an accident Depending on the type and severity of the acci‐ dent, and depending on the vehicle's equipment, the following measures can be implemented, for example: R Automatic braking (post-collision brake) R Activating the hazard warning lights R Triggering an automatic emergency call (/ page 277) R Switching off the engine To start the vehicle again, switch the vehicle off and on once more (/ page 148). Depending on the type and severity of the accident, you may no longer be able to start the vehicle. R Switching off the fuel supply R Unlocking the vehicle doors R Lowering the side windows R Displaying the emergency guide on the cen‐ tral display R Switching on the interior lighting Function of the post-collision brake Depending on the accident situation, the postcollision brake can minimize the severity of a fur‐ ther collision or even avoid it. If an accident is detected, the post-collision brake can implement automatic braking. When the vehicle has come to a standstill, the electric parking brake is automatically applied. The driver can cancel automatic braking by tak‐ ing the following actions: R Braking more strongly than automatic brak‐ ing R Fully depressing the accelerator pedal with force Safely transporting children in the vehicle Always observe when children are traveling in the vehicle % Also strictly observe the safety notes for the specific situation. In this way you can recog‐ nize potential risks and avoid dangers if chil‐ dren are traveling in the vehicle (/ page 49). Be diligent Bear in mind that negligence when securing a child in the child restraint system may have seri‐ ous consequences. Always be diligent in secur‐ ing a child carefully before every journey. To improve protection for children younger than 12 years old or under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height, Mercedes-Benz recommends you observe the following information: R Always secure the child in a child restraint system suitable for this Mercedes-Benz vehi‐ cle. R The child restraint system must be appropri‐ ate to the age, weight and size of the child. R The vehicle seat must be suitable for instal‐ ling a child restraint system. Accident statistics show that children secured on the rear seats are generally safer than chil‐ dren secured on the front seats. For this reason, Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you install a child restraint system on a rear seat. Occupant safety The generic term child restraint system The generic term child restraint system is used in this Operator's Manual. A child restraint sys‐ tem is, for example: R A baby car seat R A rearward-facing child seat R A forward-facing child seat R A child booster seat with a backrest and seat belt guide Mercedes-Benz recommends using a child booster seat with a backrest. The child restraint system must be appropriate to the age, weight and size of the child. Observe laws and legal requirements Always observe the legal requirements when using a child restraint system in the vehicle. Observe standards for child restraint sys‐ tems All child restraint systems must meet the follow‐ ing standards: R U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 225 R Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 210.2 Confirmation that the child restraint system complies with the standards can be found on an instruction label on the child restraint system. This confirmation can also be found in the instal‐ lation instructions that are included with the child restraint system. Detecting risks, avoiding danger Securing systems for child restraint systems in the vehicle Only use the following securing systems for child restraint systems: R The LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings R The vehicle's seat belt system R 49 The Top Tether anchorages Installing a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system is preferred. Simply attaching to the securing rings on the vehicle can reduce the risk of installing the child restraint system incorrectly. When securing a child with the integrated seat belt of the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system, always comply with the permissible gross weight for the child and child restraint sys‐ tem (/ page 53). A booster seat may be necessary to achieve proper seat belt positioning for children over 40 lbs (18 kg) in weight or until they reach a height where a three-point seat belt can be fas‐ tened properly without a booster seat. Mercedes-Benz recommends a suitable child booster seat with a backrest and seat belt guide. Advantage of a rearward-facing child restraint system It is preferable to transport a baby or a small child in a suitable rearward-facing child restraint system. In this case, the child sits in the oppo‐ 50 Occupant safety site direction to the direction of travel and faces backwards. Babies and small children have comparatively weak neck muscles in relation to the size and weight of their head. The risk of injury to the cer‐ vical spine during an accident can be reduced in a rearward-facing child restraint system. Always secure a child restraint system cor‐ rectly & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to incorrect installation of the child restraint system The child can then not be protected or restrained as intended. # Be sure to comply with the manufactur‐ er's installation instructions for the child restraint system and its correct use. # Make sure that the entire base of the child restraint system always rests on the sitting surface of the seat. # # # Never place objects (e.g. cushions) under or behind the child restraint sys‐ tem. Use child restraint systems only with the original cover designed for them. Always replace damaged covers with genuine covers. & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to unsecured child restraint systems in the vehicle If the child restraint system is incorrectly installed or not secured, it can come loose. The child restraint system could be flung around and hit vehicle occupants. # Always install child restraint systems correctly, even when not in use. # Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. R Always observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation and operating R R instructions as well as the vehicle-specific information: Installing the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system on the right and left rear seats (/ page 53). Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt on the rear seat (/ page 57). Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt on the front passenger seat (/ page 59). Observe the specific instructions for the rearward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems (/ page 58). If the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure, both before and during the jour‐ ney, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct for the cur‐ rent situation (/ page 44). Observe the warning labels in the vehicle interior and on the child restraint system. Also secure Top Tether if present. Occupant safety Do not modify the child restraint system & WARNING Risk of injury due to modifi‐ cations to the child restraint system The child restraint system can no longer function properly. This poses an increased risk of injury. # Never modify a child restraint system. # Only affix accessories which have been specially approved for this child restraint system by the child restraint system's manufacturer. Only use child restraint systems which are in proper working condition & WARNING Risk of injury or death caused by the use of damaged child restraint systems Child restraint systems or their retaining sys‐ tems that have been subjected to stress in an accident may not be able to perform their intended protective function. It may be the case that the child cannot be properly restrained. # Always immediately replace child restraint systems that have been dam‐ aged or involved in an accident. # Have the securing systems for the child restraint systems checked at a qualified specialist workshop before installing a child restraint system again. Avoid direct sunlight & WARNING Risk of burns when the child seat is exposed to direct sunlight If the child restraint system is exposed to direct sunlight or heat, parts could heat up excessively. Children could suffer burns from these parts, particularly the metallic parts of the child restraint system. # Always make sure that the child restraint system is not exposed to direct sunlight. # # # Cover the child restraint system with a blanket, for example. If the child restraint system has been exposed to direct sunlight, allow it to cool before securing a child into it. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Observe when stopping or parking & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle If children are left unsupervised in the vehi‐ cle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users. R get out and be struck by oncoming traf‐ fic. R operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example. 51 52 Occupant safety In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: R releasing the parking brake. R changing the transmission position. R starting the vehicle. # # # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Keep the vehicle SmartKey out of reach of children. & WARNING Danger to life due to expo‐ sure to extreme heat or cold in the vehi‐ cle If people, particularly children, are exposed to extreme temperatures over an extended period of time, there is a risk of serious injury or danger to life. # Never leave persons, children in partic‐ ular, unattended in the vehicle. Overview of suitable seats in the vehicle for installing a child restraint system R Left/right rear seat Preferred securing system: ® LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat anchor ¯ Also secure Top Tether if present (/ page 55). Center rear seat Securing system: 7 Vehicle seat belt ¯ Also secure Top Tether if present (/ page 55). Alternative securing system: 7 Vehicle seat belt Also secure Top Tether if present (/ page 55). Front passenger seat Securing system: 7 Vehicle seat belt Be sure to observe: R If the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct for the current situation (/ page 44). Notes on automatic front passenger airbag shutoff (/ page 42). Activating or deactivating the special seat belt retractor & WARNING Risk of injury or death if a seat belt is unfastened while the vehicle is in motion If the seat belt is released while the vehicle is in motion, the special seat belt retractor is deactivated and the child restraint system is no longer correctly secured. The seat belt is drawn in slightly by the inertia reel and can‐ not be immediately closed again. # Stop the vehicle immediately in accord‐ ance with the traffic conditions. Occupant safety # Activate the special seat belt retractor again and correctly secure the child restraint system. When enabled, the special seat belt retractor ensures that the seat belts of the front passenger seat and rear seats do not slacken once the child restraint system is secured. The seat belts on the following seats are equip‐ ped with a special seat belt retractor: R Front passenger seat R Rear seats Installing a child restraint system: # When installing a child restraint system, always observe the manufacturer's installa‐ tion and operating instructions as well as the information in this Operator's Manual. # Pull the seat belt smoothly from the seat belt outlet. # Engage the seat belt tongue in the seat belt buckle. Activating the special seat belt retractor: Pull the seat belt out fully and let the inertia reel retract it again. When the special seat belt retractor is activa‐ ted, you will hear a ratcheting sound. # Push the child restraint system down until the seat belt sits tightly. # Deactivating the special seat belt retractor: # Press the release button of the seat belt buckle. # Hold the seat belt tongue and guide back to the seat belt outlet. 53 Installing a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system on the left and right rear seats Installing a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system on the left and right rear seats & WARNING Risk of accident if the rear bench seat, rear seat and seat backrest are not engaged The rear bench seat, rear seat and seat back‐ rest may fold forwards, even when you are driving. R As a result, the vehicle occupant will be pushed into the seat belt with increased force. The seat belt will not be able to protect as intended and could cause additional injury. R Objects or loads in the trunk or cargo compartment will not be restrained by the seat backrest. 54 # Occupant safety Make sure that the rear bench seat, the rear seat and the seat backrest are engaged before every trip. If the rear seat backrest is not engaged and locked in place, the red lock verification indica‐ tor will be visible. & WARNING Risk of injury or death if the permissible gross mass of the child and child restraint system together is excee‐ ded. Too much load may be placed on the LATCHtype (ISOFIX) child restraint system and the child may not be restrained correctly in the event of an accident, for example. # If the child and the child restraint sys‐ tem together weigh more than the per‐ missible gross mass of 73 lb (33 kg ), only use a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system with which the child is secured with the vehicle seat belt. # Also secure the child restraint system with the Top Tether belt, if available. Always comply with the information about the mass of the child restraint system: R in the manufacturer's installation and operat‐ ing instructions for the child restraint system used R on a label on the child restraint system, if present Regularly check that the permissible gross mass of the child and child restraint system is still complied with. When installing a child restraint system, observe the following: O Always observe the correct use of the seats and consider their suitability for attaching a child restraint system. O Always comply with the manufacturer's installation and operating instructions for the child restraint system used. O Make sure that the child's feet do not touch the front seat. If necessary, move the front seat slightly forwards. ®When installing a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system, also observe the following: O When using a baby car seat in weight group 0/0+ and a rearward-facing child restraint system in weight group I on a rear seat: adjust the front seat so that the seat does not touch the child restraint sys‐ tem. O When using a forward-facing child restraint system in weight group I: remove the head restraint from the respec‐ tive seat, if possible. In addition, the back‐ rest of the child restraint system must lie as flat as possible against the backrest of the vehicle seat. After the child restraint system has been removed, replace the head restraint immedi‐ ately and adjust all head restraints cor‐ rectly. O If the head restraint of the child seat cannot be fully extended when it is installed in the vehicle, this will result in restrictions on the maximum size setting for child restraint sys‐ tems in weight group II or III. Occupant safety Contact with the roof when the head restraint is fully extended and locked in place will not result in any restrictions on use. O The child restraint system must not be put under strain between the roof and the seat cushion and/or be installed facing the wrong direction. Where possible, adjust the seat cushion inclination accordingly. O The child restraint system must not be put under strain by the head restraint. Adjust the head restraints as appropriate. 55 * NOTE Damage to the seat belt for the center seat during installation of the child restraint system # # Make sure that the seat belt is not trap‐ ped. Attach the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system to both mounting brackets in the vehicle. Fastening a Top Tether 1 ISOFIX mounting bracket Before every journey, make sure that the LATCHtype (ISOFIX) child restraint system is engaged correctly in both mounting brackets in the vehi‐ cle. & WARNING Risk of injury or death if the rear seat backrests are not locked after Top Tether belts are installed The rear seat backrests may fold forwards when you are driving. As a result, child restraint systems will no longer be able to perform their intended pro‐ tective function. This may also cause addi‐ tional injuries. 56 # # Occupant safety Always lock rear seat backrests after installing Top Tether belts. Observe the lock verification indicator. If the rear seat backrest is not engaged and locked in place, the red lock verification indica‐ tor will be visible. ¯ If the child restraint system is equipped with a Top Tether belt: The risk of injury may be reduced by Top Tether. The Top Tether belt enables an additional connection between the child restraint system attached with LATCHtype (ISOFIX) (left and right rear seats) or the seat belt (all rear seats) and the vehi‐ cle. # # # # # If necessary, slide head restraint 1 upwards (/ page 94). Fold up cover 2 of Top Tether anchorage 3. Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) or beltsecured child restraint system with Top Tether. In doing so, comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. # # # Guide Top Tether belt 4 under head restraint 1 between the two head restraint bars. Hook Top Tether hook 5 of Top Tether belt 4 into Top Tether anchorage 3 without twisting. Tension Top Tether belt 4. In doing so, com‐ ply with the child restraint system manufac‐ turer's installation instructions. Fold down cover 2 of Top Tether anchorage 3. If necessary, slide head restraint 1 down‐ wards (/ page 94). Make sure that you do Occupant safety not interfere with the correct routing of Top Tether belt 4. Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt on the rear seat & WARNING Risk of accident if the rear bench seat, rear seat and seat backrest are not engaged The rear bench seat, rear seat and seat back‐ rest may fold forwards, even when you are driving. R As a result, the vehicle occupant will be pushed into the seat belt with increased force. The seat belt will not be able to protect as intended and could cause additional injury. R Objects or loads in the trunk or cargo compartment will not be restrained by the seat backrest. # Make sure that the rear bench seat, the rear seat and the seat backrest are engaged before every trip. If the rear seat backrest is not engaged and locked in place, the red lock verification indica‐ tor will be visible. When installing a belt-secured child restraint system, observe the following: O Always comply with the manufacturer's installation and operating instructions for the child restraint system used. O Also secure Top Tether if present (/ page 55). O When using a weight category 0/0+ baby car seat and a weight category I rearward-facing child restraint system on a rear seat: adjust the front seat so that the seat does not touch the child restraint system. O When using a weight category I forwardfacing child restraint system: remove the head restraint from the respective seat, if possible. 57 After the child restraint system has been removed, replace the head restraint immedi‐ ately and adjust all head restraints cor‐ rectly. O The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must, as far as possible, be resting on the seat backrest of the rear seat. O If the head restraint of the child seat cannot be fully extended when it is installed in the vehicle, this will result in restrictions on the maximum size setting for child restraint sys‐ tems in weight category II or III. Contact with the roof when the head restraint is fully extended and locked in place will not result in any restrictions on use. O The child restraint system must not be put under strain between the roof and the seat cushion and/or be installed facing the wrong direction. Where possible, adjust the seat cushion inclination accordingly. 58 Occupant safety O The child restraint system must not be put under strain by the head restraint. Adjust the head restraints as appropriate. O Make sure that the child's feet do not touch the front seat. If necessary, move the front seat slightly forwards. The seat belts on the following seats are equip‐ ped with a child seat safety feature: R Front passenger seat R Rear seats When enabled, the special seat belt retractor ensures that the seat belts of the front passenger seat and rear seats do not slacken once the child restraint system is secured (/ page 52). # Install the child restraint system. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the seat surface of the rear seat. # Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the seat belt outlet of the vehicle to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed forward from the seat belt outlet. Notes on rearward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems on the front passenger seat & WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury when using a rearward-facing child restraint system while the co-driver air‐ bag is enabled If you secure a child in a rearward-facing child restraint system on the co-driver seat and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off, the co-driver airbag can deploy in the event of an accident. The child could be struck by the airbag. # Always ensure that the co-driver airbag is disabled. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit. # NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat with an ENA‐ BLED FRONT AIRBAG; DEATH or SERI‐ OUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur. Observe the specific instructions for the rear‐ ward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems (/ page 59). Always observe the status of the front passenger airbag on the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indica‐ tor lamp: R When using a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat, the front passenger airbag must always be disabled. This is only the case if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit continuously (/ page 44). R If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off, the front passenger airbag is ena‐ bled. The front passenger airbag may deploy during an accident. Occupant safety Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt on the front passenger seat When installing a belt-secured child restraint system on the front passenger seat, always observe the following: O Observe the notes on rearward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems on the front passenger seat (/ page 58). O Observe the child restraint system manufac‐ turer's installation and operating instruc‐ tions. O When using a forward-facing child restraint system in weight category I: remove the head restraint from the respective seat, if possible. After the child restraint system has been removed, replace the head restraint immedi‐ ately and adjust all head restraints cor‐ rectly. O The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must, as far as possible, be resting on the seat backrest of the front passenger seat. O If the head restraint of the child seat cannot be fully extended when it is installed in the vehicle, this will result in restrictions on the maximum size setting for child restraint sys‐ tems in weight category II or III. The child seat is still fully functioning even if the head restraint comes into contact with the roof when it is fully extended and locked. O The child restraint system must not be put under strain between the roof and the seat cushion and/or be installed facing the wrong direction. O The child restraint system must not be put under strain by the head restraint. Adjust the head restraints as appropriate. O Never place objects (e.g. cushions) under or behind the child restraint system. The seat belt on the front passenger side is equipped with a child seat safety feature. When enabled, the child seat safety feature ensures that the seat belt does not slacken once the child seat is secured (/ page 52). 59 & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to objects between the seat surface and the child restraint system Objects between the seat surface and the child restraint system could affect the func‐ tion of the automatic front passenger airbag shutoff. # Do not place any objects between the seat surface and the child restraint sys‐ tem. # Always make sure that the child restraint system is correctly installed. # # # Set the front passenger seat as far back as possible and move the seat into the highest position if possible. Fully retract the seat cushion length adjust‐ ment. Adjust the seat cushion inclination so that the front edge of the seat cushion is in the highest position and the rear edge of the seat cushion is in the lowest position. 60 # # # # Occupant safety Set the seat backrest to the most vertical position possible. Install the child restraint system. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the sitting surface of the front passenger seat. Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the seat belt outlet of the vehicle to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed for‐ wards and downwards from the seat belt out‐ let. If necessary, adjust the seat belt outlet and the front passenger seat accordingly. Child safety locks # Activating or deactivating the child safety lock for the rear doors # & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle If children are left unsupervised in the vehi‐ cle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users. R get out and be struck by oncoming traf‐ fic. R operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example. In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: R releasing the parking brake. R changing the transmission position. R starting the vehicle. # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Keep the vehicle SmartKey out of reach of children. & WARNING Danger to life due to expo‐ sure to extreme heat or cold in the vehi‐ cle If people, particularly children, are exposed to extreme temperatures over an extended period of time, there is a risk of serious injury or danger to life. # Never leave persons, children in partic‐ ular, unattended in the vehicle. Occupant safety & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle The child safety lock on the rear doors secures each door separately. The doors can no longer be opened from the inside. 61 Activating or deactivating the child safety lock for the rear side windows If children are traveling in the vehicle, they could, in particular: R Open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users. R Get out and be struck by oncoming traf‐ fic. R Operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example. # # # Always activate the installed child safety locks if children are traveling in the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. There are child safety locks for the rear doors and the rear side windows. # # Press the lever in direction 1 (activate) or 2 (deactivate). Make sure that the child safety locks are working properly. # To activate/deactivate: press button 2. The rear side window can be opened or closed in the following cases: R Indicator lamp 1 is lit: via the switch on the driver's door 62 Occupant safety R Indicator lamp 1 is off: via the switch on the corresponding rear door or driver's door Notes on pets in the vehicle & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to animals left unsecured or unat‐ tended in the vehicle If you leave animals in the vehicle unatten‐ ded or unsecured, they could possibly press buttons or switches. An animal may: R Activate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example R Switch systems on or off and endanger other road users Unsecured animals may be thrown around in the vehicle in the event of an accident or sudden steering and braking maneuvers and injure vehicle occupants in the process. # # Never leave animals in the vehicle unat‐ tended. Always correctly secure animals while driving, e.g. using a suitable animal car‐ rier. Opening and closing SmartKey Overview of SmartKey functions & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle If children are left unsupervised in the vehi‐ cle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users. R get out and be struck by oncoming traf‐ fic. R operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example. # # When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Keep the vehicle SmartKey out of reach of children. * NOTE Damage to the SmartKey caused by magnetic fields # Keep the SmartKey away from strong magnetic fields. In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: R releasing the parking brake. R changing the transmission position. R starting the vehicle. # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. Vehicle SmartKey with panic alarm 1 Opens/closes the trunk lid 2 3 4 5 63 Unlocks (with embossed surface) Locks Indicator lamp Panic alarm % If indicator lamp 4 does not light up after pressing the Ü or s button, the bat‐ tery is weak or possibly discharged. Replace the battery as soon as possible. Replace the SmartKey battery (/ page 65). The SmartKey locks and unlocks the following components: R Doors R Fuel filler flap R Trunk lid If the vehicle is not opened within approximately 40 seconds after unlocking, it locks again. Antitheft protection is armed again. Do not keep the SmartKey together with elec‐ tronic devices or metal objects. This can affect the SmartKey's functionality. 64 Opening and closing Activating/deactivating the acoustic locking verification signal Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Open/Close # Activate or deactivate the Acoustic Lock. # # R Press the start/stop button. A SmartKey belonging to the vehicle must be detected in the vehicle. Deactivating the function of the SmartKey or # Arming/disarming the panic alarm Requirements: R The vehicle is switched off. To arm: press button 1 for approximately one second. A visual and audible alarm is triggered. To disarm: briefly press button 1 again. Changing the unlocking settings Possible unlocking functions of the SmartKey: Central unlocking R Unlocking the driver's door and fuel filler flap R To switch between settings: press the Ü and s buttons simultaneously for approximately six seconds until the indicator lamp flashes twice. Options if the unlocking function for the driver's door and fuel filler flap has been selected: R To unlock the vehicle centrally: press the Ü button twice. # Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: if you touch the inner surface of the door handle on the driver's door, only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap are unlocked. Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: if you deactivate the function of the SmartKey, the KEYLESS-GO functions are also deactivated. Access or drive authorization by KEYLESS-GO is then no longer possible with that particular SmartKey. Activate the function of the SmartKey so that all its func‐ tions will again be available. You can also deactivate the function of the SmartKey to reduce the energy consumption of the SmartKey if you do not use the vehicle or a SmartKey for an extended period of time. # To deactivate: press the s button on the SmartKey twice in quick succession. The SmartKey indicator lamp flashes twice briefly and lights up once. # To activate: press any button on the Smart‐ Key. Opening and closing % When the vehicle is started with the Smart‐ Key in the marked space of the center con‐ sole, the function of the SmartKey is auto‐ matically activated (/ page 148). Inserting the emergency key Removing/inserting the emergency key Removing the emergency key Insert emergency key 2 at marking 3 until it engages. % You can use emergency key 2 to attach the SmartKey to a key ring. # 65 severe internal burns to occur within two hours. There is a risk of fatal injury. # Keep batteries out of the reach of chil‐ dren. # If the cover and/or cap of the battery compartment does not close securely, do not use the SmartKey any longer and keep out of the reach of children. # If batteries are swallowed, seek medical attention immediately. + ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to improper disposal of bat‐ teries Replacing the SmartKey battery # # Press release button 1. Emergency key 2 is pushed out slightly. Fully remove emergency key 2. & DANGER Risk of fatal injuries due to swallowing batteries Batteries contain toxic and corrosive sub‐ stances. Swallowing batteries may cause Batteries contain pollutants. It is illegal to dispose of them with the household rubbish. 66 Opening and closing # # # Dispose of batteries in an environmentally responsible manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop or to a collection point for used batteries. Requirements: R You require a CR 2032 3 V cell battery. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the battery replaced at a qualified specialist work‐ shop. # Remove the emergency key (/ page 65). # # # Press emergency key 2 into the opening in the SmartKey in the direction of the arrow until cover 1 opens. When doing so, do not hold cover 1 closed. # # # # Insert emergency key 2 into the opening and lift up covering 3 and remove it. Repeatedly tap the SmartKey against your palm until battery 4 falls out of the Smart‐ Key. Insert the new battery with the positive pole facing upwards. Use a lint-free cloth to do so. Make sure that the surface of the battery is free of lint, grease and other impurities. Insert the front tabs of covering 3 into the housing and then press on both sides to close it. Make sure that covering 3 is completely closed. Insert the front tabs of cover 1 into the housing and then press until it is completely closed. Insert the emergency key again (/ page 65). Opening and closing Problems with the SmartKey, troubleshoot‐ ing You can no longer lock or unlock the vehicle Possible causes: R The SmartKey battery is weak or discharged. # # # # # Check the battery using the indicator lamp (/ page 63). Replace the SmartKey battery, if necessary (/ page 65). Use the replacement SmartKey. Use the emergency key to lock or unlock (/ page 70). Have the SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop. There is interference from a powerful radio signal source Possible causes if the function of the SmartKey is impaired: R High voltage power lines R Mobile phones R Electronic devices (notebooks, tablets) R Shielding due to metal objects or induction loops for electrical gate systems or auto‐ matic barriers # Make sure that there is sufficient distance between the SmartKey and the potential source of interference. 67 Doors Unlocking/opening the doors from the inside You have lost a SmartKey # Have the SmartKey deactivated at a qualified specialist workshop. # If necessary, have the mechanical lock replaced as well. # # # To unlock and open a front door: pull door handle 1. To unlock a rear door: pull the rear door handle. To open a rear door: pull the rear door han‐ dle again. 68 Opening and closing Centrally locking and unlocking the vehicle from the inside This does not lock or unlock the fuel filler flap. The vehicle is not unlocked: R If you have locked the vehicle using the SmartKey R If you have locked the vehicle using KEY‐ LESS-GO Locking/unlocking the vehicle with KEY‐ LESS-GO Requirements: R The SmartKey is outside the vehicle. R The distance between the SmartKey and the vehicle does not exceed 3 ft (1 m). R The driver's door and the door on which the door handle is used are closed. To unlock: press button 1. To lock: press button 2. The red indicator lamp on button 2 lights up once the vehicle is locked. % The buttons are also on the front passenger and rear doors. # # * NOTE Damage to the vehicle caused by unintentionally opening the trunk lid R R When using an automatic car wash When using a high pressure cleaner # Deactivate the function of the SmartKey in these situations. or # Make sure that the SmartKey is at a minimum distance of 10 ft (3 m) away from the vehicle. Observe the notes: On washing the vehicle in a car wash (/ page 294) R On using a high pressure cleaner (/ page 295) R Opening and closing Problems with KEYLESS-GO, troubleshooting You can no longer lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO Possible causes: R The function of the SmartKey has been deac‐ tivated. R The SmartKey battery is weak or discharged. # # # To unlock the vehicle: touch the inner sur‐ face of the door handle. # To lock the vehicle: touch sensor surface 1 or 2. # Convenience closing: touch recessed sen‐ sor surface 2 for an extended period. % Further information on convenience closing (/ page 79). # # # # Activate the function of the SmartKey (/ page 64). Check the battery using the indicator lamp (/ page 63). Replace the SmartKey battery, if necessary (/ page 65). Use the replacement SmartKey. Use the emergency key to lock or unlock (/ page 70). Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop. 69 There is interference from a powerful radio signal source Possible causes if the function of KEYLESS-GO is impaired: R High voltage power lines R Mobile phones R Electronic devices (notebooks, tablets) R Shielding due to metal objects or induction loops for electrical gate systems or auto‐ matic barriers # Make sure that there is sufficient distance between the SmartKey and the potential source of interference. Activating or deactivating the automatic locking feature Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Locking Function % The vehicle is locked automatically when the vehicle is switched on and the wheels are turning faster than walking pace. 70 Opening and closing Switch Automatic Door Lock on or off. In the following situations, there is a danger of being locked out when the function is activated: R The vehicle is being towed or pushed. R If the vehicle is being tested on a roller dyna‐ mometer. # Locking/unlocking the vehicle with the emergency key Unlocking a left-hand vehicle door with the emergency key # Remove the emergency key (/ page 65). # Slightly pull and hold door handle 1. # # # Insert emergency key 2 into the lock cylin‐ der as shown. Turn emergency key 2 counter-clockwise to position 1. Remove emergency key 2 and release door handle 1. Opening and closing Locking the doors # To lock the right-hand side of the vehicle: turn the emergency key clockwise as far as it will go. If the locked door is then closed, it can no longer be opened from the outside. Trunk Opening the trunk lid & DANGER Risk of exhaust gas poisoning # # Insert a suitable object, e.g. the emergency key, into opening 1 on the door lock. To lock the left-hand side of the vehicle: turn the emergency key counter-clockwise as far as it will go. Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the trunk lid is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion. # Always switch off the engine before opening the trunk lid. # Never drive with the trunk lid open. 71 * NOTE Damage to the trunk lid by obsta‐ cles above the vehicle The trunk lid swings upwards when it is opened. # Therefore, make sure that there is suffi‐ cient clearance above the trunk lid. # # Pull the trunk lid handle. Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: Make a kicking movement with your foot below the bumper (/ page 74). 72 Opening and closing Vehicles with trunk lid convenience closing # With the trunk lid opening height restriction activated, manually pull the stopped trunk lid upwards. If an obstacle obstructs the trunk lid during the automatic opening process, blockage detection will stop the trunk lid. The automatic blockage detection function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness. Closing the trunk lid & WARNING Risk of injury from unsecured items in the vehicle # Pull trunk lid remote operating switch 1. or # # Press and hold the H button on the SmartKey. If the trunk lid is stopped in an intermediate position, pull it upwards. Release it as soon as it begins to open. If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip over or be thrown around and thereby hit vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. # Always stow objects in such a way that they cannot be thrown around. # Before the journey, secure objects, lug‐ gage or loads against slipping or tipping over. Observe the notes on loading the vehicle. Notes on closing the trunk lid: your vehicle is equipped with automatic SmartKey recognition. If a SmartKey belonging to the vehicle is detec‐ ted in the vehicle, the trunk lid will not be locked and will pop open again. Note that the trunk lid will not be locked if the following situation occurs: R You have locked the vehicle and close the trunk lid while a SmartKey belonging to the vehicle is inside the vehicle. and R A second SmartKey belonging to the vehicle is not detected outside the vehicle. Automatic SmartKey recognition is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness. # Before locking, ensure that at least one SmartKey belonging to the vehicle is outside the vehicle. Opening and closing # To close the trunk lid: pull the trunk lid downwards using the handle recess and push it closed. Vehicles with trunk lid convenience closing & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped during automatic closing of the trunk lid Parts of the body could become trapped. There may be people in the closing area. # Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the closing area. # Use one of the following options to stop the closing process: R Press the H button on the SmartKey. R Press or pull the remote operating switch on the driver's door. R Press the closing or locking button on the trunk lid. R Pull the trunk lid handle. Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: it is also possible to stop the closing process by making a kicking movement below the rear bumper. # Pull the trunk lid handle. Release it as soon as it begins to close. # If the trunk lid is stopped in an intermediate position, push it downwards. The trunk lid will continue to close. 73 # Press trunk lid remote operating switch 1. # Press closing button 1 on the trunk lid. Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO # Press locking button 2 on the trunk lid. If a SmartKey is detected outside the vehicle, the trunk lid will close and the vehicle will be locked. 74 # Opening and closing With the trunk lid completely open, press and hold the H button on the SmartKey. The SmartKey must be in the vicinity of the vehi‐ cle. Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS With the trunk lid completely open, make a kicking movement with your foot below the bumper (/ page 74). # Trunk lid automatic reversing function The trunk lid is equipped with automatic block‐ age detection with a reversing function. If an obstacle obstructs the trunk lid during the auto‐ matic closing process, it will automatically open again. The automatic reversing function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentive‐ ness. # During the closing process, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped despite reversing function HANDS-FREE ACCESS function The reversing function will not react: R to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingers R towards the end of the closing procedure In these situations in particular, the reversing function cannot prevent someone being trap‐ ped. # Ensure that no body parts are in the closing area. # If someone is trapped, use one of the following options: R Press the H button on the SmartKey. R Press the remote operating switch on the driver's door. R Press the closing or locking button on the trunk lid. R Pull the trunk lid handle. With HANDS-FREE ACCESS you can open, close or interrupt trunk lid movement by performing a kicking movement under the rear bumper. The kicking movement triggers the opening or closing process alternately. Observe the notes when opening (/ page 71) and closing (/ page 72) the trunk lid. % A warning tone sounds while the trunk lid is opening or closing. Opening and closing & WARNING Risk of burns caused by a hot exhaust system The vehicle exhaust system can become very hot. If you use HANDS-FREE ACCESS, you could burn yourself by touching the exhaust system. # Always ensure that you only make a kicking movement within the detection range of the sensors. * NOTE Damage to the vehicle caused by unintentionally opening the trunk lid R R # When using an automatic car wash When using a high pressure cleaner Deactivate the function of the SmartKey in these situations. or # Make sure that the SmartKey is at a minimum distance of 10 ft (3 m) away from the vehicle. When making the kicking movement, make sure that you are standing firmly on the ground. You could otherwise lose your balance, e.g. on ice. Observe the following notes: R The SmartKey is behind the vehicle. R Stand at least 12 in (30 cm) away from the vehicle while performing the kicking move‐ ment. R Do not come into contact with the bumper while making the kicking movement. R Do not carry out the kicking movement too slowly. R The kicking movement must be towards the vehicle and back again. 75 1 Detection range of the sensors If several consecutive kicking movements are not successful, wait ten seconds. System limits The system may be impaired or may not function in the following cases: R The sensors are dirty, e.g. due to road salt or snow. R The kicking movement is made using a pros‐ thetic leg. 76 Opening and closing The trunk lid could be opened or closed uninten‐ tionally, in the following situations: R A person's arms or legs are moving in the sensor detection range, e.g. when polishing the vehicle or picking up objects. R Objects are moved or placed behind the vehi‐ cle, e.g. tensioning straps or luggage. R Clamping straps, tarps or other coverings are pulled over the bumper. R A protective mat with a length reaching over the trunk sill down into the detection range of the sensors is used. R The protective mat is not secured correctly. Deactivate the function of the SmartKey (/ page 64) or do not carry the SmartKey about your person in such situations. Switching separate trunk locking on and off Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Open/Close 5 Vehicle Switching separate trunk locking on # Select Block Trunk Access. # Create a PIN. # Press OK to confirm the PIN. # Enter the PIN again and confirm it. The trunk will remain locked if you unlock the vehicle centrally. % If an accident has been detected, the trunk will unlock even if separate locking is switched on. % You can open the trunk with the emergency key even while trunk locking is active. Sepa‐ rate trunk locking will remain active. Switching separate trunk locking off Select Block Trunk Access. # # Enter the PIN. If the PIN is correct, separate trunk locking will be switched off and the PIN deleted. Unlocking and opening the trunk from inside with the emergency release Requirements: R The 12 V vehicle battery is connected and charged. Opening and closing Activating/deactivating the trunk lid opening height restriction Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Opening/Closing # Activate or deactivate the Opening Height Limiter. This function prevents the trunk lid from hitting a low garage ceiling, for example. Side windows Opening and closing the side windows # Press emergency release button 1 briefly. & WARNING Risk of entrapment when opening a side window When opening a side window, parts of the body could be drawn in or become trapped between the side window and window frame. # When opening, make sure that nobody is touching the side window. # 77 If someone is trapped, release the but‐ ton immediately or pull it in order to close the side window again. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when closing a side window When closing a side window, body parts could be trapped in the closing area in the process. # When closing, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area. # If someone is trapped, release the but‐ ton immediately or press the button in order to reopen the side window. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when children operate the side windows Children could become trapped if they oper‐ ate the side windows, particularly when unat‐ tended. 78 # # # Opening and closing # Activate the child safety lock for the rear passenger compartment side win‐ dows. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. To interrupt automatic operation: press or pull the W button again. When the vehicle is switched off, you can con‐ tinue to operate the side windows. This function is available for around four minutes or until a front door is opened. Requirements: R The power supply or the vehicle has been switched on. 1 To close 2 To open The buttons on the driver's door take prece‐ dence. # To start automatic operation: press the W button beyond the point of resistance or pull and release it. Automatic reversing function of the side win‐ dows If an obstacle impedes a side window during the closing process, the side window will open again automatically. The automatic reversing function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness. # During the closing process, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped despite there being reversing protection on the side window The reversing function does not react: R To soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fin‐ gers. Opening and closing R During resetting. The reversing function cannot prevent some‐ one from becoming trapped in these situa‐ tions. # During the closing process, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area. # If someone becomes trapped, press the W button to open the side window again. Convenience opening (ventilating the vehicle before starting a journey) & WARNING Risk of entrapment when opening a side window When opening a side window, parts of the body could be drawn in or become trapped between the side window and window frame. # When opening, make sure that nobody is touching the side window. # # Release the button immediately if somebody becomes trapped. Press and hold the Ü button on the key. The following functions are performed: R The vehicle is unlocked. R The side windows are opened. R The sliding sunroof is opened. R The panoramic sliding roof is opened. R The seat ventilation of the driver's seat is switched on. % If the roller sunblind of the panoramic sliding sunroof is closed, the roller sunblind is opened first. # To interrupt convenience opening: release the Ü button. # To continue convenience opening: press and hold the Ü button again. 79 Convenience closing (closing the vehicle from outside) & WARNING Risk of entrapment due to not paying attention during convenience closing When the convenience closing feature is operating, parts of the body could become trapped in the closing area of the side win‐ dow and the sliding sunroof. # When the convenience closing feature is operating, monitor the entire closing process and make sure that no body parts are in the closing area. # Press and hold the s button on the SmartKey. The following functions are performed: R The vehicle is locked. R The side windows are closed. R The sliding sunroof is closed. R The panoramic sliding roof is closed. 80 Opening and closing To interrupt convenience closing: release the s button. # To continue convenience closing: press and hold the s button again. % Convenience closing also functions with KEYLESS-GO (/ page 68). # Resolving problems with the side windows & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped or fatally injured if reversing protection is not activated If you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked, the side window will close with increased or maximum force. The reversing function is then not active and body parts may become trapped. # Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. # To stop the closing process, release the button or press the button again to reopen the side window. A side window cannot be closed and you can‐ not see the cause. # Check to see whether any objects are in the window guide. # Adjust the side windows. Adjusting the side windows If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens again immediately: # Immediately after this, pull and hold the cor‐ responding button again until the side win‐ dow has closed and hold the button for at least one more second (re-adjustment). The side window will be closed without the automatic reversing function. If the side window is obstructed again and reopens again immediately: # Immediately after this, pull and hold the cor‐ responding button again until the side win‐ dow has closed and hold the button for at least one more second (follow-up adjust‐ ment). The side window will be closed without the automatic reversing function. The side windows cannot be opened or closed using the convenience opening fea‐ ture. Possible causes: R The SmartKey battery is weak or discharged. # # Check the battery using the indicator lamp (/ page 63). Replace the SmartKey battery, if necessary (/ page 65). Sliding sunroof Opening and closing the sliding sunroof % The term "sliding sunroof" also refers to the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel. Opening and closing & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when the sliding sunroof is being opened and closed Body parts may become trapped in the range of movement. # During the opening and closing proc‐ ess, make sure that no body parts are in the sweep of the sliding sunroof. # If someone is trapped, release the con‐ trol panel immediately. or # Touch the control panel during auto‐ matic operation. The opening/closing process will be stopped. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the sliding sunroof is operated by chil‐ dren Children operating the sliding sunroof could get caught in the moving parts, particularly if unattended. # # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when the roller sunblind is being opened and closed Body parts may become trapped between the roller sunblind and frame or sliding roof. # During the opening or closing process, make sure that no body parts are in the roller sunblind's range of movement. # If someone is trapped, release the con‐ trol panel immediately. or # Touch the control panel during auto‐ matic operation. The opening/closing process will be stopped. * NOTE Malfunction due to snow and ice Snow and ice may cause the sliding sunroof to malfunction. # Open the sliding sunroof only if it is free of snow and ice. * NOTE Damage caused by protruding objects Objects that protrude from the sliding sun‐ roof may damage the seals. # Do not allow anything to protrude from the sliding sunroof. * NOTE Damage to the sliding sunroof when a roof luggage rack is installed The sliding sunroof may be damaged by the roof luggage rack if you attempt to open it when a roof luggage rack is installed. # Do not open the sliding sunroof when a roof luggage rack is installed. 81 82 Opening and closing In order to allow ventilation of the vehicle interior, you can raise the sliding sunroof. # # # # # The sliding sunroof and the roller sunblind are operated using control panel 1. The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel can be operated only when the roller sunblind is open. To open: swipe backwards across control panel 1 and hold. To close: swipe forwards across control panel 1 and hold. To raise or lower: press control panel 1 briefly. To start automatic operation: swipe for‐ wards or backwards across control panel 1. To cancel automatic operation: press con‐ trol panel 1 again. The opening/closing process will be stop‐ ped. Automatic reversing function of the sliding sunroof If an obstacle obstructs the sliding sunroof dur‐ ing the closing process, the sliding sunroof will open again automatically. The automatic revers‐ ing function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness. # During the closing process, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped despite reversing function The reversing function will not react: R To soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fin‐ gers. R Towards the end of the closing proce‐ dure. R During resetting. # # During the closing process, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area. If someone is trapped, release the con‐ trol panel immediately. or # Touch the control panel during auto‐ matic closing. The closing process will be stopped. Automatic reversing function of the roller sunblind If an obstacle obstructs the roller sunblind dur‐ ing the closing process, the roller sunblind will open again automatically. The automatic revers‐ Opening and closing ing function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness. # When closing the roller sunblind, make sure that no body parts are in the range of move‐ ment. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped despite reversing function In particular, the reversing function does not react to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fin‐ gers. # When closing the roller sunblind, make sure that no body parts are in the range of movement. # If someone is trapped, release the con‐ trol panel immediately. or # Touch the control panel during auto‐ matic closing. The closing process will be stopped. Automatic functions of the sliding sunroof # % The term "sliding sunroof" also refers to the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel. Rain closing function when driving Vehicles with a panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel: If it starts to rain, the raised sliding sunroof will automatically be lowered while the vehicle is in motion. Automatic lowering function Vehicles with a panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel: If the sliding sunroof is raised at the rear, it will automatically be lowered slightly at higher speeds. At low speeds, it will be raised again automatically. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped by automatic lowering of the sliding sunroof At higher speeds, the raised sliding sunroof will automatically be lowered slightly at the rear. # 83 Make sure that nobody reaches into the sliding sunroof's range of movement while the vehicle is in motion. If somebody becomes trapped, briefly push the sliding sunroof button for‐ wards or backwards. Rectifying problems with the sliding sunroof & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped or fatal injuries when the sliding sunroof is closed again If you close the sliding sunroof again immedi‐ ately after it has been blocked or reset, the sliding sunroof will close with increased or maximum force. There is a risk of becoming trapped or even of fatal injuries! # Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. # If someone is trapped, release the con‐ trol panel immediately. 84 Opening and closing or # Touch the control panel during auto‐ matic closing. The closing process will be stopped. Vehicles without a panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel: The sliding sunroof is not operating smoothly. # Reset the sliding sunroof. The sliding sunroof cannot be closed and you cannot see the cause. % The term "sliding sunroof" also refers to the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel. If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during closing and reopens again slightly: # Immediately after automatic reversing, swipe forwards across the control panel (/ page 80) and hold until the sliding sun‐ roof is closed. The sliding sunroof will be closed with increased force. Resetting the sliding sunroof # Repeatedly swipe forwards across the con‐ trol panel (/ page 80) and hold until the sliding sunroof is completely open. # Press and hold the control panel for another second. # Close the sliding sunroof. Vehicles with a panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel: The sliding sunroof or the roller sunblind is not operating smoothly. # Reset the sliding sunroof and the roller sun‐ blind. If the sliding sunroof is obstructed again and opens again slightly: # Repeat the previous step. The sliding sunroof will be closed again with increased force. Resetting the sliding sunroof and the roller sunblind # Repeatedly swipe forwards across the con‐ trol panel (/ page 80) and hold until the sliding sunroof is completely closed. # # # # Press and hold the control panel for another second. Press and hold the control panel until the roller sunblind is completely closed. Press and hold the control panel for another second. Use automatic operation to fully open and then close the sliding sunroof. Roller sun blinds Extending the rear side window roller sun‐ blinds * NOTE Damage to the inertia reel due to it snapping back If suddenly snapped back, the inertia reel may be damaged. # Always move the roller sun blind by hand. # Do not drive with the roller sun blind hooked in and side windows opened at the same time. Opening and closing 85 Extending or retracting the rear-window roller sunblind & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when extending or retracting the roller sunblind # Pull the roller sunblind out by tab 1 and hook it onto brackets 2 at the top of the window. Body parts may become trapped in the roller sunblind's range of movement. # Ensure there are no body parts in the range of movement. # If someone becomes trapped, briefly press the button again. The opening or closing process will briefly be stopped. The roller sunblind will then return to its starting position. # To extend or retract: press button 1. * NOTE Damage caused by objects Objects can cause the roller sunblind to mal‐ function. # Do not store objects on the rear shelf. # Ensure that the roller sunblind can move freely. Anti-theft protection Function of the immobilizer The immobilizer prevents your vehicle from being started without the correct SmartKey. 86 Opening and closing The immobilizer is automatically activated when the vehicle is switched off, and deactivated when the vehicle is switched on. When leaving the vehicle, always take the Smart‐ Key with you and lock the vehicle. Anyone can start the vehicle if a valid SmartKey has been left inside the vehicle. % In the event the engine cannot be started (yet the vehicle’s battery is charged), the system is not operational. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada). ATA (anti-theft alarm system) Function of the ATA system If the ATA system is armed, a visual and audible alarm is triggered in the following situations: R When a door is opened R When the trunk lid is opened R When the hood is opened R When the interior motion sensor is triggered (/ page 87) R When the tow-away alarm is triggered (/ page 87) The ATA system is armed automatically after approximately ten seconds in the following situa‐ tions: R After locking the vehicle with the SmartKey R After locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO Indicator lamp 1 flashes when the ATA system is armed. The ATA system is deactivated automatically in the following situations: R After unlocking the vehicle with the Smart‐ Key R After unlocking the vehicle using KEYLESSGO R After pressing the start/stop button with the SmartKey in the marked space (/ page 148) % When the Mercedes‑Benz emergency call system is active and the alarm stays on for more than 30 seconds, a message is auto‐ matically sent to the Customer Assistance Center (/ page 277). % In the case of severe battery discharging, the anti-theft alarm system is automatically deactivated to facilitate the next engine start. Deactivating the ATA # Press the Ü, s or H button on the SmartKey. or Opening and closing # Press the start/stop button with the Smart‐ Key in the marked space (/ page 148) Deactivating the alarm using KEYLESS-GO Grasp the outside door handle with the SmartKey outside the vehicle. # Function of the tow-away alarm % This function may not be available in all countries. An audible and visual alarm is triggered if an alteration to your vehicle's angle of inclination is detected while the tow-away alarm is armed. The tow-away alarm is automatically armed after approximately 60 seconds: R After locking the vehicle with the SmartKey R After locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO The tow-away alarm is only armed when the fol‐ lowing components are closed: R Doors R Trunk lid The tow-away alarm is automatically deactiva‐ ted: R After pressing the Ü or H button on the SmartKey R After pressing the start/stop button with the SmartKey in the marked space (/ page 148) R After unlocking the vehicle using KEYLESSGO R When using HANDS-FREE ACCESS Information on collision detection on a parked vehicle (/ page 174). Arming/disarming the tow-away alarm Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Opening/closing 5 Vehicle Protection # Arm or disarm Tow-away Protection. The tow-away alarm is armed again in the follow‐ ing cases: R The vehicle is unlocked again. R A door is opened. R 87 The vehicle is locked again. Function of the interior motion sensor % This function may not be available in all countries. When the interior motion sensor is activated, a visual and audible alarm is triggered if move‐ ment is detected in the vehicle interior. The interior motion sensor is activated automati‐ cally after approximately ten seconds: R After locking the vehicle with the SmartKey R After locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO The interior motion sensor is only activated when the following components are closed: R Doors R Trunk lid The interior motion sensor is automatically deac‐ tivated: R After pressing the Ü or H button on the SmartKey 88 R R R Opening and closing After pressing the start/stop button with the SmartKey in the marked space (/ page 148) After unlocking the vehicle using KEYLESSGO When using HANDS-FREE ACCESS The following situations can lead to a false alarm: R When there are moving objects such as mas‐ cots in the vehicle interior R When a side window is open R When a sliding sunroof is open R When a panoramic sliding sunroof is open Activating/deactivating the interior motion sensor Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Opening/closing 5 Vehicle Protection # Activate or deactivate Interior Motion Sensor. The Interior motion sensor is activated again in the following cases: R The vehicle is unlocked again. R A door is opened. R The vehicle is locked again. Seats and stowing Notes on the correct driver's seat position R & WARNING Risk of accident due to adjusting the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion R R You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular: R If you adjust the driver's seat, the head restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion R If you fasten your seat belt while the vehi‐ cle is in motion # Before starting the vehicle: in particular, adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your seat belt. R R R R Ensure the following when adjusting the steering wheel 1, seat belt 2 and driver's seat 3: R You are sitting as far away from the driver's airbag as possible, taking the following points into consideration: R You are sitting in an upright position R Your thighs are slightly supported by the seat cushion 89 Your legs are not fully extended and you can depress the pedals properly The back of your head is supported at eye level by the center of the head restraint You can hold the steering wheel with your arms slightly bent You can move your legs freely You can see all the displays on the instru‐ ment cluster clearly You have a good overview of the traffic con‐ ditions Your seat belt sits snugly against your body and passes across the center of your shoul‐ der and across your hips in the pelvic area Seats Adjusting the front seat mechanically & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the seats are adjusted by children Children could become trapped if they adjust the seats, particularly when unattended. 90 # # Seats and stowing When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when adjusting the seat When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the seat guide rail. # When adjusting a seat, make sure that no one has any part of their body within the sweep of the seat. Observe the safety notes on "Airbags" and "Chil‐ dren in the vehicle". & WARNING Risk of accident due to the driver's seat not being engaged The driver's seat may move unexpectedly while driving. This could cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # Always make sure that the driver's seat is engaged before starting the vehicle. & WARNING Risk of accident due to adjusting the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular: R If you adjust the driver's seat, the head restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion R If you fasten your seat belt while the vehi‐ cle is in motion # Before starting the vehicle: in particular, adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your seat belt. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the seat height is adjusted carelessly If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or other vehicle occupants could be trapped and thereby injured. Children in particular could accidentally press the electrical seat adjustment buttons and become trapped. # While moving the seats, make sure that hands or other body parts do not get under the lever assembly of the seat adjustment system. & WARNING Risk of injury due to head restraints not being installed or being adjusted incorrectly If head restraints have not been installed or have not been adjusted correctly, there is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident or when braking. Seats and stowing # # Always drive with the head restraints installed. Before driving off, make sure for every vehicle occupant that the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at about eye level. Adjust the head restraint fore-and-aft position so that it is as close as possible to the back of your head. & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to an incorrect seat position The seat belt does not offer the intended level of protection if you have not moved the seat backrest to an almost vertical position. In particular, you could slip beneath the seat‐ belt and become injured. # Adjust the seat properly before begin‐ ning your journey. # Always ensure that the seat backrest is in an almost vertical position and that 91 the shoulder belt is routed across the center of your shoulder. & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to objects under the co-driver seat Objects trapped under the co-driver seat can interfere with the function of the automatic co-driver airbag shutoff or damage the sys‐ tem. # Do not store any objects under the codriver seat. # When the co-driver seat is occupied, make sure that no objects are trapped under the co-driver seat. * NOTE Damage to the seats when adjust‐ ing The seats may be damaged by objects when adjusting the seats. # When adjusting the seats, make sure that there are no objects in the foot‐ well, under or behind the seats. # # # To adjust the seat fore-and-aft position: lift lever 1 and slide the seat into the desired position. Make sure that the seat is engaged. To adjust the seat height: push or pull lever 2 until the desired seat height has been reached. 92 # Seats and stowing % The head restraint height will be adjusted automatically when you adjust the seat height or the seat fore-and-aft position. To set the seat backrest inclination: rotate handwheel 3 forwards or backwards until the required position has been reached. Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support Adjusting the front seat electrically The switches for adjusting the seats do not move. You will therefore receive no direct feed‐ back on the switch while pressing the switch. Feedback is provided only by the movement of the seat. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Head restraint height Seat cushion inclination Seat cushion length Seat fore-and-aft position Seat height Seat backrest inclination # Save the settings with the memory function (/ page 104). 1 Higher 2 Softer Seats and stowing 3 Lower 4 Firmer # Use buttons 1 to 4 to adjust the contour of the backrest. Head restraints Adjusting the front seat head restraints mechanically (two-way head restraints) & WARNING Risk of accident due to adjusting the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular: R If you adjust the driver's seat, the head restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion R If you fasten your seat belt while the vehi‐ cle is in motion # Before starting the vehicle: in particular, adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, 93 steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your seat belt. & WARNING Risk of injury due to head restraints not being installed or being adjusted incorrectly If head restraints have not been installed or have not been adjusted correctly, there is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident or when braking. # Always drive with the head restraints installed. # Before driving off, make sure for every vehicle occupant that the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at about eye level. Adjust the head restraint fore-and-aft position so that it is as close as possible to the back of your head. # # # Take hold of the head restraint on both sides and press release knob 1. To raise or lower: pull the head restraint upwards or push it downwards. Let go of release knob 1. 94 Seats and stowing Adjusting the front seat head restraints mechanically (4-way head restraint) Adjusting partially electrically Adjusting the head restraints of the rear seats mechanically Adjusting manually # # # # # Take hold of the head restraint on both sides and press release knob 1. The head restraint will be unlocked in all directions of movement simultaneously. To raise or lower: pull the head restraint upwards or push it downwards. To move forwards or backwards: pull the head restraint forwards or push it back‐ wards. Let go of release knob 1. # # # To raise or lower: adjust the head restraint using the buttons on the door operating unit (/ page 92). To move forwards or backwards: take hold of the head restraint on both sides and press release knob 1. Pull the headrest forwards or push it back‐ wards. Let go of release knob 1. # # To raise: push release knob 1 in the direc‐ tion of the arrow and pull the head restraint up. To lower: press release knob 1 in the direc‐ tion of the arrow and push the head restraint down. Seats and stowing # To set the center head restraint in the first position: pull the head restraint up. Installing/removing the rear seat head restraints Removing You can remove the head restraints only in vehi‐ cles with folding rear seat backrests. # # # Release the rear seat backrest and fold it for‐ wards slightly (/ page 108). Press release knob 2 and pull the head restraint upwards as far as it will go. Release knob 1 will extend. Push both release knobs 1 and 2 in the direction of the arrow and pull out the head restraint. Installing Insert the head restraint such that the notches on the bar are on the left when viewed in the direction of travel. # Push the head restraint down until it engages. # Fold the rear seat backrest back until it engages. # Configuring the seat settings Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Comfort 5 Seat Adjusting the air cushions. # In the corresponding menu, adjust the air cushions for Lumbar or Side Bolsters. Setting automatic seat adjustment & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped during adjustment of the driver's seat after calling up a driver profile Selecting a user profile may trigger an adjustment of the driver's seat to the posi‐ tion saved under the user profile. You or other vehicle occupants could be injured in the process. # Make sure that when the position of driver's seat is being adjusted using the multimedia system, no people or body parts are in the seat's range of move‐ ment. 95 96 Seats and stowing If there is a risk of someone becoming trap‐ ped, stop the adjustment process immedi‐ ately: # a) Tap the warning message on the cen‐ tral display. or # b) Press a memory position button or a seat adjustment switch on the driver's door. The adjustment process will be stop‐ ped. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Comfort 5 Seat 5 Automatic Seat Positioning Manually adjusting driver's seat and steering wheel position to body size The vehicle calculates a suitable driver's seat and steering wheel position on the basis of the driver's body size and sets this directly. # To set the unit of measurement: select cm or ft/in. Set the size using the scale. Select Start Positioning. The driver's seat and steering wheel position is adjusted to the body size that has been set. % You can also configure these settings via the Mercedes me user account for your user profile. By synchronizing the profiles in the vehicle and the Mercedes me connect pro‐ files, you can carry over these settings for your vehicle. Further information about syn‐ chronizing user profiles . # # Automatically adjusting driver's seat and steering wheel position to body size If the vehicle has the Interior Assistant, the driv‐ er's body size can be determined automatically using the 3D laser cameras in the overhead con‐ trol panel. # Wait until the Interior Assistant has deter‐ mined the body size. # Select Start Positioning. The driver's seat and steering wheel position is adjusted to the body size that has been determined. % Further information on the Interior Assistant: % If the driver's seat and steering wheel posi‐ tion calculated by the vehicle is not practical or comfortable, it can be manually adapted at any time via the control buttons. The outside mirrors are not set via this func‐ tion. Instead, they have to be set manually via the operating switches. Overview of massage programs R R R R Relaxing MassageRelaxing back massage with increasing wave motions and then soothing movements. Activating Massage Activating massage with upward-moving massage waves. Classic Massage Relaxing back massage. Mobilizing Massage Mobilizing Massage with upward-moving massage waves. Can pro‐ mote slower, deeper respiration. This can improve the supply of oxygen to cells and the brain. Seats and stowing R R Deep Waves: Wave-like movements in the cushion can promote blood flow and meta‐ bolic processes in the lower back and legs. Deep Workout: Wave movements in the cush‐ ion are combined with wave movements from the backrest and can stimulate blood circula‐ tion and metabolism in the lower back, but‐ tocks and legs. % The Depth waves and Deep workout pro‐ grams are available only for the driver's seat. Selecting the massage program for the front seats Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Comfort 5 Massage # Select a massage program (/ page 96). # Start the program for the desired seat ;. # To set the massage intensity: switch Intensive on or off . Resetting seat settings Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Comfort 5 Seat # Select Reset. # Select ß for the desired seat. Switching the seat heating on/off & WARNING Risk of burns due to repeat‐ edly switching on the seat heating Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can cause the seat cushion and seat backrest padding to become very hot. In particular, the health of persons with limi‐ ted temperature sensitivity or a limited ability to react to high temperatures may be affec‐ ted or they may even suffer burn-like injuries. # Do not repeatedly switch on the seat heating. To protect against overheating, the seat heating may be temporarily deactivated after it has been switched on repeatedly. 97 * NOTE Damage to the seats caused by objects or documents when the seat heating is switched on When the seat heating is switched on, over‐ heating may occur due to objects or docu‐ ments placed on the seats, e.g. seat cush‐ ions or child seats. This could cause damage to the seat surface. # Make sure that no objects or docu‐ ments are on the seats when the seat heating is switched on. Requirements: R The vehicle is switched on. 98 Seats and stowing 10 and 20 minutes until the seat heating switches off. % If you switch the vehicle off and on again within 20 minutes, the previous setting of the seat heating for the driver's seat will remain active. Setting the panel heating Press button 1 repeatedly until the desired heating level is set. Depending on the heating level, up to three indicator lamps will light up. If all indicator lamps are off, the seat heating is switched off. % The seat heating will automatically switch down from the three heating levels after 8, # Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Comfort 5 Seat 5 Heating Settings 5 Panel Heating When the seat heating is switched on, the armr‐ ests, the center panels of the doors and the cen‐ ter console can be heated. # Switch the function for the desired seats on or off. Switching the seat ventilation on/off Requirements: R The vehicle is switched on. Seats and stowing the seat ventilation for the driver's seat will remain active. Steering wheel Adjusting the steering wheel manually & WARNING Risk of accident due to adjusting the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion Press button 1 repeatedly until the desired blower setting has been reached. Depending on the blower setting, up to three indicator lamps will light up. If all indicator lamps are off, the seat ventilation is switched off. % If you switch the vehicle off and on again within 20 minutes, the previous setting of # You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular: R If you adjust the driver's seat, the head restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion R If you fasten your seat belt while the vehi‐ cle is in motion # Before starting the vehicle: in particular, adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your seat belt. & WARNING Risk of entrapment for chil‐ dren when adjusting the steering wheel Children could injure themselves if they adjust the steering wheel. # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. # When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. 99 100 Seats and stowing Adjusting the steering wheel electrically & WARNING Risk of accident due to adjusting the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular: R If you adjust the driver's seat, the head restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion R If you fasten your seat belt while the vehi‐ cle is in motion # # # To unlock: push release lever 1 down as far as it will go. Adjust height 2 and distance 3 to the steering wheel. Locking # Fold release lever 1 up as far as it will go. # Check and make sure that the steering col‐ umn is locked by moving the steering wheel. Before starting the vehicle: in particular, adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your seat belt. & WARNING Risk of entrapment for chil‐ dren when adjusting the steering wheel Children could injure themselves if they adjust the steering wheel. # # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. The steering wheel can be adjusted when the power supply is disconnected. Seats and stowing 101 Switching the steering wheel heater on/off Requirements: R The power supply or the vehicle has been switched on. When you switch the vehicle off, the steering wheel heater will switch off. Coupling the steering wheel heater with the seat heating Requirements: R The power supply or the vehicle has been switched on. 1 2 3 4 To move up To move back To move down To move forward # Save the settings with the memory function (/ page 104). Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Comfort 5 Seat 5 Heating Settings # Tap on Additional Steering Wheel Heating. The steering wheel heater will be coupled to the seat heating. When the function has been activated, the steer‐ ing wheel heater is automatically activated and deactivated when you switch the switch the seat heating on and off. # Push the switch into position 1 or 2. If indicator lamp 3 lights up, the steering wheel heater is switched on. 102 Seats and stowing Easy entry and exit feature Using the easy entry and exit feature & WARNING Risk of accident when pulling away during the adjustment process of the easy entry and exit feature You could lose control of the vehicle. # Always wait until the adjustment proc‐ ess is complete before driving off. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped during adjustment of the easy entry and exit feature You and other vehicle occupants – particu‐ larly children – could become trapped. # Ensure that no one has a body part in the sweep of the steering wheel or driv‐ er's seat. If there is a risk of becoming trapped by the steering wheel: # Move the adjustment lever of the steer‐ ing wheel. The adjustment process will be stop‐ ped. If there is a risk of becoming trapped by the driver's seat: # Press the seat adjustment switch. The adjustment process will be stop‐ ped. # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. # When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Vehicles with memory function: you can stop the adjustment process by pressing one of the memory function position switches. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if children activate the easy entry and exit feature‑ Children could become trapped if they acti‐ vate the easy entry‑ and exit feature, particu‐ larly when unattended. # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. # When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. In order to use the easy entry and exit feature, the automatic seat adjustment function must have been switched on (/ page 95). When the easy entry and exit feature is active, the steering wheel and driver's seat will move as follows: R The steering wheel will move upwards. R The driver's seat will move forward or back‐ ward to a seat position suitable for getting out of the vehicle. Seats and stowing 103 This will occur in the following situations: R You switch off the vehicle when the driver's door is open. R You open the driver's door when the vehicle is switched off. % The steering wheel will then move upwards only if it is not already as high as it will go. The driver's seat will then move backwards only if it is not already at the rear of the seat adjustment range. The steering wheel and the driver's seat will move back to the last drive position in the fol‐ lowing cases: R You switch the power supply or the vehicle on when the driver's door is closed R You close the driver's door when the vehicle is switched on. The last drive position will be saved when: R You switch off the vehicle. R Vehicles with memory function: you call up the seat settings via the memory function. R Vehicles with memory function: you save the seat settings via the memory function. Vehicles with memory function: press one of the memory function position switches to stop the adjustment process. Setting the easy entry and exit feature Requirements: R The automatic seat adjustment has been activated (/ page 95). Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Convenience 5 Easy Entry And Exit Feature # Switch Position Seat or Position Steering Wheel on or off. % If you are using an individual user profile, this information is used for the easy entry and exit feature. This will cause the driver's seat and steering wheel to move into the correct position automatically . Memory function Function of the memory function & WARNING Risk of an accident if the memory function is used while driving If you use the memory function on the driv‐ er's side while driving, you could lose control of the vehicle as a result of the adjustments being made. # Only use the memory function on the driver's side when the vehicle is station‐ ary. & WARNING Risk of entrapment when adjusting the seat with the memory func‐ tion When the memory function adjusts the seat, you and other vehicle occupants – particu‐ larly children – could become trapped. # During the adjusting process of the memory function, ensure that no body 104 Seats and stowing # parts are in the area of movement of the seat or the steering wheel. If someone becomes trapped, press a preset position button or seat adjust‐ ment switch immediately. The adjustment process is stopped. & WARNING Risk of entrapment if the memory function is activated by children Children could become trapped if they acti‐ vate the memory function, particularly when unattended. # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. # When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. You can use the memory function when the vehi‐ cle is switched off. Seat adjustments for up to three people can be stored and called up using the memory function. You can save the following settings for the front seat: R Seat, backrest, head restraint position and contour of the seat backrest in the lumbar region R Seat heating: distribution of the heated sec‐ tions of the seat cushion and seat backrest R Driver's side: steering wheel position and position of the outside mirrors on the driver's and front passenger sides R Head-up Display Operating the memory function Storing # # Set the seat, the steering wheel, the Head-up Display and the outside mirror to the desired position. Press the V memory button and then release it. Seats and stowing 105 # # Press one of the preset position buttons 4, T or U within three seconds. An acoustic signal sounds. The settings are stored. To call up: press the preset position button 4, T or U. The seat is moved to the stored position. After releasing the button, the front seat, outside mirror, Head-up Display and steering column continue to move into the stored position automatically. Stowage areas Notes on loading the vehicle & DANGER Risk of exhaust gas poisoning Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the trunk lid is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion. # Always switch off the engine before opening the trunk lid. # Never drive with the trunk lid open. & WARNING Risk of injury from unsecured items in the vehicle If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip over or be thrown around and thereby hit vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. # Always stow objects in such a way that they cannot be thrown around. # Before the journey, secure objects, lug‐ gage or loads against slipping or tipping over. & WARNING Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addi‐ tion, cup holders, open storage spaces and mobile phone brackets cannot always retain all objects they contain. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. # Always stow objects in such a way that they cannot be thrown around in such situations. # Always make sure that objects do not protrude from storage spaces, parcel nets or storage nets. # Close the lockable storage spaces before starting a journey. # Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in the trunk. Vehicles with automatic front passenger air‐ bag shutoff: Objects trapped under the front passenger seat may interfere with the function of the automatic front passenger airbag shutoff or damage the system. Please observe the notes 106 Seats and stowing on the function of the automatic front passenger airbag shutoff (/ page 42). & WARNING ‑ Risk of accident or injury when using the cup holder while the vehicle is moving The cup holder cannot secure containers while the vehicle is moving. If you use a cup holder while the vehicle is moving, the container may be flung around and liquids may be spilled. The vehicle occu‐ pants may come into contact with the liquid and if it is hot, they could be scalded. You could be distracted from traffic conditions and you may lose control of the vehicle. # Only use the cup holder when the vehi‐ cle is stationary. # Only use the cup holder for containers of the right size. # Close the container, particularly if the liquid is hot. * NOTE Damage to the cup holder When the rear armrest is folded back the cup holder could become damaged. # Only fold the rear armrest back when the cup holder is closed. * NOTE Damage to the rear armrest due to body weight When folded out, the rear armrest can be damaged by body weight. # Do not sit or support yourself on the rear seat armrest. * NOTE Damage to the handle in the trunk floor If the handle in the trunk is left protruding, the handle may be damaged. # Before closing the trunk lid, detach the handle and press it down closed again. * NOTE Damage to the stowage compart‐ ment under the ashtray due to intense heat The stowage compartment under the ashtray is not heat resistant and could be damaged if you rest a lit cigarette on it. # Make sure that the ashtray is fully engaged. & WARNING Risk of burns from the tail‐ pipe and tailpipe trims The exhaust tailpipe and tailpipe trims can become very hot. If you come into contact with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn yourself. # Always be particularly careful around the tailpipe and the tailpipe trims and supervise children especially closely in this area. # Allow vehicle parts to cool down before touching them. Seats and stowing 107 The driving characteristics of your vehicle are dependent on the distribution of the load within the vehicle. You should bear the following in mind when loading the vehicle: R Never exceed the permissible gross mass or the gross axle weight rating for the vehicle (including occupants). The values are speci‐ fied on the vehicle identification plate on the vehicle's B-pillar. R The load must not protrude above the upper edge of the seat backrests. R Always place the load behind unoccupied seats if possible. R Secure the load using the tie-down eyes and distribute the load evenly. Notes on driving with a roof load R Evenly distribute the roof load, and place heavy objects at the bottom. Also comply with the notes on loading the vehicle (/ page 105). R Drive attentively, and avoid suddenly pulling away, braking and steering as well as rapid cornering. R When transporting roof loads and when the vehicle is fully loaded or fully occupied, select drive programs ; and A. These are designed to focus on stability (/ page 159). Stowage spaces in the vehicle interior Overview of the front storage compartments % For more information on storage compart‐ ments and storage areas, please refer to the Digital Operator's Manual. 1 Storage spaces in the doors 2 Storage and telephone compartment beneath the armrest with multimedia and USB ports as well as storage space, e.g. for an MP3 player 3 Storage compartment in the front center console with cup holders, USB ports and charging module for wireless charging of mobile phones 4 Glove box 108 Seats and stowing % The rubber mat in the storage compartment in front center console 3 can be removed for cleaning with clean, lukewarm water. Observe the notes on caring for the interior (/ page 299). Through-loading feature in the rear bench seat (EASY-PACK Quickfold) Folding the rear seat backrests forward & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when adjusting the seats When you adjust a seat, you may trap your‐ self or a vehicle occupant. # When adjusting a seat, make sure that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat. & WARNING Risk of an accident because the seat backrest is not engaged The seat backrest may fold forwards. There is a risk of the following, in particular: R The vehicle occupant may be pressed against the seat belt. The seat belt can‐ not protect as intended and could cause additional injury. R A child restraint system is no longer prop‐ erly supported or properly positioned and may no longer fulfill its function as inten‐ ded. R The seat backrest cannot restrain objects or goods in the trunk or cargo compart‐ ment. Always ensure that the seat backrest is engaged, especially: R After the seat has been adjusted. R After the cargo compartment enlarge‐ ment has been folded forwards Make sure that the red marking of the lock verifi‐ cation indicator is no longer visible. Otherwise, the seat backrest will not be locked. Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have their seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting properly. Particular attention must be paid to children. Requirements: R The rear seat backrest head restraints are fully inserted. R The rear armrest has been folded up. Folding the outer rear seat backrests forward You can fold the center and right seat backrests forward separately. The left seat backrest can be folded forward only together with the center seat backrest. If you no longer require the folded-down rear seat backrest as a load area, fold the backrest back into place. # Ensure that the center seat backrest is in an upright position and locked to the left seat backrest (/ page 111). Seats and stowing 109 To fold the right seat backrest forward: briefly press right button 1. The right seat backrest will fold forwards. % If you wish to fold only one of the outer seat backrests forwards, fold the right seat back‐ rest forwards. # Folding the center rear seat backrest forward separately If you no longer require the folded-down seat backrest as a loading area, fold the backrest back into place. # # Press the seat belt tongue of seat belt 1 into marked position 2. Vehicles with a memory function: If at least one section of the seat backrest is fol‐ ded forwards, the corresponding front seat will move forwards slightly, if necessary, to avoid a collision. # To fold the left seat backrest forward: briefly press left button 1. The left seat backrest folds forward together with the center seat backrest. If the left seat backrest is not locked with the center seat backrest, this will be shown on the multifunction display. 110 Seats and stowing Folding back the rear seat backrest * NOTE Damage caused by trapping the seat belt when folding back the seat backrest The seat belt could become trapped and thus damaged when the seat backrest is folded back. # Make sure that the seat belt is not trap‐ ped when folding back the seat back‐ rest. # # Press release catch 3. Fold seat backrest 2 forwards. # # Move the driver's or front passenger seat for‐ wards, if necessary. Swing seat backrest 1 back until it engages. If the seat backrest is not engaged and locked in place, red lock verification indicator 2 will be visible. Seats and stowing 111 Locking and releasing the release catch of the center rear seat backrest You can lock the center seat backrest release catch if you want to secure the trunk against unauthorized access. The center seat backrest can then be folded forwards only together with the left seat backrest. Overview of the tie-down eyes Observe the notes on loading the vehicle (/ page 105). Overview of bag hooks & WARNING Risk of injury when using bag hooks with heavy objects The bag hooks cannot restrain heavy objects or items of luggage. Objects or items of luggage may be flung around and hit vehicle occupants. # Only hang light objects on the bag hooks. # Never hang hard, sharp-edged or fragile objects on the bag hooks. Observe the notes on loading the vehicle (/ page 105). Subject the bag hooks to a maximum load of 6.6 lbs (3 kg) and do not attach any goods to them. 1 Tie-down eyes # To lock or unlock: slide catch 1 upwards or downwards. % Four tie-down eyes are available only in vehi‐ cles equipped with the through-loading fea‐ ture in the rear bench seat (EASY-PACK Quickfold). 112 Seats and stowing Roof luggage rack Attaching a roof luggage rack & WARNING Risk of accident due to exceeding the maximum roof load The vehicle center of gravity and the usual driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking characteristics alter. If you exceed the maximum roof load, the driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, will be greatly impaired. # Never exceed the maximum roof load and adjust your driving style. 1 Bag hook You will find information on the maximum roof load in the "Technical data" section. * NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to not observing the maximum permitted head‐ room clearance If the vehicle height is greater than the maxi‐ mum permitted headroom clearance, the roof and other parts of the vehicle may be damaged. # Observe the signposted headroom clearance. # If the vehicle height is greater than the permitted headroom clearance, do not enter. # Observe the changed vehicle height with add-on roof equipment. * NOTE Vehicle damage from nonapproved roof luggage racks The vehicle could be damaged by roof lug‐ gage racks that have not been tested and approved for Mercedes-Benz. # Use only roof luggage racks tested and approved for Mercedes-Benz. # Depending on the vehicle equipment, ensure that the sliding sunroof can be fully raised when the roof luggage rack is installed. Seats and stowing 113 # # Depending on the vehicle equipment, ensure that the trunk lid can be fully opened when the roof luggage rack is installed. Position the load on the roof luggage rack in such a way that the vehicle will not sustain damage even when it is in motion. * NOTE Damage to the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel due to nonapproved roof luggage racks The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel may be damaged by the roof luggage rack if you attempt to open it when using a roof luggage rack not tested and approved for Mercedes-Benz. # When a roof luggage rack is installed, open the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel only if this has been tested and approved for MercedesBenz. The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel may be raised to allow ventilation of the vehicle interior. * NOTE Damage to the sliding sunroof when a roof luggage rack is installed The sliding sunroof may be damaged by the roof luggage rack if you attempt to open it when a roof luggage rack is installed. # Do not open the sliding sunroof when a roof luggage rack is installed. In order to allow ventilation of the vehicle interior, you can raise the sliding sunroof. * NOTE Damage to the covers The covers may be damaged and scratched when being opened. # Do not use metallic or hard objects. # Carefully fold covers 1 upwards in the direction of the arrow. 114 Seats and stowing # # # Using the 115 V socket in the rear passenger compartment Secure the roof luggage rack to the fastening points beneath covers 1. Comply with the installation instructions of the roof luggage rack manufacturer. Secure the load on the roof luggage rack. & DANGER Risk of fatal injuries due to a damaged connecting cable or a damaged socket Sockets Using the 12 V socket Requirements: R Only connect devices up to a maximum of 180 W (15 A). Depending on the vehicle equipment, the vehicle has the following 12 V sockets: R In the front passenger footwell R In the electronics compartment in the center console of the rear passenger compartment Example: 12 V socket in the front passenger footwell # # Fold up socket cap 1. Insert the plug of the device. You could receive an electric shock if the connecting cable or the 115 V power socket is pulled out of the trim or is damaged or wet. # Use only connecting cables that are dry and free of damage. # When the vehicle is switched off, make sure that the 115 V power socket is dry. # Immediately have the 115 V power socket checked or replaced at a quali‐ fied specialized workshop if it is dam‐ aged or has been pulled out of the trim. # Never plug the connecting cable into a 115 V power socket that is damaged or has been pulled out of the trim. Seats and stowing 115 USB port in the rear passenger compartment & DANGER Risk of death due to using the socket incorrectly Depending on its equipment, the vehicle has the following USB ports: R In the storage compartment in the front cen‐ ter console R In the storage compartment under the front armrest R In the electronics compartment in the center console of the rear passenger compartment In particular, you could receive an electric shock: R If you touch the inside of the socket R If you insert unsuitable devices or objects into the socket # # Do not touch the inside of the socket. Only connect suitable devices to the socket. Make sure that no liquids get into the 115 V socket. When the 115 V socket is not in use, keep the socket flap closed. Requirements: R Only connect devices with a suitable plug which conforms to the standards specific to the country you are in. R Only connect devices up to a maximum of 150 W. R Do not use multiple socket outlets. # # Open socket flap 3. Insert the plug of the device into 115 V socket 1. When the on-board electrical system voltage is sufficient, indicator lamp 2 lights up. Depending on the vehicle equipment, the vehicle has either a single or a double USB port in the storage compartment in the front center console and beneath the front armrest. You can charge a USB device, such as a mobile phone, at the USB ports using a suitable charg‐ ing cable. Depending on the vehicle equipment, devices can be charged with up to 20 V (5 A) when the vehicle is switched on. 116 Seats and stowing Wireless charging of the mobile phone and connection with the exterior antenna Notes on wirelessly charging the mobile phone & WARNING Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addi‐ tion, cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone receptacles cannot always retain all objects within. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. # Always stow objects so that they can‐ not be thrown around in such situa‐ tions. # Always make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage spaces, parcel nets or stowage nets. # # Close the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey. Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in the trunk/cargo compart‐ ment. Observe the notes on loading the vehicle. & WARNING Risk of fire from placing objects in the mobile phone storage compartment Placing other objects in the mobile phone storage compartment could constitute a fire hazard. # Apart from a mobile phone, do not place any other objects in the mobile phone storage compartment, especially those made of metal. * NOTE Damage to objects caused by placing them in the mobile phone stor‐ age compartment If objects are placed in the mobile phone storage compartment, these may be dam‐ aged by electromagnetic fields. # Do not place credit cards, storage media, ski passes or other objects sen‐ sitive to electromagnetic fields in the mobile phone storage compartment. * NOTE Damage to the mobile phone stowage compartment caused by liquids If liquids enter the mobile phone stowage compartment, the compartment may be damaged. # Ensure that no liquids enter the mobile phone stowage compartment. Always observe the notes for persons with elec‐ tronic medical aids (/ page 25). Seats and stowing 117 R R R R R R Depending on the vehicle equipment, the mobile phone is connected to the vehicle's exterior antenna via the charging module. The charging function and wireless connec‐ tion of the mobile phone to the vehicle's exterior antenna are only available if the vehi‐ cle is switched on. Small mobile phones may not be able to be charged in every position of the mobile phone storage compartment. Large mobile phones which do not rest flat in the mobile phone storage compartment may not be able to be charged or connected with the vehicle's exterior antenna. The mobile phone may heat up during the charging process. This may also depend on the applications (apps) currently open in the background. To ensure more efficient charging and con‐ nection with the vehicle's exterior antenna, remove the protective cover from the mobile phone. Protective covers which are neces‐ sary for wireless charging are an exception. Wirelessly charging a mobile phone in the front Requirements: R The mobile phone is suitable for wireless charging. A list of compatible mobile phones can be found at: https://www.mercedes-benzmobile.com/ When a message is shown in the multimedia sys‐ tem, the mobile phone is being charged. In addi‐ tion, malfunctions during the mobile phone's charging process are shown in the multimedia system display. % The mat can be removed for cleaning, e.g. using clean, lukewarm water. Installing/removing the floor mats & WARNING Risk of accident due to objects in the driver's footwell Wirelessly charging a mobile phone in the front storage compartment # Place the mobile phone as close to the cen‐ ter of mat 1 as possible with the display facing upwards. Objects in the driver's footwell may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardizes the operating and road safety of the vehicle. # Stow all objects in the vehicle securely so that they cannot get into the driver's footwell. # Always install the floor mats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure 118 Seats and stowing # that there is always sufficient room for the pedals. Do not use loose floor mats and do not place floor mats on top of one another. Installing floor mats # # Press studs 1 onto holders 2. Adjust the corresponding seat. Removing floor mats Slide the corresponding seat backwards. # Pull the floor mat off holders 2. # Remove the floor mat. # Inserting or removing floor mats on the sec‐ ond row of seats # To insert: push the corresponding seat on the first row of seats forwards and lay the floor mat in the rear footwell such that it fits correctly. # To remove: push the corresponding seat on the first row of seats forwards and remove the floor mat from the rear footwell. # Slide the corresponding seat backwards and lay the floor mat in the footwell. Light and visibility 119 Exterior lighting Information about lighting systems and your responsibility Light switch Operating the light switch 5 L Low beam/high beam 6 R Switches the rear fog light on/off When low beam is activated, the T indicator lamp for the parking lights will be deactivated and replaced by the L low-beam indicator lamp. # Always park your vehicle safely using suffi‐ cient lighting, in accordance with the rele‐ vant legal stipulations. The various lighting systems of the vehicle are only aids. The driver of the vehicle is responsible for correct vehicle illumination in accordance with the prevailing light and visibility conditions, legal requirements and traffic situation. * NOTE Battery discharging by operating the standing lights Operating the standing lights over a period of hours puts a strain on the battery. # Where possible, switch on the right X or left W parking light. 1 2 3 4 W Left-hand standing lights X Right-hand standing lights T Parking lights and license plate lamp à Automatic driving lights (preferred light switch position) If the battery is insufficiently charged, the stand‐ ing lights or parking lights will be switched off automatically to facilitate the next engine start. 120 Light and visibility The exterior lighting (except standing and park‐ ing lights) will switch off automatically when the driver's door is opened. R Observe the notes on surround lighting (/ page 129). switched on automatically depending on the ambient light. Operating the combination switch for the lights & WARNING Risk of accident when the low beam is switched off in poor visibility When the light switch is set to Ã, the low beam may not be switched on automatically if there is fog, snow or other causes of poor visibility such as spray. # In such cases, turn the light switch to L. Switching on accident scene lighting # Switch off the vehicle. # Switch on the hazard warning light (/ page 121). # Turn the light switch from the à position to the L position. The low beam will be switched on despite the vehicle being switched off. The accident scene lighting will be switched off if: R You switch off the hazard warning lights. R You turn the light switch back to Ã. R The battery is insufficiently charged. The automatic driving lights are only an aid. You are responsible for vehicle lighting. Automatic driving lights function When the vehicle is switched on, the parking lamps, low beam and daytime running lamps are Please observe the country-specific laws on the use of rear fog lamps. Switching the rear fog lights on or off Requirements: R The light switch is in the L or à posi‐ tion. # Press the R button. 1 2 3 4 High beam Turn signal light, right High-beam flasher Turn signal light, left # Use the combination switch to activate the desired function. Light and visibility 121 Switching on high beam # Turn the light switch to the L or à position. # Push the combination switch in the direction of arrow 1. When the high beam is activated, the L indicator lamp for low beam will be deactiva‐ ted and replaced by the K indicator lamp for high beam. Switching off high beam Push the combination switch in the direction of arrow 1 or pull it in the direction of arrow 3. # # To indicate permanently: push the combi‐ nation switch beyond the point of resistance in the direction of arrow 2 or 4. Vehicles with Active Lane Change Assist: R A turn signal indicator activated by the driver may continue to operate for the duration of the lane change. R If the driver indicated directly beforehand but a lane change was not immediately possible, the turn signal indicator may activate automatically. Activating/deactivating the hazard warning lights High-beam flasher Pull the combination switch in the direction of arrow 3. # Turn signal light To indicate briefly: push the combination switch briefly to the point of resistance in the direction of arrow 2 or 4. The corresponding turn signal light will flash three times. # Press button 1. The hazard warning lights will switch on auto‐ matically if: R The airbag has been deployed. # 122 Light and visibility Adaptive functions of the DIGITAL LIGHT Intelligent Light System function In this system, the headlamps adapt to the driv‐ ing and weather situation. It also provides exten‐ ded functions for improved illumination of the road. % The availability of the functions is dependent on the country. The system comprises the following functions: R Active headlamps (/ page 122) R Cornering light (/ page 122) R Highway mode (/ page 123) R Enhanced fog light function (/ page 123) R Bad weather light (/ page 123) R City lighting (/ page 123) R Topographical compensation (vehicles with DIGITAL LIGHT) (/ page 123) The system is active only when it is dark. Active headlamps function R R The headlamps follow the steering move‐ ments. Relevant areas are better illuminated during a journey. The functions are active when the low beam is switched on. Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the course of the lane in which you are driving will also be evaluated and the active headlamps function will adjust the light in advance. Cornering light function The cornering light improves the illumination of the road over a wide angle in the turning direc‐ tion, enabling better visibility on tight curves, for example. It can be activated only when the low beam is switched on. The function is active in the following cases: R At speeds below 25 mph (40 km/h) when the turn signal light is switched on or the steering wheel is turned R At speeds between 25 mph (40 km/h) and 43 mph (70 km/h) and when the steering wheel is turned Light and visibility 123 Roundabout and intersection function: the cornering light will be activated on both sides based on an evaluation of the vehicle's current navigation position. It will remain active until after the vehicle has left the roundabout or the intersection. Highway mode function (Canada) Highway mode increases the range and bright‐ ness of the cone of light, enabling better visibil‐ ity. R R The multifunction camera The navigation system The function is not active in the following cases: At speeds below 50 mph (80 km/h) R Enhanced fog light function (Canada) The enhanced fog light function reduces selfblinding and improves the illumination of the edge of the road. The function is automatically deactivated under the following conditions: R When speeds greater than 62 mph (100 km/h) are reached. R When the rear fog light is switched off. Function of the bad weather light (Canada) The bad weather light reduces reflections in rainy conditions by dimming individual areas of the headlamps. The driver and other road users are blinded less as a result. The city lighting function (Canada) City lighting improves the illumination of road‐ sides in urban areas using a broad distribution of light. The function is active in the following cases: R At low speeds R In illuminated parts of urban areas The function will be active if a highway journey is detected by means of: R The vehicle's speed The function is automatically activated under the following conditions: R At speeds below 43 mph (70 km/h) and when the rear fog light is switched on. Function of the topographical compensation Based on map data, the lighting system responds pre-emptively to different road heights. This means that the headlamp range remains vir‐ 124 Light and visibility tually constant when you are driving on uphill or downhill gradients. % Only vehicles with a multimedia system with navigation have this function. Assistance functions of the DIGITAL LIGHT DIGITAL LIGHT visually expands on the driver assistance systems by projecting the assistant displays in front of the vehicle while it is in motion. DIGITAL LIGHT can therefore help the driver in critical situations. % The availability of the functions is dependent on the country. The system is active in the following cases: R The light switch is in the à position. R The high beam is switched on. % Depending on the country in which you are currently driving, certain functions may be disabled due to different legal requirements, even if they are enabled in the multimedia system. When a border is crossed, the vehi‐ cle will automatically adapt to the valid requirements. Spotlight Notes The spotlight function runs in the background and flashes the headlamps at detected persons within the lane markings in four short bursts. The driver is also made aware of the position of the person by a symbol projection. The function is active under the following condi‐ tions: R You are driving outside illuminated areas. R The system detects a lane marking. If Traffic Sign Assist detects a roadworks zone, the system will provide support as follows: R A corresponding symbol will be projected onto the road when you enter a roadworks zone. Observe the system limits of Traffic Sign Assist (/ page 205). Light and visibility 125 Collision warning Lane change warning Lane keeping and blind spot warning If you fall below the safe distance at speeds of at least 19 mph (30 km/h), a collision warning symbol will be projected onto the road. Observe the system limitations of Active Brake Assist (/ page 199). During assisted lane changes at speeds of at least 19 mph (30 km/h), the course of the lane change will be brightened. This enables you to identify possible dangers in the new lane at an early stage. Observe the system limitations of Active Lane Change Assist (/ page 197). At speeds of at least 19 mph (30 km/h), a trian‐ gle that indicates a lane correction and its direc‐ tion will be projected onto the road in the follow‐ ing cases: R The lane is left unintentionally. Observe the system limitations of Active Lane Keeping Assist (/ page 214). R You switch on the turn signal light while an object or obstacle is in your blind spot. Observe the system limitations of Active Blind Spot Assist (/ page 211). 126 Light and visibility Switching the Intelligent Light System on/off Requirements: R The vehicle is switched on. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Light 5 DIGITAL LIGHT # Switch Dynamic Low Beam on or off. Activating or deactivating enhanced assis‐ tance functions % The availability of the functions is dependent on the country. # Select Supporting Projections. # Activate or deactivate the desired projection. Adaptive Highbeam Assist Adaptive Highbeam Assist function & WARNING Risk of accident despite Adaptive Highbeam Assist Adaptive Highbeam Assist does not react to: R Road users without lights, e.g. pedes‐ trians R Road users with poor lighting, e.g. cyclists R Road users whose lighting is obstructed, e.g. by a barrier On very rare occasions, Adaptive Highbeam Assist may fail to recognize other road users with their own lighting, or may recognize them too late. In these, or in similar situations, the auto‐ matic high beam will not be deactivated or will be activated despite the presence of other road users. # Always observe the road and traffic conditions carefully and switch off the high beam in good time. Adaptive Highbeam Assist cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. Detection may be restricted in the following cases: R In poor visibility, e.g. fog, heavy rain or snow R If there is dirt on the sensors or the sensors are obscured Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid. You are responsible for adjusting the vehicle's lighting to the prevailing light, visibility and traffic condi‐ tions. Light and visibility 127 The high beam will switch off automatically in the following cases: R At speeds below 16 mph (25 km/h) R If other road users are detected R If street lighting is sufficient % The system's optical sensor is located behind the windshield near the overhead control panel. Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist on/off Adaptive Highbeam Assist automatically switches between the following types of light: R Low beam R High beam At speeds greater than 19 mph (30 km/h): R If no other road users are detected, the high beam will switch on automatically. Switching on # Turn the light switch to the à position. # Switch on the high beam using the combina‐ tion switch. If Adaptive Highbeam Assist is activated, the _ indicator lamp will light up on the driver display. Switching off Switch off the high beam using the combina‐ tion switch. # Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus function (Canada) & WARNING Risk of accident despite Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus does not react to: R Road users without lights, e.g. pedes‐ trians R Road users with poor lighting, e.g. cyclists R Road users whose lighting is obstructed, e.g. by a barrier On very rare occasions, Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus may fail to recognize other road users with their own lighting, or may recog‐ nize them too late. In these, or in similar situations, the auto‐ matic high beam will not be deactivated or will be activated despite the presence of other road users. 128 Light and visibility # ULTRA RANGE Highbeam increases the bright‐ ness of the cone of light to the legally permitted maximum. Partial high beam does not include other road users in the high beam area. It does not blind them but enables full high beam illumination for the driver apart from the excluded vehicles. At speeds below 16 mph (25 km/h) or when there is sufficient street lighting: R The partial high beam and the high beam will be switched off automatically. Always observe the road and traffic conditions carefully and switch off the high beam in good time. Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. Detection may be restricted in the following cases: R In poor visibility, e.g. fog, heavy rain or snow R if there is dirt on the sensors or the sensors are obscured Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is only an aid. You are responsible for adjusting the vehicle's lighting to the prevailing light, visibility and traf‐ fic conditions. At speeds greater than 19 mph (30 km/h): If no other road users are detected, the high beam will switch on automatically. R If other road users are detected, the partial high beam will switch on automatically. R Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus automatically switches between the following types of light: R Low beam R Partial high beam R High beam R ULTRA RANGE Highbeam At speeds above 25 mph (40 km/h): If no other road users are detected on a straight road, ULTRA RANGE Highbeam will be switched on automatically. R If other road users are detected, the partial high beam will switch on automatically. R Light and visibility 129 R If highly reflective signs are detected, ULTRA RANGE Highbeam will be switched off auto‐ matically. % The system's optical sensor is located behind the windshield near the overhead control panel. Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus on/off (Canada) Switching on # Turn the light switch to the à position. # Switch on the high beam using the combina‐ tion switch. If Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is activated, the _ indicator lamp will light up on the driver display. When partial high beam or high beam is active, the corresponding blue indicator lamp will also light up. Switching off Switch off the high beam using the combina‐ tion switch. # Switching the daytime running lights on/off Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Light 5 DIGITAL LIGHT # Switch the Daytime Running Lights on or off. % In vehicles without DIGITAL LIGHT head‐ lamps, the daytime running lights can be switched on or off in the Driving Lights menu. % The availability of the function is dependent on the country. Setting the exterior lighting switch-off delay time Requirements: R The light switch is in the à position. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Light 5 Interior/exterior lighting 5 External Lighting Delay # Set the switch-off delay time. When the vehicle's engine is switched off, the exterior lighting will be activated for the set time. Activating/deactivating the locator lighting Requirements: R The light switch is in the à position. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Light 5 Interior/Exterior Lighting # Activate or deactivate Locator Lighting. When the function is activated, the exterior light‐ ing will light up for 40 seconds after the vehicle is unlocked. When you start the vehicle, the locator lighting is switched off and automatic driving lights are activated. 130 Light and visibility Interior lighting Adjusting the interior lighting Operating unit inside the grab handle (rear passenger compartment) Adjusting the ambient lighting Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Ambient Lighting 5 Comfort Setting the color # Select Color. # Select Monochrome or Multi-color. # Set the desired color or color combination. 1 c Switches the front interior lighting on/off 2 u Switches the rear interior lighting on/off 3 | Switches automatic interior lighting control on/off # To switch reading lamps on/off: hold your hand under the respective reading lamp 4 or 5. 1 p Rear passenger compartment reading lamp # To switch on or off: press the 1 button. Adjusting the brightness # Select Brightness. # Adjust the brightness. % Depending on the ambient light, the ambient lighting will automatically switch between day and night modes. Activating the brightness for zones # Select Brightness. # Switch off Link Zones . The Direct, Indirect and Accents zones can be set separately. Light and visibility 131 Activating effects & WARNING Risk of an accident despite activated effects of ambient lighting and active ambient lighting To use the Warning Assistance effects, the respective functions must be activated in the driver assist menu. # Make sure that the functions and assists are switched on. % Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognize dangers (/ page 176). # Select Effects. # Activate the desired effect. % Depending on the vehicle equipment, differ‐ ent effects are available. Operating feedback effects R Climate: If changes are made to the tempera‐ ture setting in the vehicle, the color of the ambient lighting will change briefly. R Welcome Message: if the locator lighting or the exterior switch-off delay time is activa‐ ted, a high-resolution greeting or farewell scene will be played back for a short period of time when the vehicle is opened or locked. You can choose between the Digital Rain and the Flowing Lines sequences. More information on locator lighting (/ page 129) More information on the exterior switch-off delay time (/ page 129) Warning assistance effects: R Warning When Exiting: If an object is detec‐ ted in the blind spot while you are getting out of the vehicle, the ambient lighting in the affected door will flash red. Further information on the exit warning (/ page 211). R Speed Limit Assist: In vehicles with active ambient lighting, the ambient lighting behind the steering wheel will flash red when the permissible speed is exceeded. R Further information on Speed Limit Assist: (/ page 190). Parking Assist PARKTRONIC: The information from the parking sensors during parking maneuvers is displayed in color. Further information on Parking Assist PARKTRONIC: (/ page 225) Greeting R When you get into the vehicle, a special color animation will play. Multi-color Animation R The chosen color combination will change at predefined intervals. 132 Light and visibility Switching the interior lighting switch-off delay time on/off Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Light 5 Interior/exterior lighting 5 Interior Lighting Delay # Switch Interior Lighting Delay on or off. When this function is active, the interior light‐ ing will light up for a short time after the vehicle is locked. Windshield wiper and windshield washer system Switching the windshield wipers on/off 4 ° Continuous wiping, slow 5 ¯ Continuous wiping, fast Turn the combination switch to the corre‐ sponding position 1 - 5. # Single wipe/washing: push the button on the combination switch in the direction of arrow 1. R í Single wipe R î Wiping with washer fluid % Observe the notes on washing the vehicle in a car wash (/ page 294). # Replacing the windshield wiper blades & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the windshield wipers are switched on while wiper blades are being replaced 1 g Windshield wipers off 2 Ä Automatic wiping, normal 3 Å Automatic wiping, frequent If the windshield wipers begin to move while you are changing the wiper blades, you can be trapped by the wiper arm. Light and visibility 133 # Installing the wiper blades Always switch off the windshield wipers and vehicle before changing the wiper blades. Moving the wiper arms into the replacement position # Switch the vehicle on and then off again immediately. # Within around 15 seconds, press and hold the î button on the combination switch for approximately three seconds (/ page 132). The wiper arms will move into the replace‐ ment position. Removing the wiper blades Fold the wiper arms away from the wind‐ shield. # # # # Hold the wiper arm with one hand. With the other hand, turn the wiper blade away from the wiper arm in the direction of arrow 1 as far as it will go. Press release knob 2. Remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm in the direction of arrow 3. # # # Push the new wiper blade onto the wiper arm in the direction of arrow 1 until release knob 2 engages. Make sure that the wiper blade is seated cor‐ rectly. Fold the wiper arms back onto the wind‐ shield. 134 Light and visibility Switch on the vehicle. Press the î button on the combination switch. The wiper arms will return to the original position. # Switch off the vehicle. % Check the condition of the wiper blades reg‐ ularly and replace them in the event of visi‐ ble damage or ongoing smearing. # Mirrors Operating the outside mirrors # & WARNING Risk of accident due to adjusting the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular: R If you adjust the driver's seat, the head restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion R If you fasten your seat belt while the vehi‐ cle is in motion Maintenance display There is a maintenance display at the tip of the newly mounted wiper blade. # Remove protective film 1 from the mainte‐ nance display. When the color of the maintenance display changes from black to yellow, the wiper blades should be replaced. # Before starting the vehicle: in particular, adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your seat belt. Light and visibility 135 & WARNING Risk of accident due to mis‐ judgment of distance when using the front-passenger mirror Adjusting the outside mirrors The outside mirror on the front passenger side reflects objects on a smaller scale. The objects in view are in fact closer than they appear. # Therefore, always look over your shoul‐ der to check the actual distance between you and the road users travel‐ ing behind you. % If the battery has been disconnected or has discharged, the outside mirrors must be moved briefly using button 3. Only then will the automatic mirror folding function work properly. Engaging the outside mirrors If an outside mirror has been forcibly disen‐ gaged, proceed as follows. # Vehicles without electrically folding outside mirrors: manually move the outside mirror into the correct position. # Vehicles with electrically folding outside mir‐ rors: press and hold button 3. You will hear a click and the mirror will audi‐ bly engage. The outside mirror will now be set to the correct position. # # Use button 2 or 4 to select the desired mirror. Use button 1 to adjust the position of the selected mirror. Folding the outside mirrors in/out (vehicles with electrically folding outside mirrors) # Briefly press button 3. 136 Light and visibility Automatic anti-glare mirrors function & WARNING Risk of acid burns and poi‐ soning due to the anti-glare mirror elec‐ trolyte Electrolyte may escape if the glass in an automatic anti-glare mirror breaks. The electrolyte is hazardous to health and causes irritation. It must not come into con‐ tact with your skin, eyes, respiratory organs or clothing or be swallowed. # If you come into contact with electro‐ lyte, observe the following: R Immediately rinse the electrolyte from your skin with water and seek medical attention. R If electrolyte comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water and seek medical attention. R If the electrolyte is swallowed, immediately rinse your mouth out thoroughly. Do not induce vomiting. Seek medical attention immediately. R R Immediately change out of clothing which has been contaminated with electrolyte. If an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical attention immediately. The inside rearview mirror and the outside mir‐ ror on the driver's side will automatically go into anti-glare mode if light from a headlamp hits the sensor on the inside rearview mirror. System limits The system will not go into anti-glare mode if: R The vehicle is switched off. R Reverse gear is engaged. R The interior lighting is switched on. Front-passenger outside mirror parking posi‐ tion function The parking position makes parking easier. The front-passenger outside mirror will swivel downwards in the direction of the rear wheel on the front passenger's side when: R The parking position is stored (/ page 137). R The front-passenger mirror is selected. R Reverse gear is engaged. The front-passenger outside mirror will move back to its original position when: R You shift the transmission to another trans‐ mission position. R You are traveling at a speed greater than 9 mph (15 km/h). R You press the button for the outside mirror on the driver's side. Light and visibility 137 Storing the parking position of the frontpassenger outside mirror using reverse gear Storing Calling up # Select the front-passenger outside mirror using button 2. # Engage reverse gear. The front-passenger outside mirror will move into the stored parking position. Area permeable to radio waves on the windshield Activating/deactivating the automatic mirror folding function Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Opening/closing # Switch Automatic Mirror Folding on or off. # # # Select the front-passenger outside mirror using button 2. Engage reverse gear. Move the front-passenger outside mirror into the desired parking position using button 1. Radio-controlled equipment, such as toll sys‐ tems, can be mounted only on areas 1 of the windshield that are permeable to radio waves. Areas permeable to radio waves 1 are best visi‐ ble from outside the vehicle when the windshield is illuminated with an external light source. Note this position for vehicles with: R Windshield heating 138 Climate control 5 ¤ Switches the rear window heater Overview of climate control systems Notes on climate control on/off 6 r Reduces the temperature 7 Depending on vehicle equipment and set‐ An interior air filter in combination with the pre‐ filter in the engine compartment must always be used so that the air conditioning system, pollu‐ tion level monitoring and the air filtration work correctly. Use filters recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Always have main‐ tenance work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Please note that your vehicle may not be equip‐ ped with all functions described here. Overview of the climate bar for automatic climate control (dual-zone) The indicator lamps indicate that the corre‐ sponding function is activated. 8 9 A B 1 s Increases the temperature 2 Upper display area of the climate bar with the examples of j switching climate con‐ trol on/off (/ page 140) and 0 synchro‐ nization function (/ page 142) 3 ¬ Defrosts the windshield 4 ¿ Activates/deactivates the A/C func‐ tion (/ page 141) C tings: temperature display, defrost function display, display for pre-entry climate control or auxiliary heating g Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (/ page 143) ± Calls up the air conditioning menu (/ page 141) à Sets climate control to automatic mode (/ page 141) J Increases the airflow or switches on climate control (/ page 140) I Reduces the airflow or switches off cli‐ mate control(/ page 140) % The availability of individual functions is country and equipment-dependent. Overview of the climate bar for 3-zone auto‐ matic climate control Climate control 139 The indicator lamps indicate that the corre‐ sponding function is activated. 2 Upper display area of the climate bar with 3 4 5 6 7 Front climate bar on the central display (example) 1 s Increases the temperature 8 9 A the examples of j switching off climate control (/ page 140), g switching airrecirculation mode on/off (/ page 143) and 0 synchroniza‐ tion function (/ page 142) ¬ Defrosts the windshield ¿ Activates/deactivates the A/C func‐ tion (/ page 141) ¤ Switches the rear window heater on/off Depending on vehicle equipment and set‐ tings: temperature display, defrost function display, airflow, pre-entry climate control or auxiliary heating J Increases the airflow or switches on climate control (/ page 140) r Reduces the temperature à Sets climate control to automatic mode, right (/ page 141) ± Calls up the air conditioning menu (/ page 141) B à Sets climate control to automatic mode, left (/ page 141) C I Reduces the airflow or switches off cli‐ mate control(/ page 140) % The climate bar is visible even when the vehicle is parked or the air conditioning is switched off (/ page 140). % The availability of individual functions is country and equipment-dependent. 140 Climate control Overview of the rear operating unit 3 Sets the airflow in the rear passenger com‐ 4 5 6 7 8 9 Example: USA 1 Sets air distribution to the center and side air vents in the rear passenger compart‐ ment, left 2 Sets the temperature in the rear passenger compartment, left A B C partment, left, or switches climate control on/off (/ page 141) Switches climate control on/off (/ page 141) Sets the airflow in the rear passenger com‐ partment, right, or switches climate control on/off (/ page 141) Sets the temperature in the rear passenger compartment, right Sets air distribution to the center and side air vents in the rear passenger compart‐ ment, right Sets rear climate control to automatic mode, right Sets the air distribution to the right rear foot‐ well vents Synchronization is activated (/ page 142) Sets the air distribution to the rear left foot‐ well vents Sets rear climate control to automatic mode, left The settings for the second row of seats can be configured via the rear operating unit or the mul‐ timedia system (/ page 142) depending on the vehicle's equipment. Operating the climate control system Switching climate control on/off Switching on climate control Set the airflow to level 1 or higher via J on the climate bar on the central display or # Press Ã, s, r or ±. # Switching off climate control Set the airflow to level 0 via I on the cli‐ mate bar on the central display or # Press j. If climate control is switched off, the windows may fog up more quickly. Switch climate control off only briefly. # Climate control 141 % If you switch off climate control by pressing j, fragrancing, if enabled, will also be switched off automatically. Switching climate control on/off via the rear operating unit Switching on # Press button 4. or # Set the airflow to level 1 or higher using but‐ tons 3 and 5. or # Press buttons 2, 6, 8 or C. Switching off # Press button 4. or # Set the airflow to level 0 using buttons 3 and 5. % If rear climate control is switched off via but‐ ton 4, OFF will be shown on the rear dis‐ play. Calling up the air conditioning menu via the climate line or climate control panel Activating/deactivating the A/C function via the multimedia system The air conditioning menu can be called up via the air conditioning line. The air conditioning line is always shown on the lower edge of the central display. # Select the Climate Menu entry in the air con‐ ditioning line. The First Row of Seats menu is opened. Multimedia system: 4 Climate Menu 5 First Row of Seats Depending on the external conditions, improved cooling and dehumidification of the interior air are supported when the A/C function is activa‐ ted. If it is not possible to operate the A/C func‐ tion on the climate bar on the central display, this function can be switched on and off on the climate menu on the central display. # Select A/C (A/C). Defrosting the windshield via the climate bar Switching on # Press ¬ on the climate bar on the central display. Switching off # To switch off: press ¬, à or j on the climate bar on the central display or # Set the airflow to 0. % When the defrost function is activated, some functions (e.g. the temperature setting) are automatically deactivated. Setting climate control to automatic In automatic mode, the set vehicle interior tem‐ perature is controlled automatically and main‐ tained at a constant level by the air supply. # Press AUTO on the climate bar on the central display. % You can increase or reduce the airflow by pressing K on the climate bar on the mul‐ timedia system. 142 Climate control # To switch to manual operation: switch off automatic mode or adjust an aspect of air distribution, e.g. P. cally deactivated. When the air conditioning system is switched off, the buttons remain operable and the last setting is saved. Setting air distribution using the multimedia system Setting the rear climate control using the multimedia system Multimedia system: 4 Climate Menu # Select First Row of Seats or Second Row of Seats. # To set the air distribution: select ¯, P or O. # Set the airflow. % When the air conditioning system is switched on, at least one zone is always active. However, several air distribution options can be selected at the same time, for example to set the climate control for the interior and the footwells simultaneously. The windshield air conditioning ¯ can only be selected for the first row of seats. When automatic mode is active, the buttons for setting the air distribution are automati‐ Multimedia system: 4 Climate Menu Setting the temperature # Select Second Row of Seats. # Set the temperature. Setting the airflow # Select Second Row of Seats. # Set the air flow with s or r. Controlling the rear climate control automat‐ ically # Select AUTO. % When the defrost function is activated, some functions (e.g. the temperature setting) are automatically deactivated. To deactivate the defrost function, either press ¬, à or j or set the air volume to level 0 (/ page 141). Deactivating rear climate control Select REAR OFF. # Switching the synchronization function on/off via the multimedia system Multimedia system: 4 Climate Menu Climate control can be set centrally using the synchronization function. The driver's settings for temperature, airflow and air distribution will be adopted automatically for all climate zones. # Select First Row of Seats. # Select SYNC (SYNC). Activating/deactivating the climate control synchronization function via the rear operat‐ ing unit The rear climate control can be set centrally using the synchronization function. The tempera‐ Climate control 143 ture and air distribution settings for one side are automatically applied to the other side. # Press button A. Removing condensation from the windows Windows fogged up on the inside # Press à on the climate bar on the central display. # If the windows remain fogged up: press ¬ on the climate bar on the central dis‐ play. Windows fogged up on the outside # Switch on the windshield wipers. # Press à on the climate bar on the central display. Switching air-recirculation mode on/off via the multimedia system Requirements: R The control panel for 3-zone automatic cli‐ mate control is installed. Multimedia system: 4 Climate Menu 5 First Row of Seats # Press g on the upper display area of the climate bar. The interior air will be recirculated. Air-recirculation mode will automatically switch to fresh air mode after a while. % If air-recirculation mode is switched on, the windows may fog up more quickly. Switch on air-recirculation mode only briefly. Switching air-recirculation mode on/off # Press g on the climate bar on the central display. The interior air will be recirculated. Air-recirculation mode automatically switches to fresh air mode after a while. % If air-recirculation mode is switched on, the windows may fog up more quickly. Switch on air-recirculation mode only briefly. Switching residual heat mode on/off via the climate bar Requirements: R The residual heat function is available. R The vehicle is parked. R The coolant temperature is sufficiently high. It is possible to make use of the residual heat from the engine to continue heating or ventilat‐ ing the front compartment of the vehicle for approximately 30 minutes, depending on the temperature set. # To switch on or off: select Residual Heat on the climate bar of the central display. The residual heat function automatically switches off after some time. % If residual engine heat utilization is activa‐ ted, the two buttons for setting the tempera‐ ture and air distribution are automatically deactivated. 144 Climate control Activating/deactivating ionization R Multimedia system: 4 Climate Menu 5 Air Quality Only vehicles with the control panel for auto‐ matic climate control (2-zone) or 3-zone auto‐ matic climate control have this function. Ionization improves the quality of the vehicle's interior air. Ionization of the interior air is odor‐ less. # Select Ionization. % The function can only be performed if the AUTO mode is activated or the air distribu‐ tion is set to the side air vent. The function is restricted if the side air vents on the driver's side are closed. R Fragrance system Activating/deactivating the fragrance sys‐ tem using the multimedia system Requirements: R The THERMATIC (2-zone) or THERMOTRONIC air conditioning control panel is available. Automatic climate control is activated. The glove box is closed. Multimedia system: 4 Climate Menu 5 Air Quality The fragrance system distributes a pleasant fra‐ grance throughout the vehicle interior from a fla‐ con located in the glove box. # Navigate down until the climate control bar is active. # Select Air Freshener. # Activate or deactivate fragrancing. Setting the fragrance system Requirements: R The THERMATIC (2-zone) or THERMOTRONIC air conditioning control panel is available. R The climate control system is switched on. R The glove box is closed. R A flacon is inserted. Multimedia system: 4 Climate Menu 5 Air Quality The fragrance system distributes a pleasant fra‐ grance throughout the vehicle interior from a fla‐ con located in the glove box. # Select Fragrance. # Keep pressing until the desired intensity is reached. Inserting or removing the flacon of the fra‐ grance system & WARNING Risk of injury from liquid per‐ fume If children open the flacon, they could drink the liquid perfume or it could come into con‐ tact with their eyes. # Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle. # Consult a doctor immediately if liquid perfume has been drunk. Climate control 145 # # + If you do not use genuine Mercedes-Benz interior perfumes, observe the manufacturers' safety notices on the perfume packaging. Dispose of the genuine Mercedes-Benz interior perfume flacon when it is empty and do not refill it. If liquid perfume comes into contact with your eyes or skin, rinse your eyes with clean water. If symptoms continue, consult a doctor. ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to improper disposal of full flacons Refillable flacon # Unscrew the cap of the empty flacon. # Fill the flacon with a maximum of 0.5 fl. oz. (15 ml). # Screw the cap back on to the flacon. Full flacons must not be disposed of with household waste. # Full flacons must be taken to a harmful substance collection point. 1 Cap 2 Flacon # # To insert: slide the flacon into the holder as far as it will go. To remove: after opening the glove box, wait for approximately seven seconds and pull out the flacon. Always refill the empty refillable flacon with the same perfume. Observe the separate informa‐ tion sheet with the flacon. Information on the windshield heater & WARNING Risk of burns from touching the windshield when the windshield heater is switched on The windshield can become very hot when the windshield heater is switched on. 146 Climate control The health of persons with limited tempera‐ ture sensitivity or a limited ability to react to high temperatures may be affected or they may even suffer burn-like injuries. # Do not touch the windshield while the windshield heater is switched on. # Allow the windshield to cool down before touching it. The windshield heater will be switched on auto‐ matically if ¬ is activated on the climate bar on the central display. After the vehicle is started, the windshield heater is switched on automatically as required. # # Make sure that all vehicle occupants always maintain a sufficient distance from the air vents. If necessary, direct the airflow to another area of the vehicle interior. To guarantee the flow of fresh air through the air vents into the vehicle interior, comply with the following: R Always keep the vents and ventilation grilles in the vehicle interior clear. R Keep the air inlet free of residue build-up (/ page 294). # # To open or close: hold air vent 1 in the center and turn it to the left (open) or right (closed) as far as it will go. To set the airflow direction: hold air vent 1 in the center and move it up or down or to the left or right. Adjusting the rear air vents Air vents Adjusting the front air vents & WARNING Risk of burns and frostbite due to being too close to the air vents Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air vents. # # To open or close: turn controller 1 to the left or right as far as it will go. To set the airflow direction: hold control‐ ler 1 in the center and move it up or down or to the left or right. Driving and parking 147 Driving Switching on the power supply or the vehicle & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle If children are left unsupervised in the vehi‐ cle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users. R get out and be struck by oncoming traf‐ fic. R operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example. In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: R releasing the parking brake. R changing the transmission position. R starting the vehicle. # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. # # When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Keep the vehicle SmartKey out of reach of children. Requirements: R The SmartKey is in the vehicle and is recog‐ nized. R The brake pedal is not depressed. # To switch on the power supply: press but‐ ton 1 once. You can, for example, activate the windshield wipers. The power supply is switched off again if the fol‐ lowing conditions are met: R You open the driver's door. R You press button 1 twice more. 148 Driving and parking To switch on the vehicle: press button 1 twice. Indicator and warning lamps go on in the driver's display. The vehicle is switched off again if one of the fol‐ lowing conditions is met: R You do not start the vehicle within 15 minutes and the transmission is in posi‐ tion j or the electric parking brake is applied. R You press button 1 once. # Starting the vehicle Starting the vehicle with the start/stop but‐ ton & DANGER Risk of death caused by exhaust gases Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases is hazardous to health and leads to poisoning. # Never leave the engine or, if present, the auxiliary heating running in an enclosed space without sufficient venti‐ lation. & WARNING Risk of fire due to flammable material in the engine compartment or the exhaust system Flammable materials may ignite. # Therefore, check regularly that there are no flammable materials in the engine compartment or on the exhaust system. Requirements: R The SmartKey is in the vehicle and is recog‐ nized. # # # Shift the transmission to position j or i. Depress the brake pedal and press button 1 once. If the vehicle does not start: Switch off nonessential consumers and press button 1 once. If the vehicle still does not start and the Place the Key in the Marked Space See Operator's Manual display message also appears in the driver display: Start the vehi‐ cle with the SmartKey in the marked space (emergency operation mode) (/ page 148). % You can switch off the vehicle while driving. To do this, press button 1 for about three seconds or by pressing button 1 three times within three seconds. Be sure to observe the safety notes under "Driving tips" (/ page 152). Observe any information regarding display mes‐ sages that can be displayed on the driver dis‐ play. # Starting the vehicle with the SmartKey in the marked space (emergency operation mode) If the vehicle does not start and the Place the Key in the Marked Space See Operator's Manual display message appears in the driver display, you can start the vehicle in emergency operation mode. Driving and parking 149 Depress the brake pedal and start the vehi‐ cle using the start/stop button. % You can also switch on the power supply or the vehicle with the start/stop button. Observe any information regarding display mes‐ sages that can be displayed on the driver dis‐ play. # # # # # Make sure that marked space 2 is empty. Remove SmartKey 1 from the key ring. Place SmartKey 1 in marked space 2. The vehicle will start after a short time. When you remove SmartKey 1 from marked space 2, the vehicle can be driven. For fur‐ ther vehicle starts however, SmartKey 1 must be located in marked space 2 during the entire journey. Have SmartKey 1 checked at a qualified specialist workshop. If the vehicle does not start: Leave SmartKey 1 in marked space 2. # Starting the vehicle via Remote Online Serv‐ ices Cooling or heating the vehicle interior before starting the journey Ensure the following before starting the engine: R The legal stipulations in the area where your vehicle is parked allow engine starting via smartphone. R It is safe to start and run the engine where your vehicle is parked. R The fuel tank is sufficiently full. R The starter battery is sufficiently charged. Charging the starter battery before starting the journey You can receive a message on your smartphone when the state of charge of the starter battery is low. You can then start the vehicle with the smartphone to charge the battery. The vehicle is automatically switched off after ten minutes. Ensure the following before starting the vehicle: R The legal stipulations in the area where your vehicle is parked allow engine starting via smartphone. R It is safe to start and run the engine where your vehicle is parked. R The fuel tank is sufficiently full. Starting the vehicle (Remote Online) & WARNING Risk of crushing or entrap‐ ment due to unintentional starting of the engine Limbs could be crushed or trapped if the engine is started unintentionally during service or maintenance work. 150 Driving and parking # Always secure the engine against unin‐ tentional starting before carrying out maintenance or repair work. Requirements: R Park position j is selected. R The anti-theft alarm system is not activated. R The panic alarm is not activated. R The hazard warning light system is switched off. R The hood is closed. R The doors are closed and locked. R The windows and sliding sunroof are closed. # Start the vehicle using the smartphone. After every vehicle start, the engine runs for ten minutes. You can carry out a maximum of two consecu‐ tive starting attempts. You must start the engine with the SmartKey before trying to start the vehi‐ cle again with the smartphone. You can switch off the vehicle at any time as fol‐ lows: R Via the Smartphone app R By pressing the Ü or s button on the SmartKey % Further information can be found in the smartphone app. Securing the engine against starting before carrying out maintenance or repair work: # Switch on the hazard warning light system. or # Unlock the doors. or # Open a side window or the sliding sunroof. Breaking-in notes To preserve the engine during the first 1,000 miles (1,500 km): R Drive at varying road speeds and engine speeds. R R R R R R R Do not drive at speeds greater than 85 mph (140 km/h). Drive the vehicle in drive program A or ;. Shift to the next highest gear at the very lat‐ est when the needle reaches the last third before the red area in the tachometer. Do not shift down manually in order to brake. Avoid overstraining the vehicle, e.g. driving at full throttle. Do not depress the accelerator pedal past the pressure point (kickdown). Only increase the engine speed gradually and accelerate the vehicle to full speed after 1,000 miles (1,500 km). This also applies when the engine or parts of the drivetrain have been replaced. Please also observe the following breaking-in notes: R In certain driving and driving safety systems, the sensors adjust automatically while a cer‐ tain distance is being driven after the vehicle has been delivered or after repairs. Full sys‐ Driving and parking 151 R tem effectiveness is not reached until the end of this teach-in process. Brakepads, brake discs and tires that are either new or have been replaced only ach‐ ieve optimum braking effect and grip after several hundred kilometers of driving. Com‐ pensate for the reduced braking effect by applying greater force to the brake pedal. Notes on optimized acceleration If all necessary requirements and activation con‐ ditions are fulfilled, the best possible accelera‐ tion can be achieved from a standstill. Do not use the optimized acceleration on public roads. Individual wheels could spin and you could lose control of the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and/or accident. Be sure to observe the safety notes and informa‐ tion on ESP® (/ page 179). Pulling away with optimized acceleration & WARNING Risk of skidding and having an accident from wheels spinning When you use optimized acceleration, indi‐ vidual wheels could spin and you could lose control of the vehicle. If ESP® is deactivated, there is a risk of skid‐ ding and accident. # Make sure that no persons or obstacles are in the close vicinity of your vehicle. Requirements: R The vehicle has been broken in (/ page 150). R The vehicle and tires are in good condition. R You are on a high-grip roadway. R The engine and transmission are at normal operating temperature. * NOTE Increased wear due to optimized acceleration When pulling away with optimized accelera‐ tion, all components of the drivetrain are subjected to a very high load. This can lead to increased component wear. # Do not always pull away with optimized acceleration. # # # # # # Engage the h drive position (/ page 163). Move the steering wheel to the straightahead position. Select the sportiest available drive program B or C(/ page 160). Deactivate ESP® (/ page 180). Depress and hold the brake pedal firmly with your left foot. With your right foot, fully depress the accel‐ erator pedal. 152 Driving and parking # # After no more than five seconds, take your left foot quickly off the brake, but keep the accelerator pedal depressed. The vehicle pulls away at maximum accelera‐ tion. Switch on ESP® once the acceleration proce‐ dure is complete. Ending optimized acceleration Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. # Reactivate the ESP®. % After you pull away with optimized accelera‐ tion, components of the drivetrain can become very hot, which means that opti‐ mized acceleration values may be reached again only after a few minutes. # Notes on driving & WARNING Risk of accident due to objects in the driver's footwell Objects in the driver's footwell may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardizes the operating and road safety of the vehicle. # Stow all objects in the vehicle securely so that they cannot get into the driver's footwell. # Always install the floor mats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always sufficient room for the pedals. # Do not use loose floor mats and do not place floor mats on top of one another. & WARNING Risk of accident due to incor‐ rect footwear Incorrect footwear includes, for example: R Shoes with platform soles R Shoes with high heels R Slippers There is a risk of an accident. Always wear suitable footwear so that you can operate the pedals safely. # & WARNING Risk of accident if the vehicle is switched off while driving If you switch off the vehicle while driving, safety functions are restricted or no longer available. This may affect the power steering system and the brake force boosting, for example. You will need to use considerably more force to steer and brake, for example. # Do not switch off the vehicle while driv‐ ing. & DANGER Risk of death caused by exhaust gases Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases is hazardous to health and leads to poisoning. # Never leave the engine or, if present, the auxiliary heating running in an enclosed space without sufficient venti‐ lation. Driving and parking 153 & WARNING Risk of skidding and of an accident due to shifting down on slippery road surfaces If you shift down on slippery road surfaces to increase the engine braking effect, the drive wheels may lose traction. # Do not shift down on slippery road sur‐ faces to increase the engine braking effect. & DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to poi‐ sonous exhaust gases If the tailpipe is blocked or sufficient ventila‐ tion is not possible, poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide may enter the vehi‐ cle. This is the case when the vehicle becomes stuck in snow, for example. # Keep the tailpipe and the area around the vehicle free from snow when the engine or the stationary heater are run‐ ning. # Open a window on the side of the vehi‐ cle facing away from the wind to ensure an adequate supply of fresh air. & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to being under the influence of alco‐ hol and drugs while driving Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs and driving are very dangerous combinations. Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs can affect your reflexes, perceptions and judg‐ ment. The possibility of a serious or even fatal acci‐ dent are greatly increased when you drink or take drugs and drive. # Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow anyone to drive who has been drinking or taking drugs. & WARNING Risk of accident due to the brake system overheating If you leave your foot on the brake pedal when driving, the brake system may over‐ heat. This increases the braking distance and the brake system can even fail. # Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. # Do not depress the brake pedal and the accelerator pedal at the same time while driving. * NOTE Engine damage due to excessively high engine speeds The engine will be damaged if you drive with the engine in the overrevving range. # Do not drive with the engine in the over‐ revving range. 154 Driving and parking * NOTE Wearing out the brake linings by continuously depressing the brake pedal # # Do not depress the brake pedal contin‐ uously whilst driving. To use the braking effect of the engine, shift to a lower gear in good time. * NOTE Damage to the drivetrain and engine when pulling away # # Do not warm up the engine while the vehicle is stationary. Pull away immedi‐ ately. Avoid high engine speeds and driving at full throttle until the engine has reached its operating temperature. * NOTE Damage to the catalytic converter due to non-combusted fuel The engine is not running smoothly and is misfiring. Non-combusted fuel may get into the cata‐ lytic converter. # # Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly. Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. * NOTE Reduced battery life due to fre‐ quent short-distance trips The 12 V battery may not be sufficiently charged when the vehicle is used only for short-distance trips. This reduces the life of the battery. # Drive longer distances regularly to charge the battery. * NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to not observing the maximum permitted head‐ room clearance If the vehicle height is greater than the maxi‐ mum permitted headroom clearance, the roof and other parts of the vehicle may be damaged. # # # Observe the signposted headroom clearance. If the vehicle height is greater than the permitted headroom clearance, do not enter. Observe the changed vehicle height with add-on roof equipment. Notes on driving with a roof load, trailer or fully laden vehicle When driving with a loaded roof luggage rack or trailer as well as with a fully laden or fully occu‐ pied vehicle, the vehicle's driving and steering characteristics change. You should bear the following in mind: R Do not exceed the permissible roof load and towing capacity. Also observe the technical data in the printed Operator's Manual. R Evenly distribute the roof load, and place heavy objects at the bottom. Also comply with the notes on loading the vehicle (/ page 105). Driving and parking 155 R Drive attentively, and avoid suddenly pulling away, braking and steering as well as rapid cornering. Notes on driving on salt-treated roads The braking effect is limited on salt-treated roads. Therefore, observe the following notes: R Due to salt build-up on the brake discs and brakepads, the braking distance can increase considerably or result in braking only on one side R Maintain a much greater safe distance to the vehicle in front To remove salt build-up: Brake occasionally while paying attention to the traffic conditions R Carefully depress the brake pedal at the end of the journey and when starting the next journey R Notes on hydroplaning Hydroplaning can take place once a certain amount of water has accumulated on the road surface. Observe the following notes during heavy precip‐ itation or in conditions in which hydroplaning may occur: R Reduce speed R Avoid tire ruts R Avoid sudden steering movements R Brake carefully % Also observe the notes on regularly checking wheels and tires (/ page 322). Notes on driving through water on the road surface Water which has entered into the vehicle can damage the engine, electrics and transmission. Water can also enter the air intake of the engine and cause engine damage. Observe the following if you must drive through water: R The water, when calm, may only reach the lower edge of the vehicle body. R Drive at a maximum speed of 6 mph (10 km/h); water can otherwise enter the vehicle interior or engine compartment. R Vehicles traveling in front, or oncoming vehi‐ cles, can create waves which may exceed the maximum permissible depth of the water. The braking effect of the brakes is reduced after fording. Brake carefully while paying attention to the traffic conditions until braking power has been fully restored. Function of rear axle steering The rear axle steering is an electromechanical auxiliary steering on the rear axle which adjusts the steering of the rear wheels according to the position of the front wheels, depending on the speed. This results in greater maneuverability and improved driving stability, e.g. when corner‐ ing. 156 Driving and parking ECO start/stop function ECO start/stop function % Depending on the engine, the ECO start/ stop function is not available in all drive pro‐ grams. Observe the status display in the driver display for this. The engine is switched off automatically in the following situations if all vehicle conditions for an automatic engine stop are met: R You brake the vehicle to a standstill in trans‐ mission position h or i. R You depress the brake pedal when traveling at a low speed. If the system has detected one of the following situations, the engine will not stop: R You stop at a stop sign and there is no vehi‐ cle in front of you. R The vehicle that stopped in front of you starts up again. R You maneuver, turn the steering wheel sharply or engage reverse gear. % If the system detects an intelligent stop inhibitor, for example, a stop sign, the engine will not stop. If you activate the HOLD function or engage the park position j, the engine can be switched off in spite of an intelligent stop inhibitor. The engine restarts automatically in the follow‐ ing cases: R You engage transmission position h or k. R You depress the accelerator pedal. R An automatic vehicle automatic engine start is required. R You release the brake pedal. R You release the brake pedal on a downhill gradient and the vehicle does not roll. R The vehicle rolls on a downhill gradient and does not automatically enter glide mode at 15 mph (20 km/h). ECO start/stop function symbols in the driver display: R The è symbol (green) appears when the vehicle is at a standstill: The engine was switched off by the ECO start/stop function. R The ç symbol (yellow) appears when the vehicle is at a standstill: Not all vehicle condi‐ tions for an engine stop have been met. R Neither the è nor ç symbol appears when the vehicle is at a standstill: An intelli‐ gent stop inhibitor was detected, e.g. a stop sign. R The s symbol appears: The ECO start/ stop function is deactivated or there is a mal‐ function. If the engine was switched off by the ECO start/ stop function and you leave the vehicle, a warn‐ ing tone sounds and the engine is not restarted. In addition, the following display message appears in the driver display: Vehicle Ready to Drive Switch the Ignition Off Before Exiting Driving and parking 157 If you do not switch off the vehicle, it is automat‐ ically switched off after three minutes. Deactivating or activating the ECO start/ stop function # Press button 1. A display appears in the driver display when switching the ECO start/stop function off/on. % A continuous s display appears in the driver display while the ECO start/stop func‐ tion is deactivated. ECO display function The ECO display shows an evaluation of your driving style on the driver display depending on the situation. This enables you to check the effi‐ ciency of your driving style and adjust it if neces‐ sary. The ECO Display menu shows a ball 2 that will roll forwards or backwards on a stylized road in the direction of travel according to the driving characteristics. Above and below the road, lines mark the area for an efficient driving style 3. Ball 2 will light up in green if it is rolling within these lines. Out‐ side the lines, the ball will light up in orange. The ECO display assesses the following criteria for an economical driving style: R Coasting at the right time R Consistent speed R Moderate acceleration The overall assessment of your driving style "from start" is indicated using stars. It starts with five empty stars, which you can fill one after the other if you drive efficiently. When all five stars are filled, a glow appears in the back‐ ground. % You can call up the ECO Display function via the Classic and Exclusive menus (/ page 239). 158 Driving and parking ECO Assist function (vehicles with 48 V onboard electrical system) % ECO Assist is active only in drive pro‐ grams ; and A. ECO Assist analyzes data for the vehicle's expec‐ ted route. This allows the system to optimally adjust the driving style for the route ahead, save fuel and recuperate. If the system detects an event ahead and the vehicle nears the event, ECO Assist will calculate the optimum speed for maximum fuel economy and recuperative energy based on the distance, speed and downhill gradi‐ ent. 1 "Foot off the accelerator" recommendation 2 Route event ahead If a route event that can be dealt with more effi‐ ciently by adjusting your driving style is detected ahead, corresponding symbol 2 and the ý symbol will be displayed in gray. When the driver removes their foot from the accelerator, the ý symbol will turn green. The display will disappear as soon as ECO Assist cannot identify any further recommendations from the route ahead. The following route events can be detected by ECO Assist: 3 Roundabout 4 S-curve 5 Sharp curve 6 T-intersection 7 Downhill gradient 8 Vehicle in front 9 Speed limit % Only route event 8 "vehicle in front" will be displayed in drive program A. Driving and parking 159 System limits If the calculated route is adhered to when route guidance is active, ECO Assist will operate with greater accuracy. The basic function is also available without active route guidance. Not all information and traffic situations can be fore‐ seen. The quality depends on the map data. ECO Assist is only an aid. The driver is responsi‐ ble for keeping a safe distance from the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed and for braking in good time. The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations: R If there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insuffi‐ cient illumination of the road, highly variable shade conditions, rain, snow, fog or heavy spray. R If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, direct sunlight or reflections. R If the windshield in the area of the multifunc‐ tion camera is dirty, or if the camera is fog‐ ged up, damaged or covered. R R R If the traffic signs are hard to detect, e.g. due to dirt, snow or insufficient lighting, or because they are covered. If the information in the navigation system's digital map is incorrect or out-of-date. If signs are ambiguous, e.g. road signs in roadworks or in adjacent lanes. DYNAMIC SELECT button Function of the DYNAMIC SELECT button % Depending on the engine and equipment, the vehicle has different drive programs. Use the DYNAMIC SELECT button to change between the following drive programs: The drive program selected appears in the driver display. = Individual R Individual settings B Sport+ R Sporty driving R R Emphasizes the vehicle's own oversteering and understeering characteristics for a more active driving style Only suitable for good road conditions, a dry road surface and a clear stretch of road C Sport R Still sporty, but with an emphasis on stability R Allows the sporty driver a more active driving style R Only suitable for good road conditions, a dry road surface and a clear stretch of road A Comfort R Comfortable and economical driving R Balance between traction and stability R Recommended for all road conditions ; Eco R Particularly economical driving R Balance between traction and stability R Recommended for all road conditions 160 Driving and parking Depending on the drive program, the following systems change their characteristics: R Drive Engine and transmission management Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Availability of Glide mode R ESP® R Steering Selecting the drive program Configuring DYNAMIC SELECT (multimedia system) Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 DYNAMIC SELECT 5 Vehicle Setting drive program I # Select Individual. # Select and set a category. Switching the reset display on/off Switch Request at Start on or off. % This function must be activated for each user profile separately. Only when this function is activated will the drive program and ECO start/stop setting for the previous journey be saved for the respective user profile. Function on: the next time the vehicle is started a prompt appears asking whether the last active drive program should be restored. If the ECO start/stop function was deactivated, an addi‐ tional prompt appears asking if the function should remain deactivated. # # Press DYNAMIC SELECT button 1 on the left or right. The drive program selected appears in the driver's display. Driving and parking 161 % The prompt appears only if the previously active settings deviate from the standard settings. Function off: the next time the vehicle is star‐ ted the A drive program is set automatically. The ECO start/stop function is activated auto‐ matically. Displaying vehicle data Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Info # Select Vehicle. The vehicle data is displayed. Displaying engine data Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Info # Select Engine. The engine data is displayed. % The actual (maximum) values that can be achieved for engine output and engine tor‐ que may deviate from the certified values within the country-specific guidelines for permissible tolerances (basis: UN-ECE No. 85 or country-specific guidelines). Influencing variables that can influence this are, for example: R Sea level R Fuel quality R Outside temperature R Operating temperature of the engine Please adjust your driving style accordingly. The p warning lamp in the instrument cluster is on until the engine has reached operating temperature. % The values displayed serve only as orienta‐ tion. The values for engine output and engine torque shown on the central display may deviate from the actual values. % The p warning lamp to show the power reduction after starting the vehicle is not available in all vehicle models. Calling up the fuel consumption indicator Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Info # Select Consumption. The current and average fuel consumption is displayed. Automatic transmission DIRECT SELECT lever Function of the DIRECT SELECT lever & WARNING Risk of accident due to incor‐ rect gearshifting If the engine speed is higher than the idle speed and you engage the transmission posi‐ tion h or k, the vehicle may accelerate sharply. # If you engage the transmission position h or k when the vehicle is at a standstill, always depress the brake pedal firmly and do not accelerate at the same time. 162 Driving and parking & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle If children are left unsupervised in the vehi‐ cle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users. R get out and be struck by oncoming traf‐ fic. R operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example. # Keep the vehicle SmartKey out of reach of children. Use the DIRECT SELECT lever to switch the transmission position. The current transmission position is shown in the driver display. # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Engaging reverse gear R Depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT lever upwards past the first point of resistance. # Engaging neutral N Depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down to the first point of resistance. % To shift into neutral i with the vehicle switched on, push the selector lever up or down for several seconds to the first point of resistance. Subsequently releasing the brake pedal will allow you to move the vehicle freely, e.g. to push it or tow it away. # In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: R releasing the parking brake. R changing the transmission position. R starting the vehicle. # i Neutral h Drive position j Park position k Reverse gear Driving and parking 163 Proceed as follows if you want the automatic transmission to remain in neutral i, even if the vehicle is switched off or the driver's door is opened: # Depress the brake pedal and engage neutral i when the vehicle is at a standstill. # Release the brake pedal. # Switch off the vehicle. The Risk of Vehicle Rolling Away N Activated Manually No Automatic Change to P message appears on the driver's display. % If you then exit the vehicle leaving the SmartKey in the vehicle, the automatic trans‐ mission remains in neutral i. The park position j is automatically re-engaged as soon as one of the following conditions is met: R You switch to transmission position h or k. R You press the j button. Engaging park position P Observe the notes on parking the vehicle (/ page 168). # Depress the brake pedal until the vehicle comes to a standstill. # When the vehicle is at a standstill, press but‐ ton j. When the transmission position display shows j, the park position is engaged. If no transmission position display j appears, secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away. % Depending on the situation, it may take a short time until j is engaged. Therefore, always pay attention to the transmission position display. Park position j is engaged automatically if one of the following conditions is met: R You switch the stationary vehicle off in trans‐ mission position h or k. R You open the driver's door when the vehicle is at a standstill or when driving at a very low speed and the transmission position is h or k. R # R R When the vehicle is rolling, you switch if off in transmission position h or k and bring it to a standstill. You switch off the engine, bring the vehicle to a standstill and open the driver's door when the vehicle is stationary or when the vehicle is rolling and the transmission posi‐ tion is i. Engaging park position j automatically is required by the vehicle. % To maneuver with an open driver's door, open the driver's door while at a standstill and engage transmission position h or k again. Engaging drive position D Depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT lever down past the first point of resistance. When the automatic transmission is in transmis‐ sion position h, it shifts the gears automati‐ cally. This depends, among other things, on the following factors: R The selected drive program # 164 Driving and parking R R The position of the accelerator pedal The driving speed Manual gearshifting When the automatic transmission is shifted to position h, you can manually shift it with the steering wheel gearshift paddle. If permitted, the automatic transmission shifts to a higher or lower gear depending on the steering wheel gearshift paddle being pulled. You have two options to manually shift the auto‐ matic transmission: R Temporary setting R Permanent setting The gears shift automatically when manual shift‐ ing is deactivated. Temporary setting: # To activate: pull steering wheel gearshift paddle 1 or 2. Manual shifting is activated for a short time. The transmission position display shows p and the current gear. % How long the manual shifting stays activated is dependent on various factors. Manual shifting can be automatically deacti‐ vated in the following cases: R Changing the drive program R Restarting the vehicle R When the transmission position h is engaged again R Driving style # To shift up: pull steering wheel gearshift paddle 2. To shift down: pull steering wheel gearshift paddle 1. # To deactivate: pull steering wheel gearshift paddle 2 and hold it in place. The transmission position display shows h. % You can also activate and deactivate manual shifting permanently in the multimedia sys‐ tem. # Activating or deactivating manual gear changing Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Vehicle 5 Driving # Switch the function on or off. Gearshift recommendation The gearshift recommendation assists you in adopting an economical driving style. Driving and parking 165 # When gearshift recommendation 1 appears on the driver display, shift to the recommen‐ ded gear. Using kickdown # Maximum acceleration: depress the accel‐ erator pedal beyond the pressure point. To protect against engine overrev, the automatic transmission shifts up to the next gear when maximum engine speed has been reached. Glide mode function With an anticipatory driving style, Glide mode helps you to reduce fuel consumption. Glide mode is characterized by the following: R The combustion engine is disconnected from the drivetrain and continues to run in neutral. R The transmission position display h is shown in green. R The combustion engine can be switched off. All of the vehicle functions remain active. Glide mode is activated if the following condi‐ tions are met: R Drive program ; is selected. R The speed is within a suitable range. R The road's course is suitable, e.g. no steep uphill or downhill inclines or tight curves. R You do not depress the accelerator or brake pedal (except for light brake applications). % Glide mode can also be activated if you have selected the "Eco" setting for the drive in the drive program =. Glide mode is deactivated again if one of the conditions is no longer met. Glide mode can also be prevented by the follow‐ ing parameters: R Incline R Downhill gradient R Temperature R Height R Speed R Operating status of the engine R Traffic situation Function of the 4MATIC 4MATIC ensures that all four wheels are driven. Together with ESP® and 4ETS, 4MATIC improves the traction of your vehicle whenever a driven wheel spins due to insufficient traction. If you fail to adapt your driving style, 4MATIC can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor over‐ ride the laws of physics. 4MATIC cannot take account of road, weather and traffic conditions. 4MATIC is only an aid. You are responsible espe‐ cially for maintaining a safe distance from the 166 Driving and parking vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in lane. % In wintry road conditions, the maximum effect of 4MATIC can be achieved only if you use winter tires (M+S tires), with snow chains if necessary. Refueling Refueling the vehicle & WARNING Risk of fire or explosion from fuel Fuels are highly flammable. # Fire, naked flames, smoking and creat‐ ing sparks must be avoided. # Before and during refueling, switch off the vehicle and, if installed, the station‐ ary heater. & WARNING Risk of injury from fuels Fuels are poisonous and hazardous to your health. # # # # Do not swallow fuel or let it come into contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale fuel vapor. Keep children away from fuel. Keep doors and windows closed during the refueling process. If you or other people come into contact with fuel, observe the following: # Immediately rinse fuel off your skin with soap and water. # If fuel comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thor‐ oughly with clean water. Seek medical attention immediately. # If you swallow fuel, seek medical atten‐ tion immediately. Do not induce vomit‐ ing. # Change immediately out of clothing that has come into contact with fuel. & WARNING Risk of fire and explosion due to electrostatic charge Electrostatic charge can ignite fuel vapor. # Before you open the fuel filler cap or take hold of the pump nozzle, touch the metallic vehicle body. # To avoid creating another electrostatic charge, do not get into the vehicle again during the refueling process. * NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel Vehicles with a gasoline engine: Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system, the engine and the emission control system. # Only refuel with low-sulfur spark-igni‐ tion engine fuel. This fuel may contain up to 10% ethanol. Your vehicle is suitable for use with E10 fuel. Driving and parking 167 Never refuel with one of the following fuels: R Diesel R Gasoline with more than 10% ethanol by volume, e.g. E15, E85, E100 R Gasoline with more than 3% methanol by volume, e.g. M15, M30, M85, M100 R Gasoline with additives containing metal If you have accidentally refueled with the wrong fuel: # Do not switch on the vehicle. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. * NOTE Do not use diesel to refuel vehi‐ cles with a gasoline engine If you have accidentally refueled with the wrong fuel: R Do not switch on the vehicle. Otherwise fuel can enter the engine. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system and the engine. The repair costs are high. # # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely. * NOTE Damage to the fuel system due to overfilling the fuel tank # Only fill the fuel tank until the pump nozzle switches off. If too much fuel has been added due, for example, to a faulty filling pump: # Do not switch on the vehicle. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. * NOTE Fuel may spray out when you remove the fuel pump nozzle # Only fill the fuel tank until the pump nozzle switches off. Requirements: R The vehicle is unlocked. % Do not get into the vehicle again during the refueling process. Otherwise, electrostatic charge could build up again. Observe the notes on operating fluids and fuel. Only refuel with fuel that has at least the octane number specified in the information label in the fuel filler flap. Otherwise, engine output can be reduced and fuel consumption increased. 168 Driving and parking # # # # # Insert fuel filler cap from above into bracket 2. Completely insert the pump nozzle into the tank filler neck, hook in place and refuel. Only fill the fuel tank until the pump nozzle switches off. Replace the cap on the filler neck and turn clockwise until it engages audibly. Close fuel filler flap 1. Parking Parking the vehicle 1 2 3 4 5 Fuel filler flap Bracket for fuel filler cap Tire pressure table QR code for rescue card Fuel type # Press on the back area of fuel filler flap 1. Turn the fuel filler cap counter-clockwise and remove it. # & WARNING Risk of accident and injury caused by an insufficiently secured vehi‐ cle rolling away If the vehicle is not securely parked suffi‐ ciently, it can roll away in an uncontrolled way even at a slight downhill gradient. # On uphill or downhill gradients, turn the front wheels so that the vehicle rolls towards the curb if it starts moving. # # Apply the parking brake. Switch the transmission to position j. & WARNING Risk of fire caused by hot exhaust system parts Flammable materials such as leaves, grass or twigs may ignite. # Park the vehicle so that no flammable material can come into contact with hot vehicle components. # In particular, do not park on dry grass‐ land or harvested grain fields. & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle If children are left unsupervised in the vehi‐ cle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users. Driving and parking 169 R R Engage transmission position j in a station‐ ary vehicle with the brake pedal applied (/ page 163). # Switch off the vehicle by pressing button 1. # Release the service brake slowly. # Get out of the vehicle and lock it. % When you park the vehicle, you can still operate the side windows and the sliding sunroof for approximately four minutes if the driver's door is closed. % When you park the vehicle, you can still operate the side windows and the panoramic sliding sunroof for approximately four minutes if the driver's door is closed. # get out and be struck by oncoming traf‐ fic. operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example. In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: R releasing the parking brake. R changing the transmission position. R starting the vehicle. # # # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Keep the vehicle SmartKey out of reach of children. * NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to it rolling away # Always secure the vehicle against roll‐ ing away. # # # Bring the vehicle to a standstill by pressing the brake pedal. On gradients, turn the front wheels so that the vehicle will roll towards the curb if it starts moving. Apply the electric parking brake. 170 Driving and parking Garage door opener Programming buttons for the garage door opener & DANGER Risk of death caused by exhaust gases Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases is hazardous to health and leads to poisoning. # Never leave the engine or, if present, the auxiliary heating running in an enclosed space without sufficient venti‐ lation. & WARNING Risk of injury by becoming trapped when opening and closing a garage door When you operate or program a garage door with an integrated garage door opener, per‐ sons can become trapped or struck by the garage door if they stand within its range of movement. # Always make sure that nobody is within the range of the garage door's move‐ ment. Only operate the following doors using the garage door opener: R Doors with a safety stop and reversing fea‐ ture R Doors which conform to the current U.S. safety standards Requirements: R The vehicle has been parked outside the garage or outside the range of movement of the door. R The vehicle is switched on. R The vehicle has not been started. % The garage door opener function is always available when the vehicle is switched on. # Check if the transmitter frequency of the remote control has the frequency range of 280 to 868 MHz. Radio equipment approval number: R NZLMUAHL5 (USA) R 4112A-MUAHL5 (Canada) Driving and parking 171 # Press and hold button 1, 2 or 3 that you wish to program. Indicator lamp 4 flashes yellow. % It can take up to 20 seconds before the indi‐ cator lamp flashes yellow. # Release the previously pressed button. Indicator lamp 4 continues to flash yellow. # Point remote control 5 from a distance of 0.4 in (1 cm) to 3 in (8 cm) towards button 1, 2 or 3. # Press and hold button 6 of remote control 5 until one of the following signals appears: R Indicator lamp 4 lights up green contin‐ uously. Programming is complete. R Indicator lamp 4 flashes green. Pro‐ gramming was successful. Additionally, synchronisation of the rolling code with the door system must be carried out. # If indicator lamp 4 does not light up or flash green: repeat the procedure. # Release all of the buttons. % The remote control for the door drive is not included in the scope of delivery of the garage door opener. Synchronising the rolling code Requirements: R The door system uses a rolling code. R The vehicle must be within range of the garage door or door drive. R The vehicle as well as persons and objects are located outside the range of movement of the door. Press the programming button on the door drive unit. Initiate the next step within approximately 30 seconds. # Press previously programmed button 1, 2 or 3 repeatedly until the door closes. When the door closes, programming is com‐ pleted. % Please also read the operating instructions for the door drive. # Troubleshooting when programming the remote control # Check if the transmitter frequency of remote control 5 is supported. # Replace the batteries in remote control 5. # Hold remote control 5 at various angles from a distance of 0.4 in (1 cm) to 3 in (8 cm) front of the inside rearview mirror. You should test every position for at least 25 seconds before trying another position. # Hold remote control 5 at the same angles at various distances in front of the inside rearview mirror. You should test every posi‐ tion for at least 25 seconds before trying another position. # On remote controls that transmit only for a limited period, press button 6 on remote control 5 again before transmission ends. # Angle the antenna line of the garage door opener unit towards the remote control. 172 Driving and parking % Support and additional information on pro‐ gramming: R On the toll free HomeLink® Hotline on 1-800-355-3515 R On the Internet at https:// www.homelink.com/mercedes Opening or closing the garage door Requirements: R The corresponding button is programmed to operate the door. # # Press and hold buttons 1, 2 or 3 until the door opens or closes. If indicator lamp 4 flashes yellow after approximately 20 seconds: press and hold the previously pressed button again until the door opens or closes. Clearing the garage door opener memory # Press and hold buttons 1 and 3. Indicator lamp 4 lights up yellow. # If indicator lamp 4 flashes green: release buttons 1 and 3. The entire memory has been deleted. Electric parking brake # Function of the electric parking brake (apply‐ ing automatically) # & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle If children are left unsupervised in the vehi‐ cle, they could, in particular: R open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users. R get out and be struck by oncoming traf‐ fic. R operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example. In addition, the children could also set the vehicle in motion, for example by: R releasing the parking brake. R changing the transmission position. R starting the vehicle. # Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Keep the vehicle SmartKey out of reach of children. The electric parking brake is applied if the transmission is in position j and one of the following conditions is fulfilled: R The vehicle is switched off. R The seat belt tongue is not inserted in the seat belt buckle of the driver's seat and the driver's door is opened. % To prevent application: pull the handle of the electric parking brake (/ page 173). In the following situations, the electric park‐ ing brake is also applied: R The HOLD function is keeping the vehicle sta‐ tionary. R Active Parking Assist is keeping the vehicle stationary. Driving and parking 173 R R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is bringing the vehicle to a standstill. In addition, one of the following condi‐ tions must be fulfilled: The vehicle is switched off. The seat belt tongue is not inserted in the seat belt buckle of the driver's seat and the driver's door is opened. There is a system malfunction. The power supply is insufficient. The vehicle is stationary for a lengthy period. When the electric parking brake is applied, the red F (USA) or ! (Canada) indicator lamp lights up in the driver display. % The electric parking brake is not automati‐ cally applied if the vehicle is switched off by the ECO start/stop function. Function of the electric parking brake (releasing automatically) The electric parking brake is released when the following conditions are fulfilled: R The driver's door is closed. R The vehicle has been started. R The transmission is in position h or k and you depress the accelerator pedal or you shift from transmission position j to h or k when on level ground. R If the transmission is in position k, the trunk lid must be closed. R The seat belt tongue is inserted into the seat belt buckle of the driver's seat. If the seat belt tongue is not inserted into the seat belt buckle of the driver's seat, one of the following conditions must be fulfilled: You shift from transmission position j. You have previously driven at speeds greater than 2 mph (3 km/h). When the electric parking brake is released, the red F (USA) or ! (Canada) indicator lamp in the driver's display goes out. Applying/releasing the electric parking brake manually Applying 174 Driving and parking Push handle 1. The red F (USA) or ! (Canada) indica‐ tor lamp lights up in the driver display. % The electric parking brake is only securely applied if the red F (USA) or ! (Can‐ ada) indicator lamp is lit continuously. # Releasing Switch on the vehicle. # Pull handle 1. The red F (USA) or ! (Canada) indica‐ tor lamp in the driver display goes out. # Emergency braking Press and hold handle 1. As long as the vehicle is driving, the Please Release Parking Brake message is displayed and the red F (USA) or ! (Canada) indicator lamp flashes. When the vehicle has been braked to a standstill, the electric parking brake is applied. The red F (USA) or ! (Can‐ ada) indicator lamp lights up in the driver's display. # Information on collision detection on a parked vehicle If a collision is detected when the tow-away alarm is armed on a locked vehicle, you will receive a notification in the multimedia system when you switch the vehicle on. You will receive information about the following points: R The area of the vehicle that may have been damaged. R The force of the impact. The following situation can lead to inadvertent activation: R The parked vehicle is moved, for example, in a two-story garage. % Deactivate the tow-away alarm in order to prevent inadvertent activation. If you deacti‐ vate the tow-away alarm, collision detection will also be deactivated. You can permanently deactivate collision detection via the multimedia system (/ page 174). % If the battery is severely discharged, the function for detecting a collision on a parked vehicle is automatically deactivated to facili‐ tate the next engine start. System limits Detection may be restricted in the following sit‐ uations: R The vehicle is damaged without impact, for example, if an outside mirror is torn off or the paint is damaged by a key R An impact occurs at low speed R The electric parking brake is not applied Setting collision detection on a parked vehi‐ cle Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Open/Close 5 Vehicle Protection # Activate or deactivate the function via Collision Notification. Driving and parking 175 % A maximum of three incidents can be regis‐ tered. Up to 15 photos are taken for every incident. In the event of another incident, the photos of the first incident will be overwrit‐ ten if they have not been deleted already. Activating or deactivating the collision pho‐ tos function Please note possible legal restrictions in some countries regarding automatic recording of the vehicle surroundings. # Activate or deactivate Take Photos. Transferring the collision photos with the Mercedes me app # Select Upload to Mercedes me. # Select Upload Automatically. # Scan the generated QR code on the central display with the Mercedes me App. The encrypted collision photos will then be uploaded to Mercedes me. % Any device that can scan QR codes can be used to view the collision photos in the Mercedes me App. Copying the collision photos to a USB flash drive # Connect a USB flash drive . # Select Manage Collision Photos. # Select Copy (USB). All collision photos are copied to the USB flash drive. % To ensure secure operation, only use with FAT32 or exFAT formatted USB storage devi‐ ces. Deleting collision photos Select Manage Collision Photos. # Select Delete. All collision photos will be deleted. # Notes on parking the vehicle for an extended period If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than six weeks, it may suffer damage through disuse. The 12 V battery may also be impaired or dam‐ aged by heavy discharging. % Further information can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop. Standby mode (extension of the starter bat‐ tery's period out of use) Standby mode function % This function is not available for all models. If standby mode is activated, energy loss will be minimized during extended periods of non-oper‐ ation. Standby mode is characterized by the following: R The starter battery is preserved. R The maximum non-operational time appears in the driver's display. R The connection to online services is interrup‐ ted. If the following conditions are fulfilled, standby mode can be activated or deactivated using the multimedia system: R The vehicle is switched on. R The vehicle has not been started. 176 Driving and parking Exceeding the vehicle's displayed non-opera‐ tional time may cause inconvenience; i.e. it can‐ not be guaranteed that the starter battery will reliably start the vehicle. Charge the starter battery in the following situa‐ tions: R The vehicle's non-operational time must be extended. R The starter battery charge level is insufficient for standby mode. % Standby mode is automatically deactivated when the vehicle is switched on. Activating/deactivating standby mode (park‐ ing the vehicle for an extended period) Requirements: R The vehicle is switched off. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Vehicle 5 Opening/closing # Activate or deactivate Standby Mode. Driving and driving safety systems Driving systems and your responsibility Your vehicle is equipped with driving systems which assist you in driving, parking and maneu‐ vering the vehicle. The driving systems are only aids. They are not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings and do not relieve you of your responsibility pertaining to road traffic law. The driver is always responsible for maintaining a safe distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in lane. Pay attention to the traffic conditions at all times and intervene when necessary. Be aware of the limitations regarding the safe use of these systems. Driving systems can neither reduce the risk of accident if you fail to adapt your driving style nor override the laws of physics. They cannot always take into account road, weather or traffic condi‐ tions. Information on vehicle sensors and cameras Some driving and driving safety systems use cameras as well as radar or ultrasonic sensors to monitor the area in front of, behind or next to the vehicle. 1 Multifunction camera 2 Cameras in the outside mirrors Driving and parking 177 3 4 5 6 7 Front radar Front camera Corner radars Ultrasonic sensors Rear view camera & WARNING Risk of accident due to restricted detection performance of vehi‐ cle sensors and cameras If the area around vehicle sensors or cam‐ eras is covered, damaged or dirty, certain driving and safety systems cannot function correctly. There is a risk of an accident. # Keep the area around vehicle sensors or cameras clear of any obstructions and clean. # Have damage to the bumper, radiator grille or stone chipping in the area of the front and rear windows repaired at a qualified specialist workshop. Particularly, keep the areas around the sensors and cameras free of dirt, ice or slush (/ page 298). The sensors and cameras must not be covered and the detection ranges around them must be kept free. Do not attach additional license plate brackets, advertisements, stickers, decorative foils or foils to protect against stone chippings in the detection range of the sensors and cameras. Make sure that there are no over‐ hanging loads protruding into the detection range. If there is damage to a bumper or the radiator grille, or after an impact, have the function of the sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Have damage or stone chipping in the area of the cameras on the windshield and rear window repaired at a qualified specialist work‐ shop. % The rear view camera can extend and retract automatically for the purpose of calibration, even though there is no camera image in the display. Overview of driving systems and driving safety systems R R R R R R R R R R R R ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) (/ page 178) BAS (Brake Assist System) (/ page 178) ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) (/ page 179) ESP® Crosswind Assist (/ page 180) EBD (Electronic Brakeforce Distribution) (/ page 180) STEER CONTROL (/ page 180) HOLD function (/ page 181) Hill Start Assist (/ page 182) ATTENTION ASSIST (/ page 182) Cruise control (/ page 184) Traffic Sign Assist (/ page 205) Traffic light view (/ page 208) 178 Driving and parking Driving Assistance package % Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, Active Blind Spot Assist, Active Brake Assist, Active Lane Keeping Assist and Active Emergency Stop Assist are also available without the Driving Assistance Package, albeit with restricted functionality. R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 186) R Active Speed Limit Assist (country-depend‐ ent) (/ page 190) R Route-based speed adaptation (countrydependent) (/ page 191) R Active Brake Assist (/ page 199) R Active Steering Assist (country-dependent) (/ page 193) R Active Emergency Stop Assist (countrydependent) (/ page 195) R Active Lane Change Assist (country-depend‐ ent) (/ page 197) R Active Stop-and-Go Assist (country-depend‐ ent) (/ page 193) R R R Active Blind Spot Assist with exit warning (/ page 211) Active Lane Keeping Assist (/ page 214) PRE-SAFE® Impulse Side (/ page 47) Parking Package % The rear view camera is also available with‐ out the Parking Package in some countries. % The availability of individual functions is country and equipment-dependent. R Rear view camera (/ page 217) R Surround view camera (/ page 220) R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 225) R Active Parking Assist (/ page 229) Functions of ABS The Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) regulates the brake pressure in critical driving situations: R During braking, for instance, at maximum full-stop braking or if there is insufficient tire traction, the wheels are prevented from lock‐ ing. R Vehicle steerability while braking is ensured. If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel a pulsing in the brake pedal. The pulsating brake pedal can be an indication of hazardous road conditions and can serve as a reminder to take extra care while driving. System limits R ABS is active from speeds of approx. 3 mph (5 km/h). R ABS may be impaired or may not function if a malfunction has occurred and the yel‐ low ! ABS warning lamp lights up contin‐ uously in the instrument cluster after the vehicle is started. Function of BAS & WARNING Risk of an accident caused by a malfunction in BAS (Brake Assist Sys‐ tem) If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distance in an emergency braking situation is increased. Driving and parking 179 # Depress the brake pedal with full force in emergency braking situations. ABS prevents the wheels from locking. The Brake Assist System (BAS) supports your emergency braking situation with additional brake force. If you depress the brake pedal quickly, BAS is activated: R BAS automatically boosts the brake pres‐ sure. R BAS can shorten the braking distance. R ABS prevents the wheels from locking. The brakes will function as usual once you release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated. Function of ESP® & WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® is deactivated If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilization. # ESP® should only be deactivated in the following situations. The Electronic Stability Program (ESP®) can monitor and improve driving stability and trac‐ tion in the following situations within physical limits: R When pulling away on wet or slippery road. R When braking. If the vehicle deviates from the direction desired by the driver, ESP® can stabilize the vehicle by intervening in the following ways: R One or more wheels are braked. R The engine output is adapted according to the situation. When ESP® is deactivated, the å warning lamp lights up continuously: R Driving stability will no longer be improved. R The drive wheels could spin. R ETS/4ETS traction control is still active. % When ESP® is deactivated, you are still assis‐ ted by ESP® when braking. When the ÷ warning lamp flashes, one or several wheels has reached its grip limit: R Adapt your driving style to suit the current road and weather conditions. R Do not deactivate ESP®. R Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as is necessary when pulling away. Deactivate ESP® in the following situations to improve traction: R When using snow chains. R In deep snow. R On sand or gravel. % Spinning the wheels results in a cutting action, which enhances traction. If the ÷ ESP® warning lamp lights up continu‐ ously, ESP® is not available due to a malfunction. Observe the following information: R Warning and indicator lamps (/ page 424) R Display messages (/ page 367) 180 Driving and parking ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System) ETS/4ETS traction control is part of ESP® and makes it possible to pull away and accelerate on a slippery road. ETS/4ETS can improve the vehicle's traction by intervening in the following ways: R The drive wheels are braked individually if they spin. R More drive torque is transferred to the wheel or wheels with traction. Influence of drive programs on ESP® The drive programs enable ESP® to adapt to dif‐ ferent weather and road conditions as well as the driver's preferred driving style. Depending on the selected drive program, the appropriate ESP® mode will be activated. You can select the drive programs using the DYNAMIC SELECT switch (/ page 160). Function of ESP® Crosswind Assist ESP® Crosswind Assist detects sudden gusts of side wind and helps the driver to keep the vehi‐ cle in the lane: R ESP® Crosswind Assist is active at vehicle speeds between approx. 47 mph (75 km/h) and 125 mph (200 km/h) when driving straight ahead or cornering slightly. R The vehicle is stabilized by means of individ‐ ual brake application on one side. Activating/deactivating ESP® (Electronic Sta‐ bility Program) Multimedia system: 4 © 5 ß 5 y # Select ESP. # Select On or å Off. ESP® is deactivated if the å ESP® OFF warn‐ ing lamp lights up continuously in the driver dis‐ play. Observe any information on warning lamps and display messages which may be shown in the driver display. Function of EBD Electronic Breakforce Distribution (EBD) is char‐ acterized by the following: R Monitoring and regulating the brake pressure on the rear wheels. R Improved driving stability when braking, especially on bends. Function of STEER CONTROL STEER CONTROL assists you by transmitting a noticeable steering force to the steering wheel in the direction required for vehicle stabilization. This steering recommendation is given in the fol‐ lowing situations: R Both right wheels or both left wheels are on a wet or slippery road surface when you brake R The vehicle starts to skid Driving and parking 181 System limits STEER CONTROL may be impaired or may not function in the following situations: R ESP® is deactivated. R ESP® is malfunctioning. R The steering is malfunctioning. If ESP® is malfunctioning, you will be assisted further by the electric power steering. HOLD function HOLD function The HOLD function holds the vehicle at a stand‐ still without requiring you to depress the brake pedal, e.g. while waiting in traffic. The HOLD function is only an aid. The responsi‐ bility for the vehicle safely standing still remains with the driver. System limits The HOLD function is only intended to provide assistance when driving and is not a sufficient means of safeguarding the vehicle against rolling away when stationary. R The incline must not be greater than 30%. R Activating/deactivating the HOLD function & WARNING Risk of an accident due to the HOLD function being active when you leave the vehicle If the vehicle is only braked with the HOLD function it could, in the following situations, roll away: R If there is a malfunction in the system or in the power supply. R If the HOLD function is deactivated by depressing the accelerator pedal or brake pedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant. # Always secure the vehicle against roll‐ ing away before you leave it. Requirements: R The vehicle is stationary. R The driver's door is closed or the seat belt on the driver's side is fastened. R R R The vehicle has been started or has been automatically switched off by the ECO start/ stop function. The electric parking brake is released. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deacti‐ vated. The transmission is in position h, k or i. Activating the HOLD function # Depress the brake pedal, and after a short time quickly depress further until the ë display appears in the driver's display. # Release the brake pedal. Deactivating the HOLD function # Depress the accelerator pedal to pull away. or # Depress the brake pedal until the ë dis‐ play disappears from the driver's display. The HOLD function is deactivated in the follow‐ ing situations: R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activa‐ ted. 182 Driving and parking R R The transmission is shifted to position j. The vehicle is secured with the electric park‐ ing brake. In the following situations, the vehicle is held by transmission position j and/or by the electric parking brake: R The seat belt is unfastened and the driver's door is opened. R The vehicle is switched off. R There is a system malfunction. R The power supply is insufficient. In addition, the Brake Immediately message may appear in the driver's display and a horn tone may sound at regular intervals. # Immediately depress the brake pedal firmly until the warning message disappears. The HOLD function is deactivated. # Additionally secure the vehicle against rolling away. Function of Hill Start Assist ATTENTION ASSIST Hill Start Assist holds the vehicle for a short time when pulling away on a hill under the fol‐ lowing conditions: R The transmission is in position h or k. R The electric parking brake is released. Function of ATTENTION ASSIST ATTENTION ASSIST assists you on long, monoto‐ nous journeys, e.g. on highways and trunk roads. If indicators of fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration on the part of the driver are detected, the system suggests taking a break. ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid. It cannot always detect fatigue or lapses in concentration in time. The system is not a substitute for a wellrested and attentive driver. On long journeys, take regular breaks in good time that allow for adequate recuperation. You can choose between two settings: R Standard: normal system sensitivity. R Sensitive: higher system sensitivity. The driver is warned earlier and the attention level detected by ATTENTION ASSIST is adap‐ ted accordingly. This gives you enough time to move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal and depress it before the vehicle begins to roll away. & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to the vehicle rolling away After a short time, Hill Start Assist no longer holds the vehicle. # Swiftly move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Do not leave the vehicle when it is being held by Hill Start Assist. If drowsiness or increasing lapses in concentra‐ tion are detected, the ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a Break! warning appears in the driver display. You can acknowledge the message and take a Driving and parking 183 break where necessary. If you do not take a break and ATTENTION ASSIST continues to detect increasing lapses in concentration, you will be warned again after a minimum of 15 minutes. The following information is displayed in the driver display: R The length of the journey since the last break R The attention level determined by ATTENTION ASSIST: The more segments 1 of the circle dis‐ played, the higher the detected attention level. - Fewer segments 1 are displayed in the circle as the attention level decreases. If ATTENTION ASSIST is unable to calculate the attention level and cannot issue a warning, the System Suspended message appears. If a warning is given in the driver display, the multimedia system offers to search for a rest area. You can select a rest area and start naviga‐ tion to this rest area. If you restart the vehicle, ATTENTION ASSIST with microsleep detection is automatically acti‐ vated. The last selected sensitivity level remains stored. System limits ATTENTION ASSIST is active in the 37 mph (60 km/h) to 124 mph (200 km/h) speed range. Particularly in the following situations, ATTEN‐ TION ASSIST only functions in a restricted man‐ ner and warnings may be delayed or not occur: R If you have been driving for less than approx‐ imately 30 minutes. R If the road condition is poor (uneven road surface or potholes). R R R R R If there is a strong side wind. If you adopt a sporty driving style (high cor‐ nering speeds or high rates of acceleration). If the Steering Assist function of Active Dis‐ tance Assist DISTRONIC is active. If the clock is set to the incorrect time. If you change lanes and vary your speed fre‐ quently in active driving situations. Also observe any information regarding display messages that can be displayed in the driver dis‐ play. The ATTENTION ASSIST drowsiness or alertness assessment is reset and restarted when continu‐ ing the journey in the following situations: R You switch off the vehicle. R If you unfasten your seat belt and open the driver's door (e.g. to change drivers or take a break). 184 Driving and parking Setting ATTENTION ASSIST Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Assistance 5 ATTENTION ASSIST Displays on the driver display h (gray): cruise control is selected but not yet active, or temporarily passive. R h (green): cruise control is active. Setting the sensitivity Tap the current setting. # Select Standard or Sensitive. A stored speed appears under the h display and is indicated in the speedometer. # Speed control cruise control Function of cruise control Cruise control regulates the speed to the value selected by the driver. If you accelerate to overtake, for example, the stored speed is not deleted. If you remove your foot from the accelerator pedal after overtaking, cruise control will resume speed regulation back to the stored speed. You can store any speed above 15 mph (20 km/h) up to the maximum design speed. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog‐ nize dangers (/ page 176). R R System limits Cruise control may be unable to maintain the stored speed on uphill gradients. The stored speed is resumed when the gradient evens out. Change into a lower gear in good time on long and steep downhill gradients. Take particular note of this when driving a laden vehicle. By doing so, you will make use of the engine's brak‐ ing effect. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheat‐ ing and wearing too quickly. Do not use cruise control in the following situa‐ tions: R In traffic situations which require frequent changes of speed, e.g. in heavy traffic, on winding roads. R On slippery roads. Accelerating can cause the drive wheels to lose traction and the vehicle could then skid. If you are driving when visibility is poor. Operating cruise control & WARNING Risk of accident due to stored speed If you call up the stored speed and this is lower than your current speed, the vehicle decelerates. # Take into account the traffic situation before calling up the stored speed. Requirements: R Cruise control is selected. R ESP® must be activated, but not intervening. R The vehicle speed is at least 15 mph (20 km/h). R The transmission is in position h. Driving and parking 185 Activating cruise control Press M or N on control panel 1. The current speed is stored and maintained by the vehicle. or # Press J. The last stored speed is called up and main‐ tained by the vehicle. If the last stored speed has previously been deleted, the current vehicle speed is stored. % When you switch off the vehicle, the last speed stored is deleted. Increasing/decreasing the stored speed # To increase the stored speed: swipe upwards from the bottom of control panel 1. R The stored speed is increased by 1 mph (1 km/h). # To decrease the stored speed: swipe down‐ wards from the top of control panel 1. R The stored speed is decreased by 1 mph (1 km/h). or # # Steering wheel control panel for cruise control J Adopts the stored/detected speed ± Deactivates cruise control M Activates cruise control N Deactivates cruise control 1 Control panel to increase/decrease speed Activating cruise control # Press M. Briefly press M or N on control panel 1. The stored speed is increased or decreased to the following values depending on the unit: R mph: the next value ending in 5 R km/h: the next value ending in 0 or Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed. Press M on control panel 1. Adopting a detected speed If cruise control is activated and Traffic Sign Assist has detected a speed restriction sign with a maximum permissible speed and this is dis‐ played in the driver display: # Press J. The maximum permissible speed shown by the traffic sign is stored and the vehicle maintains this speed. # # Deactivating cruise control # Press ±. 186 Driving and parking Deactivating cruise control # Press N. % If you brake, deactivate ESP® or if ESP® intervenes, cruise control is deactivated. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Function of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC maintains the set speed on free-flowing roads. If vehicles in front are detected, the set distance is main‐ tained, if necessary, until the vehicle comes to a halt. The vehicle accelerates or brakes depend‐ ing on the distance to the vehicle in front and the set speed. The speed and distance to the vehicle in front are set and saved using the steering wheel. Available speed range: R Vehicles without Driving Assistance Pack‐ age: 15 mph (20 km/h) - 100 mph (160 km/h) R Vehicles with Driving Assistance Pack‐ age: 15 mph (20 km/h) - 130 mph (210 km/h) Other features of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC: R Adjusts the driving style depending on the selected drive program (fuel-saving, comfort‐ able or dynamic) (/ page 159) R Initiates acceleration to the stored speed if the turn signal indicator is switched on to change to the overtaking lane R Vehicles with Driving Assistance Pack‐ age: Reacts to stationary vehicles detected in urban speed ranges (except bicycles and motorcycles) Takes one-sided overtaking restrictions into account on highways or on multi-lane roads with separate roadways (countrydependent) % In the DYNAMIC SELECT menu, the driving style of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC can be set. Depending on which drive pro‐ gram is selected, the driving characteristics can be geared towards energy economy, comfort or dynamic performance. In the Active Distance Assist menu, the driving style can be permanently set to Comfort or Dynamic (/ page 192). Vehicles with Active Parking Assist and Driv‐ ing Assistance Package: if Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC has braked the vehicle to a standstill, it can automatically follow the vehicle in front when driving off again within 30 sec‐ onds. If a critical situation is detected in the sur‐ rounding area when driving off, such as a person in the vehicle path, a visual and acoustic warning is given indicating that the driver must now take control of the vehicle. The vehicle is not acceler‐ ated any further. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog‐ nize dangers (/ page 176). Driving and parking 187 Display in the driver display in the Assistance menu 1 Vehicle in front 2 Distance indicator 3 Set specified distance Vehicle detected in front 1 is highlighted in green. It may also be in the lane to the left of your vehicle in situations where it is not permit‐ ted to overtake on the right, for example on high‐ ways. Permanent status display R ç (white): Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC selected, specified distance set R ç (green): Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC active, specified distance set and vehicle detected The stored speed is shown under the permanent status display and highlighted on the speedome‐ ter. When Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is passive, the status display is grayed out. If the speed of the vehicle in front or the speed adjustment is less than the stored speed due to the route event ahead, the segments in the speedometer light up. When the set specified distance is increased or decreased, the Ò display briefly appears under the vehicle in the permanent status dis‐ play. % On highways or high-speed major roads, the green ç vehicle symbol is displayed cycli‐ cally when the vehicle is ready to pull away. % If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the setting of the Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, the system is switched to pas‐ sive mode. The ç Suspended message appears in the driver display. System limits The system may be impaired or may not function in the following situations, for example: R In snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, if there is glare, in direct sunlight or in greatly varying ambient light. R The windshield in the area of the camera is dirty, fogged up, damaged or covered. R If the radar sensors are dirty or covered. R In parking garages or on roads with steep uphill or downhill gradients. R If there are narrow vehicles in front, such as bicycles or motorcycles. In addition, on slippery roads, braking or accel‐ erating can cause one or several wheels to lose traction and the vehicle could then skid. Do not use Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC in these situations. 188 Driving and parking & WARNING Risk of accident from acceler‐ ation or braking by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC & WARNING Risk of accident due to insuf‐ ficient deceleration by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC may accel‐ erate or brake in the following cases, for example: R If the vehicle pulls away using Active Dis‐ tance Assist DISTRONIC. R If the stored speed is called up and is considerably faster or slower than the currently driven speed. R If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC no longer detects a vehicle in front or does not react to relevant objects. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC brakes your vehicle with up to 50% of the possible deceleration. If this deceleration is not suffi‐ cient, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC alerts you with a visual and acoustic warning. # Adjust your speed and maintain a suita‐ ble distance from the vehicle in front. # Brake the vehicle yourself and/or take evasive action. R # # Always carefully observe the traffic con‐ ditions and be ready to brake at all times. Take into account the traffic situation before calling up the stored speed. & WARNING Risk of accident if detection function of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is impaired Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC does not react or has a limited reaction: R when driving on a different lane or when changing lanes R to pedestrians, animals, bicycles or sta‐ tionary vehicles, or unexpected obstacles to complex traffic conditions to oncoming vehicles and crossing traffic As a result, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC may neither give warnings nor intervene in such situations. # Always observe the traffic conditions carefully and react accordingly. Operating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Requirements: R The electric parking brake is released. R ESP® is activated and is not intervening. R The transmission is in position h. R All the doors are closed. R Check of the radar sensor system has been successfully completed. Driving and parking 189 # To operate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC: press the respective button with only one finger or swipe on the control panel. Activates/deactivates Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC # Press H. Activating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC To activate without a stored speed: on control panel 1 press M on the upper section or N on the lower section or J. Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. or # To activate with a stored speed: press J. Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. The current speed is stored and maintained by the vehicle. # J Adopts the stored/detected speed ± Deactivates Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC 1 Increases/decreases the speed K Increases/decreases the specified dis‐ tance H Activates/deactivates Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Increasing or reducing the speed # To increase the stored speed: swipe upwards from the bottom of control panel 1. R The stored speed is increased by 1 mph (1 km/h). # To decrease the stored speed: swipe down‐ wards from the top of control panel 1. R The stored speed is decreased by 1 mph (1 km/h). or # Briefly press M on the upper section or N on the lower section of control panel 1. The stored speed is increased or reduced by 5 mph (10 km/h). or # Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed. # Press M on the upper section of control panel 1. Adopting the limit speed shown in the driver display # Activate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC. 190 Driving and parking # Press J. The limit speed displayed in the driver display is adopted as the stored speed. The vehicle adapts its speed to that of the vehicle in front, but only up to the stored speed. Pulling away with Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC # Activate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and remove your foot from the brake pedal. # Press J. or # Depress the accelerator pedal briefly and firmly. The functions of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC continue to be carried out. Reducing or increasing the specified dis‐ tance from the vehicle in front # Press K. The h display appears. The specified dis‐ tance is reduced by one level. If the lowest level is already selected, the selection jumps to the highest level. Deactivating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC & WARNING Risk of an accident due to Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC being active when you leave the driver's seat If you leave the driver's seat while the vehicle is being braked by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC only, the vehicle can roll away. # Always deactivate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and secure the vehi‐ cle to prevent it from rolling away before you leave the driver's seat. # Press ±. % If you brake, deactivate ESP® or if ESP® intervenes, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deactivated. Function of Active Speed Limit Assist If a change in the speed limit of 12 mph (20 km/h) or more is detected and automatic adoption of speed limits is activated, the new speed limit is automatically adopted as the stored speed (/ page 192). The driven speed is adjusted when the vehicle is level with the traffic sign at the latest. In the case of signs indicating entry into an urban area, the speed is adapted according to the speed permitted within the urban area. The speed limit display in the driver display is always updated when the vehicle is level with the traffic sign. If you are driving on German highways and there is no speed limit, the system uses the speed stored for a stretch of road with no speed limit as the set speed. If you do not alter the stored speed on a stretch of road with no speed limit, the recommended speed of 80 mph (130 km/h) is adopted. If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC has been put into passive mode by pressing the accelera‐ tor pedal, only speed limits which are higher than the set speed are adopted. The maximum permissible speed does not take the road condition and current weather and traf‐ fic conditions into account. Adjust your speed accordingly, when necessary. Driving and parking 191 Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog‐ nize dangers (/ page 176). System limits The system limits of Traffic Sign Assist apply to the detection of traffic signs (/ page 205). Speed limits below 12 mph (20 km/h) are not automatically adopted by the system as the stored speed. Temporary speed restrictions (e.g. for a certain time or due to weather conditions) cannot be properly detected by the system. The maximum permissible speed applying to a vehi‐ cle with a trailer is not detected by the system. Adjust the speed in these situations. & WARNING Risk of accident due to Active Speed Limit Assist adapting the vehicle's speed The speed adopted by Active Speed Limit Assist may be too high or incorrect in some individual cases, such as: R at speed limits below 12 mph (20 km/h) R R # # in wet conditions or in fog when towing a trailer Ensure that the driven speed complies with traffic regulations. Adjust the driving speed to suit current traffic and weather conditions. Function of route-based speed adaptation When Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is acti‐ vated, the vehicle speed will be adapted accord‐ ingly to the route events ahead. Depending on the drive program selected, the vehicle negoti‐ ates a route event ahead in a fuel-saving, com‐ fortable or dynamic manner. When the route event has been passed, the vehicle accelerates again to the stored speed. The set distance to the vehicle in front, vehicles detected ahead and speed restrictions ahead are taken into account. Route-based speed adaptation can be activated in the multimedia system (/ page 192). The following route events are taken into account: R Curves R R R R Roundabouts T-intersections Turns and exits Traffic jams ahead (only with Live Traffic ) Also, the speed is reduced if the turn signal indi‐ cator is switched on and one of the following sit‐ uations is detected: R Turning off at intersections R Driving on slowing-down lanes R Driving on lanes adjacent to slowing-down lanes The driver is responsible for choosing the right speed and observing other road users. This applies in particular to intersections, round‐ abouts and traffic lights, as route-based speed adaptation does not brake the vehicle to a stand‐ still. If a corresponding route event is detected while route guidance is active, the first speed adjust‐ ment is carried out automatically. If the turn sig‐ nal indicator is switched on, the selected route is 192 Driving and parking confirmed and further speed adjustment is acti‐ vated. Speed adaptation is canceled in the following cases: R If the turn signal indicator is switched off before the route event and it is therefore assumed that the route event is not relevant to the driver. R If the driver depresses the accelerator or brake pedal during the process. System limits Route-based speed adaptation does not take right of way regulations into account. The driver is responsible for complying with road traffic regulations and driving at a suitable speed. In difficult conditions, the speed selection made by the system may not always be suitable. This applies to the following situations, for example: R Unclear roads R Road narrowing R Varying maximum permissible speeds in indi‐ vidual lanes, for example at toll stations R Wet road surfaces, snow or ice In these situations the driver must intervene accordingly. & WARNING Risk of accident in spite of route-based speed adaptation Route-based speed adaptation can malfunc‐ tion or be temporarily unavailable in the fol‐ lowing situations: R If the driver does not follow the calcula‐ ted route R If map data is not up-to-date or available R In the event of roadworks R In bad weather or road conditions R If the accelerator pedal is depressed R In the event of electronically displayed speed limitations # Adapt the speed to the traffic situation. Setting Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC driving styles Requirements: R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activa‐ ted. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Driving 5 Active Distance Assist Selecting a driving style Select DYNAMIC SELECT based , Dynamic or Comfort. # Setting speed adaptation Select On Bends etc. or For Limits. When these functions are active, the vehicle speed is adjusted according to a route event ahead or to speed limits detected by Traffic Sign Assist. % When one of the following systems is active, the detected speed can be manually adopted as the speed limit: R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC # Driving and parking 193 R R Cruise control Variable limiter Further information about Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 188). % Further information on speed adaptation (/ page 191). Function of Active Stop-and-Go Assist Active Stop-and-Go Assist helps you when in traffic jams on multi-lane roads with separate roadways by automatically pulling away within up to 60 seconds and with moderate steering maneuvers. It orients itself using the vehicle in front and lane markings. Active Stop-and-Go Assist automatically maintains a safe distance from the vehicle in front and vehicles cutting in. Active Stop-and-Go Assist requires you, as the driver, to keep your hands on the steering wheel at all times so that you are able to intervene at any time to correct the course of the vehicle and keep it in lane. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog‐ nize dangers (/ page 176). Active Stop-and-Go Assist activates automati‐ cally when all of the following conditions are met: R You are in a traffic jam on a freeway or highspeed major road. R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activa‐ ted and active (/ page 188). R Active Steering Assist is activated and active (/ page 195). R You are traveling no faster than 35 mph (60 km/h). When Active Stop-and-Go Assist is active the ¬ status display appears in the driver display. System limits The system limitations of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and Active Steering Assist apply to Active Stop-and-Go Assist (/ page 193). Active Steering Assist Function of Active Steering Assist Active Steering Assist is only available up to a speed of 130 mph (210 km/h). The system helps you to stay in the center of the lane by means of moderate steering interventions. Depending on the speed driven, Active Steering Assist uses the vehicles ahead and lane markings as a refer‐ ence. % Depending on the country, in the lower speed range Active Steering Assist can use the surrounding traffic as a reference. If nec‐ essary, Active Steering Assist can then also provide assistance when driving away from the center of the lane. If the detection of lane markings and vehicles ahead is impaired, Active Steering Assist switches to passive mode. The system provides no support in this case. Permanent status display in the driver dis‐ play Ø Gray: activated and passive Ø Green: activated and active Ø Red, flashing: prompt to the driver to actively confirm or transition from active to passive status, system limit detected 194 Driving and parking % During the transition from active to passive status, the Ø symbol is shown as enlarged and flashing. Once the system is passive, the Ø symbol is shown as gray in the driver display. Contact detection The driver is required to keep their hands on the steering wheel at all times and be able to inter‐ vene at any time to correct the course of the vehicle and keep it in lane. The driver must expect a change from active to passive mode or vice versa at any time. time or has removed their hands from the steer‐ ing wheel, an optical warning is given first. Dis‐ play 1 appears in the driver display. If the driver still does not steer the vehicle, or gives no confirmation to the system, a warning tone sounds in addition to the visual warning mes‐ sage. If the driver does not react to this warning for a considerable period, an emergency stop is initi‐ ated (/ page 195). The warning is not issued or is stopped as soon as the system detects that the driver has touched the steering wheel. Touch detection may be limited or inoperative in the following situations: R The driver is wearing gloves. R There is a steering wheel cover on the steer‐ ing wheel. If Active Steering Assist detects that a system limit has been reached, a visual warning is issued and a warning tone sounds. If the system detects that the driver has not steered the vehicle for a considerable period of Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog‐ nize dangers (/ page 176). System limits Active Steering Assist has a limited steering tor‐ que for lateral guidance. In some cases, the steering intervention is not sufficient to keep the vehicle in the lane. The system may be impaired or may not function in the following instances: R There is poor visibility, e.g. due to snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, greatly varying ambient light or strong shadows on the road. R There is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, direct sunlight or reflections. R Insufficient road illumination. R The windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged or covered in the vicinity of the camera, e.g. by a sticker. R No, or several, unclear lane markings are present for one lane, or the markings change quickly, for example, in a construction area or intersections. Driving and parking 195 R R R R The lane markings are worn away, dark or covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow. If the distance to the vehicle in front is too short and thus the lane markings cannot be detected. The road is narrow and winding. There are obstacles on the lane or projecting out into the lane, such as object markers. The system does not provide assistance in the following conditions: R On very tight curves and when turning. R When crossing intersections. R At roundabouts or toll stations. R When actively changing lane without switch‐ ing on the turn signal indicator. R When the tire pressure is too low. & WARNING Risk of accident if Active Steering Assist unexpectedly stops func‐ tioning If the system limits of Active Steering Assist are reached there is no guarantee that the system will remain active or will keep the vehicle in lane. # Always keep your hands on the steering wheel and observe the traffic carefully. # Always steer the vehicle paying atten‐ tion to traffic conditions. & WARNING Risk of accident if Active Steering Assist unexpectedly intervenes The detection of lane markings and objects may malfunction and cause unexpected steering interventions. # Steer according to traffic conditions. Activating/deactivating Active Steering Assist Requirements: R ESP® is activated, but is not intervening. R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activa‐ ted. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Driving # Select Ø Act. Steering Asst. . Function of Active Emergency Stop Assist Depending on vehicle equipment, Active Emer‐ gency Stop Assist uses touch sensors or detects steering movements when monitoring the steer‐ ing wheel. If the system detects that the driver is no longer holding the steering wheel, it can ini‐ tiate an emergency stop, if necessary. Vehicles without Driving Assistance Pack‐ age: the accelerator and brake pedal are moni‐ tored as well as the steering wheel. 196 Driving and parking Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package: if Active Steering Assist is deactivated, the accel‐ erator and brake pedal are monitored as well as the steering wheel. A warning is issued when the steering wheel is not being held or when a pedal is not depressed, and the vehicle is in danger of leaving the lane. If the system detects that the driver has not steered the vehicle for a considerable period of time or has removed their hands from the steer‐ ing wheel, visual warning 1 is issued. If the driver still does not steer the vehicle, or gives no confirmation to the system, a warning tone sounds in addition to the visual warning mes‐ sage. Also observe the instructions on the contact detection of Active Steering Assist (/ page 193). Active Emergency Stop Assist issues the follow‐ ing warnings in order: R Display message 1 appears in the driver display. R In addition to display 1 a warning tone sounds. R The Beginning Emergency Stop message appears in the driver display, a continuous warning tone sounds, the vehicle no longer accelerates, and there is a slight, repeated tensioning of the seat belt. R The vehicle speed is reduced in increments until it is at a standstill. Sharp brake impul‐ ses are also produced. Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package: depending on the country, a lane change to the adjacent right-hand lane is carried out, if possi‐ ble. % It is only possible to change across one lane and only into the right-hand lane, and not onto the hard shoulder. When automatic braking is initiated, Active Dis‐ tance Assist DISTRONIC is deactivated. Depend‐ ing on the country, the hazard warning light sys‐ tem is switched on. When the vehicle is stationary, the following actions are carried out: R The vehicle is secured with the electric park‐ ing brake. R The vehicle is unlocked. R If possible, an emergency call is placed to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call center. Before automatic braking is initiated, you can cancel Active Emergency Stop Assist by steer‐ ing. You can cancel the intervention by Active Emer‐ gency Stop Assist after automatic braking is ini‐ tiated by one of the following actions: R Accelerating or braking: the emergency stop is canceled, but the warning message, warn‐ ing tone and power steering remain active Driving and parking 197 R Steering: power-assisted steering is can‐ celed, the warning message and warning tone remain active and the vehicle continues to be braked % Active Emergency Stop Assist can initiate an emergency stop a maximum of three times within one driving cycle. Subsequently, Active Steering Assist and Active Emergency Stop Assist are deactivated for that driving cycle. System limits Vehicles without Driving Assistance Pack‐ age: if Active Lane Keeping Assist does not detect lane markings or is deactivated, Active Emergency Stop Assist is not active. Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package: if Active Lane Keeping Assist does not detect lane markings, Active Emergency Stop Assist is not active. For the detection of vehicles and other obsta‐ cles, observe the system limits of the following functions: R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 186) R Active Steering Assist (/ page 193) R Active Lane Change Assist (/ page 197) Active Lane Change Assist Function of Active Lane Change Assist Active Lane Change Assist supports the driver when changing lanes and is activated by indicat‐ ing briefly. For this, the following conditions must be fulfil‐ led: R You are on a freeway or high-speed major road. R The vehicle speed is between approximately 45 mph (70 km/h) and 110 mph (180 km/h). R The neighboring lane is separated by a bro‐ ken lane marking. R R R No vehicle or obstacle is detected in the adjacent lane. Active Lane Change Assist is selected in the multimedia system. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and Active Steering Assist are switched on and active. 198 Driving and parking Display in the driver display in the Assistance menu 1 Green arrow: lane change initiated 2 Red arrow: lane change canceled When Active Lane Change Assist is available, the ± display appears along with green arrows in the driver display. If the system has been activa‐ ted but is not currently available, the ± dis‐ play appears along with gray arrows in the driver display. If no vehicle or obstacle is detected in the adja‐ cent lane and a lane change is permitted, the lane change begins after the driver has indicated briefly. The lane change is shown to the driver with a flashing green arrow next to the ± steering wheel symbol. Green arrow 1 is dis‐ played in the appropriate adjacent lane in the Assistance menu in the driver display. The Lane Change to the Left message, for example, also appears. If a lane change is not possible directly after the driver has activated the turn signal indicator because an obstacle has been detected, for example, the arrow will also flash in green next to the ± steering wheel symbol and the neighboring lane will continue to be monitored. When the lane becomes free, a lane change will be carried out and the Lane Change to the Left message, for example, appears in the driver dis‐ play. If the green arrows stop flashing, the lane change must be activated again. Active Lane Change Assist can be canceled in various situations, including the following: R Change in the surrounding conditions (e.g. detected obstacle). R The driver steers with too much force or in the opposite direction. R The driver moves the turn signal indicator in the opposite direction. R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC or Active Steering Assist is deactivated. R The vehicle cannot make the lane change as planned. Cancellation of Active Lane Change Assist is dis‐ played as follows: R The arrow in the selected direction of travel turns red. R A corresponding message will also appear in the driver display. R In certain circumstances a warning tone sounds. Driving and parking 199 & WARNING Risk of accident when chang‐ ing lane to an occupied adjacent lane Lane Change Assist cannot always clearly detect if the adjacent lane is free. The lane change might be initiated although the adjacent lane is not free. # Before changing lanes, make sure that the neighboring lane is free and there is no danger to other road users. # Monitor the lane change. & WARNING Risk of accident if Lane Change Assist unexpectedly stops func‐ tioning If the system limitations for Lane Change Assist have been reached, there is no guar‐ antee that the system will remain active. Lane Change Assist cannot then assist you by applying steering torque. # Always monitor the lane change and keep your hands on the steering wheel. Observe the traffic conditions and steer and/or brake if necessary. System limits The system limitations of Active Steering Assist apply to Active Lane Change Assist (/ page 193). The system may also be impaired or may not function in the following situations: R The sensors are damaged, covered or dirty (/ page 176). R The exterior lighting shows a defect. R The system does not detect a suitable road, for example, in tight curves. R The vehicle is on a construction site. % The Active Lane Change Assist sensors adjust automatically while a certain distance is being driven after the vehicle has been delivered. Active Lane Change Assist is unavailable or only partially available during this teach-in process, and no arrows are dis‐ played next to the Ø Active Steering Assist symbol. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog‐ nize dangers (/ page 176). Selecting Active Lane Change Assist Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Driving # Select the function. Active Brake Assist Function of Active Brake Assist Active Brake Assist consists of the following functions: R Distance warning function R Autonomous braking function R Situation-dependent braking assistance R Vehicles with Driving Assistance Pack‐ age: Evasive Steering Assist (country-spe‐ cific) Active Brake Assist can help you to minimize the risk of a collision with vehicles, cyclists or 200 Driving and parking pedestrians or to reduce the effects of such a collision. If Active Brake Assist has detected a risk of colli‐ sion, a warning tone sounds and the L dis‐ tance warning lamp lights up. In the Assistance menu, an insufficient distance 1 to the vehicle in front is displayed in red. If you further reduce the distance, the vehicle in front is also highlighted in red. When the system detects a risk of collision, red radar waves 2 appear in front of the vehicle. Vehicles with PRE-SAFE®: depending on the country, an additional haptic warning occurs in the form of slight, repeated tensioning of the seat belt. % Vehicles with active ambient lighting: if Warning Support is activated, the Active Brake Assist warning is also accompanied by ambient lighting (/ page 130). If you do not react to the warning, autonomous braking can be initiated in critical situations. In particularly critical situations, Active Brake Assist can also initiate autonomous braking directly. In this case, the warning lamp and warn‐ ing tone occur simultaneously with the braking application. If you apply the brake yourself in a critical situa‐ tion or apply the brake during autonomous brak‐ ing, situation-dependent braking assistance occurs. The brake pressure increases up to max‐ imum full-stop braking if necessary. If autonomous braking or situation-dependent braking assistance has occurred, pop up 1 appears in the driver's display and then automat‐ ically goes out after a short time. If the autonomous braking function or the situa‐ tion-dependent braking assistance is triggered, additional preventive measures for occupant protection (PRE-SAFE®) may also be initiated. Driving and parking 201 & WARNING Risk of an accident caused by limited detection performance of Active Brake Assist Active Brake Assist cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic situa‐ tions. In such cases, Active Brake Assist might: R Give a warning or brake without reason R Not give a warning or not brake Active Brake Assist is only an aid. The driver is responsible for maintaining a sufficiently safe distance to the vehicle in front, vehicle speed and for braking in good time. # Always pay careful attention to the traf‐ fic situation; do not rely on Active Brake Assist alone. # Be prepared to brake or swerve if nec‐ essary. % If Active Brake Assist is deactivated, æ appears in the driver's display. If the system is unavailable or the functions are restricted, Ä appears. Also observe the system limits of Active Brake Assist. The individual subfunctions are available in the following speed ranges: The distance warning function issues a warning in the following situations: R From approximately 4 mph (7 km/h) if your vehicle is critically close to a vehicle, cyclist or pedestrian, you will hear an intermittent warning tone and the L distance warning lamp lights up in the driver's display. Vehicles with PRE-SAFE®: depending on the country, an additional haptic warning occurs in the form of slight, repeated ten‐ sioning of the seat belt. If possible, brake immediately or maneuver to avoid the obstacle. Distance warning function The distance warning function can aid you in the following situations with an intermittent warning tone and a warning lamp: Vehicles without Driving Assistance Package: At speeds up to approximately 155 mph (250 km/h) when approaching vehicles ahead. R At speeds up to approximately 50 mph (80 km/h) when approaching stationary vehi‐ cles, pedestrians walking in the direction of travel and cyclists ahead R At speeds up to approximately 43 mph (70 km/h) when approaching crossing pedestrians and cyclists. R At speeds up to approximately 37 mph (60 km/h) when approaching stationary pedestrians and cyclists. R Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package: At speeds up to approximately 155 mph (250 km/h) when approaching vehicles ahead. R At speeds up to approximately 75 mph (120 km/h) when approaching crossing vehi‐ cles, pedestrians and cyclists. R 202 Driving and parking R R R At speeds up to approximately 62 mph (100 km/h) when approaching stationary vehicles. At speeds up to approximately 50 mph (80 km/h) when approaching cyclists ahead. At speeds up to approximately 43 mph (70 km/h) when approaching stationary pedestrians and cyclists. Autonomous braking function If the vehicle is traveling at speeds above approximately 4 mph (7 km/h), the autonomous braking function may intervene in the following situations: Vehicles without Driving Assistance Package: R At speeds up to approximately 155 mph (250 km/h) when approaching vehicles ahead. R At speeds up to approximately 50 mph (80 km/h) when approaching cyclists ahead, pedestrians walking in the direction of travel and stationary vehicles. R At speeds up to approximately 43 mph (70 km/h) when approaching crossing pedestrians and cyclists. Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package: R At speeds up to approximately 155 mph (250 km/h) when approaching vehicles ahead. R At speeds up to approximately 75 mph (120 km/h) when approaching crossing vehi‐ cles, pedestrians and cyclists. R At speeds up to approximately 62 mph (100 km/h) when approaching stationary vehicles. R At speeds up to approximately 50 mph (80 km/h) when approaching cyclists ahead. R At speeds up to approximately 43 mph (70 km/h) when approaching stationary pedestrians and cyclists. Situation-dependent braking assistance If the vehicle is traveling at speeds above approximately 4 mph (7 km/h), situationdependent braking assistance may intervene in the following situations. Vehicles without Driving Assistance Package: R At speeds up to approximately 155 mph (250 km/h) when approaching vehicles ahead. R At speeds up to approximately 50 mph (80 km/h) when approaching cyclists ahead, pedestrians walking in the direction of travel and stationary vehicles. R At speeds up to approximately 43 mph (70 km/h) when approaching crossing pedestrians and cyclists. R At speeds up to approximately 37 mph (60 km/h) when approaching stationary pedestrians and cyclists. Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package: R At speeds up to approximately 155 mph (250 km/h) when approaching vehicles ahead. R At speeds up to approximately 75 mph (120 km/h) when approaching crossing vehi‐ cles, pedestrians and cyclists. Driving and parking 203 R R R At speeds up to approximately 62 mph (100 km/h) when approaching stationary vehicles. At speeds up to approximately 50 mph (80 km/h) when approaching cyclists ahead. At speeds up to approximately 43 mph (70 km/h) when approaching stationary pedestrians and cyclists. Canceling a brake application of Active Brake Assist You can cancel a brake application of Active Brake Assist at any time by: R Fully depressing the accelerator pedal or with kickdown. R Releasing the brake pedal. Active Brake Assist may cancel the brake appli‐ cation when one of the following conditions is fulfilled: R You maneuver to avoid the obstacle R There is no longer a risk of collision R An obstacle is no longer detected in front of your vehicle Reaction to oncoming road users (only vehi‐ cles with Driving Assistance Package) Active Brake Assist can also react to detected oncoming road users: R Reaction up to speeds of approximately 62 mph (100 km/h) R Warning for oncoming road users through acoustic warning and warning lamp R Autonomous braking application in order to reduce the severity of an accident Evasive Steering Assist (only vehicles with Driving Assistance Package) & WARNING Risk of accident despite Eva‐ sive Steering Assist Evasive Steering Assist cannot always recog‐ nize objects or complex traffic situations clearly. Moreover, the steering support provided by Evasive Steering Assist is not sufficient to avoid a collision. # # # # Always pay careful attention to the traf‐ fic situation; do not rely on Evasive Steering Assist alone. Be prepared to brake or swerve if nec‐ essary. End the support by actively steering in non-critical situations. Drive at an appropriate speed if there are pedestrians close to the path of your vehicle. Evasive Steering Assist has the following charac‐ teristics: R Detection of pedestrians, cyclists and vehi‐ cles. R Assistance through power-assisted steering if it detects a swerving maneuver. R Activation by an abrupt steering movement during a swerving maneuver. R Assistance during swerving and straightening of the vehicle. 204 Driving and parking R Reaction from a speed of approximately 12 mph (20 km/h) up to a speed of approx‐ imately 68 mph (110 km/h). The steering support of Evasive Steering Assist can be canceled at any time by counter steering. System limits Full system performance is not yet available for a few seconds after switching on the vehicle or after driving off. If the system is unavailable or the functions are restricted, the Ä warning lamp appears in the driver's display. The system may be impaired or may not func‐ tion, particularly in the following situations: R In snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, if there is glare, in direct sunlight or in greatly varying ambient light. R If the sensors are dirty, fogged up, damaged or covered (/ page 176). R If the sensors are impaired due to interfer‐ ence from other radar sources, e.g. strong radar reflections in parking garages. R R R R R R R R If a loss of tire pressure or a faulty tire has been detected and displayed. In complex traffic situations where objects cannot always be clearly identified. If pedestrians, cyclists or vehicles move quickly into the sensor detection range. If road users are hidden by other objects or are located close to other objects. If the typical outline of a pedestrian or cyclist cannot be distinguished from the back‐ ground. If a pedestrian or cyclist is not detected as such, e.g. due to special clothing or other objects. If the driver's seat belt is not fastened. On curves with a tight radius. % The Active Brake Assist sensors adjust auto‐ matically while a certain distance is being driven after the vehicle has been delivered. Active Brake Assist is unavailable or only partially available during the teach-in proc‐ ess. Setting Active Brake Assist Requirements: R The vehicle is switched on. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Collision Avoidance 5 Active Brake Assist # Select the desired setting. Deactivating Active Brake Assist % It is recommended that you always leave Active Brake Assist activated. # Select Off. The distance warning function, the autono‐ mous braking function and Evasive Steering Assist are deactivated. The system is switched on again the next time the vehicle is started. % If Active Brake Assist is deactivated, the æ symbol appears in the status bar of the multifunction display. Driving and parking 205 Traffic Sign Assist Function of Traffic Sign Assist Traffic Sign Assist detects traffic signs with the multifunction camera and compares this with information in the digital navigation map. It assists you by displaying detected speed limits and overtaking restrictions in the driver display and in the Head-up Display. The system can issue a warning when you exceed the maximum permissible speed. Vehicles with the Driving Assistance Pack‐ age: in some countries, the system can provide you with further functions and can warn you when you are approaching pedestrian crossings or when you are about to drive past stop signs or red lights unintentionally. The camera also detects and analyzes traffic signs with a restriction indicated by an additional sign (e.g. when wet). Traffic Sign Assist portrays only selected signs in the driver display. Actual traffic signs and speed limits have priority over traffic signs and speed limits shown in the driver display. Also observe the following information: R Select a speed adapted to the traffic, sur‐ roundings and weather conditions R Observe actual traffic signs R Observe applicable traffic rules and regula‐ tions Displays in the driver display Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog‐ nize dangers (/ page 176). 1 Permissible speed 2 Permissible speed when there is a restriction 3 Additional sign with restriction The system can show up to two traffic signs in the driver display simultaneously. The system always prioritizes displaying speed limits. Up to one traffic sign with a maximum permissible speed can be shown in the Head-up Display. If two speed signs are shown in the driver display, for example when speed limits are detected, the value of left-hand speed limit 1 is transmitted to the limiter, cruise control or Active Distance 206 Driving and parking Assist DISTRONIC for adoption and is shown in the Head-up Display. Examples of traffic signs which can be displayed Traffic Sign Assist can detect and display follow‐ ing traffic signs 1: R Speed limits R End of the speed limit R Overtaking restrictions R Play streets R Recommended speeds Traffic Sign Assist can detect following addi‐ tional signs 3 and, if necessary, analyze the relevance of the restrictions using other vehicle sensors: R When wet R Slippery road surfaces R In fog R Temporary restrictions R Exits R Restrictions for vehicle/trailer combinations Traffic Sign Assist also uses data from the digital street map in the navigation system. When you leave or enter a municipality or change roads, on a freeway exit or access road for example, or after you turn at an intersection, the display in the driver display can thus be updated without a traffic sign having been detected. If Traffic Sign Assist cannot determine the cur‐ rently applicable maximum permissible speed (e.g. due to missing signs), the following display appears in the driver display: Traffic Sign Assist is not available in all coun‐ tries. If the vehicle is in a country where Traffic Sign Assist is not supported, this is displayed continuously. % Also observe the information on display mes‐ sages in Traffic Sign Assist (/ page 367). Warning when the maximum permissible speed is exceeded The system can warn you if you unintentionally exceed the maximum permissible speed. To do this, you can specify in the multimedia system by how much the maximum permissible speed can be exceeded before a warning is issued. You can set the warning to visual only (the traffic sign flashes three times in the driver display) or visual and acoustic, including a warning tone. Additional functions of Traffic Sign Assist (country-specific) Warning for no-entry signs: Traffic Sign Assist can warn you if you drive the wrong way down a Driving and parking 207 section of road, for example on freeway access roads or one-way streets. Warning at pedestrian crossings (vehicles with the Driving Assistance Package): if you approach pedestrian crossings, provided that pedestrians are in the danger zone or are moving towards it, Traffic Sign Assist can warn you up to a speed of approximately 44 mph (70 km/h). Warning at stop signs (vehicles with the Driving Assistance Package): Traffic Sign Assist can warn you up to a speed of approx‐ imately 44 mph (70 km/h) if you are about to drive past a stop sign unintentionally. For this to be possible, the signs must be clear, for example if the system detects more than one stop sign, or a stop sign can be confirmed using the digital navigation map. No warning can be issued if sev‐ eral different signs with differing information have been detected. Warning at red lights (vehicles with the Driv‐ ing Assistance Package): Traffic Sign Assist can warn you up to a speed of approximately 44 mph (70 km/h) if you are about to drive through a red light unintentionally. The following conditions must be fulfilled: Several traffic lights have been detected. R All traffic lights detected are red. R At least one of the red traffic lights detected is on the front passenger side beside the vehicle's own lane. R The traffic lights are in the following sequence (from top to bottom): red, yellow, green. R R % If the function is available, you can activate or deactivate the warnings at pedestrian crossings, stop signs and red lights in the Traffic Sign Assist menu under Further Warnings (/ page 208). System limits The system may be impaired or may not function particularly in the following situations: R If visibility is poor, e.g. due to insufficient illu‐ mination of the road, highly variable shade conditions, rain, snow, fog, swirling dust or heavy spray. R R R R R R R If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, direct sunlight or reflections. If the windshield in the area of the multifunc‐ tion camera is dirty, or if the camera is fog‐ ged up, damaged or covered. If traffic signs are difficult to detect, e.g. because they are dirty, covered, faded, cov‐ ered with ice, damaged, badly positioned, poorly lit or twisted. Active traffic signs with LED displays may not be detected correctly or at all due to techni‐ cal factors, such as transmission frequency. If the information on the navigation system's digital map is incorrect, incomplete or out of date. If signs or the road layout is ambiguous, e.g. traffic signs in roadworks, at exits and ramps, in neighboring lanes or parallel roads. If signs do not conform to the standard. If signs or road layouts are specific to the country and deviate from the route guidance in the navigation system, e.g. at or beyond construction sites. 208 Driving and parking R R After sharp turns and tight curves, when traf‐ fic signs are outside the camera's field of vision. If you overtake vehicles with traffic signs which are affixed or attached to them. Activating or deactivating further functions of Traffic Sign Assist # Activate or deactivate Further Warnings. The available functions are activated or deac‐ tivated. Setting Traffic Sign Assist Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Assistance 5 Traffic Sign Assist Setting the type of warning for further func‐ tions # Select ´ next to Further Warnings. # Select Visual & Audible or Visual. Activating or deactivating the speed warning # Activate or deactivate Speed Limit Warning. Traffic light view Setting the type of warning # Select ´ next to Speed Limit Warning. # Select Visual & Audible or Visual. Setting the warning threshold This value determines the speed at which a warning is issued when exceeded. # Set the desired speed under Warning Threshold. Information about the traffic light view The traffic light view supports the driver when waiting in front of a red light by displaying the camera image on the central display. The cam‐ era image is displayed when the driver is the first vehicle in front of the red light and faded out when the vehicle drives off. Displaying traffic light view Requirements: R The Traffic Light View option is switched on. R A traffic light view is available. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Assistance 5 Traffic Light View % This function is not available in all countries. If the vehicle is in first position at a traffic light, the camera image with traffic light view is shown on the central display. When the vehicle pulls away, the camera image is faded out. # Activate D or deactivate E Traffic Light View. Using other available functions Select Z. # Select On Request or Automatic. If On Request is set and a traffic light view is available, the Tap Here for Traffic Light View message is displayed. The camera image is shown after confirmation of the message. When Automatic is set, the camera image is automatically displayed when the traffic light view is available. # Driving and parking 209 Traffic Light Information service & WARNING Risk of an accident or injury due to distraction, incorrect or missing data The traffic light information display is an aid and cannot replace the observation of the actual driving situation. # Keep the actual traffic situation con‐ stantly in view when approaching a traf‐ fic light and when changing lanes. # Avoid prolonged viewing of the Instru‐ ment Display and Head-up Display. The traffic light icon and countdown of remain‐ ing time 1 until the next green phase are shown in the driver display. Example view on the driver display The display is hidden about five seconds before the traffic lights change to green. % The display also goes out in the following cases: R When turning off before the intersection into a cross or side street R When turning before the intersection % The direction arrows are displayed depend‐ ing on the following functions: R A turn signal is set R A lane is recommended during active route guidance If neither function is active, the remaining time until the next green phase for the lane straight ahead is displayed. % Use of the traffic light information service requires the regular transmission of vehicle positions and driving directions to Mercedes-Benz. The data is immediately anonymized by Mercedes-Benz and forwar‐ ded to the provider of the traffic light infor‐ mation service. The vehicle positions and driving directions are deleted after a very short time (a few seconds) and are not per‐ manently saved. If you do not want to transmit the vehicle positions and driving directions, you have the following options: R You deactivate the service in the Mercedes me portal. R You have the service deactivated at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. % This traffic light information service is only available in certain cities and regions. 210 Driving and parking The function is supported under the following conditions: R The vehicle is equipped with a multimedia system featuring navigation and a communi‐ cation module with an activated, integrated SIM card. R You have a user account for the Mercedes me Portal. R The vehicle has been connected with the user account. R The navigation services option is available, subscribed to and activated in the Mercedes me Portal. R The traffic light data service is within the scope of the navigation service. The current vehicle position and the direction of travel are transmitted via the communication module and aligned with the data from the traf‐ fic light data service provider. The provider gath‐ ers data from traffic lights which transmit their changing phases. When the vehicle approaches an intersection with networked traffic lights, data is transmitted to the vehicle. A set turn signal left or right and lane recom‐ mendations during active route guidance are taken into account for the display. The service is for information purposes only and is not linked to any other vehicle functions, sys‐ tems or components. Please note that the dis‐ played data is not available in all traffic areas and may be incorrect. Certain light signal systems automatically adapt their switching times to the current traffic situa‐ tion. This can lead to a sudden change in the countdown display. The driver display is shown after selecting the Assistancemenu . If another menu is selected, the traffic light countdown is not displayed. Also observe the following information: R Select a speed adapted to the traffic, sur‐ roundings and weather conditions R Observe actual traffic signs R Observe applicable traffic rules and regula‐ tions Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog‐ nize dangers. System limits The display does not appear in the following sit‐ uations, for example: R There is no traffic light data available. R The time remaining until the next green phase is less than ten seconds. R Emergency vehicles or local public transport are located in the vicinity of the intersection. R The data transmission from the vehicle has been interrupted. R Light signal systems are located in a con‐ struction site area or are being maintained. R The light signal system is malfunctioning. R The subscription to the service has expired. Driving and parking 211 Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist Function of Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist with exit warning Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist use radar sensors to monitor the area up to 130 ft (40 m) behind and 10 ft (3 m) next to your vehicle. The system can detect vehicles traveling from speeds of approximately 8 mph (12 km/h) and issue a warning if they move into the monitoring range. Status display in the driver's display ¸ Gray: the system is activated but inopera‐ tive. ¸ Green: the system is activated and opera‐ tional. Driver's display in the Assistance menu If a vehicle is detected at speeds above approx‐ imately 8 mph (12 km/h) and this vehicle enters the monitoring range immediately afterwards, the red warning lamp in the corresponding out‐ side mirror lights up red. In the Assistance menu, the lamp in outside mirror 1 also lights up red, and the lane in which the vehicle is detected is hatched out. If a vehicle is detected in the monitoring range and you switch on the turn signal indicator in the corresponding direction, a double warning tone sounds once and the warning lamp flashes red in the corresponding outside mirror. Red radar waves 2 are displayed next to your vehicle in the Assistance graphic. If the turn signal indicator remains on, the dis‐ play in the outside mirror flashes for all other detected vehicles, but no further warning tone sounds. If you overtake a vehicle quickly, no warning is given. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog‐ nize dangers (/ page 176). & WARNING Risk of accident despite Blind Spot Assist Blind Spot Assist does not react to vehicles approaching and overtaking you at a greatly different speed. Blind Spot Assist cannot warn drivers in this situation. # Always pay careful attention to the traf‐ fic situation and maintain a safe dis‐ tance at the side of the vehicle. 212 Driving and parking Exit warning The exit warning is an additional function of Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist and can warn vehicle occupants attempting to leave a stationary vehicle about approaching vehicles. & WARNING Risk of accident despite exit warning The exit warning neither reacts to stationary objects nor to persons or road users approaching you at a greatly differing speed. The exit warning cannot warn drivers in these situations. # Always pay particular attention to the traffic situation when opening the doors and make sure there is sufficient clear‐ ance. If a vehicle is detected in the monitoring range, the red warning lamp lights up in the corre‐ sponding outside mirror. If a vehicle occupant pulls the door handle on the side of the warning, a warning tone sounds twice and the ambient lighting in the respective door and the warning lamps in the correspond‐ ing outside mirror flash red. % Vehicles with ambient lighting: the Warning Support of the ambient lighting can be activated and deactivated (/ page 130). % The warning assistance can differ depending on the equipment and may vary according to the setting. The exit warning is only available when Blind Spot Assist is activated and up to a maximum of three minutes after the vehicle has been switched off. The exit warning is no longer avail‐ able once the warning lamp in the outside mirror flashes three times. The exit warning is only an aid and not a substi‐ tute for the attention of vehicle occupants. The responsibility for opening and closing the doors and for leaving the vehicle remains with the vehi‐ cle occupants. System limits Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist may be limited in the following situations, in par‐ ticular: R If there is dirt on the sensors or the sensors are obscured R In poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or snow R If there are narrow vehicles, e.g. bicycles or motorbikes R If the road has very wide or narrow lanes R If vehicles are not driving in the middle of their lane Warnings may be issued in error when driving close to crash barriers or similar continuous lane borders. Always make sure that there is suffi‐ cient distance to the side for other traffic or obstacles. Warnings may be interrupted when driving along‐ side long vehicles, for example trucks, for a pro‐ longed time. Driving and parking 213 Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist are not operational when reverse gear is engaged. Additionally, the exit warning may be limited in the following situations: R When the sensors are covered by adjacent vehicles in narrow parking spaces R When people approach the vehicle R In the event of stationary or slowly moving objects Function of the brake application of Active Blind Spot Assist % The brake application function is only availa‐ ble for vehicles with a Driving Assistance Package. If Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of a side impact in the monitoring range, a course-cor‐ recting brake application is carried out. This is designed to help you avoid a collision. The course-correcting brake application is availa‐ ble in the speed range between approximately 20 mph (30 km/h) and 125 mph (200 km/h). & WARNING Risk of accident despite brake application of Active Blind Spot Assist # Always pay careful attention to the traf‐ fic situation and maintain a safe dis‐ tance at the side of the vehicle. A course-correcting brake application cannot always prevent a collision. # Always steer, brake or accelerate your‐ self, especially if Active Blind Spot Assist warns you or makes a coursecorrecting brake application. # Always maintain a safe distance at the sides. & WARNING Risk of accident despite Active Blind Spot Assist Active Blind Spot Assist does not react in the following situations: R If you overtake vehicles at a high speed. R If vehicles approach and overtake you at a greatly different speed. Active Blind Spot Assist may not give warn‐ ings or intervene in such situations. If a course-correcting brake application occurs, the red warning lamp flashes in the outside mir‐ ror and a warning tone sounds. In addition, dis‐ play 1 indicating the danger of a side collision appears in the driver's display. In rare cases, the system may make an inappro‐ priate brake application. This brake application may be interrupted at any time if you steer slightly in the opposite direction or accelerate. 214 Driving and parking System limits Either a course-correcting brake application appropriate to the driving situation, or none at all, may occur especially in the following situa‐ tions: R Vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crash barriers, are located on both sides of your vehicle. R A vehicle approaches too closely on the side. R You have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds. R You brake or accelerate significantly. R A driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP® or Active Brake Assist. R ESP® is deactivated. R A loss of tire pressure or a faulty tire is detected. Activating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Collision Avoidance # Select Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist. # Select On or Off. Active Lane Keeping Assist Function of Active Lane Keeping Assist Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in front of your vehicle by means of the multifunc‐ tion camera (/ page 176) and can warn you before you leave your lane unintentionally. The system can guide you back into your lane through a course-correcting steering interven‐ tion and additionally warns you with vibration pulses in the steering wheel. Active Lane Keep‐ ing Assist is available in the speed range between 37 mph (60 km/h) and 124 mph (200 km/h). The system can intervene in the following situa‐ tions: R Active Lane Keeping Assist detects a lane marking. R One of your front wheels goes over a lane marking. If you activate the turn signal indicator, a steer‐ ing intervention does not occur on the corre‐ sponding side. If you leave the lane without activating the turn signal indicator, but danger of a collision with a moving obstacle is detected in your lane, a steer‐ ing intervention does not occur. Vehicles with Blind Spot Assist or Driving Assistance Package: if the system detects an obstacle, such as another vehicle in the adjacent lane, a steering intervention will occur regard‐ less of the turn signal indicator. Driving and parking 215 ous lane markings or only continuous lane mark‐ ings (/ page 216). Display 1 will appear in the driver display and a warning tone will sound in the following situa‐ tions: R A steering intervention by Active Lane Keep‐ ing Assist lasts longer than approximately ten seconds. R The system carries out two or more steering interventions within approximately three minutes without any steering intervention from the driver. In the Active Lane Keeping Assist settings, you can set the sensitivity of the system and set the level of support. Additionally, you can set whether the system should react to discontinu‐ Status displays for Active Lane Keeping Assist ï White: Active Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated. ï Yellow: there is a malfunction. Please also observe the display messages. ð gray: Active Lane Keeping Assist is acti‐ vated, but not operating. ð Green: Active Lane Keeping Assist is activated and operating. If the system is operational on only one side, the lane marking is shown in green on the corre‐ sponding side. ð Red: Active Lane Keeping Assist has gui‐ ded you back into your lane with a course-correcting steering intervention. The status display will flash if there is also a haptic warning in the steering wheel. The lane marking is shown in red only on the side for which there is a warning. Vehicles without Driving Assistance Package: if both lane markings are simultaneously shown in red in the status display, Active Lane Keeping Assist has initiated an emergency stop (/ page 195). Active Lane Change Assist display in the "Assistance" menu If the front wheel of the vehicle drives over a detected lane marking, this will be highlighted red in the Assistance menu in the driver display. 216 Driving and parking % Vehicles with active ambient lighting: if Warning Support is activated, the Active Lane Keeping Assist warning is also accom‐ panied by ambient lighting (/ page 130). System limits In the following situations, no lane-correcting steering intervention occurs but rather a warning in the steering wheel, depending on the situa‐ tion: R You clearly and actively steer, brake or accel‐ erate. R If a driving safety system intervenes, such as ESP®, Active Brake Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist. R You have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds or high rates of accel‐ eration. R When ESP® is deactivated. R If a loss of tire pressure or a defective tire has been detected and displayed. The system may be impaired or may not function particularly in the following situations: R If there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insuffi‐ cient illumination of the road, highly variable shade conditions, rain, snow, fog or heavy spray. R If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the sun or reflections. R If the windshield in the area of the multifunc‐ tion camera is dirty, or if the camera is fog‐ ged up, damaged or covered. R If there are no lane markings, or several unclear lane markings are present for one lane, e.g. around roadworks. R If the lane markings are worn, dark or cov‐ ered. R If the distance to the vehicle in front is too short and thus the lane markings cannot be detected. R If the lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes branch off, cross one another or merge. R If the road is very narrow and winding. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recog‐ nize dangers (/ page 176). Activating/deactivating Active Lane Keeping Assist Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Collision Avoidance 5 Active Lane Keeping Assist # Switch the function on or off. Alternatively, Active Lane Keeping Assist can be activated and deactivated in the Favorites menu. % After starting the vehicle, the settings are country-specific. Setting Active Lane Keeping Assist Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Collision Avoidance 5 Active Lane Keeping Assist Setting the sensitivity Select ´. # Driving and parking 217 # Select Early, Med. or Late. The last selected setting will be adopted the next time the vehicle is started. % The standard setting for this function is dependent on the country. Activating or deactivating assistance on dis‐ continuous lane markings # Select Advanced Support. The last selected setting will be adopted the next time the vehicle is started. % The standard setting for this function is dependent on the country. % This function must be activated in vehicles without Driving Assistance Package, so that Emergency Stop Assist is fully available. Further information on Emergency Stop Assist (/ page 195) Rear view camera Function of the rear view camera The rear view camera monitors the area behind your vehicle. When you engage reverse gear, the image from the rear view camera is automati‐ cally shown in the central display. The rear view camera is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe maneuvering and parking remains with you. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects etc., in the maneuvering area while maneuvering and park‐ ing. % The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a mirror image, as in the inside rearview mir‐ ror. Vehicles without Parking Package The following camera views are available in the multimedia system: Standard view 1 Guide lines at a distance of approximately 1.6 ft (0.5 m), 3.3 ft (1.0 m), 5 ft (1.5 m) and 9.9 ft (3.0 m) from the rear area 2 Path marking the course the tires will take with the current steering wheel angle (dynamic) 218 Driving and parking 3 Driven surface depending on the current steering wheel angle (dynamic) 4 Guide line at a distance of approximately 1.0 ft (0.3 m) from the rear area Wide-angle view Pedestrian braking function % This function is only available in vehicles without the Parking Package. Vehicles with the Parking Package are equipped with maneuvering assistant functions (/ page 234). The pedestrian braking function can prevent col‐ lisions with pedestrians when the vehicle is backing up at slow speeds. If the rear view cam‐ era detects a person in the vehicle path, the vehicle can be braked to a standstill. The pedestrian braking function can intervene under the following conditions: R The vehicle is backing up at a speed below 9 mph (15 km/h). R The camera image is shown in the central display. The function is automatically active when the rear view camera is switched on and cannot be deactivated separately . If automatic braking is triggered, the following symbol appears in red in the camera image: % If the function is not available, the same symbol appears in gray. The pedestrian braking function is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the sur‐ roundings. The responsibility for safe maneuver‐ ing and parking remains with you. Make sure that no persons, animals or objects etc., are in the maneuvering range. & WARNING Risk of accident caused by limited detection of the pedestrian brak‐ ing function The pedestrian braking function cannot always clearly detect people. Other obstacles are not detected by the function. In these cases, the function may brake unnecessarily or not brake at all. # Always pay careful attention to the traf‐ fic situation; do not rely on the pedes‐ trian braking function alone. # Be ready to brake. Driving and parking 219 In the following situations, the pedestrian brak‐ ing function is not available: R On inclines R If the rear view camera is not operational 6 Guide lines at a distance of approximately 1.6 ft (0.5 m), 3.3 ft (1.0 m), 5 ft (1.5 m) and 9.9 ft (3.0 m) from the rear area 7 Path marking the course the tires will take with the current steering wheel angle (dynamic) 8 Driven surface depending on the current steering wheel angle (dynamic) 9 Guide line at a distance of approximately 1.0 ft (0.3 m) from the rear area % Please also note the system limits of the rear view camera at the end of the section. Vehicles with Parking Package % When Active Parking Assist is active, lanes 7 are displayed in green (/ page 229). Camera Views menu in the 9.5'' driver's dis‐ play (top view) 1 2 3 4 5 Camera Views menu in the 11.9'' driver's display (top view) Parking Assistance menu Rear view camera with top view Wide-angle view Activates/deactivates Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 228) Warning display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 225) 220 Driving and parking Wide-angle view (example in the 11.9" driver's display) System limits If the system is not ready for operation, the System Inoperative message appears in the central display. The rear view camera will not function or will only partially function in the following situations: R You are driving forwards at a speed greater than approximately 10 mph (16 km/h). R The trunk lid is open. R The weather conditions are poor, e.g. heavy rain, snow, fog, storm or spray. R The ambient light conditions are poor, e.g. at night or if light is shining into the camera. R The camera lens is obstructed, dirty or fog‐ ged up. Observe the notes on cleaning the rear view camera (/ page 298). R The camera or rear of your vehicle is dam‐ aged. In this case, have the camera and its position and setting checked at a qualified specialist workshop. R The detection range is limited by additional vehicle attachments at the rear, such as a license plate bracket or bicycle rack. Also observe the information on vehicle sensors and cameras (/ page 176). % Do not use the rear view camera in these types of situations. You could otherwise injure others or collide with objects when parking the vehicle. % The contrast of the display may be impaired by direct sunlight or by other light sources, e.g. when driving out of a garage. In this case, pay particular attention. % Have the display repaired or replaced if, for example, pixel errors considerably restrict its use. 360° camera Function of the surround view camera The surround view camera is a system that con‐ sists of four cameras which cover the immediate surroundings of the vehicle. The cameras assist you when you are parking, for example, or at exits with reduced visibility. The surround view camera includes the following cameras and evaluates their images: R Rear view camera R Front camera R Two side cameras in the outside mirrors Driving and parking 221 The cameras are only an aid and may show a dis‐ torted view of obstacles, show them incorrectly or not show them at all. They are not a substi‐ tute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe maneuvering and parking remains with you. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects etc., in the maneu‐ vering area while maneuvering and parking. Menu overview Camera Views Camera Views menu in the 9.5'' driver display 1 2 3 4 5 Camera Views menu in the 11.9" driver dis‐ play Menu Parking Assistance Top view with image from the front camera Top view with image from the rear view cam‐ era 3D view, left-hand side of the vehicle 3D view, right-hand side of the vehicle 222 Driving and parking 6 3D auto view 7 To activate/deactivate Parking Assist Function of the guide lines PARKTRONIC (/ page 228) 8 To set the GPS activation point 9 To switch between standard and wide-angle % When Active Parking Assist is active, lanes and guide lines are displayed in green instead of yellow (/ page 229). Top view with image from the front or rear view camera If you have activated the function, the image from the rear view camera is automatically dis‐ played on the central display when reverse gear is selected . view % In all views, the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC warning display is shown (/ page 225). 1 Guide lines at a distance of approximately 1.6 ft (0.5 m), 3.3 ft (1.0 m), 5 ft (1.5 m) and 9.9 ft (3.0 m) from the rear area 2 Path marking the course the tires will take with the current steering wheel angle (dynamic) 3 Driven surface depending on the current steering wheel angle (dynamic) 4 Guide line at a distance of approximately 1.0 ft (0.3 m) from the rear area 1 Warning display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 225) 2 Your vehicle from above 3 Lane indicating the route the vehicle will take at the current steering angle Driving and parking 223 3D view, left/right-hand side of the vehicle * NOTE Risk of accident due to objects being severely distorted in the display or not displayed at all Due to the projection of the cameras, objects in the 3D views may be severely dis‐ torted when displayed or not displayed at all. # Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects etc. in the maneu‐ vering area while maneuvering and parking. 1 Display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 225) In the 3D view, left-/right-hand side of the vehi‐ cle, the virtual camera moves to the respective side of the vehicle. When you change the trans‐ mission position, the view is automatically adap‐ ted. 3D auto view % The area behind the vehicle is not displayed as a mirror image as is usual in the 3D views. 1 Display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 225) 2 Guide lines In the 3D auto view, the virtual camera moves to the standard perspective, facing forward from the rear above the roof. The view changes auto‐ matically when approaching obstacles. If you touch the touchscreen, the view changes to 3D view with free rotation. You can turn, tilt and zoom the views by touch. 224 Driving and parking Wide-angle view 1 Display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (/ page 225) 2 To switch between standard and wide-angle view System limits If the system is not ready for operation, the System Inoperative message appears on the central display. The surround view camera will not function or will only partially function in the following situa‐ tions: R You are driving forwards at a speed greater than approximately 10 mph (16 km/h). R The doors are open. R An outside mirror is not completely folded out. R The trunk lid is open. R The weather conditions are poor, e.g. heavy rain, snow, fog, storm or spray. R The ambient light conditions are poor, e.g. at night or if light is shining into the camera. R The camera lens is obstructed, dirty or fog‐ ged up. R If cameras or vehicle components in which the cameras are installed are damaged. In this event, have the cameras, their positions and their setting checked at a qualified spe‐ cialist workshop. % Do not use the surround view camera under such circumstances. You could otherwise injure others or collide with objects when parking the vehicle. For technical reasons, the standard height of the vehicle may be altered if the vehicle is carrying a heavy load and can result in inaccuracies in the guide lines and in the display of the generated images. The field of vision and other functions of the camera system may be restricted due to addi‐ tional attachments on the vehicle (e.g. license plate bracket, bicycle rack). % The contrast of the display may be impaired by abrupt, direct sunlight or by other light sources, e.g. when driving out of a garage. In this case, pay particular attention. % Have the display repaired or replaced if, for example, pixel errors considerably restrict its use. See the notes on cleaning the surround view camera (/ page 298). Driving and parking 225 Calling up the surround view camera views using the button Selecting a view for the surround view cam‐ era (reverse gear) # Engage reverse gear. # Select the desired view in the multimedia system (/ page 220). Opening the camera cover of the rear view camera Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Camera # Select Open Camera Cover. % The camera cover closes automatically after some time or after the vehicle is switched on or off. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC # # # Press button 1. Select the Camera Views menu. In the multimedia system, select the desired view (/ page 220). Function of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is an electronic parking assistance system which monitors the area surrounding your vehicle and shows you the distance between the vehicle and a detected obstacle visually and audibly. The passive side impact protection also warns you of obstacles to the side. These must be detected beforehand by the sensors in the front or rear bumper while driving by them. If you steer in the direction of a detected obstacle and there is a risk of a lateral collision, a warning is issued. The passive side impact protection can be activated and deactivated via the multimedia system. In order for front or rear obstacles to the side to be displayed, the vehicle must first travel a dis‐ tance of at least half a vehicle length. Once the vehicle has traveled one vehicle length, obsta‐ cles on all sides can be shown. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the sur‐ roundings. The responsibility for safe maneuver‐ ing and parking remains with you. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in the maneuvering area while maneuvering and parking in/exiting parking spaces. 226 Driving and parking Displays on the central display Vehicles with surround view camera Vehicles with rear view camera As soon as Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is opera‐ tional, the respective areas of the display are shown in blue. 1 Operational, front and rear 2 Operational, all around 3 Operational, all around and obstacle detec‐ ted ting, the system warns you from a distance of 3.3 ft (1 m), in the standard setting only from 1.2 ft (0.4 m). The color of the display changes depending on the distance to the detected obstacle: R Blue: > 3.3 ft (1 m) (no obstacles detected) R Yellow: approx. 3.3 ft (1 m) - 2.2 ft (0.7 m) R Orange: approx. 2.2 ft (0.7 m) - 1.2 ft (0.4 m) R Red: < 1.2 ft (0.4 m) Vehicles with surround view camera: the boundary line shifts dynamically depending on the position and distance of the obstacles detec‐ ted. Depending on the distance to the obstacle detected, an intermittent warning tone also sounds. You can set the timing of the warnings in the multimedia system. In the Warn Early set‐ Vehicles with surround view camera Driving and parking 227 R Vehicles with Active Parking Assist: when driving no faster than 11 mph (18 km/h). R R R Obstacles above the detection range, e.g. overhanging loads, overhangs or loading ramps of trucks. Pedestrians or animals approaching the vehi‐ cle from the side. Objects placed next to the vehicle. Obstacles on the sides are not shown in the fol‐ lowing situations, for example: R You park the vehicle and switch it off. R You open the doors. Vehicles with rear view camera If you are not in the Camera & Parking menu and an obstacle in the vehicle path is detected, popup window 1 appears in the driver's display: R Vehicles without Active Parking Assist: when driving no faster than 8 mph (12 km/h). Optionally, obstacles detected by Parking Assist PARKTRONIC from a distance of approximately 3.3 ft (1.0 m) in front 2 and 2.2 ft (0.7 m) on sides 3 can also be displayed in the head-up display. System limits Parking Assist PARKTRONIC does not necessa‐ rily take into account the following obstacles: R Obstacles below the detection range, e.g. persons, animals or objects. After the engine is restarted, obstacles must be detected again by driving past them before a new warning can be issued. Also observe the system limits of the following systems: R Rear view camera (/ page 217) R Surround view camera (/ page 220) Observe the information on vehicle sensors and cameras; the system otherwise cannot function properly (/ page 176). 228 Driving and parking Problems with Parking Assist PARKTRONIC If the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC display lights up red for approximately three seconds then goes out, and the é symbol appears in the driver's display, the system may have been deac‐ tivated due to signal interference. Start the vehi‐ cle again and check if Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is working at a different location. If a warning tone also sounds, it may be due to one of the following causes: R The sensors are dirty: clean the sensors and observe the notes on care of vehicle parts (/ page 298). R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC has been deactivated due to a malfunction: restart the vehicle. If the problem persists, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Activating/deactivating Parking Assist PARKTRONIC * NOTE Risk of an accident from objects at close range Parking Assist PARKTRONIC may not detect certain objects at close range. # When parking or maneuvering the vehi‐ cle, pay particular attention to any objects which are above or below the sensors, e.g. flower pots or drawbars. The vehicle or other objects could oth‐ erwise be damaged. Requirements: R The camera menu is open. R Or: Active Parking Assist is active. R Or: the PARKTRONIC pop-up window appears. # Press = in the central display. If the indicator lamp is lit, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is active. If the indicator lamp is not lit or the é symbol appears in the instru‐ ment cluster, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is not active. % Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is automatically activated when the vehicle is started. Alternatively, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC can be activated or deactivated in the quick access menu. Setting the warning tones of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Parking Setting the volume or pitch of the warning tones # Set the desired level under Volume or Tone Pitch. Activating/deactivating audio fadeout Select Audio Fadeout. The volume of the currently playing media source is reduced during a Parking Assist PARKTRONIC warning tone. or # Driving and parking 229 # Switch Audio Fadeout When in R on or off. The volume of the currently playing media source is reduced when reverse gear is engaged. Setting the time of the warnings Select Time of Warning. # Set the time for the warning. # Active Parking Assist Function of Active Parking Assist Active Parking Assist is an electronic parking assistance system, which uses ultrasound with the assistance of the rear view camera and sur‐ round view camera. When you are driving for‐ wards up to approximately 22 mph (35 km/h), the system automatically measures parking spaces on both sides of the vehicle. Active Parking Assist offers the following func‐ tions: Vehicles with rear view camera R Parking in parking spaces parallel to the road R Backing up into parking spaces perpendicu‐ lar to the road Vehicles with surround view camera Parking in parking spaces parallel to the road R Parking in parking spaces perpendicular to the road (optionally either forwards or reverse) R Parking in parking spaces that can only be detected as such due to markings (for exam‐ ple at the roadside) R Exiting a parking space parallel to the road R Exiting a parking space perpendicular to the road (optionally either left or right) R Active Parking Assist is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe maneuvering and parking remains with you. Make sure that no persons, animals or objects etc. are in the maneuvering range. If Active Parking Assist is available, the Ç message appears in the driver display. When the system detects parking spaces, È appears. The arrows show on which side of the road free parking spaces are located. These are then shown on the central display. When Active Parking Assist is activated, the turn signal indicators are activated based on the cal‐ culated path of your vehicle. When you are entering or exiting a parking space, the proce‐ dure is assisted by acceleration, braking, steer‐ ing and gear changes. To start the parking procedure, press the c button (/ page 231). Active Parking Assist will be canceled in the fol‐ lowing situations: R You deactivate Parking Assist PARKTRONIC. R You press the c button again. R You begin steering. R You engage transmission position j. R ESP® intervenes. R You open the driver's door. System limits If the exterior lighting is malfunctioning, Active Parking Assist is not available. 230 Driving and parking Also observe the system limits of the following systems: R Rear view camera (/ page 217) R Surround view camera (/ page 220) Objects located above or below the detection range of Active Parking Assist, such as over‐ hanging loads, overhangs or loading ramps of trucks or the borders of parking spaces, are not detected during measurement of the parking space. These are also then not taken into account when calculating the parking procedure. In some circumstances, Active Parking Assist may therefore guide you into the parking space prematurely or brake too late. Certain environmental conditions, such as snow‐ fall or heavy rain, may lead to a parking space being measured inaccurately. Parking spaces that are partially occupied by trailer drawbars might not be identified as such or be measured incorrectly. Only use Active Parking Assist on level, high-grip ground. & WARNING Risk of accident due to objects located above or below the detection range of Active Parking Assist If there are objects above or below the detection range, the following situations may arise: R Active Parking Assist may steer too early. R The vehicle may not stop in front of these objects. There is a danger of collision! In these situations, do not use Active Parking Assist. # Active Parking Assist can also display unsuitable parking spaces, e.g. parking spaces in which parking is not permitted or parking spaces on unsuitable surfaces. Do not use Active Parking Assist in the following situations: R In extreme weather conditions such as ice, packed snow or in heavy rain. R R R R R R R When transporting a load that protrudes beyond the vehicle. If the parking space is on a steep downhill or uphill gradient. When snow chains are installed. Directly after a tire change or when spare tires are installed. If the tire pressure is too low or too high. If the suspension is out of alignment, e.g. after bottoming out on a curb. On steep inclines of more than approximately 15%. Driving and parking 231 Parking with Active Parking Assist # # Press button 1. Select Parking Assistance menu 2. Parking spaces 3 detected by the system are shown on the central display. When the vehicle is stationary, indicated vehicle path 4 into currently selected parking space 5 also appears. # If a parking space is displayed: stop the vehi‐ cle. # If necessary, select another parking space. 232 Driving and parking # # Vehicles with surround view camera: to change the parking direction, tap the selec‐ ted parking space again. To start the parking procedure: press but‐ ton 1 again. The vehicle drives into the selected parking space. The turn signal indicator is switched on automat‐ ically when the parking procedure begins. You are responsible for selecting the turn signal indi‐ cator in accordance with the traffic conditions. If necessary, select the turn signal indicator accordingly. & WARNING Risk of accident due to vehi‐ cle swinging out while parking or pulling out of a parking space While parking or exiting a parking space, the vehicle swings out and can drive onto areas of the oncoming lane. This could cause you to collide with objects or other road users. # # Pay attention to objects and other road users. Where necessary, stop the vehicle or cancel the parking procedure with Active Parking Assist. On completion of the parking procedure, the Active Parking Assist Finished display message appears. # Secure the vehicle against rolling away. When required by legal requirements or local conditions: turn the wheels towards the curb. % You can stop the vehicle and change the transmission position during the parking pro‐ cedure. The system then calculates a new vehicle path. If no new vehicle path is availa‐ ble, the transmission position can be changed again, or the process can be can‐ celed. Immediate parking via the Camera Views menu Select the Camera Views menu. When the vehicle is stationary and in trans‐ mission position k, and symbol 6 appears in the camera image: press button 1 again. The parking procedure is initiated for the detected parking space. % The parking space and parking direction can‐ not be changed in immediate parking. % This function can be deactivated in the Parking menu. # # Driving and parking 233 Exiting a parking space with Active Parking Assist Requirements: R The vehicle is equipped with a surround view camera. R The vehicle has been parked with Active Parking Assist. # # Start the vehicle. Press button 1. # # # # Select Parking Assistance menu 2. If necessary, change direction of exit 3. To start exiting the parking space: press button 1 again. If necessary, change the transmission posi‐ tion. Observe any messages displayed in the driver display and central display. The vehicle moves out of the parking space. The turn signal indicator is automatically switched on when exiting a parking space begins and switched off when it is completed. You are responsible for selecting the turn signal indicator in accordance with the traffic conditions. If nec‐ essary, select the turn signal indicator accord‐ ingly. After the parking space has been exited, a warn‐ ing tone and the Ø Active Parking Assist Finished: Take Control of Vehicle message prompt you to take control of the vehicle. You have to accelerate, brake, steer and change gear your‐ self again. If you do not react to the prompt to take control of the vehicle, the system will brake the vehicle to a standstill. Pausing Active Parking Assist You can interrupt the parking or exiting proce‐ dure of Active Parking Assist by one of the fol‐ lowing actions, for example: # Depressing the brake pedal # Opening the front passenger door, a rear door, the trunk or the hood 234 Driving and parking Applying the electric parking brake or acti‐ vating the HOLD function # To resume the parking or exiting proce‐ dure: gently depress the accelerator pedal. % If the electric parking brake was applied before Active Parking Assist was activated, depress the accelerator pedal lightly to start the parking or exiting procedure. Check the area around your vehicle again before resuming a paused parking procedure. Make sure that persons, animals or objects are no lon‐ ger in the maneuvering range. Also observe the system limitations of Active Parking Assist. # Automatic braking function of Active Parking Assist Persons or objects detected in the maneuvering range could cause the vehicle to brake sharply and interrupt the parking or exiting procedure. The vehicle will then be held at a standstill. If you depress the accelerator pedal, the parking or exiting procedure is resumed. Check the area around your vehicle again before resuming the parking or exiting procedure. Make sure that persons, animals or objects are no lon‐ ger in the maneuvering range. Also observe the system limitations of Active Parking Assist. R Maneuvering assistance R Function of Drive Away Assist Drive Away Assist can reduce the severity of an impact when pulling away. If the system detects an obstacle in the direction of travel, the vehi‐ cle's speed is briefly reduced to approximately 1 mph (2 km/h). A risk of collision may occur in the following sit‐ uations, for example: R If the driver mixes up the accelerator and brake pedals. R If the driver engages an incorrect gear. R If the driver depresses the accelerator pedal with too much force. Drive Away Assist is active under the following conditions: R If the vehicle was stationary and the trans‐ mission position was changed to k or h. If the vehicle has rolled less than approx‐ imately 3.3 ft (1.0 m) since being at a stand‐ still. If the detected obstacle is less than approx. 3.3 ft (1.0 m) away. Drive-away Assist can be deactivated or activa‐ ted in the Maneuvering Assistance menu (/ page 236). If a critical situation is detected, the following symbol appears in red in the selected view in the Camera & Parking menu: % If Drive Away Assist is not available, the same symbol appears in gray. If the Camera & Parking menu is not open on the central display, the symbol and pop-up of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC both appear. Drive Away Assist is only an aid. It is not a sub‐ stitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe maneuvering and parking remains with you. Make sure that no Driving and parking 235 persons, animals or objects etc. are in the maneuvering range. & WARNING Risk of accident caused by limited detection performance of Drive Away Assist Drive Away Assist cannot always clearly iden‐ tify objects and traffic situations. # Always pay careful attention to the traf‐ fic situation; do not rely on Drive Away Assist alone. # Be prepared to brake or swerve as nec‐ essary, provided the traffic situation permits and that it is safe to take eva‐ sive action. System limits The system limits of Active Parking Assist apply (/ page 229). On uphill gradients, the performance of Drive Away Assist is restricted. Function of cross traffic warning The cross traffic warning can warn you of cross‐ ing traffic when you are backing up out of a parking space. The radar sensors in the bumper also monitor the area adjacent to the vehicle. The cross traffic warning is automatically active when you reverse at a speed of less than approx‐ imately 6 mph (10 km/h). If a critical situation is detected, the following symbol appears in red in the selected view in the Camera & Parking menu: Warning for Cross Traffic, Rear: the vehicle can be automatically braked if cross traffic is detec‐ ted. % If the cross traffic warning is not available, the L symbol appears in gray. If the Camera & Parking menu is not opened in the central display, the symbol and pop-up of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC both appear. The cross traffic warning is only an aid and not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe maneuvering and parking remains with you. Make sure that no persons, animals or objects etc. are in the maneuvering range. & WARNING Risk of accident caused by limited detection performance of the cross traffic warning The cross traffic warning cannot always clearly identify objects and traffic situations. # Always pay careful attention to the traf‐ fic situation; do not rely on the cross traffic warning alone. # Be prepared to brake or swerve as nec‐ essary, provided the traffic situation permits and that it is safe to take eva‐ sive action. System limits The system limits of Active Parking Assist apply (/ page 229). If the radar sensors are obstructed by vehicles or other objects, detection is not possible. In the following situations, the cross traffic warn‐ ing is not available: R On inclines 236 Driving and parking Maneuvering brake function The maneuvering brake function can prevent col‐ lisions with pedestrians when the vehicle is backing up at slow speeds. If the rear view cam‐ era detects a person in the vehicle path, the vehicle can be braked to a standstill. The maneuvering brake function can intervene under the following conditions: R The vehicle is backing up at a speed slower than 6 mph (10 km/h). R The camera image is shown in the central display (/ page 225). You can activate and deactivate the maneuvering brake function in the Maneuvering Assistance menu (/ page 236). If the maneuvering brake function is triggered, the following symbol appears in red in the selec‐ ted view in the Camera & Parking menu: % If the maneuvering brake function is not available, the same symbol appears in gray. The maneuvering brake function is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the sur‐ roundings. The responsibility for safe maneuver‐ ing and parking remains with you. Make sure that no persons, animals or objects etc. are in the maneuvering range. & WARNING Risk of accident caused by limited detection by the maneuvering brake function The maneuvering brake function cannot always clearly detect people. Other obstacles are not detected by the function. In these cases, the function may brake unnecessarily or not brake at all. # Always pay careful attention to the traf‐ fic situation; do not rely on the maneu‐ vering brake function alone. # Be ready to brake. System limits Observe the system limits of the following func‐ tions: R Active Parking Assist (/ page 229) R Surround view camera (/ page 220) R Rear view camera (/ page 217) The maneuvering brake function is not available in the following situations: R On inclines Activating/deactivating maneuvering assis‐ tance Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Assistance 5 Parking # Select Maneuvering Assistance. # Activate or deactivate the desired maneuver‐ ing assistance. Vehicle towing instructions The vehicle is not suitable for the use of tow bar systems that are used for flat towing or dinghy Driving and parking 237 towing, for example. Attaching and using tow bar systems can result in damage to the vehicle. When you are towing a vehicle with tow bar sys‐ tems, safe driving characteristics cannot be guaranteed for the towing vehicle or the towed vehicle. The vehicle-trailer combination may swerve from side to side. Observe the following information: R Permitted towing methods (/ page 314) R The notes on towing the vehicle with both axles on the ground (/ page 315) 238 Driver display Notes on the driver display R & WARNING Risk of accident if the driver display fails R If the driver display has failed or is malfunc‐ tioning, function restrictions in systems rele‐ vant to safety cannot be detected. The operating safety of your vehicle may be impaired. # Drive on carefully. # Have the vehicle checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. If the operating safety of your vehicle is impaired, park the vehicle immediately and safely. Contact a qualified specialist workshop. The driver display shows basic information such as speed, engine speed, fuel level, coolant tem‐ perature as well as indicator and warning lamps. Additional functions available to you include the following: R Different menus, e.g. for assistance and navi‐ gation R Status displays for the driving systems Display messages Information on Consumption and range The menu contents and settings can be individu‐ ally adapted and set. Observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operat‐ ing the driver display. Scrolling on the menu bar Operating the driver display & WARNING Risk of distraction due to information systems and communica‐ tions equipment If you operate information systems and com‐ munications equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you could be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits. # If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary. 1 Back button 2 Main menu button 3 Touch Control Driver display 239 The content on the driver display is controlled using the control elements on the left side of the steering wheel. Touch Control 3 is used to navi‐ gate in a vertical and horizontal direction by swiping with one finger. Confirm the selection by pressing the Touch Control. % To operate Touch Control 3 in the most effective way, use the tip of your thumb if possible. You can also set the sensitivity of the Touch Control on the central display . # Briefly press main menu button 2. # Select a menu by swiping to the left or right on Touch Control 3. # Press Touch Control 3 to confirm. Driver display menus Notes on menus on the driver display & WARNING Risk of distraction due to information systems and communica‐ tions equipment If you operate information systems and com‐ munications equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you could be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits. # If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary. Observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operat‐ ing the driver display. The following menus can be called up via the menu bar on the driver display: R Understated R Sport R Classic R Navigation R Assistance R Service In some of these menus, you can choose between different display content on the center display area. In most of the menus, you can use Options to configure further settings for the menu-specific display content. % You can find further information about the possible settings and selections in the menus in the Digital Operator's Manual. 240 Driver display Head-up Display Function of the Head-up Display The Head-up Display projects various content into the driver's field of vision, for example. You can use the Head-up Display menu bar to select different contexts, e.g.: R Minimal R Sport R Standard R ECO display R Settings R Head-up Display on/off The following image shows an example of the context with navigation. Head-up Display content with navigation (9x3°) 1 Navigation instructions 2 Navigation instructions (distance to the next 3 4 5 6 route event) Steer Assist status Current speed Set speed in the driving system (e.g. cruise control) Detected traffic signs (Traffic Sign Assist) When you receive a call, the 6 Call Waiting message will appear on the Head-up Display and the driver display. System limits Visibility is particularly influenced by the follow‐ ing conditions: R Seat position R Image position setting R Ambient light R Wet road surfaces R Objects on the display cover R Polarization in sunglasses Operating the Head-up Display Selecting display content of the Head-up Dis‐ play via the menu bar of the driver display # Press the main menu button ò on the left. # To select the menu bar of the Head-up Display: swipe upwards on the left-hand Touch Control. Driver display 241 Setting the position and brightness On the menu bar of the Head-up Display, select Settings by swiping to the left or right. # Press the left-hand Touch Control. The current position and brightness settings will be displayed graphically on the Head-up Display as well as on the driver display. # To adjust the position: swipe upwards or downwards on the left-hand Touch Control. # To adjust the brightness: swipe to the right or left on the left-hand Touch Control. The settings configured for position and brightness will be saved automatically. # Press the G or a button to exit the settings. # Switching between display contents on the Head-up Display # Swipe right or left on the left-hand Touch Control. The Head-up Display shows a preview of the selected display contents after each swipe. # Press the a button to confirm the desired content. Switching back to the driver display Press the G or ò button. # Switching the Head-up Display on/off Driver display: 4 © Switching on Swipe upwards on the left-hand Touch Con‐ trol. # # Press a on the left-hand Touch Control. Switching off # Swipe upwards on the left-hand Touch Con‐ trol. # Select Head-up Display by swiping on the left-hand Touch Control. # Press a on the left-hand Touch Control. 242 Driver display Vehicles with a 48 V on-board electrical system Overview of status displays on the driver display The status displays for the driving and driving safety systems can be found in display sections 1 to 4. 1 The area shows the electric drive support. 2 This area shows the recuperation behavior of the electric motor. % Due to various system limits, the values dis‐ played may temporarily differ slightly from the actual value. Y Pedestrian detection (only on assistant display) Ç Active Parking Assist available (/ page 231) È Active Parking Assist has detected a park‐ ing space (/ page 231) é Parking Assist PARKTRONIC deactivated (/ page 228) h Cruise control (/ page 184) ç Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 186) Ò Specified distance for Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 186) æ Active Brake Assist switched off (/ page 204) Ä Active Brake Assist impaired or not func‐ tioning (/ page 204) Ø Active Steering Assist (/ page 193) ± Active Lane Change Assist (/ page 197) ð Active Lane Keeping Assist (/ page 214) Z Active Blind Spot Assist (only on assistant display) (/ page 213) ° Haptic accelerator pedal (/ page 158) Driver display 243 è ECO start/stop function (/ page 156) ë HOLD function (/ page 181) _ Adaptive Highbeam Assist (/ page 126) Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus (/ page 127) ¬ Active Stop-and-Go Assist (/ page 193) Ò Slippery road surface warning Vehicles with Traffic Sign Assist: Detected instructions and traffic signs (/ page 205). 244 MBUX multimedia system Overview and operation Notes on the MBUX multimedia system & WARNING Risk of distraction due to information systems and communica‐ tions equipment If you operate information systems and com‐ munications equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you could be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits. # If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the multimedia system. * NOTE Increased surface temperature due to direct sunlight on the central dis‐ play Overview of the MBUX multimedia system The surface of the central display is very dark. If the display is exposed to direct sunlight, the surface can become very hot. # If the central display has been exposed to direct sunlight, allow it to cool down before touching it for a long time. 1 Touch Control and control panel for the MBUX multimedia system MBUX stands for Mercedes-Benz User Expe‐ rience. • Operating Touch Control 2 Central display with touch functionality • Home screen overview • Operates the touchscreen 3 Control panel with: ú Fingerprint sensor Ü Switches the MBUX multimedia system on or off MBUX multimedia system 245 a Switches sound on or off ø Adjusts the volume Home screen overview Further operating options: Conducting a dialog with the MBUX Voice Assistant. 7 Calls up applications 8 Quick-access to application 9 Global menu G Calls up previous menu © Calls up the home screen û Previous track or previous radio sta‐ tion ü Next track or next radio station Active call: display of the call duration R % You can find further information about oper‐ ation as well as about applications and serv‐ ices in the Digital Operator's Manual. Anti-theft protection This device is equipped with technical provisions to protect it against theft. Further information on protection against theft can be obtained at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. 1 Status line 2 Calls up user profile settings and switches 3 4 5 6 user Uses the global search Calls up the Control Center (pull down) Calls up favorites Displays in the status line In the image, the applications are arranged as a carousel. Pressing and holding on © arranges the applications in a grid. This presentation is also used by a smartphone, for example. The following functions are called up in the Con‐ trol Center: R Notifications Center R Favorites R Vehicle quick-access 246 MBUX multimedia system Operating the MBUX multimedia system Using Touch Control 8 Switches off the sound: press Using the touchscreen 7 ß Calls up favorites (press briefly) or adds favorites (press and hold) 8 £ Starts the MBUX Voice Assistant 1 © Shows the home screen 2 Touch Control 3 4 5 6 =9Ì: swipe in the direction of the arrow (navigate) a Press (confirm) G Returns to the previous display 6 Makes or accepts a call ~ Rejects or ends a call Increase volume: swipe upwards Reduce volume: swipe down You can navigate through menus and lists via the touch-sensitive surface of Touch Control 2 using a single-finger swipe, for example: # To enter a character: select a character using the keyboard and press on Touch Con‐ trol 2. # To select a menu option: scroll in a list and press Touch Control 2. # To move the digital map: swipe in any direction. Example: Control elements under the central display 1 Fingerprint sensor 2 Switches the MBUX multimedia system on or off 3 Switches the mute function on/off MBUX multimedia system 247 4 Adjusts the volume # Press ± or q or swipe over the button # # # # # # # # # To select a menu item or entry: tap on a symbol or an entry. To increase the map scale: tap twice quickly with one finger. To reduce the map scale: tap with two fin‐ gers. To enter characters with the keypad: tap on a button. To navigate in menus: swipe up, down, left or right. To use handwriting to enter characters: write the character with one finger on the touchscreen. To zoom in and out of the map: move two fingers together or apart. To enlarge or reduce the size of a section of a website: move two fingers together or apart. To turn the digital map: turn counter-clock‐ wise or clockwise using two fingers. # # # # To move the digital map: touch the touchscreen and move your finger in any direction. To save the destination in the digital map: touch the touchscreen and hold until a message is shown. To call up the home screen: swipe up with three fingers in an application. To set the volume on a scale: touch the touchscreen and move the finger to the left or right. To call up a global menu in the applica‐ tions: touch the touchscreen and hold until the Options menu appears. Function of the MBUX Voice Assistant & WARNING Risk of distraction due to information systems and communica‐ tions equipment If you operate information systems and com‐ munications equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you could be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits. # If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary. For your own safety, always observe the follow‐ ing points when operating mobile communica‐ tions equipment and especially your voice con‐ trol system: R Observe the legal requirements for the coun‐ try in which you are driving. R If you use the voice control system in an emergency your voice can change and your telephone call, e.g. an emergency call, can thereby be unnecessarily delayed. R Familiarize yourself with the voice control system functions before starting the journey. Using the MBUX Voice Assistant, vehicle func‐ tions and various areas of the MBUX multimedia 248 MBUX multimedia system system can be operated by voice input. The MBUX Voice Assistant is operational approx‐ imately half a minute after switching on the igni‐ tion and can be operated from all seats. Further information and examples of voice commands can be found in the Digital Operator's Manual. You can use the MBUX Voice Assistant to oper‐ ate the following functions depending on the vehicle equipment: R Telephone R Text message and e-mail R Navigation R Radio, media, TV R Vehicle functions R Online functions Full functionality of the voice control system is only available for you with activation of online voice control. Conducting a dialog Starting a dialog # Say "Hey Mercedes" to activate the MBUX Voice Assistant. Voice activation must be switched on in the multimedia system. or # Press the £ button on the multifunction steering wheel. A blue line appears in the MBUX multimedia system. The dialog can be started. For the dialog with the MBUX Voice Assistant, you can use complete sentences of colloquial language as voice commands. Voice activation can also be directly combined with a voice com‐ mand, e.g. "Hey Mercedes, how fast can I drive?". Calling up help For information about the MBUX Voice Assistant: say "Hey Mercedes, what can you do?" # Digital Operator's Manual: "Show me the Operator's Manual". The full extent of the # Digital Operator's Manual is available when the vehicle is stationary. Operating functions (examples) # To operate the navigation: "Search for an Asian restaurant, but not Japanese, in South London." # To operate the phone: "Call my father." # To change the system language to Eng‐ lish (short command): "Change language to English". # To operate the radio: "Show me the list of radio stations." # To operate media: "Switch on random playback." # To operate vehicle functions: "Switch the seat heating to level 2." # To operate online functions: "What's the time in Sydney?" # To ask a question about the vehicle: "Do I have Blind Spot Assist?" MBUX multimedia system 249 Information on users, suggestions and favor‐ ites & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped during adjustment of the driver's seat after calling up a driver profile Selecting a user profile may trigger an adjustment of the driver's seat to the posi‐ tion saved under the user profile. You or other vehicle occupants could be injured in the process. # Make sure that when the position of driver's seat is being adjusted using the multimedia system, no people or body parts are in the seat's range of move‐ ment. If there is a risk of someone becoming trap‐ ped, stop the adjustment process immedi‐ ately: # a) Tap the warning message on the cen‐ tral display. or # b) Press a memory position button or a seat adjustment switch on the driver's door. The adjustment process will be stop‐ ped. The driver's seat is equipped with an access pre‐ venter. If the driver's door is open, the driver's seat will not be set after calling up the driver's profile. User profiles and user-specific content Prerequisites for the vehicle owner: R You have a Mercedes me user account. R You have a Mercedes me PIN. R You have agreed to the terms of use. R The vehicle is linked to a Mercedes me user account. % If one of the pre-requisites listed is missing or if no user profile has been selected, the data described in the following section will be saved in the vehicle as the standard set‐ ting. Standard settings can be changed by all vehicle users. User profiles save personal settings. If the vehi‐ cle is used by several people, a person can change their profile settings without changing the settings of other users. You can individualize a user profile in the vehicle using the set-up assistant or using the settings in your user profile. Some settings, e.g. the Mercedes me PIN and a profile photo are made in the Mercedes me app or in the Mercedes me Portal. User-specific content and applications with per‐ sonal data are protected by different levels of security. To access protected content, the Mercedes me PIN and, depending on the vehicle equipment, biometric sensors can be used. % The security level is set by the multimedia system and calculated from the combination of all sensor inputs. Some security levels cannot be turned off. 250 MBUX multimedia system % When a user profile is activated, the follow‐ ing personalized comfort systems, for exam‐ ple, can be adjusted or their settings loaded: R Seat R Ambient light R Outside mirrors R Blinds R Air conditioning adjustment If the user profile is activated when driving then the driver's seat position will not be adjusted. Depending on the vehicle equipment you can, as a user, save the following settings, for example: R Driver's seat, steering wheel and mirror set‐ tings R Climate control R Ambient lighting R Radio (including station list) R Suggestions and favorites Suggestions The vehicle can learn the habits of the driver. It then makes suggestions regarding navigation destinations, phone numbers and music prefer‐ ences. The requirements for that are the selec‐ tion of a user, your consent to the recording of data and sufficient collected data. # # Favorites Favorites offer you quick access to frequently used applications. 100 favorites are available in total. Configuring users, suggestions and favorites Requirements: R To use the set-up assistant: the vehicle is sta‐ tionary. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 f 5 Adding a user Select f Add User . A QR code is loaded. # Change User Scan the displayed QR code with the Mercedes me app or any QR code scanner on a mobile device. If the Mercedes me app is not yet installed on your mobile device, you will be directed to the store of your mobile device. Follow the directions in the app. The vehicle is connected with your Mercedes me user account. This automatically creates your user profile in the vehicle. If only your user profile is available, it will be loaded automatically. If more than one user profile is available, you will be directed to the user selection. When the vehicle is stationary, the set-up assistant starts automatically after user selection. Selecting user options Select Settings. # Select Suggestions. # Select Allow All Suggestions. or # MBUX multimedia system 251 # # # # Switch the options on or off individually. If an option is switched on and sufficient data has been gathered, suggestions based on your user behavior will be offered to you. For intelligent multimodality: select Multimodality. If the option is active, the MBUX Voice Assis‐ tant can be activated in certain situations. To switch the learning function off for 24 h: switch on Deactivate 24h Intelligent Learning. To delete cumulated suggestions: select Reset Suggestion History and confirm Ja (Yes). Protecting user-specific content and applica‐ tions If you add a new user, access protection is already activated for the user profile. The Mercedes me PIN and, depending on the vehicle equipment, biometric sensors are available for access. Biometric sensors must be taught in in the vehicle. The authentication process then takes all taught-in and available sensors into account. The following user-specific content and applica‐ tions are protected, for example: R User selection and user profile settings R Biometric sensors The teaching-in of biometric sensors is pro‐ tected. R Suggestions The data and determination of the most probable navigation destinations, media sources, radio stations, contacts and mes‐ sages are protected. R ENERGIZING COACH The recorded health data and their evaluation are protected. R Mercedes me connect store The purchase of services is protected. Switch Protect Content on or off. Switch Access Protection on or off. % When access protection is switched off, your user profile can be accessed and changed from every vehicle seat. # # % Access protection is switched on or off on a vehicle-specific basis. Teaching in, editing and deleting biometric data The biometric data models are saved in the sen‐ sors in the vehicle. If recognition has been taught-in, this sensor serves as a contributory factor for authentication on the multimedia sys‐ tem. # Select Protect Content. # Select Facial Recognition, Fingerprint Recognition or Voice Recognition. % If necessary, authenticate yourself on the multimedia system. Authenticating using face recognition Close the driver's door or fasten the driver's seat belt. # Look at the driver display for about five sec‐ onds. Your face is scanned. A message in the driver display shows whether facial recognition was successful or not. You can unlock your user # 252 MBUX multimedia system profile and protected applications with the facial scan. Authenticating using fingerprints # Place and lift your finger several times on the fingerprint sensor under the touchscreen . The finger is scanned. If the scanning proce‐ dure is successful, a message appears on the central display. You can unlock your user pro‐ file and protected applications with your fin‐ ger print. Authenticating using voice recognition # Speak the sentence shown on the central display and follow the Voice Assistant's instructions. If the voice recognition was successful, a message appears on the central display. You can unlock your user profile. % Avoid background or disturbing noises dur‐ ing voice recognition. Deleting biometric data Tap on E , for example, behind Facial Recognition. # # Select Yes. Selecting a user % When you call up your driver profile, the driv‐ er's seat and the steering wheel can be set. You can cancel the setting process with the following actions: R Press Tap Here to Cancel message on the central display. R Press one of the seat operating buttons in the driver's door. # Select Change User. # Select a user. # When requested to do so, authenticate with the Mercedes me PIN or a taught-in biomet‐ ric characteristic. The user profile is loaded and activated. % If you select Continue Without Selecting a User, no specific settings for the user profile are loaded. Adding favorites from categories Select ©. # # # # # # Select ß. Select r. Select W Create New Favorite. Select the category. Select a favorite. System settings Overview of the system settings menu In the system settings menu, you can make set‐ tings in the following menus and control ele‐ ments: R Display Display brightness R Control elements Keyboard language and handwriting rec‐ ognition Sensitivity of the touchpad Sensitivity of the Touch Controls Haptic operation for the touchscreen R MBUX Voice Assistant MBUX multimedia system 253 R R R R R R R R R MBUX Interior Assistant Sound Entertainment Navigation and traffic announcements Telephone Voice amplification Connectivity Wi-Fi, Bluetooth®, NFC MBUX rear tablet child-proof lock Time & date Language Units for distance Updating software System Reset Overview of software updates Important software updates may be necessary for the security of your multimedia system's data. Install these updates, or else the security of your multimedia system cannot be ensured. The multimedia system displays a corresponding message when a software update is available. If the Automatic Online Update option is active, software updates are downloaded automatically. If the option is deactivated, you will be informed of new software updates once. The software updates are available for downloading for a limi‐ ted period of time. Carrying out a software update: R You can start online software updates via the communication module. R You can start software updates via a Wi-Fi hotspot. R You can start map updates from an external medium. % Online software updates cannot be per‐ formed via external Wi-Fi hotspots that are encrypted using TKIP. % To complete software updates via the com‐ munication module, the vehicle must be con‐ nected with the Internet and a Mercedes me user account. % To complete software updates via Wi-Fi, the vehicle must be connected to an external WiFi hotspot. A software update consists of three steps: R Downloading or copying of the data required for installation R Installation of the downloaded software update R Activation of the downloaded software update. % It may be necessary to restart the MBUX multimedia system after completion of a software update. % While some software updates are being downloaded, the multimedia system cannot be operated and the vehicle functions may be restricted. % Some software updates require a safe vehi‐ cle status for the installation to be comple‐ ted. They can only be carried out in a safely parked vehicle with the vehicle switched off. For software updates requiring a safe vehi‐ cle status: when the last installation step is 254 MBUX multimedia system reached, a message appears on the central dis‐ play after the vehicle is switched off. Follow the step-by-step instructions on the central display to complete the installation. There are software updates that can only be installed when the vehicle is safely parked, there are no more people in the vehicle and the vehi‐ cle is locked. % The display message does not appear every time a software update is installed. In rare cases, an error can occur during the installation. The multimedia system automati‐ cally attempts to restore the previous version. If it is not possible to restore the previous ver‐ sion, the display message shown above appears every time the vehicle is started. Availability of the driver and central display During the installation of software updates, it is not possible to use the vehicle, central display and driver display. You may receive the following display message when an installation is running: Failure of the driver display If the driver display fails or there is a malfunc‐ tion, you may not recognize limitations in the functions of systems relevant to safety or the speed display, for example. The operating safety of the vehicle may be impaired. Drive on care‐ fully and have the vehicle checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately (/ page 377). Further information about software updates can be found at https://me.secure.mercedesbenz.com. Failure of the central display If the central display fails or the display message shown above is shown continuously, several sys‐ tems such as the rear view camera, PARKTRONIC or climate control are no longer available. Drive on carefully and consult a spe‐ cialist workshop as soon as possible. Setting up a Wi-Fi hotspot Requirements: R The Wi-Fi function is activated on the multi‐ media system and the communication device to be connected. R The communication device to be connected supports at least one of the types of connec‐ tion described. The connection types shown depend on the device to be connected. The function must be supported by the multimedia system and by the device to be connected. The type of connection established must be selected on the multimedia system and on the device to be connected. % Some functions may first need to be activa‐ ted on the communication device being con‐ nected. More detailed information can be found in the manufacturer's operating instructions. MBUX multimedia system 255 % The use of the vehicle data tariff by external devices is not available in all countries. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Internet and Bluetooth % The availability of the functions is dependent on the country. # Select Wi-Fi. The controller is to the right: Wi-Fi is switched on. When the Wi-Fi function is switched on, you can connect the multimedia system with external hotspots or make it available as a hotspot for external devices. When the Wi-Fi function is switched off, it is not possible to establish a hotspot connection. When the Wi-Fi function is switched off, no con‐ nection can be established with the MBUX rear tablet. % The data volume can be purchased directly from a mobile phone network provider via the Mercedes me Portal. % The use of the vehicle data tariff by external devices is not available in all countries. Using the multimedia system as a Wi-Fi hot‐ spot # Select MBUX Hotspot. # Select one of the following connection options. Connecting using a QR code Requirement: an app for scanning the QR code is installed on the device being connected. Alternatively: the device being connected has an integrated QR code scanner (see manufacturer's operating instructions). # Scan the QR code shown. The Wi-Fi connection is established. Connecting using NFC Activate NFC on the device to be connected. # When the NFC icon is displayed in the MBUX Hotspot menu, hold the device to be connec‐ ted to the NFC interface. # Follow the instructions on the device. The Wi-Fi connection is established. # Connecting using a security key Select the vehicle from the device to be con‐ nected. The vehicle is displayed with the MBUX XXXXX network name. # Enter the security key which is shown in the central display on the device to be connec‐ ted. # Confirm the entry. # Generating a new security key Select the hotspot name MBUX XXXXX in the MBUX Hotspot menu. # Confirm the prompt with Yes. A new security key is generated. # A connection will be established with the newly created security key. % When a new security key is generated, all existing Wi-Fi connections are then discon‐ nected. If the Wi-Fi connections are being reestablished, the new security key must be entered. 256 MBUX multimedia system Using a mobile communication device as a Wi-Fi hotspot (tethering) An external Wi-Fi hotspot is accessed for the Internet connection of the multimedia system. The data tariff of the mobile communication device via Purchased Plan is used for the data connection. % This function is country-dependent. % With external Wi-Fi hotspots, which are encrypted via TKIP, online software updates cannot be carried out via the external Wi-Fi hotspot. # Select the Connect to the Internet option in the Internet and Bluetooth menu. Setting up an Internet connection via Wi-Fi % The Wi-Fi function on the mobile phone and Internet access via Wi-Fi must be activated (see the manufacturer's operating instruc‐ tions). # Select Search for Access. # Select the network. # Log in to the Wi-Fi network. or # Select the mobile phone with the ö Wi-Fi symbol. System language Notes on the system language This function allows you to determine the lan‐ guage for the menu displays and the navigation announcements. The selected language affects the characters available for entry. The navigation announcements are not available in all lan‐ guages. If a language is not available, the naviga‐ tion announcements will be in English. Setting the language Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 Language 5 System Setting the system language A list of the available system languages is shown. # Select a language. The system language is switched to the selected language. Resetting the multimedia system (reset func‐ tion) & WARNING Risk of accidents due to fail‐ ure of the central display functions While the multimedia system is being reset, its functions such as the rear view camera are not available. # Only reset the multimedia system when the vehicle is stationary. Requirements: R The vehicle is switched on. R Some settings can only be reset when the vehicle is stationary. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Settings 5 System 5 Reset When resetting the system, personal data and settings are deleted, for example: R Connected devices R Individual user profiles R Biometric data MBUX multimedia system 257 % The data used and saved in the multimedia system by the driver assistance systems is deleted. # Select Reset. A query appears asking if the system should really be reset. # Select Yes. The multimedia system is reset to the factory settings. The multimedia system is restarted after the system reset. % Due to data protection, as well as the func‐ tion of individual driving systems and driving safety systems, it is a requirement to carry out a complete system reset before selling the vehicle or transferring it to a third party, or after use as a hire car. Navigation and traffic Notes on navigation Route guidance with augmented reality & WARNING Risk of accident and injury as a result of distraction, incorrect depic‐ tion or wrong interpretation of the dis‐ play The camera image of the augmented reality display is not suitable as a guide for driving. # Always keep an eye on the actual traffic situation. # Avoid extended observation of the cam‐ era image. & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to imprecise positioning of addi‐ tional information The additional information from the augmen‐ ted reality display may be inaccurate and is not a substitute for observing and assessing the actual driving situation. # Always keep an eye on the actual traffic situation when carrying out all driving maneuvers. Switching navigation on Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Navigation # Alternatively, activate the MBUX Voice Assis‐ tant (/ page 248). # Switch to navigation. The map appears. 258 MBUX multimedia system Navigation overview Digital map 4 Selects the map orientation 5 Current vehicle position (vehicle symbol or arrow) 6 Navigation menu Navigation menu • Showing the route overview, entering intermediate destinations, selecting alterna‐ tive routes • Displaying traffic incidents and local area reports 5 Makes settings for View, Messages & Acoustic Signals and Route % If the navigation menu is not shown, tap on the digital map. % The options are not available in all countries. 1 Enters a POI or address and additional desti‐ nation entries 1 Navigation window Route guidance active: display for destina‐ tion information, route list, lane recommen‐ dations, for example 2 Calls up the Control Center in the status line 3 Searches for parking facilities in the vicinity 2 Interrupts route guidance (if route guidance is active) 3 Repeats a navigation announcement and switch navigation announcements on or off 4 Calls up Route, and Traffic menus Overview of the toll system Debiting of toll charges at freeway toll plazas is facilitated with an electronic payment system. The toll system uses RFID (Radio Frequency Identification) for data transfer between the con‐ trol unit and the toll station. The toll system is switched off at the factory. The control unit is in the vehicle glove box. To register and activate the control unit, the fol‐ lowing steps are required: R You activate the toll system in the settings of the MBUX multimedia system. MBUX multimedia system 259 R In the Mercedes me app, register the unit identification number of the control unit and activate the toll system. Registration and activation of the toll system can take up to 24 hours. When the toll system is activated, the number of vehicle occupants is first transmitted manually and is preset with one person. The number of vehicle occupants can be trans‐ mitted automatically. In the process, the number of seat belts worn is determined. The toll system is operational in all states in the USA and in all provinces in Canada. % In Mexico, for example, the toll system can be registered and activated for journeys to the USA. Notices R Drive at the prescribed vehicle speed in the toll lane. R Only after registration and activation of the toll system will the toll be debited automati‐ cally. R R R Mercedes-Benz recommends operation using the MBUX multimedia system. Alternatively, this can also be done on the control unit in the glove box. For safety reasons, make the entries with the vehicle stationary. For further information, please consult the Mercedes me app or an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada). For information on how to register and activate the toll system, see the Digital Operator's Man‐ ual. Entering a destination Requirements: R For the online search: There is an Internet connection. Mercedes me connect is available. You have set up a user account in the Mercedes me Portal. - - The vehicle is connected with the user account and you have accepted the terms of use. Further information can be found at: https://www.mercedes.me The service is available. The service has been activated at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. 260 MBUX multimedia system Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Navigation 5 ª Where to? 5 Adopts the search result in the input line and 6 7 8 9 A B C # Example: entering a POI or address 1 Input line with current entry 2 Search result 3 Selects destination input, displays further destination inputs with double arrow 4 Deletes an entry continues the search Deletes the last character entered Hides the keypad Switches to handwriting recognition Starts the MBUX Voice Assistant Sets the written language Switches to digits and special characters Switches to upper-case or lower-case letters Enter the destination in 1. The entries can be made in any order. The search results are displayed in a list. % Online search results for POIs may contain additional information, for example opening times and prices. The information is provi‐ ded by an online map service. This online function is not available in all countries. % You can enter a destination as a 3 word address from what3words. This option is not available in all countries. # Hide the keyboard with a. Select the destination in the list. The route is calculated. % Observe the notes on the MBUX multimedia system (/ page 244). # MBUX multimedia system 261 Calculating a route and using settings for route guidance 4 Shares the destination 5 Saves a destination as a favorite 6 Destination address After selection of a destination the route is be calculated. # Select one of the options. Calling up the route overview Select Routes. # Select an alternative route. # # # # # Starting route guidance # Select ¥ Let's Go!. Example: detailed display 1 Calls up alternative routes 2 Calculates the route and starts route guid‐ ance 3 Selects a point of interest in the vicinity of the destination Calling up the detailed display with destina‐ tion address # Pull the bar above the ¥ Let's Go! sym‐ bol upwards. Depending on the destination selection and availability, online content, for example rat‐ ings, prices and weather information, is shown. To share a destination: select Ç Share . This option allows you to scan the displayed QR code. To save a destination as a favorite: select ß Favorite and then an option. To call up an Internet address: if a web address is available, select www. To call the destination: if a telephone num‐ ber is available, select Call. Searching for POIs in the vicinity of the des‐ tination shown # Select In The Vicinity. # Search using categories, enter a search entry or search for a personal POI . Selecting a route type Select Z in the navigation menu (/ page 258). # Select Route. The route is calculated as a fast route with a short journey time. Trailer mode is available if a trailer has been coupled with the vehicle. If available, you can select online routes. # 262 MBUX multimedia system Traffic announcements for the route are taken into account via Reroute Based on Traffic r. % Trailer mode and online routes are not availa‐ ble in all countries and for all vehicles. Calculating alternative routes Select Z in the navigation menu. # Select View. # Activate Route Overview after Start. Alternative routes are calculated for every route. # Selecting alternative routes % If Route Overview after Start has been switched on and a route has been calcula‐ ted, the function is available. # Select ¡ in the navigation menu. # Select Alternative Routes. # When the alternative routes have been calcu‐ lated, display the route in the navigation win‐ dow by swiping to the right or left. # Select Start. Activating a commuter route % A user profile has been created and Allow Destination Suggestions has been activated in the user options (/ page 250). Route guidance is not active. # Select Z in the navigation menu. # Select Route. # Activate Activate Commuter Route. The navigation system automatically detects that the vehicle is on a commuter route. For the daily commuter route, traffic inci‐ dents on the route are also reported when driving without active route guidance. # To select or delete a commuter route: selectStart or ¨. Avoiding or using route sections, e.g. high‐ ways or ferries # Select Z in the navigation menu. # Select Route. # Select Avoid Options. # Activate or deactivate the avoid option. Activating route guidance with augmented reality # Tap on ¨ in the map. The indicator lamp lights up blue. The AR camera's video image is shown on the central display before a turning maneu‐ ver. The video image includes additional information. # To return to the navigation map: tap on ¨ again. The indicator lamp is not lit. Showing property information for route guid‐ ance with augmented reality Road guidance with augmented reality is activa‐ ted. # Select Z in the navigation menu. # Select View. # Select Augmented Reality Video. # Activate Street Names and House Numbers. During route guidance, the activated options are shown as additional information in the camera image. MBUX multimedia system 263 Using map functions Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Navigation Increasing map scale # When the map is shown, tap twice quickly with one finger on the central display. Decreasing map scale When the map is displayed, tap the central display with two fingers. # Moving the map When the map is displayed, swipe in any direction with one finger on the central dis‐ play. # To reset the map to the current vehicle position: select \ Center . # Selecting map orientation Tap repeatedly on the Ä compass symbol on the map. The map orientations changes in this order: R The 2D map view is displayed so that north is always at the top. R The 2D map view is aligned to the direc‐ tion of travel. R The 3D map view is aligned to the direc‐ tion of travel. R The map shows the complete route. # Using services Requirements: R There is an Internet connection. R Mercedes me connect is available. R You have set up a user account in the Mercedes me Portal. R The vehicle is connected to a user account and you have accepted the conditions of use for the service. R R Further information can be found at: https://www.mercedes.me The service is available. The service has been activated at an author‐ ized Mercedes-Benz Center. Multimedia system: 4 © Showing traffic information Select Z in the navigation module (/ page 258). # Select View. # Select Map Symbols. # Activate Traffic Incidents and Free Flowing Traffic. Traffic incidents, for example roadworks, local area reports (e.g. fog) and warning mes‐ sages, are shown on the route. The traffic delay is displayed for the current route. The smallest value for the display for traffic delays is a minute. # 264 MBUX multimedia system Displaying hazard warnings If hazard warnings are available these can be shown as symbols on the map. The display depends on the settings for the Traffic Incidents option. # Set the option using Z. If the option is activated, all of the symbols are shown. If the option is deactivated, the symbols are only shown when there is a hazard warning. The following hazards may be shown on the map: R Accidents and breakdowns R Fog and ice R Hazards reported manually R Vehicle with active hazard warning light R Mobile roadworks Displaying online map contents Select Z in the navigation module . # Select View. # Select Map Symbols. # # Switch on an online service, e.g. Weather. Current weather information is displayed on the navigation map, e.g. temperature or cloud cover. The service information is not shown in all map scales, e.g. weather symbols. Parking service * NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to not observing the maximum permitted head‐ room clearance If the vehicle height is greater than the maxi‐ mum permitted headroom clearance, the roof and other parts of the vehicle may be damaged. # Observe the signposted headroom clearance. # If the vehicle height is greater than the permitted headroom clearance, do not enter. # Observe the changed vehicle height with add-on roof equipment. * NOTE Before selecting the parking option The data is based on information provided by the respective service provider. Mercedes Benz accepts no liability for the accuracy of the information provided relating to the parking garage/parking lot. # Always observe the local Information and conditions. % This service is not available in all countries. # Select Z in the navigation module and activate Parking. # Tap on j in the map. # Select a parking option. The map shows the parking options in the vicinity. The following information is displayed (if available): R Destination address, distance from cur‐ rent vehicle position and arrival time MBUX multimedia system 265 Information on the parking garage/park‐ ing facility For example, opening times, parking charges, current occupancy, maximum parking time, maximum access height. The maximum access height shown by the parking service does not replace the need for observation of the actual cir‐ cumstances. R Available payment options (Mercedes pay, coins, bank notes, cards) R Details on parking tariffs R Number of available parking spaces R Payment method (e.g. at the parking meter) R Services/facilities at the parking option R Telephone number Calculate the route (/ page 261). R # Notes on the dashcam * NOTE Before using the dashcam You are legally responsible for operation and use of the dashcam functions. The legal requirements relating to operation and use of the dashcam can vary depending on the country in which the dashcam is operated. Therefore, observe the legal requirements, in particular the data protection regulations, in your country. For this reason, before using the dashcam inform yourself about the regulation details for the respective country. This function is not permitted in all countries. # Observe the country-specific regula‐ tions. % To ensure secure operation, only use FAT32 or exFAT formatted USB storage devices. % The file size and therefore the duration of single recording is limited by the limitations of the USB flash drive format. So FAT32 for‐ matted USB flash drives do not allow files larger than 4 GB, for example. When the file size is reached, the recording stops and you receive a notification. % The following functions are available in the Gallery app: R Switching write protection on or off R Deleting video files Selecting a USB device for a video recording with the dashcam Requirements: R At least one USB device is connected with the multimedia system. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Apps 5 Dashcam # Select the USB symbol. # Select the USB device. % When USB devices contain multiple parti‐ tions, recorded video files are not always dis‐ played in the recording list. 266 MBUX multimedia system Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use USB devices with one partition. Starting or stopping video recording with the dashcam Requirements: R For recording and saving a video file: a USB device is connected with the multimedia sys‐ tem. R The vehicle is switched on. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Apps 5 Dashcam # If several USB devices are connected with the multimedia system, select a USB device (/ page 265). If no USB device is selected, a selection is made automatically when recording starts. # To select a recording mode: select Loop Recording or Individual Recording. Loop Recording records several short video files. When the memory is full, recording is continued automatically. In doing so, other files will be overwritten starting with the old‐ est file. Individual Recording stops recording when the memory limit is reached. An individual recording is automatically protected against being overwritten. # To start: select Start Recording. The length of the recording is shown. The Please do not remove the storage medium. message appears. The video file is stored on the USB device. # To end: select End Recording. % In some countries, geo-coordinates (longi‐ tude and latitude) are shown in the video image. For technical reasons, the geo-coordinates may show greater inaccuracies. A report may appear in the following cases: R Individual Recording: the memory is full or there are only a few minutes recording time available. The video recording stops or will be stopped imminently. Change the USB device or delete a video file. R R R The camera is not functional, the Camera Unavailable message appears. Have the camera checked in an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. If the country border indication has been switched on. If an outdoor recording is started with the camera app during a dashcam recording, the dashcam recording pauses and resumes automatically after the camera recording is finished. A notification to this effect is dis‐ played. Telephone Telephony Notes on telephony & WARNING Risk of distraction from oper‐ ating integrated communication equip‐ ment while the vehicle is in motion If you operate communication equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you MBUX multimedia system 267 could be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. # Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits. # If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary. & WARNING Risk of an accident from operating mobile communication equip‐ ment while the vehicle is in motion Mobile communications devices distract the driver from the traffic situation. This could also cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. # As the driver, only operate mobile com‐ munications devices when the vehicle is stationary. # As a vehicle occupant, only use mobile communications devices in the areas & WARNING Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly Always make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage spaces, parcel nets or stowage nets. Close the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey. Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in the trunk/cargo compart‐ ment. If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addi‐ tion, cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone receptacles cannot always retain all objects within. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. # Always stow objects so that they can‐ not be thrown around in such situa‐ tions. Observe the additional information on stowing mobile communications devices correctly: R Loading the vehicle (/ page 105) Bluetooth® connection The menu view and the available functions in the telephone menu are in part dependent on the Bluetooth® profile of the connected mobile phone. If the mobile phone supports all the fol‐ lowing Bluetooth® profiles, the full range of fea‐ tures is available: R PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile) intended for this purpose, e.g. in the rear passenger compartment. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating mobile communication equipment in the vehicle. # # # 268 MBUX multimedia system The contacts on the mobile phone are shown automatically on the multimedia system. MAP (Message Access Profile) The mobile phone message functions can be used on the multimedia system. HFP (hands-free profile) Wireless telephony is available on the multimedia system. SAP (SIM Access Profile) The car telephone has access to the SIM card data and dials into the mobile phone network via the exterior antenna. - R R R Irrespective of this, Bluetooth® audio functional‐ ity can by used with any mobile radio unit. For information on the range of functions of the mobile radio unit to be connected, see the man‐ ufacturer's operating instructions. Network connection: The following cases can lead to the call being disconnected while the vehicle is in motion: R You switch into a transmission/reception station, in which no communication channel is free. R The SIM card used is not compatible with the network available R A mobile phone with "Twincard" is logged into the network with the second SIM card at the same time The multimedia system supports calls in HD Voice® for improved speech quality. A require‐ ment for this is that the mobile phone and the mobile phone network provider of the person you are calling support HD Voice® . Depending on the quality of the connection, the voice quality may fluctuate. Further information can be obtained from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or at: https://www.mercedes-benz.com/connect Telephone menu overview 1 Bluetooth® device name of the currently connected mobile phone/of the mobile phone 2 Bluetooth® device name of the currently connected mobile phone/of the mobile phone (two phone mode) 3 Signal strength of the mobile phone network MBUX multimedia system 269 4 Battery status of the connected mobile Connecting a mobile phone 5 6 7 8 9 Requirements: R Bluetooth® is activated on the mobile phone (see the manufacturer's operating instruc‐ tions). R Bluetooth® is activated on the multimedia system. phone Options Messages Calls up my devices Numerical pad Starts contact search Telephony operating modes overview Depending on your equipment, the following tel‐ ephony operating modes are available: R A mobile phone is connected to the multime‐ dia system via Bluetooth®. R Two mobile phones are connected with the multimedia system via Bluetooth® (two phone mode). You can use all the functions of the multi‐ media system with both mobile phones. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Phone 5 My Devices 5 Z 5 Devices Searching for a mobile phone # Select Connect New Device. Connecting a mobile phone Select a mobile phone. A code is displayed in the multimedia system and on the mobile phone. # If both codes match, confirm the code on the mobile phone. # Functions in the telephony menu In the telephony menu you have the following functions, for example: R Making calls, e.g.: R Accept a call k End Call Answering a call with a message i Conference Accepting or rejecting a waiting call R Managing contacts, e.g.: Downloading mobile phone contacts Managing the format of a contact's name Deleting favorites R Receiving and sending messages, e.g.: Using the read-aloud function Dictating a new message 270 MBUX multimedia system Mercedes me and apps Mercedes me calls # Making a call via the overhead control panel # 1 me button for service or information calls 2 SOS button cover 3 SOS button (emergency call system) Making a Mercedes me call Press me button 1. You can find information on the following topics: Activation of Mercedes me connect R Operating the vehicle R Nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center R Other products and services from MercedesBenz Making an emergency call To open the cover of SOS button 2, press it briefly. # Press and hold SOS button 3 for at least one second. R If a Mercedes me call is active, an emergency call can still be triggered. This has priority over all other active calls. Data is transferred during the connection to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center (/ page 272). Information about the Mercedes me call using the me button A call to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center has been initiated via the me button in the over‐ head control panel or the multimedia system (/ page 270). Using the voice dialog system you access the desired service: R Accident and Breakdown Management R Mercedes-Benz Customer Center for general information about the vehicle Calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center using the multimedia system Requirements: R Access to a GSM network is available. R The contract partner's GSM network cover‐ age is available in the respective region. R The vehicle must be switched on so that vehicle data can be transferred automati‐ cally. MBUX multimedia system 271 Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Phone 5 © # Call Mercedes me connect. After confirmation, the multimedia system sends the required vehicle data. The data transfer is shown on the central display. Then, you can select a service and be connected to a specialist at the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center. Calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center after automatic accident or breakdown detection Requirements: R The vehicle has detected an accident or breakdown situation. R The vehicle is stationary. R The hazard warning lights are switched on. % This function is not available in all countries. The vehicle can detect accident or breakdown situations under certain circumstances. In the event an accident or breakdown is detec‐ ted, the emergency guide shows safety notes in the multimedia system display. After quitting the emergency guide display on the multimedia system, a prompt appears asking whether you would like to get support from the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center. # Select Call. R After your agreement, or if the Mercedes me connect service "Accident and Break‐ down Management" is active, the vehicle data is transferred automatically (/ page 273). R The Mercedes-Benz Customer Center takes your call and organizes the break‐ down and accident assistance. You may be charged for these services. % Depending on the severity of the accident, an automatic emergency call can be initi‐ ated. This has priority over all other active calls. % In addition, if the Mercedes me connect service "Telediagnostics" is active, a similar prompt can appear after a delay in the event of a breakdown. If you are already in contact with the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center or have already received support, this prompt can be ignored or declined. % If you answer the prompt for support from the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center with Call Later, the message will be hidden and appear again later. The prompt triggered by the Mercedes me connect service "Telediagnostics", can either be confirmed or declined. After being declined, this will not be shown again. Arranging a service appointment via a Mercedes me call If you have activated the maintenance manage‐ ment service, relevant vehicle data is transferred automatically to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center. You will then receive individual recom‐ mendations regarding the maintenance of your vehicle. Regardless of whether you have consented to the maintenance management service, the multi‐ media system reminds you after a certain amount of time that a service is due. A prompt 272 MBUX multimedia system appears asking if you would like to make an appointment. # To arrange a service appointment: select Call. After your agreement, the vehicle data is transferred and the Mercedes-Benz customer center takes your preferred appointment date. The information is then sent to your desired service outlet. This will contact you to confirm the appoint‐ ment and if necessary consult about the details. % If you select Call Later after the service mes‐ sage appears, the message is hidden and reappears at a later time. Transferred data during a Mercedes me call If you initiate a service call using Mercedes me, data is transferred to enable targeted advice and an efficient service. The following requirements must be fulfilled for the transfer of the data: R The vehicle is switched on. R R The required data transfer technology is sup‐ ported by the mobile phone network pro‐ vider. The quality of the mobile connection is suffi‐ cient. Multi-stage transfer depends on the following factors: R Reason for the initiation of the call R The available mobile phone transmission technology. R The activated Mercedes me connect serv‐ ices. R The service selected in the voice control sys‐ tem. Data transfer if Mercedes me connect serv‐ ices are not activated If no Mercedes me connect services are activa‐ ted, the following data is transferred: R Vehicle identification number R Time of the call R Reason for the initiation of the call R R R R Confirmation of the data protection prompt Country indicator of the vehicle Set language for the multimedia system Telephone number of the communication platform installed in the vehicle If a call is made for a service appointment via the service reminder, the following data is also transmitted: R Current mileage and maintenance data If a call is made after automatic accident or breakdown detection using the multimedia sys‐ tem, the following data is also transmitted: R Current mileage and maintenance data R Current vehicle location If Accident and Breakdown Management is called via the voice control system, the following data can also be called up from the vehicle by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center: R Current vehicle location MBUX multimedia system 273 Data processing The data transmitted within the scope of the call is deleted from the processing system after the call is finished, in so far as this data is not being used for other activated Mercedes me connect services. The incident-specific data is processed and stored in the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center and, if required to process the incident, forwar‐ ded to the service partner authorized by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center. Please take note of the data protection information on the Mercedes me Internet page https:// www.mercedes.me or in the recorded message immediately after calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center. % The recorded message is not available in every country. Mercedes me connect Information on Mercedes me connect Mercedes me connect consists of multiple serv‐ ices. You can use the following services via the multi‐ media system and the overhead control panel, for example: R Accident and Breakdown Management (me button or situation-dependent display in the multimedia system) R Mercedes-Benz emergency call system (auto‐ matic emergency call and SOS button) The Mercedes me connect Accident and Break‐ down Management and the Mercedes-Benz emergency call center are available to you around the clock. The me button and the SOS button can be found on the vehicle's overhead control panel (/ page 270). You can also call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center using the multimedia system (/ page 270). Please note that Mercedes me connect is a Mercedes-Benz service. In emergencies, first call the national emergency services using the standard national emergency service telephone numbers. In emergencies, you can also use the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system (/ page 277). Please note the Mercedes me connect terms of use and the data protection information for Mercedes me connect. You can find these in your Mercedes me user account. Further information about Mercedes me connect services can be obtained in the Mercedes me Portal: https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com Information on Mercedes me connect Acci‐ dent and Breakdown Management The Accident and Breakdown Management can include the following functions: R Supplement to the Mercedes-Benz emer‐ gency call system (/ page 277) If necessary, the contact person at the Mercedes-Benz emergency call center for‐ wards the call to Mercedes me connect Acci‐ dent and Breakdown Management. Forward‐ ing the call is however not possible in all countries. R Breakdown assistance by a technician on location and/or the towing away of the vehi‐ 274 MBUX multimedia system R R cle to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center You may be charged for these services. Addition to the emergency guide after auto‐ matic accident or breakdown detection (/ page 271) In the event of a breakdown or accident, fur‐ ther vehicle data is sent which enables opti‐ mal support by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center and the authorized service partner or breakdown assistance. Addition to the Mercedes me connect service Telediagnostics With the Telediagnostics function, specific wear and failure reports are recorded by the service provider, in so far as these can be clearly interpreted and are available through the monitoring of components that are sub‐ ject to diagnostics. If your vehicle detects a breakdown or threat of a breakdown, you may be prompted via the multimedia system to contact the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center for further help. This prompt in the multimedia system only appears when the vehicle is stationary. % These services are subject to technical restrictions such as the mobile phone cover‐ age, mobile network quality and the ability of the processing systems to interpret the transferred data. In some circumstances, this can result in delays or the failure of the information to appear in the multimedia sys‐ tem. More information about Mercedes me connect services can be obtained in the Mercedes me Portal: https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com Data transferred during Mercedes me con‐ nect call services The data transferred during a Mercedes me con‐ nect call depends on: R The reason for initiation of the call R The service that is selected in the voice con‐ trol system R The activated Mercedes me connect services You can find out which data is transferred when using the services in the currently valid Mercedes me connect terms of use and the data protection information for Mercedes me con‐ nect. You can find these in your Mercedes me user account. Overview of the Mercedes me & Apps menu When you log in with a user account to the Mercedes me Portal, then services and offers from Mercedes-Benz will be available to you. For more information consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or visit the Mercedes me portal: https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com % Make sure you always keep the Mercedes me apps updated. You can call up the menu using Apps in the mul‐ timedia system. In the Apps menu, the following options can be available: R Connecting the vehicle with the Mercedes me user account MBUX multimedia system 275 R R R Deleting a connection between a Mercedes me user account and the vehicle Calling up the Mercedes me services Calling up apps such as, In-Car Office or the web browser depending on availability Web browser overview % Under Ä you have the following options: R Bookmarks R Request Mobile Website R Tabs % Websites cannot be shown while the vehicle is in motion. Overview of smartphone integration 1 2 3 4 5 Search To refresh/stop Previous website Options Settings With Smartphone Integration, you can use cer‐ tain functions on your mobile phone via the mul‐ timedia system display. Only one mobile phone at a time can be connec‐ ted via Smartphone Integration to the multime‐ dia system. Also for use with two phone mode with smartphone integration, only one additional mobile phone can be connected using Blue‐ tooth® with the multimedia system. The full range of functions for Smartphone Inte‐ gration is only possible with an Internet connec‐ tion. The appropriate application must be down‐ loaded on the mobile phone to use Smartphone Integration. The mobile phone must be switched 276 MBUX multimedia system on and connected to the multimedia system via the USB port using a suitable cable. Apps for Smartphone Integration R Mercedes-Benz Link (implementation of the function using the Mercedes-Benz Link con‐ trol box) R Apple CarPlay® (wireless connection via Bluetooth® also possible) R Android Auto (wireless connection via Blue‐ tooth® also possible) % For safety reasons, the first activation of Mercedes-Benz Link, Apple CarPlay® or Android Auto on the multimedia system must be carried out when the vehicle is sta‐ tionary and the parking brake is applied. You can start Smartphone Integration using the My Devices menu. You can end Smartphone Integration via the My Devices or by disconnecting the connecting cable between the mobile phone and multimedia system. % Mercedes-Benz recommends disconnecting the connection via the device manager or the connecting cable only when the vehicle is stationary. Overview of transferred vehicle data When using Smartphone Integration, certain vehicle data is transferred to the mobile phone. This enables you to get the best out of selected mobile phone services. Vehicle data is not directly accessible. The following system information is transmitted: R Software release of the multimedia system R System ID (anonymized) The transfer of this data is used to optimize com‐ munication between the vehicle and the mobile phone. To do this, and to assign several vehicles to the mobile phone, a vehicle identifier is randomly generated. This has no connection to the vehicle identifica‐ tion number (VIN) and is deleted when the multi‐ media system is reset (/ page 256). The following driving status data is transmitted: R Transmission position engaged R Distinction between parked, standstill, rolling and driving R Day/night mode of the instrument cluster R Drive type The transfer of this data is used to alter how content is displayed to correspond to the driving situation. The following position data is transmitted: R Coordinates R Speed R Compass direction R Acceleration direction This data is used by the mobile phone to improve the accuracy of the navigation (e.g. for continuation in a tunnel). MBUX multimedia system 277 Mercedes-Benz emergency call system Information on the Mercedes-Benz emer‐ gency call system Your vehicle is equipped with the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system (“eCall”). This feature can help save lives in the event of an accident. eCall in no way replaces assistance provided from dialing 911. Mercedes-Benz eCall only functions in areas where mobile phone coverage is available from the wireless service providers. Insufficient net‐ work coverage from the wireless service provid‐ ers may result in an emergency call not being transmitted. eCall is a standard feature in your MercedesBenz vehicle. In order to function as intended, the system relies on the transmission of data detailed in the Transmitted Data section that fol‐ lows. To disable eCall, a customer must visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Service department to deactivate the vehicle’s communication mod‐ ule. Deactivation of this module prevents the activa‐ tion of any and all Mercedes me connect serv‐ ices. After the deactivation of eCall, automatic emergency call and manual emergency call will not be available. The vehicle must be switched on before an auto‐ matic emergency call can be made. % eCall is activated at the factory. % eCall can be deactivated by an authorized Mercedes-Benz dealer. Please note that in the event ownership of the vehicle is trans‐ ferred to another owner in its deactivated state, eCall will remain deactivated unless the new owner visits an authorized Mercedes-Benz dealership to reactivate the system. Overview of the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system eCall can help to reduce the time between an accident and the arrival of emergency services at the site of the accident. It helps locate an accident site in places that are difficult to access. However, even if a vehicle is equipped with eCall, this does not mean the system is ON. As such, eCall does not replace dialing 911 in the event of an accident. An emergency call can be made automatically or manually. Only make emergency calls if you or others are in need of rescue. Do not make an emergency call in the event of a breakdown or a similar sit‐ uation. Triggering an automatic Mercedes-Benz emergency call Requirements: R The vehicle is switched on. R The starter battery is sufficiently charged. The Mercedes-Benz emergency call system trig‐ gers an emergency call automatically in the fol‐ lowing cases: R After activation of the restraint systems such as airbags or Emergency Tensioning Devices after an accident 278 MBUX multimedia system R After an automatically initiated emergency stop by Active Emergency Stop Assist The emergency call has been made: R A voice connection is made to the MercedesBenz emergency call center. R A message with accident data is transmitted to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call center. The Mercedes-Benz emergency call center can transmit the vehicle position data to one of the emergency call centers. The SOS button in the overhead control panel flashes until the emergency call is finished. It is not possible to immediately end an auto‐ matic emergency call. If no connection can be made to the emergency services either, a corresponding message appears in the media display. # Dial the local emergency number on your mobile phone. If an emergency call has been initiated: R Remain in the vehicle if the road and traffic conditions permit you to do so until a voice R R connection is established with the emer‐ gency call center operator. Based on the call, the operator decides whether it is necessary to call rescue teams and/or the police to the accident site. If no vehicle occupant answers, an ambu‐ lance is sent to the vehicle immediately. Triggering a manual Mercedes-Benz emer‐ gency call # To use the SOS button in the overhead control panel: press the SOS button at least one second long (/ page 270). or To use voice control: use the voice com‐ mands of the MBUX Voice Assistant. The emergency call has been made: R A voice connection is made to the MercedesBenz emergency call center. R A message with accident data is transmitted to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call center. # R R The Mercedes-Benz emergency call center can transmit the vehicle position data to one of the emergency call centers. Remain in the vehicle if the road and traffic conditions permit you to do so until a voice connection is established with the emer‐ gency call center operator. Based on the call, the operator decides whether it is necessary to call rescue teams and/or the police to the accident site. If no connection can be made to the emergency services, a corresponding message appears in the central display. # Dial the local emergency number on your mobile phone. Ending an unintentionally triggered manual Mercedes-Benz emergency call # Select on the multifunction steering wheel. Depress button for several seconds. MBUX multimedia system 279 Data transfer of the Mercedes-Benz emer‐ gency call system In the event of an automatic or manual emer‐ gency call the following data is transmitted, for example: R Vehicle's GPS position data R GPS position data on the route (a few hun‐ dred meters before the incident) R Direction of travel R Vehicle identification number R Vehicle drive type R Number of people determined to be in the vehicle R Whether Mercedes me connect is available or not R Whether the emergency call was initiated manually or automatically R Time of the accident R Language setting on the multimedia system Data transmitted is vehicle information. For any questions about the collection, use and sharing of the eCall system data, please contact MBU‐ SA's Customer Assistance Center at 800-FORMERC. For Canada, please contact MBC's Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-387-0100. Customer requests for covered information should be submitted via the same channels. For accident clarification purposes, the following measures can be taken up to an hour after the emergency call has been initiated: R The current vehicle position can be deter‐ mined. R A voice connection to the vehicle occupants can be established. 280 MBUX multimedia system Radio & media Overview of the symbols and functions in the media menu Symbol Designation Function 6 Play Select to start or continue playback. 8 Rest Select to pause the playback. : Repeat a track Select to repeat the current track or the active playlist. R Select once: the active playlist is repeated. R Select twice: the current track is repeated. R Select three times: the function is deactivated. 9 Random playback Select to play back the tracks in random order. û/ü Skip forwards/back Select to skip to the next or to the previous track. Ä Additional options Select to show additional options. 5 Categories Select to show or search through available categories (e.g. playback lists, albums, artists, etc.). ª Search Select to search in the active menu. You can search for artists, genres or moods, for example. MBUX multimedia system 281 Symbol Designation Function Z Settings Select to make settings. © Home Select to return to the home screen. j Messaging Select to call up messaging. 2 Full screen Select to switch to full screen mode. The following functions and settings are availa‐ ble in the media menu: R Connecting external data storage media with the multimedia system (e.g. using USB or Bluetooth®) R Playing back audio or video files 282 MBUX multimedia system Overview of the symbols and functions in the radio menu Symbol Designation Function © Home Select to return to the home screen. j Messaging Select to call up messaging. û/ü Skip forwards/back Select to skip to the next or to the previous station. Z Settings Select to have further options shown. The setting options are country-dependent. HD HD radio® Select to switch the HD Radio® function on or off. This function is not available in all countries. 4 Station list Select to have the station list shown. ª Search Select to search in the active menu. You can search for artists, genres or moods, for example. Additional functions of TuneIn Radio % A relatively large volume of data can be transmitted when using TuneIn Radio. MBUX multimedia system 283 Symbol Designation Function Z Settings The following additional settings are available in the TuneIn Radio menu: R Selecting stream R Logging on to or out of the TuneIn account ß Favourites Select during playback to save the station cur‐ rently set as a favorite. 6/8 Play/Pause Select to start, stop or continue playback. 4 Browse Select to choose a category and then a radio station. Additional functions of the satellite radio SIRIUS XM® satellite radio offers more than 175 digital-quality radio channels providing 100% commercial-free music, sports, news and enter‐ tainment, for example. SIRIUS XM® satellite radio employs a fleet of high-performance satel‐ lites to broadcast around the clock throughout the USA and Canada. The satellite radio program is available for a monthly fee. Information about this can be obtained from a Sirius XM® Service Center and at https://www.siriusxm.com (USA) or https://www.siriusxm.ca (Canada). % Sirius, XM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc. and its subsidiaries. All other marks, channel names and logos are the property of their respective owners. All rights reserved. 284 MBUX multimedia system Symbol Designation Function Z Settings The following additional settings are available in the satellite radio menu: R Activate child safety lock to lock channels with adult content R Set alarm programming for music and sport alerts R Create TuneMix lists to listen to music seam‐ lessly 6 Play Select to start or continue playback. 8 Rest Select to pause the playback. Depending on the frequency band selected, dif‐ ferent functions are available to you. Select the desired frequency band in the radio menu head runner. Calling up TuneIn Radio Requirements: R There is a user account at https:// www.mercedes.me. R The vehicle is linked to the Mercedes me user account. R The TuneIn Radio service is activated in the Mercedes me portal. R R The data volume is available. Depending on the country, data volume may need to be purchased. A fast Internet connection for data transmis‐ sion free of interference. % Data volume can be purchased directly from a mobile phone network provider via the Mercedes me Portal. MBUX multimedia system 285 % The functions and services are countrydependent. For more information, consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Radio # Select TuneIn Radio. The TuneIn menu appears. The last station set starts playing. % The connection quality depends on the local mobile phone reception. Setting up satellite radio Requirements: R Satellite radio equipment is available. R Registration with a satellite radio provider has been completed. R If registration is not included when purchas‐ ing the system, your credit card details will be required to activate your account. Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Þ Radio 5 SiriusXM 5 Z # Select Service Information. The service information screen appears showing the radio ID and the current sub‐ scription status. # Establish a telephone connection. # Follow the service staff's instructions. The activation process may take up to ten minutes. % You can also have the satellite service acti‐ vated online. To do so, please visit https:// www.siriusxm.com (USA) or https:// www.siriusxm.ca (Canada). Music and sport alerts Multimedia system: 4 © 5 Þ Radio 5 Z 5 Alerts 5 SiriusXM Setting music and sport alerts This function enables you to program an alert for your favorite artists, tracks or sporting events. Music alerts can be saved whilst a track is being played and sport alerts can be saved during a live game. You can also specify sport alerts via the menu option. The system then continuously searches through all the channels. # Set a music or sports alert, to be informed of matches in the live program. Activating messages for a category Select a category and activate D. # Adding messages for a category Select a category and add a message W. # Select Artist Alerts or Song Alerts in the dia‐ log window. The message is set for the activated O track and artist. If a match is found, a prompt # 286 MBUX multimedia system appears asking whether you wish to change to the station. Deleting messages in a category # Select a category, mark the desired mes‐ sages and delete E. or # Do not mark any messages and delete all entries E. Sound settings Overview of functions in the sound menu The setting options and functions available depend on the sound system installed. You can find out which sound system is installed in your vehicle in the Digital Operator's Manual. Standard sound system The following functions are available: R Equalizer: Treble, mid-range and bass R Balance and fader R Volume: - Automatic adjustment Burmester® 3D-surround sound system and Burmester® high-end 3D surround sound system The following functions are available: R Equalizer: Treble, mid-range and bass R Balance and fader R Sound focus R VIP seat (Burmester® high-end 3D surround sound system only) R Sound profiles R Volume: Automatic adjustment Maintenance and care 287 ASSYST PLUS service interval display Function of the ASSYST PLUS service interval display The ASSYST PLUS service interval display on the driver display provides information on the remaining time or distance before the next service due date. You can hide this service display using the G back button on the left-hand side of the steering wheel. Depending on how the vehicle is used, the ASSYST PLUS service interval display may shorten the service interval, e.g. in the following cases: R Mainly short-distance driving R When the engine is often left idling for long periods R In the event of frequent cold start phases Mercedes-Benz recommends avoiding such operating conditions. You can obtain information concerning the serv‐ icing of your vehicle from a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Displaying the service due date Driver display: 4 Service The next service due date is displayed. # To exit the display: press the back button G on the left-hand side of the steering wheel. Bear in mind the following related topic: R Operating the driver display (/ page 238). Information on regular maintenance work * NOTE Premature wear through failure to observe service due dates Maintenance work which is not carried out at the right time or incompletely can lead to increased wear and damage to the vehicle. # # Adhere to the prescribed service inter‐ vals. Always have the prescribed mainte‐ nance work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Notes on special service requirements The prescribed service interval is based on nor‐ mal operation of the vehicle. Have the mainte‐ nance work carried out more often than prescri‐ bed if operating conditions are difficult or the vehicle is subject to increased stress. The ASSYST PLUS service interval display is only an aid. The driver of the vehicle bears responsi‐ bility as regards to whether maintenance work needs to be performed more often than speci‐ fied based on the actual operating conditions and/or loads. Examples of arduous operating conditions: R Regular city driving with frequent intermedi‐ ate stops R Mainly short-distance driving 288 Maintenance and care R R R Frequent operation in mountainous terrain or on poor road surfaces When the engine is often left idling for long periods Operation in particularly dusty conditions and/or if air-recirculation mode is frequently used In these or similar operating conditions, have the interior air filter, air filter, engine oil and oil filter, for example, changed more frequently. The tires must be checked more frequently if the vehicle is operated under increased loads. Further infor‐ mation can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop. Battery disconnection periods The ASSYST PLUS service interval display can calculate the service due date only when the battery is connected. # Display and note down the service due date on the driver display before disconnecting the battery (/ page 287). Engine compartment Opening and closing the hood & WARNING Risk of accident due to driv‐ ing with the hood unlocked The hood may open and block your view. # Never release the hood when driving. # Before every trip, ensure that the hood is locked. & WARNING Risk of accident and injury when opening and closing the hood The hood may suddenly drop into the end position. There is a risk of injury for anyone in the hood's range of movement. # Do not open or close the hood if there is a person in the hood's range of move‐ ment. & WARNING Risk of burns when opening the hood If you open the hood in the event of an over‐ heated engine or fire in the engine compart‐ ment, the following situations may occur: R You may come into contact with hot gases. R You may come into contact with other escaping hot operating fluids. # # Before opening the hood, allow the engine to cool down. In the event of a fire in the engine com‐ partment, keep the hood closed and call the fire service. & WARNING Risk of injury due to moving parts Components in the engine compartment may continue to run or start unexpectedly even when the drive system is switched off. Maintenance and care 289 Observe the following if you must open the hood: # Switch off the vehicle. # Never touch the danger zones sur‐ rounding moving components, e.g. the rotation area of the fan. # Remove jewelery and watches. # Keep items of clothing and hair away from moving parts. & WARNING Risk of injury from touching live components The ignition system and the fuel injection system operate with a high voltage. You could receive an electric shock. # Never touch components of the ignition system or fuel injection system when the vehicle is switched on. The live components include the following, for example: R Ignition coils R R Fuel injectors Electric lines to the ignition coils and the fuel injectors Opening the hood & WARNING Risk of burns from hot com‐ ponent parts in the engine compartment Certain component parts in the engine com‐ partment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the cooler and parts of the exhaust system. # Allow the engine to cool down and only touch component parts described in the following. & WARNING Risk of injury from using the windshield wipers when the hood is open If the windshield wipers start moving when the hood is open, you could be trapped by the wiper linkage. # Always switch off the windshield wipers and the vehicle first if you need to open the hood. # To release the hood, pull on handle 1. 290 Maintenance and care # # Lower the hood to a height of around 8 in (20 cm) and then allow it to fall, applying a little force as you let it go. If the hood can still be lifted slightly, open the hood again and close it with a little more force until it engages correctly. Engine oil One of the following messages will appear on the driver display: R Engine Oil Level Measuring Now…: the engine oil level cannot be determined yet. # R Checking the engine oil level using the driver display # Push handle 1 of the hood catch upwards and lift the hood until it opens automatically. Closing the hood * NOTE Damage to the hood If the hood is closed manually, there is a risk of dents. # Do not close the hood manually. Requirements: R The engine has been warmed up. R The vehicle is parked on a level surface. R The engine is running at idle speed. R The hood is closed. Determining the engine oil level can take up to 30 minutes with a normal driving style and even longer with an active driving style. Driver display: 4 Service The engine oil level is shown. Repeat the request after a maximum of 30 minutes' driving. Engine Oil Level OK and the bar display for indicating the engine oil level on the driver display is green and is between "min" and "max": the engine oil level is correct. R Engine Oil Level Refill 1,0 liq.gal. and the bar display for indicating the engine oil level on the driver display is yellow and is below "min": # Add 1.1 US qt (1 l) of engine oil. Engine Oil Level Reduce and the bar display for indicating the engine oil level on the driver display is yellow and is above "max": R # Drain off any excess engine oil that has been added. To do so, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Maintenance and care 291 R For Engine Oil Level Ignition Switch Position 1 # Switch on the vehicle to check the engine oil level. Engine Oil Level System Inoperative: The oil level sensor is defective or not connected. R R Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Engine Oil Level Currently Unavailable # Close the hood. # Refilling engine oil & WARNING Risk of burns from hot com‐ ponent parts in the engine compartment Certain component parts in the engine com‐ partment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the cooler and parts of the exhaust system. # Allow the engine to cool down and only touch component parts described in the following. & WARNING Risk of fire and injury from engine oil If engine oil comes into contact with hot component parts in the engine compart‐ ment, it may ignite. # Make sure that no engine oil is spilled next to the filler opening. # Allow the engine to cool off and thor‐ oughly clean the engine oil from compo‐ nent parts before starting the vehicle. * NOTE Engine damage caused by an incorrect oil filter, incorrect oil or addi‐ tives # # Do not use engine oils or oil filters which do not correspond to the specifi‐ cations explicitly prescribed for the service intervals. Follow the instructions on the service interval display for changing the engine oil and observe the prescribed change intervals. # Do not use additives. * NOTE Damage caused by refilling too much engine oil Too much engine oil can damage the engine or the catalytic converter. # Have excess engine oil removed at a qualified specialist workshop. % Depending on driving style, the vehicle con‐ sumes up to 0.9 US qt (0.8 liter) of oil per 600 miles (1000 km). The oil consumption may be higher than this when the vehicle is new or if you frequently drive at high engine speeds. 292 Maintenance and care Checking the coolant level & WARNING Risk of burns from hot com‐ ponent parts in the engine compartment Certain component parts in the engine com‐ partment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the cooler and parts of the exhaust system. # Allow the engine to cool down and only touch component parts described in the following. & WARNING Risk of scalding from hot coolant # # # # Turn cap 1 counter-clockwise and remove it. Add engine oil. Replace cap 1 and turn it clockwise until it engages. Check the oil level again (/ page 290). If you open the cap, you could be scalded. # Let the motor cool down before opening the cap. # When opening the cap, wear protective gloves and safety glasses. # Open the cap slowly to release pres‐ sure. # # # Park the vehicle on a level surface. Check the coolant temperature display in the instrument cluster. The coolant temperature must be in the bot‐ tom quarter of the temperature display. Slowly turn cap 1 counter-clockwise to release overpressure. Maintenance and care 293 # Continue turning cap 1 counter-clockwise and remove it. The coolant level is correct in the following cases: R If the engine is cold, the coolant is up to marker bar 2. R If the engine is warm, the coolant is up to 0.6 in (1.5 cm) over the marker bar 2. If necessary, add coolant that has been approved for Mercedes-Benz. % Further information on coolant (/ page 362) # Refilling the windshield washer system & WARNING Risk of injury due to moving parts Components in the engine compartment may continue to run or start unexpectedly even when the drive system is switched off. Observe the following if you must open the hood: # Switch off the vehicle. # Never touch the danger zones sur‐ rounding moving components, e.g. the rotation area of the fan. # Remove jewelery and watches. # Keep items of clothing and hair away from moving parts. & WARNING Risk of burns from hot com‐ ponent parts in the engine compartment Certain component parts in the engine com‐ partment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the cooler and parts of the exhaust system. # Allow the engine to cool down and only touch component parts described in the following. & WARNING ‑ Risk of fire and injury from windshield washer concentrate Windshield washer concentrate is highly flammable. It could ignite if it comes into contact with hot engine component parts or the exhaust system. # Make sure that no windshield washer concentrate spills out next to the filler opening. 294 Maintenance and care Keeping the air-water duct free # Keep the area between the hood and the windshield free of deposits, e.g. ice, snow and leaves. Cleaning and care Notes on washing the vehicle in a car wash & WARNING Risk of accident due to reduced braking effect after washing the vehicle Open cap 1 by the tab. Add washer fluid. % Further information about the windshield washer fluid (/ page 363) # # The braking effect is reduced after washing the vehicle. # After the vehicle has been washed, brake carefully while paying attention to the traffic conditions until the braking effect has been fully restored. * NOTE Damage from automatic braking If one of the following functions is switched on, the vehicle brakes automatically in cer‐ tain situations: R Active Brake Assist R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC R HOLD function R Active Parking Assist To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate these systems in the following or similar sit‐ uations: # During towing # In a car wash * NOTE Damage due to unsuitable car wash # Before driving into a car wash make sure that the car wash is suitable for the vehicle dimensions. Maintenance and care 295 # # Ensure there is sufficient ground clear‐ ance between the underbody and the guide rails of the car wash. Ensure that the clearance width of the car wash, in particular the width of the guide rails, is sufficient. To avoid damage to your vehicle when using a car wash, ensure the following beforehand: R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deacti‐ vated. R The HOLD function is switched off. R The surround view camera or the rear view camera is switched off. R The side windows and sliding sunroof are completely closed. R The blower for the ventilation and heating is switched off. R The windshield wiper switch is in position g. R The SmartKey is at a minimum distance of 10 ft (3 m) away from the vehicle. Otherwise, the trunk lid could open unintentionally. R R For car washes with a conveyor system: neutral i is engaged. If you would like to leave the vehicle while it is being washed, make sure the Smart‐ Key is located in the vehicle. The park position j is otherwise automatically engaged. Do not make any hand movements in the area of the overhead control panel or deacti‐ vate (/ page 252) the Sliding Sunroof and Roller Sunblind option in the settings for the MBUX interior assistant. % If, after the car wash, you remove the wax from the windshield and wiper rubbers, this will prevent smearing and reduce wiper noise. Notes on using a power washer & WARNING Risk of an accident when using power washers with round-spray nozzles The water jet can cause externally invisible damage. Components damaged in this way may unex‐ pectedly fail. # Do not use a power washer with roundspray nozzles. # Have damaged tires or chassis parts replaced immediately. To avoid damage to your vehicle, observe the fol‐ lowing when using a power washer: R The SmartKey is at a minimum distance of 10 ft (3 m) away from the vehicle. Otherwise, the trunk lid could open unintentionally. R Maintain a distance of at least 11.8 in (30 cm) to the vehicle. R Vehicles with decorative foil: Parts of your vehicle are covered with a decorative foil. 296 Maintenance and care R R Maintain a distance of at least 27.6 in (70 cm) between the foil-covered parts of the vehicle and the nozzle of the power washer. Move the power washer nozzle around whilst cleaning. The water temperature of the power washer must not exceed 140°F (60°C). Observe the information on the correct dis‐ tance in the equipment manufacturer's oper‐ ating instructions. Do not direct the nozzle of the power washer directly at sensitive parts, such as tires, gaps, electrical components, batteries, light sources and ventilation slits. Washing the vehicle by hand * NOTE Engine damage due to water ingress # Take care not to point the water jet directly towards the air inlet grille below the hood. Observe the legal requirements, e.g. in a number of countries, washing by hand is only permitted in specially designated wash bays. # Use a mild cleaning agent, e.g. car shampoo. # Wash the vehicle with lukewarm water using a soft car sponge. When doing so, do not expose the vehicle to direct sunlight. # Carefully hose the vehicle off with water and dry using a chamois. % Observe the notes on the care of vehicle parts (/ page 298). Notes on paintwork/matte finish paintwork care To avoid damaging the paintwork and interfering with the driving assistance systems, please observe the following notes: Paint R Insect remains: soak with insect remover and rinse off the treated areas afterwards. R Bird droppings: soak with water and rinse off afterwards. R R R R R R Tree resin, oils, fuels and greases: remove by rubbing gently with a cloth soaked in petro‐ leum ether or lighter fluid. Coolant and brake fluid: remove with a damp cloth and clean water. Tar stains: use tar remover. Wax: use silicone remover. Do not attach stickers, films or similar mate‐ rials. Only have film attached to the bumper at a qualified specialist workshop. Remove dirt immediately, where possible. Matte finish Only use care products approved for Mercedes-Benz. R Do not attach stickers, films or similar mate‐ rials. Only have film attached to the bumper at a qualified specialist workshop. R Do not polish the vehicle and alloy wheels. R Only use car washes that correspond to the latest engineering standards. R Do not use car wash program with a final hot wax treatment. R Maintenance and care 297 R Do not use paint cleaners, buffing or polish‐ ing products, gloss preservers, e.g. wax. In the event of paintwork damage: R Always have paintwork repairs carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. R Make sure the radar sensors function (/ page 176). Notes on cleaning decorative foils Observe the notes on matte finish care in the chapter "Notes on paintwork/matte finish paint‐ work care" (/ page 296). They also apply to matte decorative foils. Observe the notes on cleaning decorative foils to avoid vehicle damage. Cleaning R For cleaning, use plenty of water and a mild cleaning agent without additives or abrasive substances, e.g. a car shampoo approved for Mercedes-Benz. R Remove dirt immediately, where possible, whilst avoiding rubbing too hard. There is R R R R otherwise a risk of damaging the decorative foil irreparably. If there is dirt on the finish or if the decora‐ tive foil is dull: use the Paint Cleaner recom‐ mended and approved for Mercedes-Benz. Insect remains: soak with insect remover and rinse off the treated areas afterwards. Bird droppings: soak with water and rinse off afterwards. To prevent water stains, dry a foil-wrapped vehicle with a soft, absorbent cloth after every car wash. Avoiding damage to the decorative foil The service life and color of decorative foils are impaired by: Sunlight Temperature, e.g. hot air blower Weather conditions Stone chippings and dirt Chemical cleaning agents Oily products R R R Do not use polish on matte decorative foil. Polishing will have the effect of shining the foil-wrapped surface. Do not treat matte or structured decorative foils with wax. Permanent stains may occur. Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected by corrosion and damage caused by incorrect care cannot always be completely repaired. In such cases, visit a qualified specialist workshop. You can obtain more information on care and cleaning products from the manufacturer. In the case of foil-wrapped surfaces, optical dif‐ ferences may occur between the surfaces that were not protected by a decorative foil after removing a decorative foil. % Have work or repairs to decorative foils car‐ ried out at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. 298 Maintenance and care Notes on care of vehicle parts & WARNING Risk of entrapment if the windshield wipers are switched on while the windshield is being cleaned If the windshield wipers are set in motion while you are cleaning the windshield or wiper blades, you can be trapped by the wiper arm. # Always switch off the windshield wipers and the vehicle before cleaning the windshield or wiper blades. & WARNING Risk of burns from the tail‐ pipe and tailpipe trims The exhaust tailpipe and tailpipe trims can become very hot. If you come into contact with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn yourself. # Always be particularly careful around the tailpipe and the tailpipe trims and supervise children especially closely in this area. # Allow vehicle parts to cool down before touching them. To avoid damage to the vehicle, observe the notes on cleaning and care of the following vehi‐ cle parts: Wheels and rims Use water and acid-free alloy wheel cleaners. R Do not use acidic alloy wheel cleaners to remove brake dust. This could damage wheel bolts and brake components. R To avoid corrosion of the brake discs and brakepads, drive the vehicle for a few minutes after cleaning before parking it. The brake discs and brakepads warm up and dry out. R Windows Clean the windows inside and outside with a damp cloth and with a cleaning agent recom‐ mended for Mercedes-Benz. R Do not use dry cloths or abrasive or solventbased cleaning agents to clean the inside of windows. R % After changing the wiper blades or treating the vehicle with wax, clean the windshield thoroughly with cleaning agents recommen‐ ded for Mercedes-Benz. Failure to observe the application instructions may result in damage, smear marks or shiny spots. % Remove external fogging or dirt on the wind‐ shield in front of the multifunction camera. Otherwise, driving systems and driving safety systems may be impaired or not avail‐ able (/ page 176). Wiper blades Move the wiper arms into the replacement position (/ page 132). R With the wiper arms folded out, clean the wiper blades with a damp cloth. R % Make sure that the wiper blades are coated. The coating can leave residues on a cloth. Do not rub the wiper blades excessively or clean them too often. Exterior lighting R Clean the lenses with a wet sponge and mild cleaning agent, e.g. car shampoo. Maintenance and care 299 R Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths that are suitable for plastic lenses. Sensors R Clean the sensors in the front and rear bumpers with a soft cloth and car shampoo (/ page 176). R When using a power washer, maintain a mini‐ mum distance of 11.8 in (30 cm). Rear view camera and surround view camera R Open the camera cover with the multimedia system (/ page 225). R Use clean water and a soft cloth to clean the camera lens. R Do not use a power washer. Tailpipes Clean with a cleaning agent recommended for Mercedes-Benz, especially in the winter and after washing the vehicle. R Do not use acidic cleaning agents. R Notes on care of the interior & WARNING Risk of injury from plastic parts breaking off after the use of sol‐ vent-based care products Care and cleaning products containing sol‐ vents can cause surfaces in the cockpit to become porous. When the airbags are deployed, plastic parts may break away. # Do not use any care or cleaning prod‐ ucts containing solvents to clean the cockpit. & WARNING Risk of injury or death from bleached seat belts Bleaching or dyeing seat belts can severely weaken them. This can, for example, cause seat belts to tear or fail in an accident. # Never bleach or dye seat belts. To avoid damage to the vehicle, observe the fol‐ lowing notes on cleaning and care: Seat belts R Clean with lukewarm and soapy water. R Do not use chemical cleaning agents. R Do not dry by heating them to over 176°F (80°C) or exposing them to direct sunlight. Display Switch off the display and let it cool down. R Clean the surface carefully with a microfiber cloth and a suitable display care product (TFT-LCD). R Do not use any other agents. R Head-up Display R Clean with a soft, non-static, lint-free cloth. R Do not use cleaning agents. Plastic trim R Clean with a damp microfiber cloth. R For heavy soiling: Use a cleaner recommen‐ ded for Mercedes-Benz. R Do not attach stickers, films or similar mate‐ rials. 300 Maintenance and care R Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent or sun cream to come in contact with the plas‐ tic trim. Real wood and trim elements R Clean with a microfiber cloth. R Black piano-lacquer look: Clean with a damp cloth and soapy water. R For heavy soiling: Use a cleaner recommen‐ ded for Mercedes-Benz. R Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents, polishes or waxes. Headliner R Clean with a brush or dry shampoo. Carpet R Use a carpet and textile cleaning agent rec‐ ommended for Mercedes-Benz. Steering wheel made of genuine leather or DINAMICA * NOTE Damage caused by wrong cleaners # Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents such as tar remover or wheel cleaner; neither should you use pol‐ ishes or waxes. Otherwise you may damage the finish. R R R R R Clean with a damp cloth and 1% soapy water solution and then wipe with a dry cloth. For heavy soiling: Use a cleaner recommen‐ ded for Mercedes-Benz. Leather care: Use a leather care agent that has been recommended for Mercedes-Benz. Do not allow the leather to become too damp. Do not use a microfiber cloth. % Leather is a natural product. It has natural surface properties, such as differences in structure, marks caused by growth and injury or subtle color differences. Genuine leather seat covers R Clean with a damp cloth and then wipe with a dry cloth. R Leather care: Use a leather care agent that has been recommended for Mercedes-Benz. R R Do not allow the leather to become too damp. Do not use a microfiber cloth. DINAMICA seat covers R Clean with a damp cloth. R Do not use a microfiber cloth. Imitation leather seat covers Clean with a damp cloth and 1% soapy water. R Do not use a microfiber cloth. R Fabric seat covers Clean with a damp microfiber cloth and 1% soapy water and allow to dry. R EASY-PACK trunk box R Clean with a damp cloth. R Do not use any alcohol-based thinners, gaso‐ line or abrasive cleaning agents. Breakdown assistance 301 R Emergency Removing the safety vest R The maximum permissible number of washes is exceeded The fluorescence has faded Warning triangle Removing the warning triangle 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 The safety vests are located in the storage com‐ partments in the driver's and front passenger door. # Pull out safety vest bag 1 by the loop. # Open the safety vest bag and pull out the safety vest. Maximum number of washes Maximum wash temperature Do not bleach Do not iron Do not tumble dry Do not dry clean Class 2 safety vest The requirements defined by the legal standard are only fulfilled if the safety vest is the correct size and is fully closed. Replace the safety vest in the following cases: R The reflective strips are damaged or dirty # Remove warning triangle 1. 302 Breakdown assistance Setting up the warning triangle # # # # Fold side reflectors 1 upwards to form a tri‐ angle and attach at the top using upper press-stud 2. Fold legs 3 down and out to the side. First-aid kit (soft-sided) overview First-aid kit (soft sided) 1 is on the left or right in the trunk, depending on the vehicle version. Flat tire Notes in the event of a flat tire & WARNING Risk of accident due to a flat tire A flat tire severely affects the driving charac‐ teristics as well as the steering and braking of the vehicle. Tires without run-flat characteristics: Do not drive with a flat tire. Change the flat tire immediately with an emergency spare wheel or spare wheel. Alternatively, consult a qualified spe‐ cialist workshop. Tires with run-flat characteristics: # Observe the information and warning notes on MOExtended tires (run-flat tire). In the event of a flat tire, the following options are available depending on your vehicle's equip‐ ment: R Vehicles with MOExtended tires: it is pos‐ sible to continue the journey for a short period of time. Make sure you observe the notes on MOExtended tires (run-flat tires) (/ page 303). R Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit: you can repair the tire so that it is possible to continue the journey for a short period of time. To do this, use the TIREFIT kit (/ page 304). Breakdown assistance 303 R R Vehicles with Mercedes me connect: you can make a call for breakdown assistance via the overhead control panel in the case of a breakdown (/ page 270). All vehicles: change the wheel (/ page 346). % The emergency spare wheel is only available in certain countries. Notes on MOExtended tires (run-flat tire) & WARNING Risk of accident when driving in limp-home mode When driving in emergency mode the han‐ dling characteristics are impaired. # Do not exceed the specified maximum speed of the MOExtended tires. # Avoid any abrupt steering and driving maneuvers as well as driving over obstacles (curbs, pot holes, off-road). This applies, in particular, to a loaded vehicle. # R R R R R # # Stop driving in the emergency mode if you notice: Banging noise Vehicle vibration Smoke which smells like rubber Continuous ESP® intervention Cracks in the tire side walls After driving in emergency mode, have the rims checked by a qualified special‐ ist workshop with regard to their further use. The defective tire must be replaced in every case. With MOExtended tires (run-flat tires), you can continue to drive your vehicle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one or more tires. How‐ ever, the tire affected must not show any clearly visible damage. You can recognize MOExtended tires by the MOExtended marking which appears on the side wall of the tire. Vehicles with tire pressure loss warning sys‐ tem: MOExtended tires may only be used in con‐ junction with an activated tire pressure loss warning system. Vehicles with tire pressure monitoring sys‐ tem: MOExtended tires may only be used in con‐ junction with an activated tire pressure monitor‐ ing system. If a pressure loss warning message appears in the driver's display, proceed as follows: R Check the tire for damage. R If driving on, observe the following notes. Driving distance possible in emergency mode after the pressure loss warning: Load condition Driving distance pos‐ sible in emergency mode Partially laden 50 miles (80 km) Fully laden 19 miles (30 km) The driving distance possible in emergency mode may vary depending on the driving style. 304 Breakdown assistance Observe the maximum permissible speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). If a tire has gone flat and cannot be replaced with an MOExtended tire, you can use a stand‐ ard tire as a temporary measure. TIREFIT kit storage location Plug-in hybrid: be sure to observe the notes in the Supplement. You could otherwise fail to rec‐ ognize dangers. When delivered from the factory, the TIREFIT kit is located in the trunk. Depending on the vehi‐ cle's equipment, placing it under the trunk floor is also possible. Using the TIREFIT kit Requirements: R Tire sealant bottle R TIREFIT sticker R Tire inflation compressor R Gloves (depending on the vehicle equipment) TIREFIT kit storage location: (/ page 304) You can use TIREFIT tire sealant to seal perfora‐ tion damage of up to 0.16 in (4 mm), particularly those in the tire contact surface. You can use TIREFIT in outside temperatures down to -4 °F (-20 °C). & WARNING Risk of accident when using tire sealant The tire sealant may be unable to seal the tire properly, especially in the following cases: R There are cuts or punctures in the tire larger than damage previously men‐ tioned. R The wheel rim is damaged. R You have driven at very low tire pressure or on a flat tire. # # Do not continue driving. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. & WARNING Risk of injury and poisoning from tire sealant The tire sealant is harmful and causes irrita‐ tion. Do not allow it to come into contact with the skin, eyes or clothing, and do not swallow it. Do not inhale tire sealant fumes. Keep the tire sealant away from children. If you come into contact with the tire sealant, observe the following: # Rinse off the tire sealant from your skin immediately using water. # If tire sealant gets into your eyes, thor‐ oughly rinse out the eyes using clean water. # If tire sealant has been swallowed, immediately rinse out the mouth thor‐ oughly and drink plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting and seek medical attention immediately. # Change out of any clothes contamina‐ ted with tire sealant immediately. # If allergic reactions occur, seek medical attention immediately. Breakdown assistance 305 * NOTE Overheating due to the tire infla‐ tion compressor running too long # Do not run the tire inflation compressor for longer than ten minutes without interruption. # # Affix part 1 of the TIREFIT sticker to the instrument cluster within the driver's field of vision. Affix part 2 of the TIREFIT sticker near the valve on the wheel with the faulty tire. # # Push the plug of hose 5 into flange 6 of tire sealant bottle 1 until the plug engages. Place tire sealant bottle 1 head downwards into recess 2 of the tire inflation compres‐ sor. Comply with the manufacturer's safety notes on the sticker on the tire inflation compressor. Have the tire sealant bottle replaced in a quali‐ fied specialist workshop every five years. # Do not remove any foreign objects which have entered the tire. # # # # Pull plug 4 with the cable and hose 5 out of the tire inflation compressor housing. # Remove the cap from valve 7 on the faulty tire. Screw filling hose 8 onto valve 7. Insert plug 4 into a 12 V socket in your vehicle. Switch on the vehicle. 306 Breakdown assistance # Press on and off switch 3 on the tire infla‐ tion compressor. The tire inflation compressor is switched on. The tire is inflated. First, tire sealant is pum‐ ped into the tire. The pressure may briefly rise to approximately 500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi). Do not switch off the tire inflation compres‐ sor during this phase! # Let the tire inflation compressor run for a maximum of ten minutes. The tire should then have attained a tire pressure of at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/ 29 psi). If tire sealant leaks out, make sure you clean the affected area as quickly as possible. It is prefera‐ ble to use clean water. If you get tire sealant on your clothing, have it cleaned as soon as possible with perchloroethy‐ lene. If, after ten minutes, a tire pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has not been attained: # Switch off the tire inflation compressor. # Unscrew the filling hose from the valve of the faulty tire. Please note that tire sealant may leak out when unscrewing the filling hose. # Very slowly drive forwards or reverse approx‐ imately 33 ft (10 m). # Pump up the tire again. After a maximum of ten minutes the tire pressure must be at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/ 29 psi). & WARNING Risk of accident due to the specified tire pressure not being attained If the minimum tire pressure is not reached after the specified time, the tire is too badly damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair the tire in this instance. The braking and driving characteristics may be greatly impaired. # # Do not continue driving. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. If, after ten minutes, a tire pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has been attained: & WARNING Risk of accident from driving with sealed tires A tire temporarily sealed with tire sealant impairs the handling characteristics and is not suitable for higher speeds. # Adapt your driving style accordingly and drive carefully. # Do not exceed the maximum speed limit with a tire that has been repaired using tire sealant. # # Observe the maximum permissible speed for a tire sealed with tire sealant 50 mph (80 km/h). Affix the upper section of the TIREFIT sticker to the instrument cluster in a location where it will be easily seen by the driver. Breakdown assistance 307 * NOTE Staining caused by leaking tire sealant After use, excess tire sealant may leak out from the filling hose. # Therefore, place the filling hose in the plastic bag that contained the TIREFIT kit. + ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental pollution caused by environmentally irre‐ sponsible disposal Tire sealant contains pollutants. # Have the tire sealant bottle disposed of professionally, e.g. at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. # # # # Switch off the tire inflation compressor. Unscrew the filling hose from the valve of the faulty tire. Stow the tire sealant bottle and the tire infla‐ tion compressor. Pull away immediately. # Stop driving after approximately ten minutes and check the tire pressure using the tire inflation compressor. The tire pressure must now be at least 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). # on the driver's side or the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap for values. To increase the tire pressure: switch on the tire inflation compressor. & WARNING Risk of accident due to the specified tire pressure not being attained If the specified tire pressure is not reached, the tire is too badly damaged. The tire seal‐ ant cannot repair the tire in this instance. The braking and driving characteristics may be greatly impaired. # Do not continue driving. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. In cases such as the one mentioned above, con‐ tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada). # Correct the tire pressure if it is still at least 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). See the Tire and Loading Information placard on the B‑pillar # # # To reduce the tire pressure: press pressure release button 1 next to manometer 2. When the tire pressure is correct, unscrew the filling hose from the valve of the sealed tire. Screw the valve cap onto the valve of the sealed tire. 308 Breakdown assistance Battery (vehicle) Notes on the 12 V battery & WARNING Risk of an accident due to work carried out incorrectly on the bat‐ tery # # Pull the tire sealant bottle out of the tire inflation compressor. Press the locking tabs on the yellow cap together to do this. The filling hose stays on the tire sealant bot‐ tle. Drive to the nearest qualified specialist work‐ shop and have the tire, tire sealant bottle and filling hose replaced there. Work carried out incorrectly on the battery can, for example, lead to a short circuit. This can restrict functions relevant for safety sys‐ tems and impair the operating safety of your vehicle. You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations in particular: R When braking R In the event of abrupt steering maneuvers and/or when the vehicle's speed is not adapted to the road conditions # # In the event of a short circuit or a simi‐ lar incident, contact a qualified special‐ ist workshop immediately. Do not drive on. # R R Always have work on the battery carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Further information on ABS (/ page 178) Further information on ESP® (/ page 179) For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use batteries which have been tes‐ ted and approved for your vehicle by MercedesBenz. All vehicles except vehicles with a lithiumion battery & WARNING Risk of explosion due to elec‐ trostatic charge Electrostatic charge can ignite the highly explosive gas mixture in the battery. # To discharge any electrostatic charge that may have built up, touch the metal vehicle body before handling the bat‐ tery. Breakdown assistance 309 The highly flammable gas mixture is created while the battery is charging and during starting assistance. All vehicles + & WARNING Danger of chemical burns from the battery acid Battery acid is caustic. # Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. # Do not lean over the battery. # Do not inhale battery gases. # Keep children away from the battery. # Immediately rinse battery acid off thor‐ oughly with plenty of clean water and seek medical attention immediately. ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental damage due to improper disposal of bat‐ teries Batteries contain pollutants. It is illegal to dispose of them with the household rubbish. # Dispose of batteries in an environmentally responsible manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop or to a collection point for used batteries. If you have to disconnect the 12 V battery, con‐ tact a qualified specialist workshop. Comply with safety notes and take protective measures when handling batteries. Risk of explosion. Fire, open flames and smoking are prohibited when handling the battery. Avoid creating sparks. Electrolyte or battery acid is corro‐ sive. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Wear suitable protective clothing, in particular gloves, an apron and a face mask. Immediately rinse electrolyte or acid splashes off with clean water. Consult a doctor if necessary. Wear safety glasses. Keep children away. 310 Breakdown assistance Observe this Operator's Manual. Observe the following if you do not intend to use the vehicle over an extended period of time: R Activate standby mode. R Alternatively: connect the battery to a bat‐ tery charger approved by Mercedes-Benz or consult a qualified specialist workshop to disconnect the battery. Notes on starting assistance and charging the 12 V battery Vehicles with a lithium-ion battery When charging the battery and during starting assistance, always use the jump-start connec‐ tion point in the engine compartment. * NOTE Damage to the battery from over‐ voltage When charging using a battery charger with‐ out a maximum charging voltage, the battery or the on-board electronics may be damaged. # Only use battery chargers with a maxi‐ mum charging voltage of 14.8 V. All other vehicles When charging the battery and during starting assistance, always use the jump-start connec‐ tion point in the engine compartment. * NOTE Damage to the battery from over‐ voltage When charging using a battery charger with‐ out a maximum charging voltage, the battery or the on-board electronics may be damaged. # Only use battery chargers with a maxi‐ mum charging voltage of 14.8 V. & WARNING Risk of explosion from hydro‐ gen gas igniting There is a danger of hydrogen gas igniting when charging the battery if there is a short circuit or sparks start to form. # Make sure that the positive terminal of the connected battery does not come into contact with vehicle parts. # Never place metal objects or tools on a battery. # The described order of the battery clamps must be observed when con‐ necting and disconnecting the battery. # When giving starting assistance, always make sure that you only connect bat‐ tery terminals with identical polarity. # During starting assistance, you must observe the described order for con‐ necting and disconnecting the jumper cable. # Do not connect or disconnect the bat‐ tery clamps while the engine is running. Breakdown assistance 311 & WARNING Risk of explosion during charging process and starting assistance During the charging process and starting assistance, the battery may release an explo‐ sive gas mixture. # Avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. # Make sure there is sufficient ventila‐ tion. # Do not lean over a battery. & WARNING Risk of explosion from a fro‐ zen battery A discharged battery may freeze at tempera‐ tures slightly above or below freezing point. During starting assistance or battery charg‐ ing, battery gas can be released. # Always allow a battery to thaw before charging it or performing starting assis‐ tance. If the indicator/warning lamps in the instrument cluster do not light up at low temperatures, it is very likely that the discharged battery has fro‐ zen. In this case you may neither jump-start the vehicle nor charge the battery. The service life of a battery that has been thawed may be dramatically shortened. The starting characteristics may be impaired, espe‐ cially at low temperatures. It is recommended that you have a thawed bat‐ tery checked at a qualified specialist workshop. All vehicles * NOTE Damage caused by numerous or extended attempts to start the engine Numerous or extended attempts to start the engine may damage the catalytic converter due to non-combusted fuel. # Avoid numerous and extended attempts to start the engine. Observe the following points during starting assistance and when charging the battery: R Only use undamaged jumper cables/charg‐ ing cables with a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps. R Non-insulated parts of the terminal clamps must not come into contact with other metal parts while the jumper cable/charging cable is connected to the battery/jump-start con‐ nection point. R The jumper cable/charging cable must not come into contact with any parts which may move when the engine is running. R Always make sure that neither you nor the battery is electrostatically charged. R Keep away from fire and open flames. R Do not lean over the battery. Observe the additional following points when charging the battery: R Only use battery chargers tested and approved for Mercedes-Benz. R Read the battery charger's operating instruc‐ tions before charging the battery. 312 Breakdown assistance Observe the additional following points during starting assistance: R Starting assistance may only be provided using vehicles, batteries or other jump start devices with a nominal voltage of 12 V. R The vehicles must not touch. R Vehicles with a gasoline engine: Jump start the vehicle only when the engine and exhaust system are cold. Starting assistance and charging the 12 V battery Preparing starting assistance/charging Secure the vehicle by applying the electric parking brake. # Shift the transmission to position j. # Switch off the vehicle and all electrical con‐ sumers. # Open the hood. # # Fold cover 1 up in the direction of the arrow. # Slide cover 2 of positive clamp 3 on the jump-starting connection point in the direc‐ tion of the arrow. Starting assistance # Connect positive contact 3 on your vehicle to the positive terminal of the donor battery using the jumper cable. Always begin with positive clamp 3 on your own vehicle first. Breakdown assistance 313 # # # # # Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed. Connect the negative terminal of the donor battery to ground point 4 of your vehicle using the jumper cable. Begin with the donor battery first. Start the engine of your own vehicle. Let the engines run for several minutes. Before disconnecting the jumper cables, switch on an electrical consumer in your own vehicle, e.g. the rear window heater or the lighting. When the starting assistance procedure is com‐ plete: # First, remove the jumper cables from ground point 4 and the negative terminal of the donor battery, then from positive contact 3 and the positive terminal of the donor bat‐ tery. Begin each time with the contacts on your own vehicle first. # After removing the jumper cables, close cover 2 of positive contact 3. # Close cover 1. Further information can be obtained at a quali‐ fied specialist workshop. Charging # Connect positive contact 3 of the vehicle to the positive terminal of the charger using the charging cable. Always begin with positive contact 3 of the vehicle. # Connect the negative terminal of the charger and ground point 4 on the vehicle with the charging cable. Start with the charger. # Start the charging process. When the charging process is complete: # First, remove the charging cable from ground point 4 and the negative terminal of the charger, then from positive contact 3 and the positive terminal of the charger. Begin each time with the contacts of the vehicle. # After removing the charging cable, close cover 2 of positive contact 3. # Close cover 1. Further information can be obtained at a quali‐ fied specialist workshop. Replacing the 12 V battery # Observe the notes on the 12 V battery (/ page 308). Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the 12 V battery replaced at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Observe the following notes if you want to replace the battery yourself: R Always replace a faulty battery with a battery which meets the specific vehicle require‐ ments. The vehicle is equipped with an AGM technol‐ ogy battery (Absorbent Glass Mat) or a lith‐ ium-ion battery. Full vehicle functionality is only guaranteed with an AGM battery or lith‐ ium-ion battery. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use batteries which have been tested and approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. R Carry over detachable parts, such as vent hoses, elbow fittings or terminal covers from the battery being replaced. 314 Breakdown assistance R R Make sure that the vent hose is always con‐ nected to the original opening on the side of the battery. Install any existing or supplied cell caps. Otherwise, gases or battery acid could escape. Make sure that detachable parts are recon‐ nected in the same way. Tow starting or towing away Permitted towing methods * NOTE Damage from automatic braking If one of the following functions is switched on, the vehicle brakes automatically in cer‐ tain situations: R Active Brake Assist R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC R HOLD function R Active Parking Assist To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate these systems in the following or similar sit‐ uations: # During towing # In a car wash Mercedes-Benz recommends transporting your vehicle in the case of a breakdown, rather than towing it away. For towing, use a tow rope or tow bar with both axles on the ground. Do not use tow bar sys‐ tems. * NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to tow‐ ing away incorrectly # Observe the instructions and notes on towing away. Vehicles with rear wheel drive Permitted towing methods Both axles on the ground Yes, maximum 31 miles (50 km) at 31 mph (50 km/h) Front axle raised No Rear axle raised Yes, if the steering wheel is fixed in the center position with a steering wheel lock 4MATIC vehicles Permitted towing methods Both axles on the ground Yes, maximum 31 miles (50 km) at 31 mph (50 km/h) Front axle raised No Rear axle raised No To tow with a raised axle: towing should be performed by a towing company. Breakdown assistance 315 Towing the vehicle with both axles on the ground # # Observe the notes on the permitted towing methods (/ page 314). Make sure that the battery is connected and charged. Observe the following points when the battery is discharged: R The engine cannot be started R The electric parking brake cannot be released or applied R Vehicles with automatic transmission: The automatic transmission cannot be shif‐ ted to position i or j % Vehicles with automatic transmission: If the automatic transmission cannot be shif‐ ted to position i, or the multifunction dis‐ play in the instrument cluster does not show anything, have the vehicle transported (/ page 316). A towing vehicle with lifting equipment is required for vehicle transporta‐ tion. * NOTE Damage due to towing away at excessively high speeds or over long dis‐ tances The drivetrain could be damaged when tow‐ ing at excessively high speeds or over long distances. # A towing speed of 30 mph (50 km/h) must not be exceeded. # A towing distance of 30 miles (50 km) must not be exceeded. & WARNING Risk of accident when towing a vehicle which is too heavy If the vehicle to be tow-started or towed away is heavier than the permissible gross mass of your vehicle, the following situations can occur: R The towing eye may become detached. R The vehicle/trailer combination may swerve or rollover. # Before tow-starting or towing away, check if the vehicle to be tow-started or towed away exceeds the permissible gross mass. If a vehicle must be tow-started or towed away, its permissible gross mass must not exceed the permissible gross mass of the towing vehicle. # Information on the permissible gross mass of the vehicle can be found on the vehicle iden‐ tification plate (/ page 355). # Vehicles with automatic transmission: Do not open the driver's door or front passenger door; the automatic transmission otherwise automatically shifts to position j. # Install the towing eye (/ page 318). # Fasten the towing device. * NOTE Damage due to incorrect connec‐ tion of the tow bar # # Only connect the tow rope or tow bar to the towing eyes. Deactivate the automatic locking mecha‐ nism . 316 Breakdown assistance # # # # # Do not activate the HOLD function. Deactivate the tow-away alarm (/ page 87). Deactivate Active Brake Assist (/ page 204). Vehicles with automatic transmission: Shift the automatic transmission to position i. Release the electric parking brake. & WARNING Risk of accident due to limi‐ ted safety-related functions during the towing process Safety-related functions are limited or no lon‐ ger available in the following situations: R The vehicle is switched off. R The brake system or power steering sys‐ tem is malfunctioning. R The energy supply or the on-board electri‐ cal system is malfunctioning. When your vehicle is towed away, signifi‐ cantly more effort may be required to steer and brake than is normally required. # # Use a tow bar. Make sure that the steering wheel can move freely before towing the vehicle away. * NOTE Damage due to excessive tractive power If you pull away sharply, the tractive power may be too high and the vehicles could be damaged. # Pull away slowly and smoothly. Loading the vehicle for transport # # # Observe the notes on towing away (/ page 315). Connect the tow bar to the towing eye in order to load the vehicle. Shift the automatic transmission to position i. % The automatic transmission may be locked in position j in the event of damage to the # # # # electrics. To shift to i, provide the onboard electrical system with power (/ page 312). Load the vehicle onto the transporter. Shift the automatic transmission to position j. Use the electric parking brake to secure the vehicle against rolling away. Only secure the vehicle by the wheels. Vehicles with ADS PLUS (Adaptive Damping System PLUS) & WARNING Risk of an accident when transporting vehicles with Adaptive Damping System PLUS When transporting vehicles with Adaptive Damping System PLUS, the vehicle/trailer combination may begin to rock and start to skid. # When transporting, ensure that: R The vehicle has been loaded onto the transporter correctly Breakdown assistance 317 R R Towing eye storage location The vehicle is secured at all four wheels with suitable tensioning straps The maximum permissible speed of 35 mph (60 km/h) is not exceeded when transporting * NOTE Damage to the vehicle from secur‐ ing it incorrectly # # # After loading, the vehicle must be secured on all four wheels. Otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged. A minimum distance of 8 in (20 cm) upwards and 4 in (10 cm) downwards must be kept to the transport platform. Secure the vehicle on all four wheels after loading. # Make sure that the front and rear axles come to rest on the same transportation vehicle. * NOTE Damage to the drivetrain due to incorrect positioning # Do not position the vehicle above the connection point of the transport vehi‐ cle. Towing eye 1 is located in the storage space under the trunk floor. 318 Breakdown assistance Installing and removing the towing eye # # Only use the towing eye or trailer hitch to tow away or tow start the vehicle. Do not use the towing eye or trailer hitch to tow the vehicle during recovery. Tow starting the vehicle (emergency engine start) Vehicles with automatic transmission # # # # Press the mark on cover 1 inwards and remove. Depending on the vehicle version, use a tool (such as a screwdriver) to pry off the cover out of recess 2. Screw in the towing eye clockwise as far as it will go and tighten. Make sure that cover 1 engages in the bumper when you remove the towing eye. * NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to incorrect use of the towing eye or trailer hitch When a towing eye or trailer hitch is used to recover a vehicle, the vehicle may be dam‐ aged in the process. * NOTE Damage to the automatic trans‐ mission due to tow starting The automatic transmission may be damaged in the process of tow starting vehicles with automatic transmission. # Vehicles with automatic transmission must not be tow started. # Vehicles with automatic transmission must not be tow-started. Breakdown assistance 319 Electrical fuses Notes on electrical fuses & WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to overloaded lines If you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or if you replace it with a fuse with a higher amperage, the electric line could be overloa‐ ded. This could result in a fire. # Always replace faulty fuses with speci‐ fied new fuses containing the correct amperage. * NOTE Damage due to incorrect fuses Electrical components or systems may be damaged by incorrect fuses, or their func‐ tionality may be significantly impaired. # Only use fuses that have been approved by Mercedes-Benz and which have the correct fuse rating. Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of the same rating, which you can recognize by the color and the label. The fuse ratings and further information to be observed can be found in the fuse assignment diagram. Fuse assignment diagram: on the fuse box in the trunk (/ page 321). * NOTE Damage or malfunctions caused by moisture Moisture may cause damage to the electrical system or cause it to malfunction. # When the fuse box is open, make sure that no moisture can enter the fuse box. # When closing the fuse box, make sure that the seal of the lid is positioned cor‐ rectly on the fuse box. If the newly inserted fuse also blows, have the cause traced and rectified at a qualified special‐ ist workshop. Ensure the following before replacing a fuse: R The vehicle is secured against rolling away. R R All electrical consumers are switched off. The vehicle is switched off. The electrical fuses are located in various fuse boxes: R Fuse box in the engine compartment on the driver's side (/ page 319) R Fuse box on the driver's side of the cockpit (/ page 320) R Fuse box in the front passenger footwell (/ page 321) R Fuse box in the trunk (/ page 321) Opening and closing the fuse box in the engine compartment Requirements: A dry cloth and a screwdriver are available. R Observe the notes on electrical fuses (/ page 319). 320 Breakdown assistance Opening # & WARNING Risk of injury from using the windshield wipers when the hood is open # If the windshield wipers start moving when the hood is open, you could be trapped by the wiper linkage. # Always switch off the windshield wipers and the vehicle first if you need to open the hood. # # # Opening and closing the fuse box in the cockpit R # # # # Turn both retaining clips 2 on cover 1 on the driver's side a quarter-turn clockwise. Fold cover 1 upwards. Insert lid 4 into the bracket at the rear of the fuse box. Fold down lid 4 of the fuse box and tighten screws 3. Fold down cover 1. Turn both retaining clips 2 on cover 1 a quarter-turn counter-clockwise. Close the hood. Remove any existing moisture from the fuse box using a dry cloth. Loosen screws 3 and remove fuse box lid 4 from the top. Closing # Check whether the seal is positioned cor‐ rectly in lid 4. Observe the notes on electrical fuses (/ page 319). The fuse box is on the driver's side on the side of the cockpit under a cover. # Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen‐ ter for further information. Breakdown assistance 321 Opening and closing the fuse box in the front passenger footwell Opening and closing the fuse box in the trunk Observe the notes on electrical fuses (/ page 319). Observe the notes on electrical fuses (/ page 319). # # # To open: fold out and remove cover 1. To close: reinsert cover 1. Open cover 1. 322 Wheels and tires Notes on noise or unusual handling charac‐ teristics Make sure there are no vibrations, noises or unusual handling characteristics when the vehi‐ cle is in motion. This may indicate that the wheels or tires are damaged. Hidden tire dam‐ age could also be causing the unusual handling characteristics. If you suspect that a tire is malfunctioning, reduce your speed immediately and have the tires and wheels checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Notes on regularly inspecting wheels and tires & WARNING Risk of injury through dam‐ aged tires Damaged tires can cause tire pressure loss. # Check the tires regularly for signs of damage and replace any damaged tires immediately. & WARNING Risk of hydroplaning due to insufficient tire tread Insufficient tire tread will result in reduced tire grip. In heavy rain or slush the risk of hydroplaning is increased, in particular where speed is not adapted to suit the conditions. # Thus, you should regularly check the tread depth and the condition of the tread across the entire width of all tires. R R R Visually inspect wheels and tires for damage. Check the valve caps. Visual check of the tire tread depth and the tire contact surface across the entire width. The minimum tread depth for summer tires is â in (3 mm) and for winter tires ã in (4 mm). Minimum tread depth for: R Summer tires: â in (3 mm) R M+S tires: ãin (4 mm) # For safety reasons, replace the tires before the legally-prescribed limit for the minimum tread depth is reached. Carry out the following checks on all wheels reg‐ ularly, at least once a month or as required, for example, prior to a long journey or driving offroad: R Check the tire pressure (/ page 323). Six marks 1 show where the bar indicators (arrow) are integrated into the tire tread. They are visible once a tire tread depth of approx‐ imately á in (1.6 mm) has been reached. Wheels and tires 323 Notes on snow chains & WARNING Risk of accident due to incor‐ rect mounting of snow chains If you have mounted snow chains to the front wheels, the snow chains may drag against the vehicle body or chassis components. This could cause damage to the vehicle or the tires. # Never mount snow chains on the front wheels. # Only mount snow chains on the rear wheels in pairs. * NOTE Damage to components of the vehicle body or chassis due to mounted snow chains If you mount snow chains to the front wheels of 4MATIC vehicles, you may damage compo‐ nents of the vehicle body or chassis. # Only mount snow chains to the rear wheels of 4MATIC vehicles. Observe the following notes when using snow chains: R Snow chains are only permissible for certain wheel/tire combinations. You can obtain information about this from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. R For safety reasons, only use snow chains that have been specifically approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or snow chains with the same quality standard. R If snow chains are installed, the maximum permissible speed is 30 mph (50 km/h). R Vehicles with Active Parking Assist: Do not use Active Parking Assist when snow chains are installed. % You can deactivate ESP® to pull away (/ page 180). This allows the wheels to spin, achieving an increased driving force. Tire pressure Notes on tire pressure & WARNING Risk of accident due to insuf‐ ficient or excessive tire pressure Underinflated or overinflated tires pose in particular the following risks: R The tires can burst. R The tires can wear excessively and/or unevenly. R The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking characteristics may be greatly impaired. # R R R Comply with the recommended tire pressures and check the tire pressure of all tires, including the spare wheel, regularly: Monthly When the load changes Before embarking on a longer journey 324 Wheels and tires R # If operating conditions change, e.g. offroad driving R Adjust the tire pressure, if necessary. R Tire pressure which is too high or too low can: R Shorten the service life of the tires. R Cause increased tire damage. R Adversely affect driving characteristics and thus driving safety, e.g. due to hydroplaning. & WARNING Risk of accident due to too low a tire pressure Tires with pressure that is too low can over‐ heat and burst as a consequence. In addition, they also suffer from irregular wear, which can significantly impair the brak‐ ing properties and the handling characteris‐ tics. # Avoid excessively low tire pressure. Tire pressure which is too low can cause: R Tire malfunctions as a result of overheating R Impaired handling characteristics Irregular wear Increased fuel consumption & WARNING Risk of accident due to too high a tire pressure Tires with excessively high pressure can burst. In addition, they also suffer from irregular wear, which can significantly impair the brak‐ ing properties and the handling characteris‐ tics. # Avoid excessively high tire pressures. Tire pressure which is too high can cause: R Increased braking distance R Impaired handling characteristics R Irregular wear R Impaired driving comfort R Susceptibility to damage & WARNING Risk of accident due to repea‐ ted pressure drop in the tires The wheels, valves or tires could be dam‐ aged. Too low a tire pressure can lead to the tires bursting. # Examine the tires for foreign objects. # Check whether the tire has a puncture or the valve has a leak. # If you are unable to rectify the damage, contact a qualified specialist workshop. You can find information on tire pressure for the vehicle's factory-installed tires on the following labels: R Tire and Loading Information placard on the B‑pillar of your vehicle (/ page 330). R Tire pressure table on the inside of the fuel filler flap (/ page 325). Observe the maximum tire pressure (/ page 336). Wheels and tires 325 Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the tire pressure. The outer appearance of a tire does not permit any reliable conclusion about the tire pressure. Only correct tire pressure when the tires are cold. Conditions for cold tires: R The vehicle has been parked with the tires out of direct sunlight for at least three hours. R The vehicle has traveled less than 1 mile (1.6 km). The vehicle's tires heat up when driving. As the temperature of the tires increases, so too does the tire pressure. Vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring sys‐ tem: You can also see the tire pressure in the driver's display. The tire pressure recommended for increased load/speed in the tire pressure table can affect the ride comfort. & WARNING Risk of accident due to unsuitable accessories on tire valves If you mount unsuitable accessories onto tire valves, the tire valves may be overloaded and malfunction, which can cause tire pressure loss. # Only screw standard valve caps or valve caps specifically approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle onto the tire valve. Tire pressure table The tire pressure table is on the inside of the fuel filler flap. % The data shown in the images is example data. If one or more tire sizes precede a tire pressure, the following tire pressure information is only valid for those tire sizes and their respective load condition. The load conditions "partially laden" and "fully laden" are defined in the table for different num‐ bers of passengers and amounts of luggage. The actual number of seats may differ from this. 326 Wheels and tires Checking the tire pressure manually R Read the tire pressure recommended for the current operating conditions from the Tire and Loading Information placard or the tire pressure table. Observe the notes on tire pressure. # Remove the valve cap of the tire to be checked. # Press the tire pressure gauge securely onto the valve. # Read the tire pressure. # If the tire pressure is lower than the recom‐ mended value, increase the tire pressure to the recommended value. # If the tire pressure is higher than the recom‐ mended value, release air. To do so, press down the metal pin in the valve, e.g. using the tip of a pen, for example. Then check the tire pressure again using the tire pressure gauge. # Screw the valve cap onto the valve. Further related subjects: R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 323) R # Some tire pressure tables only show the rim diameter instead of the complete tire size, e.g. R18. The rim diameter is part of the tire size and can be found on the tire side wall (/ page 337). R Tire and Loading Information placard (/ page 330) R Maximum tire pressure (/ page 336) Tire pressure table (/ page 325) Tire and Loading Information placard (/ page 330) Tire pressure monitoring system Function of the tire pressure monitoring sys‐ tem & DANGER Risk of accident due to incor‐ rect tire pressure Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommen‐ ded by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehi‐ cle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should deter‐ mine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitor‐ ing system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire Wheels and tires 327 pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accord‐ ingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illu‐ minates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a signifi‐ cantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s han‐ dling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsi‐ bility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pres‐ sure telltale. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the sys‐ tem detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illumina‐ ted, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of rea‐ sons, including the installation of replace‐ ment or alternate tires or wheels on the vehi‐ cle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. The system checks the tire pressure and the tire temperature of the tires installed on the vehicle by means of a tire pressure sensor. The tire pressure and the tire temperature appear on the driver display (/ page 327). If there is a substantial pressure loss or if the tire temperature is excessive, you will be warned with display messages (/ page 417) or the h warning lamp on the driver display (/ page 439). The tire pressure monitoring system is only an aid. It is the driver's responsibility to set the tire pressure to the recommended cold tire pressure suitable for the operating situation. In most cases, the tire pressure monitoring sys‐ tem will automatically update the new reference values after you have changed the tire pressure. You can, however, also update the reference val‐ ues by restarting the tire pressure monitoring system manually (/ page 328). System limits The system may be impaired or may not function particularly in the following situations: R Incorrect reference values were taught in R Sudden pressure loss caused by a foreign object penetrating the tire, for example R There is a malfunction caused by another radio signal source Checking the tire pressure with the tire pres‐ sure monitoring system Requirements: R The vehicle is switched on. 328 Wheels and tires Driver's display: 4 © 5 Service # Select Tire Pressure and confirm with a. One of the following displays appears: R Current tire pressure of each wheel: R R Tire pressure displayed after driving for a few minutes. Tire Pressure Monitor Active: the teach-in process of the system is not yet complete. The tire pressures are already being moni‐ tored. Compare the current tire pressure with the recommended tire pressure for the current operating condition (/ page 325). Addition‐ ally, observe the notes on cold tires (/ page 323). % The values displayed in the driver display may deviate from those of the tire pressure gauge as they refer to sea level. At high ele‐ vations, the tire pressure values indicated by a tire pressure gauge are higher than those shown in the driver display. In this case, do not reduce the tire pressure. Bear in mind the following related topic: R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 323) # Restarting the tire pressure monitoring sys‐ tem Requirements: R The recommended tire pressure is correctly set for the respective operating status on each of the four wheels (/ page 323). Restart the tire pressure monitoring system in the following situations: R The tire pressure has changed. R The wheels or tires have been changed or newly installed. Driver's display: 4 © 5 Service # Select Tire Pressure and confirm with a. # Swipe downwards on Touch Control on the steering wheel. The Use current pressures as new reference values? message is shown in the driver dis‐ play. # Select Yes and confirm the restart with a. The Tire Pressure Monitor Restarted mes‐ sage is shown in the driver display. Current warning messages are deleted and the yellow h warning lamp goes out. After you have been driving for a few minutes, the system checks whether the cur‐ rent tire pressures are within the specified range. The current tire pressure are then accepted as reference values and monitored. Bear in mind the following related topic: R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 323) Wheels and tires 329 Tire pressure loss warning system Function of the tire pressure loss warning system The tire pressure loss warning system warns the driver by means of display messages when there is a severe tire pressure loss. System limits The system may be impaired or may not function particularly in the following situations: R Incorrect reference values were taught in R Sudden pressure loss caused by a foreign object penetrating the tire, for example R An even pressure loss on more than one tire occurs The system has a restricted or delayed function particularly in the following situations: R Poor ground conditions, e.g. snow or gravel R Driving with snow chains R When adopting a very sporty driving style with high cornering speeds or sudden accel‐ eration R Driving with a high load The tire pressure loss warning system is only an aid. It is the driver's responsibility to set the tire pressure to the recommended cold tire pressure suitable for the operating situation and to check it. Be sure to also observe the following further related subjects: R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 323) R Display messages about the tires (/ page 417) Restarting the tire pressure loss warning system Requirements: R The recommended tire pressure is correctly set for the respective operating status on each of the four wheels (/ page 323). Restart the tire pressure loss warning system in the following situations: R The tire pressure has changed. R The wheels or tires have been changed or newly installed. Driver's display: 4 © 5 Service # Select Tire Pressure and confirm with a. The Run Flat Indicator Active message is shown in the driver display. # To initiate a restart, press a on the steer‐ ing wheel. The Are the current pressure values OK? message is shown in the driver display. # Select Yes. # To confirm restart, press a on the steer‐ ing wheel. The Run Flat Indicator Restarted message is shown in the driver display. Be sure to also observe the following further related subjects: R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 323) 330 Wheels and tires Loading the vehicle Notes on Tire and Loading Information plac‐ ard & WARNING Risk of accident from overloa‐ ded tires Overloaded tires may overheat and burst as a consequence. Overloaded tires can also impair the steering and handling characteris‐ tics and lead to brake failure. # Observe the load rating of the tires. # The load rating must be at least half the permissible axle load of the vehicle. # Never overload the tires by exceeding the maximum load. The Tire and Loading Information placard is on the B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehicle. 1 Tire and Loading Information placard % The data shown in the illustration is example data. The Tire and Loading Information placard shows the following information: R Maximum number of seats 2 according to the maximum number of people permitted to travel in the vehicle. Wheels and tires 331 R R Maximum permissible load 3 comprises the gross weight of all vehicle occupants, load and luggage. Recommended tire pressure 1 for cold tires. The recommended tire pressures are valid for the maximum permissible load and up to the maximum permissible vehicle speed. Please also note: R Information on permissible weights and loads on the vehicle identification plate (/ page 355). R Information on tire pressure in the tire pres‐ sure table (/ page 325). Further related subjects: Determining the maximum permissible load (/ page 331) R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 323). R Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit The following steps have been developed as required of all manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575, pur‐ suant to the "National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966". # (1): Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle's placard. # (2): Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. # (3): Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs. # (4): The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb pas‐ sengers in your vehicle, the amount of availa‐ ble cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1,400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.) # (5): Determine the combined weight of lug‐ gage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the availa‐ # ble cargo and luggage load capacity calcula‐ ted in Step 4. (6): If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to deter‐ mine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle. % Not all vehicles are permitted to tow a trailer. Towing a trailer is only permitted if a trailer-hitch is installed. Please consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz dealer if you have any questions about towing a trailer with your vehicle. Even if you have calculated the total load care‐ fully, you should still make sure that the maxi‐ mum permissible gross weight and the maxi‐ mum gross axle weight rating of your vehicle are not exceeded. Details can be found on the vehi‐ cle identification plate. 332 Wheels and tires Have your loaded vehicle – including driver, occupants and load – weighed on a vehicle weighbridge. The measured values may not exceed the maximum permissible values stated on the vehicle identification plate. Further related subjects: R Calculation example for determining the max‐ imum load (/ page 332) # R R R Tire and Loading Information placard (/ page 330) Tire pressure table (/ page 325) Vehicle identification plate (/ page 355) Calculation example for determining the maximum load The following table shows examples of how to calculate total and load capacities with varying seating configurations and different numbers and sizes of occupants. The following examples use a maximum load of 1500 lbs (680 kg). This is for illustration purposes only. Make sure you are using the actual load limit for your vehi‐ cle stated on your vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard (/ page 330). The higher the weight of all the occupants, the smaller the maximum load for luggage. Step 1 Combined maximum weight of occupants and load (data from the Tire and Loading Information placard) Example 1 Example 2 1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg) Wheels and tires 333 Step 2 Example 1 Example 2 Number of people in the vehicle (driver and occupants) 5 1 Distribution of the occupants Front: 2 Rear: 3 Front: 1 Weight of occupants Occupant 1: 150 lbs (68 kg) Occupant 2: 180 lbs (82 kg) Occupant 3: 160 lbs (73 kg) Occupant 4: 140 lbs (63 kg) Occupant 5: 120 lbs (54 kg) Occupant 1: 200 lbs (91 kg) Total weight of all occupants 750 lbs (340 kg) 200 lbs (91 kg) Example 1 Example 2 1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò 750 lbs (340 kg) = 750 lbs (340 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò 200 lbs (91 kg) = 1300 lbs (589 kg) Step 3 Permissible load (maximum gross vehicle weight rating from the Tire and Loading Information placard minus the gross weight of all occupants) 334 Wheels and tires Tire labeling Overview of tire labeling 5 Manufacturer 6 Tire characteristics (/ page 337) 7 Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity, speed rating and load index (/ page 337) 8 Tire name % The data shown in the illustration is example data. Tire Quality Grading In accordance with the US Department of Trans‐ portation's "Uniform Tire Quality Grading Stand‐ ards", tire manufacturers are required to grade their tires on the basis of the following three per‐ formance factors: 1 Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards 2 DOT (Department of Transportation), (TIN) Tire Identification Number 3 Maximum tire load (/ page 336) 4 Maximum tire pressure (/ page 336) 1 Tread wear grade 2 Traction grade 3 Temperature grade % The data shown in the illustration is example data. % The classification is not legally stipulated for Canada, but it is generally stated. Tread wear grade The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified gov‐ ernment test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1\1/2\) Wheels and tires 335 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate. The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as meas‐ ured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and con‐ crete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. Traction grade Temperature grade & DANGER Risk of accident due to inade‐ quate traction The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests. # Always adapt your driving style and drive at a speed to suit the prevailing traffic and weather conditions. * NOTE Damage to the drivetrain from wheelspin # Avoid wheelspin. & WARNING Risk of accident from tire overheating and tire failure Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause excessive heat build-up and possi‐ ble tire failure. # Observe the recommended tire pres‐ sure. # Regularly check the pressure of all the tires. # Adjust the tire pressure, if necessary. The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sus‐ tained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law. DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) US tire regulations stipulate that every tire man‐ ufacturer or retreader must imprint a TIN in or on the side wall of each tire produced. 336 Wheels and tires R R R % The data shown in the image is example data. The TIN is a unique identification number to identify tires and comprises the following: R DOT (Department of Transportation): tire symbol marks 1 indicating that the tire complies with the requirements of the US Department of Transportation. R Manufacturer identification code: manu‐ facturer identification code 2 contains details of the tire manufacturer. New tires have a code with two symbols. Retreaded tires have a code with four symbols. Further information on retreaded tires (/ page 342). Tire size: identifier 3 describes the tire size. Tire type code: tire type code 4 can be used by the manufacturer as a code to describe specific characteristics of the tire. Manufacturing date: manufacturing date 5 provides information about the age of a tire. The 1st and 2nd positions represent the calendar week and the 3rd and 4th positions state the year of manufacture (e.g. "3208" represents the 32nd week of 2008). % The data shown in the image is example data. Maximum tire load 1 is the maximum permissi‐ ble weight for which the tire is approved. Do not overload the tires by exceeding the speci‐ fied load limit. The maximum permissible load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on the driv‐ er's side (/ page 330). Specifications for maximum tire pressure Information on the maximum tire load % The data shown in the illustration is example data. Wheels and tires 337 Never exceed maximum tire pressure 1 speci‐ fied for the tire. Always observe the recommen‐ ded tire pressure for your vehicle when adjusting the tire pressure (/ page 325). Information on tire characteristics % The data shown in the image is example data. This information describes the type of tire cord and the number of layers in side wall 1 and under tire tread 2. Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity, speed rating and load index & WARNING Risk of injury through exceed‐ ing the specified tire load-bearing capa‐ city or the permissible speed rating Exceeding the specified tire load rating or the permissible speed rating may lead to tire damage and to the tires bursting. # Therefore, only use tire types and sizes approved for your vehicle model. # Observe the tire load rating and speed rating required for your vehicle. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 First letter(s) Nominal tire width in millimeters Aspect ratio in % Tire code Rim diameter Load-bearing index Speed rating Load index % The data shown in the illustration is example data. Information about reading tire data can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop. 338 Wheels and tires First letter(s) 1: R Without: passenger vehicle tires according to European manufacturing standards. R "P": passenger vehicle tires according to US manufacturing standards. R "LT": light truck tires according to US manu‐ facturing standards. R "T": compact emergency spare wheels with high tire pressure that are only designed for temporary use in an emergency. Aspect ratio 3: Ratio between tire height and tire width in per‐ cent (tire height divided by tire width). Tire code 4 (tire type): R "R" radial tire R "D": bias ply tire R "B": bias belted tires R "ZR": radial tire with a maximum speed above 149 mph (240 km/h) (optional) Rim diameter 5: The diameter of the bead seat (not the diameter of the rim flange). The rim diameter is specified in inches (in). Load-bearing index 6: Numerical code that specifies the maximum load-bearing capacity of a tire (e.g. "91" corre‐ sponds to 1356 lbs (615 kg)). The load-bearing capacity of the tire must be at least half the gross axle weight rating of your vehicle. Do not overload the tires by exceeding the specified load limit. See also: R Maximum permissible load on the Tire and Loading Information placard (/ page 330) R Maximum tire load (/ page 336) R Load index Speed rating 7: Specifies the approved maximum speed of the tire. % An electronic speed limiter prevents your vehicle from exceeding a speed of 130 mph (210 km/h). Make sure that your tires have the required speed rating. You can obtain information on the required speed rating from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Summer tires Index Speed rating Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h) R up to 106 mph (170 km/h) S up to 112 mph (180 km/h) T up to 118 mph (190 km/h) H up to 130 mph (210 km/h) V up to 149 mph (240 km/h) W up to 168 mph (270 km/h) Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h) Wheels and tires 339 Index Speed rating ZR...Y1 up to 186 mph (300 km/h) ZR...(..Y)1 over 186 mph (300 km/h) ZR1 over 149 mph (240 km/h) R R R 1 2 Specifying the speed rating as the "ZR" index in tire code 4 is optional for tires up to 186 mph (300 km/h). If your tire code 4 includes "ZR" and there is no speed rating 7, find out what the max‐ imum speed is from the tire manufacturer. If load-bearing index 6 and speed rating 7 are in brackets, the maximum speed rating of your tire is above 186 mph (300 km/h). To find out the maximum speed, ask the tire manufacturer. "ZR" stated in the tire code. Or "M+Si" for winter tires. All-weather tires and winter tires Index Speed rating M+S2 up to 100 mph (160 km/h) T M+S2 up to 118 mph (190 km/h) H M+S2 up to 130 mph (210 km/h) V M+S2 up to 149 mph (240 km/h) Q Winter tires bear the i snowflake symbol and fulfill the requirements of the Rubber Manu‐ facturers Association (RMA) and the Rubber Association of Canada (RAC) regarding the tire traction on snow. Load index 8: No specification given: standard load (SL) tire R "XL" or "Extra Load": extra load tire or rein‐ forced tire R "Light Load": light load tire R R "C", "D", "E": a load range that depends on the maximum load that the tire can carry at a certain pressure Definition of terms for tires and loading Tire structure and characteristics: describes the number of layers or the number of rubbercoated belts in the tire contact surface and the tire wall. These are made of steel, nylon, poly‐ ester and other materials. Bar: metric unit for tire pressure. 14.5038 pounds per square inch (psi) and 100 kilopascal (kPa) is the equivalent of one bar. DOT (Department of Transportation): DOTmarked tires fulfill the requirements of the US Department of Transportation. Average weight of the vehicle occupants: the number of vehicle occupants for which the vehi‐ cle is designed, multiplied by 150 lb (68 kg). 340 Wheels and tires Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards: a uniform standard to grade the quality of tires with regard to tread quality, tire traction and temperature characteristics. The quality grading assessment is made by the manufacturer follow‐ ing specifications from the U.S. government. The quality grade of a tire is imprinted on the side wall of the tire. Recommended tire pressure: the recommen‐ ded tire pressure is the tire pressure specified for the tires mounted to the vehicle at the fac‐ tory. The tire and information table contains the rec‐ ommended tire pressures for cold tires, the max‐ imum permissible load and the maximum per‐ missible vehicle speed. The tire pressure table contains the recommen‐ ded tire pressures for cold tires under various operating conditions, i.e. loading and/or speed of the vehicle. Increased vehicle weight due to optional equipment: the combined weight of all standard and optional equipment available for the vehicle, regardless of whether it is actually installed on the vehicle or not. Rim: the part of the wheel on which the tire is installed. GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating): the GAWR is the maximum permissible axle load. The actual load on an axle must never exceed the gross axle weight rating. The gross axle weight rating can be found on the vehicle identification plate on the B‑pillar on the driver's side. Speed rating: the speed rating is part of the tire identification. It specifies the speed range for which a tire is approved. GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight): the gross vehicle weight comprises the weight of the vehicle including fuel, tools, the spare wheel, accesso‐ ries installed, occupants, luggage and the trailer drawbar noseweight, if applicable. The gross vehicle weight must not exceed the gross vehicle weight rating GVWR as specified on the vehicle identification plate on the B‑pillar on the driver's side. GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating): the GVWR is the maximum permitted gross weight of the fully laden vehicle (weight of the vehicle including all accessories, occupants, fuel, lug‐ gage and the trailer drawbar noseweight if appli‐ cable). The gross vehicle weight rating is speci‐ fied on the vehicle identification plate on the B‑pillar on the driver's side. Maximum weight of the laden vehicle: the maximum weight is the sum of the curb weight of the vehicle, the weight of the accessories, the maximum load and the weight of optional equip‐ ment installed at the factory. Kilopascal (kPa): metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPa corresponds to 1 psi. Another unit for tire pressure is bar. 100 kilopascal (kPa) equals 1 bar. Load index: in addition to the load-bearing index, the load index may also be imprinted on the side wall of the tire. This specifies the loadbearing capacity of the tire more precisely. Curb weight: the weight of a vehicle with stand‐ ard equipment including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant. It also includes the air conditioning system and optional equipment if Wheels and tires 341 these are installed on the vehicle, but does not include passengers or luggage. Maximum tire load: the maximum tire load is the maximum permissible weight in kilograms or lbs for which a tire is approved. Maximum permissible tire pressure: maxi‐ mum permissible tire pressure for one tire. Maximum load on one tire: maximum load on one tire. This is calculated by dividing the maxi‐ mum axle load of one axle by two. PSI (pounds per square inch): standard unit of measurement for tire pressure. Aspect ratio: ratio between tire height and tire width in percent. Tire pressure: pressure inside the tire applying an outward force to every square inch of the tire. The tire pressure is specified in pounds per square inch (psi), in kilopascals (kPa) or in bar. The tire pressure should only be corrected when the tires are cold. Cold tire pressure: the tires are cold when the vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours without direct sunlight on the tires or the vehicle has been driven for less than 1 mile (1.6 km). Tire contact surface: the part of the tire that comes into contact with the road. Tire bead: the purpose of the tire bead is to ensure that the tire sits securely on the wheel rim. There are several wire cores in the tire bead to prevent the tire from changing length on the wheel rim. Side wall: the part of the tire between the tread and the tire bead. Weight of optional equipment: the combined weight of the optional equipment weighing more than the replaced standard parts and more than 5 lbs (2.3 kg). This optional equipment, such as high-performance brakes, level control system, a roof luggage rack or high-performance batteries, is not included in the curb weight and the weight of the accessories. TIN (Tire Identification Number): a unique identification number which can be used by a tire manufacturer to identify tires, for example, in a product recall, and thus identify the pur‐ chasers. The TIN is made up of the manufactur‐ er's identity code, tire size, tire type code and the manufacturing date. Load-bearing index: the load-bearing index is a code that contains the maximum load-bearing capacity of a tire. Traction: traction is the grip resulting from fric‐ tion between the tires and the road surface. Wear indicator: narrow bars (tread wear bars) that are distributed over the tire contact surface. If the tire tread is level with the bars, the wear limit of 1/16 in (1.6 mm) has been reached. Distribution of vehicle occupants: distribution of vehicle occupants over designated seat posi‐ tions in a vehicle. Maximum permissible payload weight: nomi‐ nal load and luggage load plus 150 lb (68 kg) multiplied by the number of seats in the vehicle. 342 Wheels and tires Changing a wheel Notes on selecting, installing and replacing tires & WARNING Risk of injury through incor‐ rect sizes of wheels and tires If wheels and tires of the wrong size are installed, the wheel brakes or components in the brake system and in the wheel suspen‐ sion may be damaged. # Always replace wheels and tires with those that fulfill the specifications of the original part. For wheels, pay attention to the following: R Designation R Type For tires, pay attention to the following: R Designation R Manufacturer R Type & WARNING Risk of injury through exceed‐ ing the specified tire load-bearing capa‐ city or the permissible speed rating Exceeding the specified tire load rating or the permissible speed rating may lead to tire damage and to the tires bursting. # Therefore, only use tire types and sizes approved for your vehicle model. # Observe the tire load rating and speed rating required for your vehicle. * NOTE Vehicle and tire damage through tire types and sizes that have not been approved For safety reasons, only use tires, wheels and accessories which have been specially approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle. These tires are specially adapted to the active safety systems, such as ABS, ESP® and 4MATIC, and marked as follows: R MO = Mercedes-Benz Original R R MOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended (run-flat tire only for certain wheels) MO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only cer‐ tain AMG tires) Otherwise, certain properties, such as han‐ dling characteristics, vehicle noise emis‐ sions, consumption, etc. could be adversely affected. Furthermore, other tire sizes could result in the tires rubbing against the body and axle components when loaded. This could result in damage to the tire or the vehi‐ cle. Only use tires, wheels and accessories that have been checked and recommended by Mercedes-Benz. * NOTE Risk to driving safety from retrea‐ ded tires Retreaded tires are neither tested nor recom‐ mended by Mercedes-Benz, since previous damage cannot always be detected on retreaded tires. Wheels and tires 343 For this reason driving safety cannot be guar‐ anteed. # Do not use used tires if you have no information about their previous usage. * NOTE Possible wheel and tire damage when driving over obstacles Large wheels have a smaller section width. As the section width decreases, the risk of wheels and tires being damaged when driv‐ ing over obstacles increases. # Avoid obstacles or drive especially care‐ fully. # Reduce your speed when driving over curbs, speed bumps, manhole covers and potholes. # Avoid particularly high curbs. * NOTE Possible wheel and tire damage when parking on curbs or in potholes Parking on curbs or in potholes may damage the wheels and tires. # # If possible, park only on flat surfaces. Avoid curbs and potholes when parking. * NOTE Damage to electronic component parts from the use of tire-mounting tools Vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring system: Electronic component parts are located in the wheel. Tire-mounting tools should not be used in the area of the valve. This could otherwise damage the electronic component parts. # Have the tires changed at a qualified specialist workshop only. * NOTE Damage to summer tires at low ambient temperatures At low ambient temperatures, tears could form when driving with summer tires, caus‐ ing permanent damage to the tires. # At temperatures below 45 °F (7 °C) use i M+S tires. Accessory parts which are not approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or which are not used correctly, can impair the operating safety. Before purchasing and using non-approved accessories, visit a qualified specialist workshop and inquire about: R Suitability R Legal stipulations R Factory recommendations & WARNING Risk of accident with high performance tires The special tire tread in combination with the optimized tire compound means that the risk of skidding and hydroplaning on wet roads is increased. In addition, the tire grip is greatly reduced at a low outside temperature and tire running temperature. # Switch on the ESP® and adapt your driving style accordingly. 344 Wheels and tires # # Use i M+S tires at outside temper‐ atures of less than 50 °F (10 °C). Only use the tires for their intended pur‐ pose. Observe the following when selecting, installing and replacing tires: R Furthermore, the use of certain tire types in certain regions and areas of operation can be highly beneficial. R Only use tires and wheels of the same type (summer tires, winter tires, MOExtended tires) and the same make. R Only install wheels of the same size on one axle (left and right). It is only permissible to install a different wheel size in the event of a flat tire in order to drive to the specialist workshop. R Vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring system: All installed wheels must be equip‐ ped with functioning sensors for the tire pressure monitoring system. R R R R R R At temperatures below 45 °F (7 °C) use win‐ ter tires or all-season tires marked i M+S for all wheels. Winter tires provide the best possible grip in wintry road conditions. For M+S tires, only use tires with the same tread. Observe the maximum permissible speed for the M+S tires installed. If the tire's maximum speed is below that of the vehicle, this must be indicated by an appropriate label in the driver's field of vision. Break in new tires at moderate speeds for the first 60 miles (100 km). Replace the tires after six years at the latest, regardless of wear. When replacing with tires that do not fea‐ ture run-flat characteristics: vehicles with MOExtended tires are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. Equip the vehicle with a TIREFIT kit after replacing with tires that do not feature run-flat characteristics, e.g. winter tires. For more information on wheels and tires, con‐ tact a qualified specialist workshop. Be sure to also observe the following further related subjects: R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 323) R Tire and Loading Information placard (/ page 330) R Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity, speed rating and load index (/ page 337) R Tire pressure table (/ page 325) R Notes on the emergency spare wheel (/ page 351) Notes on rotating wheels & WARNING Risk of injury through differ‐ ent wheel sizes Rotating the front and rear wheels can severely impair the driving characteristics. Wheels and tires 345 The wheel brakes or suspension components may also be damaged. # Rotate front and rear wheels only if the wheels and tires are of the same dimen‐ sions. The wear patterns on the front and rear wheels differ: R Front wheels wear more on the tire shoulder R Rear wheels wear more in the center of the tire Do not drive with tires that have too little tread depth. This significantly reduces traction on wet roads (hydroplaning). On vehicles that have the same size front and rear wheels, rotate the wheels according to the intervals in the tire manufacturer's warranty book in your vehicle documents. If this is not available, rotate the tires every 3000 to 6000 miles (5000 to 10,000 km), depending on the wear. Ensure that the direction of rotation is maintained. Observe the instructions and safety notes on "Changing a wheel" when doing so (/ page 346). R Notes on storing wheels The tire-change tool kit is located in tool bag 1 on the trunk floor. % If necessary, the tool bag can also be kept under the trunk floor. When storing wheels, observe the following notes: R After removing wheels, store them in a cool, dry and preferably dark place. R Protect the tires from contact with oil, grease or fuel. R R Chock Lug wrench Alignment bolt Overview of the tire-change tool kit Apart from some country-specific variants, vehi‐ cles are not equipped with a tire-change tool kit. For more information on which tire-changing tools are required and approved for performing a wheel change on your vehicle, consult a qualified specialist workshop. You require the following tools, for example, to change a wheel: R Jack The tool bag contains: Jack R Gloves R Lug wrench R Alignment bolt R 346 Wheels and tires R R Folding chock Ratchet for jack Preparing the vehicle for a wheel change Requirements: R The vehicle is not on a slope. R The vehicle is on solid, non-slippery and level ground. R The required tire-change tool kit is available. % If your vehicle is not equipped with the tirechange tool kit, consult a qualified specialist workshop to find out about suitable tools. # Apply the electric parking brake manually. # Move the front wheels to the straight-ahead position. # Shift the transmission to position j. # Switch off the vehicle. # Make sure that the vehicle cannot be started. # Place chocks or other suitable items under the front and rear of the wheel that is diago‐ nally opposite the wheel you wish to change. # Raise the vehicle (/ page 347). Aluminum hub cap Removing and installing the wheel trim/hub caps Requirements: R The vehicle is prepared for a wheel change (/ page 346). Plastic hub cap # To remove: turn the center cover of the hub cap counter-clockwise and remove the hub cap. # To install: make sure that the center cover of the hub cap is turned counter-clockwise. # Position the hub cap and turn the center cover clockwise until the hub cap engages physically and audibly. To remove: position socket 2 from the tirechange tool kit on hub cap 1. # Position wheel wrench 3 on socket 2. # Using wheel wrench 3, turn hub cap 1 counter-clockwise and remove it. # To install: follow the instructions above in reverse order. % Specified tightening torque: 18 lb-ft (25 Nm). # Wheels and tires 347 Raising the vehicle when changing a wheel Requirements: R There are no persons in the vehicle. R The vehicle has been prepared for a wheel change (/ page 346). Important notes on using the jack: Use only a vehicle-specific jack that has been approved by Mercedes-Benz to raise the vehicle. R The jack is only designed for raising and holding the vehicle for a short time while a wheel is being changed and not for mainte‐ nance work under the vehicle. R The jack must be placed on a firm, flat and non-slip surface. If necessary, use a large, flat, load-bearing, non-slip underlay. R The foot of the jack must be positioned verti‐ cally under the jack support point. R Rules of conduct when the vehicle is raised: Never place your hands or feet under the vehicle. R Never lie under the vehicle. R Do not start the vehicle and do not release the electric parking brake. R Do not open or close any doors or the trunk lid. R # Using the lug wrench, loosen the wheel bolts on the wheel you wish to change by about one full turn. Do not unscrew the bolts com‐ pletely. 348 Wheels and tires * NOTE Vehicle damage from the jack If you do not position the jack correctly at the appropriate jack support point of the vehicle, the jack could tip over with the vehi‐ cle raised. # The jack is designed exclusively for jacking up the vehicle at the jack sup‐ port points. Position of jack support points & WARNING Risk of injury from incorrect positioning of the jack If you do not position the jack correctly at the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle, the jack could tip with the vehicle raised. # Only position the jack at the appropri‐ ate jacking point of the vehicle. The base of the jack must be positioned vertically under the jacking point of the vehicle. # Take the ratchet out of the tire-change tool kit and place it on the hexagon nut of the jack so that the letters "AUF" are visible. # # # # Position support 2 of jack 4 on jack sup‐ port point 1. Turn ratchet 3 clockwise until support 2 sits completely on jack support point 1 and the base of the jack lies evenly on the ground. Turn ratchet 3 until the tire is raised a maxi‐ mum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from the ground. Loosen and remove the wheel (/ page 349). Wheels and tires 349 Removing a wheel Requirements: R The vehicle is raised (/ page 347). When changing a wheel, avoid applying any force to the brake discs, as this could impair the level of comfort when braking. * NOTE Damage to threading from dirt on wheel bolts # # Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on a dirty surface. Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt com‐ pletely. # # # # Screw alignment bolt 1 into the thread instead of the wheel bolt. Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts com‐ pletely. Remove the wheel. Install the new wheel (/ page 349). Installing a new wheel & WARNING Risk of accident from losing a wheel Oiled, greased or damaged wheel bolt/wheel nut threads or wheel hub/wheel mounting bolt threads can cause the wheel bolts/ wheel nuts to come loose. # Never oil or grease the threads. # In the event of damage to the threads, contact a qualified specialist workshop immediately. # Have the damaged wheel bolts or dam‐ aged hub threads replaced. # Do not continue driving. # Observe the information on the choice of tires (/ page 342). For tires with a specified direction of rotation, an arrow on the side wall of the tire indicates the correct direction of rotation. Observe the direc‐ tion of rotation when installing. # Slide the wheel to be mounted onto the alignment bolt and push it on. 350 Wheels and tires & WARNING Risk of injury from tightening wheel bolts and nuts If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip. # Only tighten wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is on the ground. # # Be sure to observe the instructions and safety notes on "Changing a wheel" (/ page 342). For safety reasons, only use wheel bolts which have been approved by MercedesBenz and for the wheel in question. # # # # Lowering the vehicle after a wheel change Requirements: R The new wheel has been installed (/ page 349). # * NOTE Damage to paintwork of the wheel rim when screwing in the first wheel bolt If the wheel has too much play when screw‐ ing in the first wheel bolt, the wheel rim paint can be damaged. # Press the wheel firmly against the wheel hub when screwing in the first wheel bolt. Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diagonal pattern in the order indicated until they are finger-tight. Unscrew and remove the alignment bolt. Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is fingertight. Lower the vehicle (/ page 350). To lower the vehicle: place the ratchet onto the hexagon nut of the jack so that the let‐ ters "AB" are visible and turn counter-clock‐ wise. # # Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diagonal pattern in the order indicated 1 to 5 with an initial maximum force of 59 lb-ft (80 Nm). Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diagonal pattern in the order indicated 1 to 5 with the specified tightening torque of 111 lb-ft (150 Nm). & WARNING Risk of accident due to incor‐ rect tightening torque The wheels could come loose if the wheel bolts or wheel nuts are not tightened to the prescribed torque. Wheels and tires 351 # # # Ensure that the wheel bolts or wheel nuts are tightened to the prescribed tightening torque. If you are not sure, do not move the vehicle. Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have the tightening tor‐ que checked immediately. Check the tire pressure of the newly installed wheel and adjust it if necessary. % The following does not apply if the new wheel is an emergency spare wheel. # Vehicles with tire pressure loss warning system: Restart the tire pressure loss warn‐ ing system (/ page 329). # Vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring system: Restart the tire pressure monitoring system (/ page 328). Emergency spare wheel Notes on the emergency spare wheel & WARNING Risk of accident caused by incorrect wheel and tire dimensions The wheel or tire sizes and the tire type of the emergency spare wheel or spare wheel and the wheel to be replaced may differ. The emergency spare wheel or spare wheel can significantly impair driving characteristics of the vehicle. To prevent hazardous situations: # Drive carefully. # Never install more than one emergency spare wheel or spare wheel that differs in size. # Only use an emergency spare wheel or spare wheel briefly. # Do not deactivate ESP®. # Have the emergency spare wheel or spare wheel of a different size replaced at the nearest qualified specialist work‐ shop. The new wheel must have the correct dimensions. % The emergency spare wheel is secured in the emergency spare wheel bag in the trunk. Observe the following notes on installing an emergency spare wheel: R The maximum permissible speed with an emergency spare wheel installed is 50 mph (80 km/h). R Do not install snow chains on the emergency spare wheel. R Replace the emergency spare wheel after six years at the latest, regardless of wear. R Check the tire pressure of the emergency spare wheel installed. Correct the pressure as necessary. % The specified tire pressure is stated on the label of the emergency spare wheel. 352 Wheels and tires % Vehicles with a tire pressure loss warn‐ ing system: If an emergency spare wheel is installed, the tire pressure loss warning sys‐ tem cannot function reliably. Only restart the system again when the emergency spare wheel has been replaced with a new wheel. Vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring system: If an emergency spare wheel is installed, the tire pressure monitoring sys‐ tem cannot function reliably. For a few minutes after an emergency spare wheel is installed, the system may still display the tire pressure of the removed wheel. Only restart the system again when the emergency spare wheel has been replaced with a new wheel. Be sure to also observe the following further related subjects: R Notes on tire pressure (/ page 323) R Tire and Loading Information placard (/ page 330) R Tire pressure table (/ page 325) R Notes on installing tires (/ page 342) Technical data 353 Notes on technical data The data stated only applies to vehicles with standard equipment. You can obtain further information from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Vehicle electronics Two-way radios Notes on installing two-way radios & WARNING Risk of accident due to improper work on two-way radios If two-way radios are manipulated or retrofit‐ ted incorrectly, the electromagnetic radiation from the two-way radios can interfere with the vehicle electronics and jeopardize the operating safety of the vehicle. # You should have all work on electrical and electronic components carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. & WARNING Risk of accident due to improper operation of two-way radios If you use two-way radios in the vehicle improperly, their electromagnetic radiation can disrupt the vehicle's electronics. This is the case in the following situations, in partic‐ ular: R The two-way radio is not connected to an exterior antenna. R The exterior antenna is installed incor‐ rectly or is not a low-reflection antenna. This could jeopardize the operating safety of the vehicle. # Have the low-reflection exterior antenna installed at a qualified special‐ ist workshop. # When operating two-way radios in the vehicle, always connect them to the low-reflection exterior antenna. * NOTE Invalidation of the operating per‐ mit due to failure to comply with the instructions for installation and use The operating permit may be invalidated if the instructions for installation and use of two-way radios are not observed. # Only use approved frequency bands. # Observe the maximum permissible out‐ put power in these frequency bands. # Only use approved antenna positions. 354 Technical data retrofitting two-way radios. Comply with the legal requirements for detachable parts. If your vehicle has installations for two-way radio equipment, use the power supply and antenna connectors provided in the pre-installation. Observe the manufacturer's supplements when installing. Two-way radio transmission output The maximum transmission output (PEAK) at the base of the antenna must not exceed the values in the following table. Frequency band and maximum transmission output Frequency band 1 Rear roof area On vehicles with a panoramic sliding sunroof, installing an antenna to the roof area is not per‐ mitted. Use Technical Specification ISO/TS 21609 (Road Vehicles – "EMCs for installation of aftermarket radio frequency transmitting equipment") when Maximum transmis‐ sion output 2 m frequency band 144 - 174 MHz 50 W Terrestrial Trunked Radio (TETRA) 380 - 460 MHz 10 W Frequency band Maximum transmis‐ sion output 70 cm frequency band 430 - 470 MHz 35 W Two-way radio 2G 2W Two-way radio 3G/4G/5G 0.5 W The following devices can be used in the vehicle without restrictions: R two-way radios with a maximum transmission output of up to 100 mW R two-way radios with transmitter frequencies in the 380 - 420 MHz frequency band and a maximum transmission output of up to 2 W (TETRA) R mobile phones (2G/3G/4G/5G) Technical data 355 There are no restrictions when positioning the antenna on the outside of the vehicle for the fol‐ lowing frequency bands: R TETRA R 2G/3G/4G/5G Regulatory radio identification and notes Regulatory radio identification of small com‐ ponents Manufacturer information about radio-based vehicle components can be found using the key phrase "Regulatory radio identification" in the Digital Operator's Manual in the vehicle, on the internet and in the app. Regulatory radio identification – Indonesia Manufacturer information about radio-based vehicle components can be found using the key phrase "Regulatory radio identification – Indone‐ sia" in the Digital Operator's Manual in the vehi‐ cle, on the internet and in the app. % These are not small components. Informa‐ tion about small components can be found using the key phrase "Regulatory radio iden‐ tification of small components". Information on user separation distances Information on user separation distances of wireless vehicle components can be found using the key phrase "User separation distances" in the Digital Operator's Manual in the vehicle, on the Internet, and in the app. Vehicle identification plate, VIN and engine number overview Vehicle identification plate 356 Technical data Do not exceed the maximum gross vehicle weight or the maximum gross axle weight rating for the front or rear axle. VIN below the front right-hand seat 1 2 3 4 5 Vehicle identification plate (USA only) Maximum permissible gross vehicle weight Maximum permissible front axle load Maximum permissible rear axle load Paint code VIN (vehicle identification number) 1 2 3 4 5 Vehicle identification plate (Canada only) Maximum permissible gross vehicle weight Maximum permissible front axle load Maximum permissible rear axle load Paint code VIN (vehicle identification number) The maximum permissible gross vehicle weight is made up of the vehicle weight, all vehicle occupants, the fuel and the load. The maximum gross axle weight rating is the maximum weight that can be carried on one axle (front or rear axle). 1 Imprinted VIN (vehicle identification number) 2 Floor covering Technical data 357 Additional plates Operating fluids Notes on operating fluids & WARNING Risk of injury from operating fluids harmful to your health Operating fluids may be poisonous and harm‐ ful to your health. # Observe the text on the original con‐ tainers when using, storing or disposing of operating fluids. # Always store operating fluids sealed in their original containers. # Always keep children away from operat‐ ing fluids. 1 Plate with information about emissions test‐ ing, including confirmation of emissions guidelines at the U.S. federal level as well as for California 2 Engine number stamped into the crankcase 3 VIN (vehicle identification number) as a label at the lower edge of the windshield + ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental pollution due to disposing of operating fluids in a non-environmentally responsi‐ ble manner Operating fluids include the following: R fuels R R exhaust gas aftertreatment additives, e.g. DEF lubricants Incorrect disposal of operating fluids can cause considerable damage to the environ‐ ment. # Dispose of operating fluids in an envi‐ ronmentally responsible manner. Operating fluids include the following: R Fuels R Lubricants R Coolant R Brake fluid R Windshield washer fluid R Climate control system refrigerant Only use products approved by Mercedes-Benz. Damage caused by the use of products that have not been approved is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz warranty or goodwill gestures. 358 Technical data The operating fluids approved by Mercedes-Benz can be identified by the following inscriptions on the container: R MB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51) R MB-Approval (e.g. MB-Approval 229.51) Further information on approved operating flu‐ ids: R In the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Operating Fluids by entering the designation At https://bevo.mercedes-benz.com In the Mercedes-Benz BeVo app R At a qualified specialist workshop & WARNING Risk of fire or explosion from fuel Fuels are highly flammable. Fire, open flames, smoking and creating sparks must be avoided. # Before and during refueling, switch off the vehicle and, if installed, the station‐ ary heater. # & WARNING Risk of injury from fuels Fuels are poisonous and hazardous to your health. # Do not swallow fuel or let it come into contact with skin, eyes or clothing. # Do not inhale fuel vapor. # Keep children away from fuel. # Keep doors and windows closed during the refueling process. If you or other people come into contact with fuel, observe the following: # Immediately rinse fuel off your skin with soap and water. # If fuel comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thor‐ oughly with clean water. Seek medical attention immediately. # If you swallow fuel, seek medical atten‐ tion immediately. Do not induce vomit‐ ing. # Change immediately out of clothing that has come into contact with fuel. Flexible-fuel vehicles can be refueled with the following fuel types: R Unleaded premium grade gasoline R E85 fuel R A mixture of E85 fuel and unleaded premium grade gasoline Flexible-fuel vehicles can be identified by the Ethanol up to E85 sticker on the inside of the fuel filler flap. Depending on the country, the fuels you can use in your vehicle may differ from the information in the Operator's Manual. The fuels that have been approved for your vehicle can be found on the instruction label on the inside of the fuel filler flap. Technical data 359 Fuel Notes on fuel quality for vehicles with a gas‐ oline engine Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 357). * NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system, the engine and the emission control system. # Only refuel with low-sulfur spark-igni‐ tion engine fuel. This fuel may contain up to 10% ethanol by volume. Your vehicle is suitable for use with E10 fuel. Never refuel with one of the following fuels: R diesel R Gasoline with more than 10% ethanol by volume, e.g. E15, E85, E100 R Gasoline with more than 3% methanol by volume, e.g. M15, M30, M85, M100 R Gasoline with additives containing metal If you have accidentally refueled with the wrong fuel: # Do not switch on the vehicle. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. If the available fuel is not sufficiently low in sul‐ fur, this can produce unpleasant odors. Only refuel with fuel that has at least the octane number specified in the information label in the fuel filler flap (/ page 166). For maximum engine output: Only refuel using premium grade unleaded gasoline with at least 91 AKI/95 RON. If the recommended fuel is not available, you may also temporarily use regular unleaded gaso‐ line with an octane number of at least 87 AKI/ 91 RON. This may reduce engine output and increase fuel consumption. Never refuel using gasoline with an even lower RON. * NOTE Premature engine wear through unleaded regular gasoline Impairment of the longevity and performance of the engine. If unleaded premium grade gasoline is unavailable and you have to refuel using unleaded regular gasoline: # Only fill the fuel tank to half full with unleaded regular gasoline and refill as soon as possible with unleaded pre‐ mium grade gasoline. # Do not drive at the maximum design speed. # Avoid sudden acceleration and engine speeds over 3000 rpm. Further information on fuel is available at the fol‐ lowing locations: R At a gas station R At a qualified specialist workshop R USA only: At https://www.mbusa.com 360 Technical data Notes on additives in gasoline (vehicles with gasoline engine) Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 357). * NOTE Damage from use of unsuitable additives Even small amounts of the wrong additive may lead to malfunctions occurring. # Only add cleaning additives recommen‐ ded by Mercedes-Benz to the fuel. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use brand-name fuels with additives. In some countries, the fuel available may not have sufficient additives. Deposits could build up in the fuel injection system as a result. In this case, in consultation with an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, mix the fuel with the cleaning additive recommended by MercedesBenz. Observe the notes and mixing ratios indi‐ cated on the tank. Notes on fuel quality for vehicles with a die‐ sel engine General notes Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 357). & WARNING Risk of fire from fuel mixture If you mix diesel fuel with gasoline, the flash point of the fuel mixture is lower than that of pure diesel fuel. # Never refuel using gasoline in diesel engines. # Never mix gasoline with diesel fuel. * NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could result in damage to the fuel system, the engine and the emission control system. Vehicles with a diesel particulate filter: # Only refuel using sulfur-free diesel fuel that conforms to European standard EN 590, or an equivalent specification. In countries without sulfur-free diesel fuel, refuel using only low-sulfur diesel fuel with a sulfur content less than 50 ppm. Vehicle without diesel particulate filter: # Only refuel using diesel fuel with a sul‐ fur content less than 500 ppm. # Only refuel using sulfur-free diesel fuel. Never refuel with one of the following fuels: R Gasoline R Marine diesel R Heating oil R Pure fatty acid methyl ester or vegetable oil R Paraffin or kerosene If you have accidentally refueled with the wrong fuel: Technical data 361 # # Do not switch on the vehicle. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The recommended fuel quality for your vehicle can be found on the information label in the fuel filler flap (/ page 166). Notes on low outside temperatures Refuel your vehicle with as much winter diesel fuel as possible at the beginning of winter. Before changing over to winter diesel fuel, the fuel tank should be empty, if possible. Keep the fuel level low for the first refueling with winter diesel fuel, e.g. to reserve level. The fuel tank can be filled as usual when next refueling. Further information on fuel is available at the fol‐ lowing locations: R At a gas station R At a qualified specialist workshop R On the https://www.mbusa.com (USA only) Tank content and fuel reserve The total capacity of the fuel tank may vary, depending on the vehicle equipment. Total capacity and reserve fuel tank Model All models Total capacity 17.4 gal (66.0 liters) Model Of which reserve All models 1.9 gal (7.0 liters) Engine oil Notes on engine oil Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 357). * NOTE Engine damage caused by an incorrect oil filter, incorrect oil or addi‐ tives # # # # Do not use engine oils or oil filters other than those which meet the specifica‐ tions necessary for the prescribed service intervals. Do not alter the engine oil or oil filter in order to achieve longer change intervals than prescribed. Do not use additives. Have the engine oil changed after the prescribed intervals. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the oil change carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. 362 Technical data Quality and capacity of engine oil Notes on brake fluid Coolant Engine oil specifications Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 357). Notes on coolant Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 357). Gasoline engines MB-Freigabe or MBApproval All models 229.71*, 229.72 Gasoline engines: Only use SAE 0W-20 viscos‐ ity class engine oils. * Recommended for the lowest possible fuel consumption. To achieve the lowest possible fuel consumption, it is recommended to use the engine oil specifi‐ cations marked in the table for the lowest SAE viscosity class. While doing so, observe possible restrictions of the approved SAE viscosity classes. Engine oil filling capacity Model All models Capacity 6.3 US qt (6.0 liters) The specified filling capacity refers to an oil change with the oil filter. & WARNING Risk of an accident due to vapor pockets forming in the brake sys‐ tem The brake fluid constantly absorbs moisture from the air. This lowers the boiling point of the brake fluid. If the boiling point is too low, vapor pockets may form in the brake system when the brakes are applied hard. This causes the braking effect to be impaired. # Have the brake fluid renewed at the specified intervals. Have the brake fluid regularly replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. Only use a brake fluid approved by MercedesBenz according to MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval 331.0. & WARNING ‑ Risk of fire and injury from antifreeze If antifreeze comes into contact with hot component parts in the engine compart‐ ment, it may ignite. # Allow the engine to cool down before adding antifreeze. # Make sure that no antifreeze spills out next to the filler opening. # Thoroughly clean off any antifreeze from component parts before starting the vehicle. Technical data 363 * NOTE Damage caused by incorrect cool‐ ant Only use coolant that has been pre‐ mixed with the required antifreeze pro‐ tection. Information on coolant is available at the fol‐ lowing locations: R In the Mercedes-Benz Specification for Operating Fluids 320.1 At https://bevo.mercedes-benz.com In the Mercedes-Benz BeVo app R At a qualified specialist workshop # * NOTE Overheating at high outside tem‐ peratures If an inappropriate coolant is used, the engine cooling system is not sufficiently pro‐ tected against overheating and corrosion at high outside temperatures. # Only use coolant approved by Mercedes-Benz. # Observe the instructions in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Oper‐ ating Fluids 320.1. Have the coolant regularly replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. Proportion of antifreeze concentrate in the engine cooling system: R A minimum of 50% (antifreeze protection down to about -35°F (-37°C)) R A maximum of 55% (antifreeze protection down to -49°F (-45°C)) Coolant capacity Coolant (engine) Model All models Capacity 12.7 US qt (12.0 liters) Notes on windshield washer fluid Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 357). & WARNING ‑ Risk of fire and injury from windshield washer concentrate Windshield washer concentrate is highly flammable. It could ignite if it comes into contact with hot engine component parts or the exhaust system. # Make sure that no windshield washer concentrate spills out next to the filler opening. * NOTE Damage to the exterior lighting due to unsuitable windshield washer fluid Unsuitable windshield washer fluid may dam‐ age the plastic surface of the exterior light‐ ing. # Only use windshield washer fluid which is also suitable for use on plastic surfa‐ ces, e.g. MB SummerFit or MB Winter‐ Fit. 364 Technical data * NOTE Blocked spray nozzles caused by mixing windshield washer fluids * NOTE Damage due to incorrect refriger‐ ant Do not mix MB SummerFit and MB Win‐ terFit with other windshield washer flu‐ ids. If a non-approved refrigerant is used, the cli‐ mate control system may be damaged. # USA: use only R‑134a refrigerant. # Canada: use only R‑1234yf refrigerant. # Do not use distilled or de-ionized water. Other‐ wise, the fill level sensor may be triggered erro‐ neously. Recommended windshield washer fluid: R Above freezing point: e.g. MB SummerFit R Below freezing point: e.g. MB WinterFit For the correct mixing ratio, refer to the informa‐ tion on the antifreeze container. Mix washer fluid with windshield washer fluid all year round. Refrigerant Notes on refrigerant Observe the notes on operating fluids (/ page 357). erant compressor oil (PAG oil) is located on the inside of the hood. * NOTE Damage to the climate control system due to incorrect refrigerant com‐ pressor oil # # Only use refrigerant compressor oil that has been approved by Mercedes-Benz. Do not mix the approved refrigerant compressor oil with a different refriger‐ ant compressor oil. Work on the climate control system may be car‐ ried out only at a qualified specialist workshop. All applicable regulations, as well as SAE stand‐ ard J639, must be adhered to. The information label for the climate control sys‐ tem regarding the refrigerant type and the refrig‐ Information label (example – USA/China) Hazard and service warning symbols Refrigerant filling capacity Applicable standards PAG oil part number GWP (global warming potential) of the refrig‐ erant used 6 Refrigerant type 1 2 3 4 5 Technical data 365 Filling capacity for refrigerant and PAG oil Overview of height when opened Capacity Model Refrigerant All models 21.5 ± 0.4 oz (610 ± 10 g) Model All models 1 2 3 4 5 6 Information label (example – Canada) Hazard and service warning symbols Refrigerant filling capacity Applicable standards PAG oil part number GWP (global warming potential) of the refrig‐ erant used Refrigerant type Symbols 1 indicate the following: R Possible dangers R Having maintenance work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop PAG oil 2.8 ± 0.4 oz (80 ± 10 g) Vehicle data Vehicle dimensions The heights specified may vary as a result of the following factors: R Tires R Load R Condition of the suspension R Optional equipment Missing values were not available at the time of going to press. Height when opened Model All models 1 Height when opened 366 Technical data Roof load Vehicle dimensions All models Vehicle dimensions Vehicle length 187.1 in (4751 mm) Vehicle width includ‐ ing outside mirrors 80.0 in (2033 mm) Vehicle height 56.6 in (1438 mm) Wheelbase 112.8 in (2865 mm) Turning radius Model Turning radius C 300 36.32 ft (11.07 m) C 300 4MATIC 37.57 ft (11.45 m) Weights and loads Observe the following information for the vehicle data specified below: optional equip‐ ment increases the curb weight and reduces the payload. Model All models Maximum roof load 221 lb (100 kg) Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 367 Display messages Introduction Information about display messages Display messages appear on the driver display. Display messages with graphical symbols are simplified in the Operator's Manual and may dif‐ fer from the symbols on the driver display. The driver display shows high-priority display mes‐ sages in red. Certain display messages are accompanied by a warning tone. Please act in accordance with the display mes‐ sages and follow the additional notes in the Operator's Manual. For some display messages, symbols will also be shown: R Õ Further information R ¨ Hide display message With the left-hand Touch Control, you can select the respective symbol by swiping to the left or right. Pressing Õ displays further information on the central display. Press the ¨ symbol to hide the display message. You can hide low-priority display messages by pressing the G back button or the left-hand Touch Control. The display messages will then be stored in the message memory. Rectify the cause of a display message as quickly as possible. High-priority display messages cannot be hid‐ den. The driver display will show these display messages continuously until the cause of the display message has been rectified. Calling up saved display messages Driver display: 4 Service 5 Message Memory: XX If there are no display messages, No Messages will appear on the driver display. # Scroll through the display messages by swip‐ ing upwards or downwards on the left-hand Touch Control. # To exit the message memory: press the back button G. 368 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Occupant safety Display messages 6 Restraint System Malfunction Service Required Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 34). & WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as planned in an accident. # Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. 6 * The corresponding restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 34). 6 * The corresponding restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 34). Front Left Malfunction Service Required (example) Left Window Airbag Malfunction Service Required (example) & WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as planned in an accident. # Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. & WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury due to a malfunction in the window curtain airbag The window curtain airbag might be triggered unintentionally or might not be triggered at all in the event of an accident. # Have the window curtain airbag checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 369 Display messages Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Operator's Manual Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The front passenger airbag has been disabled even though an adult or a person of adult stature is on the front passenger seat. If additional forces are applied to the seat, the weight the system detects may be too low. & WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury due to a disabled front passenger airbag If the front passenger airbag is disabled, the front passenger airbag will not be deployed in the event of an acci‐ dent and cannot perform its intended protective function. A person in the front passenger seat could then, for example, come into contact with the vehicle's interior, especially if the person is sitting too close to the cockpit. # Make sure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct. # # # # Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's Manual Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Make sure that no objects are trapped under the front passenger seat. Check the status of automatic front passenger airbag actuation (/ page 44). If necessary, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. * The front passenger airbag will be enabled while the vehicle is in motion in the following situations: R Even when a child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the system weight threshold is located on the front passenger seat R Even when the front passenger seat is not occupied The system may detect objects or forces that are adding to the weight applied to the seat. 370 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions & WARNING Risk of injury or death when using a child restraint system while the front passenger airbag is enabled If you secure a child in a child restraint system on the front passenger seat and the front passenger airbag is enabled, the front passenger airbag can deploy in the event of an accident. The child could be struck by the airbag. # Ensure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct. NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur. # # # # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Make sure that no objects are trapped under the front passenger seat. Check the status of automatic front passenger airbag actuation (/ page 44). If necessary, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. PRE-SAFE Inoperative See Operator's Manual * The PRE‑SAFE® functions are malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. PRE-SAFE Impulse Side Inoperative See Operator's Manual * The PRE‑SAFE® Impulse Side system is malfunctioning or inoperative after having already been triggered. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 371 SmartKey Display messages Á Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * Have the SmartKey replaced. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Obtain a New Key Á * The SmartKey battery is discharged. # Replace the battery (/ page 65). Replace Key Battery Á Key Not Detected (white display message) * The SmartKey is currently undetected. # Change the location of the SmartKey in the vehicle. # If the SmartKey is still not recognized, place it in the marked space for starting with the SmartKey (/ page 148). 372 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Á Key Not Detected (red dis‐ play message) Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The SmartKey cannot be detected and may no longer be in the vehicle. The SmartKey is no longer in the vehicle and you switch off the vehicle: R You can no longer start the vehicle. R You cannot centrally lock the vehicle. # Ensure that the SmartKey is in the vehicle. If the SmartKey detection function has a malfunction due to a strong radio signal source: Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Place the SmartKey in the marked space for starting the engine with the SmartKey (/ page 148). # Á * A warning tone will also sound. This message reminds you to take your SmartKey with you when you leave the vehicle. Á * The vehicle is processing in order to teach in the new SmartKey. # Wait until processing is complete. Don't Forget Your Key Key Being Initialized Please Wait Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 373 Display messages Place the Key in the Marked Space See Operator's Manual Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * SmartKey detection is malfunctioning. # Change the location of the SmartKey in the vehicle. # Place the SmartKey in the marked space for starting the engine with the SmartKey (/ page 148). Lights Display messages : Check Left Low Beam (example) : Malfunction See Operator’s Manual Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The corresponding light source is defective. # Drive on carefully. # Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. % LED light sources: the display message for the corresponding light appears only when all the light-emitting diodes in the light are faulty. * The exterior lighting is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. 374 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages : Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The light sensor for automatic driving lights is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Automatic Headlamp Mode Inoperative : * The active headlamps are malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. : * You are driving without low-beam headlamps. # Turn the light switch to the L or à position. : * You are leaving the vehicle and the lights are still switched on. # Turn the light switch to the à position. Active Headlamps Inoperative Switch On Headlamps Switch Off Lights Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 375 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions DIGITAL LIGHT Functions Limited * The DIGITAL LIGHT system is malfunctioning. The lighting system will continue to work even without the functions of the DIGITAL LIGHT system. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Adaptive Highbeam Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual * Adaptive Highbeam Assist is temporarily unavailable. The system limits have been reached (/ page 126). Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. The Adaptive Highbeam Assist Now Available display message will appear. # Drive on. # Operate the high beam manually until Adaptive High Beam Assist is available again. Adaptive Highbeam Assist Inoperative * Adaptive Highbeam Assist is malfunctioning. # Drive on. or # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Until then, operate the high beam manually. Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual * Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is temporarily unavailable. The system limits have been reached (/ page 127). Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. The Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus Available Again display message will appear. 376 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # # Drive on. Operate the high beam manually until Adaptive High Beam Assist Plus is available again. Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus Inoperative * Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is malfunctioning. # Drive on. or # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Until then, operate the high beam manually. Hazard Warning Light Malfunction * The hazard warning lamp switch is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 377 Vehicle Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The driver display is inoperative due to a failed software update. The display message will be shown every time the engine is started. & WARNING Risk of accident if the driver display fails If the driver display has failed or is malfunctioning, function restrictions in systems relevant to safety cannot be detected. The operating safety of your vehicle may be impaired. # Drive on carefully. # Have the vehicle checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. If the operating safety of your vehicle is impaired, park the vehicle immediately and safely. Contact a qualified spe‐ cialist workshop. If the driver display fails, you may not recognize function restrictions affecting systems relevant to safety or the speed display, for example. The operating safety of the vehicle may be impaired (/ page 253). # Have the vehicle checked by a qualified specialist workshop immediately. 378 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages d Vehicle Ready to Drive Switch the Ignition Off Before Exiting Head-up Display Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * You are leaving the vehicle in a ready-to-drive state. # Get out of the vehicle, secure it against rolling away and take the SmartKey with you. # If you do not leave the vehicle, switch off the electrical consumers, e.g. the seat heating. Otherwise, the 12‑V battery may discharge and starting the engine may be possible only with the help of a second battery (jump start). * The Head-up Display is temporarily unavailable. Possible causes: R Malfunctions in the power supply R Signal interference # # Stop in accordance with the traffic conditions and switch the vehicle off and on again. If the display message still appears, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Head-up Display Inoperative * The Head-up Display has an internal error. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Head-up Display Brightness Currently Reduced See Operator's Manual * The brightness of the Head-up Display is reduced. Possible causes: R Dirt on the windshield in the camera's field of vision R Faulty exterior brightness signals # # Switch on the windshield wipers. Clean the windshield if necessary. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 379 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # # Switch the vehicle off and switch it back on If the display message still appears, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Ù * A power steering malfunction has occurred. Steering characteristics may be impaired as a result. # Drive on carefully. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Ù * The power steering assistance is malfunctioning. Ù * The steering is malfunctioning. Steering capability is significantly impaired. Steering Malfunction Drive Carefully Service Required Steering Malfunction Increased Physical Effort See Operator's Manual Steering Malfunction Stop Immediately See Operator's Manual & WARNING Risk of an accident due to altered steering characteristics If the power assistance of the steering fails partially or completely, you will need to use more force to steer. # If safe steering is possible, drive on carefully. # Visit or consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. & WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired If the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardized. 380 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # # Ù Rear Axle Steering Currently Malfunctioning Ù Rear Axle Steering Malfunction Service Required Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. * The rear axle steering is temporarily unavailable. The turning radius may increase. # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle. If the display message does not disappear: Drive on carefully. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # * The rear axle steering is malfunctioning. The rear axle has no steering capability. The steering wheel may be tilted when you drive in a straight line. # Adapt your speed and drive on carefully. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 381 Display messages Ù Rear Axle Steering Malfunction Stop Immediately Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The rear axle steering is malfunctioning. The rear axle has no steering capability. The steering wheel may be tilted when you drive in a straight line. & WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired If the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardized. # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. C M * At least one door is open. # Close all doors. * The hood is open. & WARNING Risk of accident due to driving with the hood unlocked The hood may open and block your view. Never release the hood when driving. # Before every trip, ensure that the hood is locked. # 382 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Close the hood. N * The trunk lid is open. Ambient Lighting Warning Support Inoperative * The ambient lighting may not provide full visual warning support. # Lock the vehicle and unlock it again after a few minutes. # If the display message appears regularly, contact a qualified specialist workshop. Function Blocked by Center Backrest * You cannot electrically unlock the left seat backrest. # Fold the center seat backrest back until it engages. & DANGER Risk of exhaust gas poisoning Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the trunk lid is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion. # Always switch off the engine before opening the trunk lid. # Never drive with the trunk lid open. # Close the trunk lid. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 383 Display messages _ Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The seat backrest of the corresponding seat is not engaged. # Fold the seat backrest back until it engages. Rear Left Backrest Not Latched (example) ¥ * The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped below the minimum. # Add washer fluid (/ page 293). Windshield Wiper Malfunction * The windshield wipers are malfunctioning. # Restart the vehicle. Check Washer Fluid If the display message still appears: Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # 384 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Engine Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions To switch vehicle off, press and hold Start/Stop button for at least 3 seconds or press 3 times * You have pressed the start/stop button while the vehicle is in motion. # Information about switching off the vehicle while driving (/ page 148). Cannot Start Vehicle See Operator's Manual * The vehicle cannot be started. # Switch the vehicle off and switch it back on # If the display message still appears, consult a qualified specialist workshop. + Check Coolant Level See Operator's Manual * The coolant level is too low. * NOTE Engine damage due to insufficient coolant # # # Avoid long journeys with insufficient coolant. Add coolant (/ page 292). Have the engine cooling system checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 385 Display messages ÿ Coolant Stop Switch Off Vehicle Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The coolant is too hot. # Stop immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions and switch off the vehicle. & WARNING Risk of burns when opening the hood If you open the hood in the event of an overheated engine or fire in the engine compartment, the following situations may occur: R You may come into contact with hot gases. R You may come into contact with other escaping hot operating fluids. # # # # # Before opening the hood, allow the engine to cool down. In the event of a fire in the engine compartment, keep the hood closed and call the fire service. Wait until the engine has cooled down. Make sure that the air supply to the radiator is not obstructed. Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that the coolant temperature display remains below the red marking. ÿ * There is a malfunction in the engine cooling system. # Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that the coolant temperature display remains below the red marking. Fuel Level Low * The fuel supply has dropped into the reserve range. 386 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # 8 Fuel Filler Cap Open Refuel. * The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leaking. # Close the fuel filler cap. # If the fuel filler cap was already properly closed: consult a qualified specialist workshop. Transmission Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Shift to P Only When Vehicle Is Stationary * It is possible to select the park position j only if the vehicle is stationary. # Depress the brake pedal to stop. # Shift the transmission to park position j when the vehicle is stationary. Depress Brake to Shift from P * You have attempted to shift the transmission out of park position j and into another transmission position. # Depress the brake pedal. # Select transmission position h, k or neutral i. To Deselect P or N Depress Brake and Start Vehicle * You have attempted to shift the transmission out of park position j or neutral i and into another transmission position. # Depress the brake pedal. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 387 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # # Start the vehicle. Change the transmission position. Depress Brake to Shift to D or R * You have attempted to select transmission position h or k. # Depress the brake pedal. # Select transmission position h or k. Depress Brake to Shift to R * You have attempted to select transmission position k. # Depress the brake pedal. # Select transmission position k. Apply Brake To Park Service Required * A malfunction has occurred in the emergency power supply to park position j. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Until then, always select park position j manually before you switch off the vehicle. # Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake. Risk of Vehicle Rolling Away Driver's Door Open Position P Not Selected * The driver's door is not fully closed and transmission position h, k or neutral i is selected. The vehicle may roll away. # Select park position j when switching off the vehicle. Risk of Vehicle Rolling Away Apply Brake to Park * The transmission is malfunctioning. Park position j cannot be selected. # Park the vehicle safely. 388 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # # Risk of Vehicle Rolling Away N Activated Manually No Automatic Change to P Use the electric parking brake to secure the vehicle against rolling away. On gradients, turn the front wheels so that the vehicle will roll towards the curb if it starts moving. * While the vehicle was at a standstill or driving at very low speed, neutral i was engaged with the engine running or the vehicle switched on. * NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to rolling away When the vehicle is switched off or the driver's door is opened, automatic engagement of park position j is deactivated. The vehicle may roll away. # Be ready to brake. # Do not leave the vehicle unattended. # # # N Automatically Activated Please Shift to Transmission Position Again Depress the brake pedal until the vehicle comes to a standstill. Engage park position j when the vehicle is stationary with the brake pedal depressed. To continue driving with the brake pedal depressed, select transmission position h or k. * Neutral i was automatically engaged when the vehicle was rolling or being driven. % When you open the driver's door in neutral i, park position j will be engaged automatically. # Depress the brake pedal until the vehicle comes to a standstill. # Engage park position j when the vehicle is stationary with the brake pedal depressed. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 389 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # To continue driving with the brake pedal depressed, select transmission position h or k. Reversing Not Possible Service Required * The transmission is malfunctioning. It is not possible to select transmission position k. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Transmission Malfunction Stop * The transmission is malfunctioning. The transmission shifts to neutral i automatically. # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Depress the brake pedal. # Engage park position j. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Service Required Do Not Change Transmission Position * The transmission is malfunctioning. It is no longer possible to change the transmission position. # If transmission position h is selected, consult a qualified specialist workshop and do not change the transmis‐ sion position. # For all other transmission positions, park the vehicle safely. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service. Drive Malfunction Stop Restart Vehicle * The transmission is malfunctioning. # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Restart the vehicle. If the display message still appears: 390 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Drive Malfunction Stop Contact Dealer * The transmission is malfunctioning. # Stop the vehicle immediately in a safe location and do not continue driving. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Drive Overheated Drive Carefully * The transmission is overheating. When the display message is active, start-up and driving characteristics may be temporarily impaired. # Drive at low engine speed. # Avoid sporty driving. # Before pulling away on uphill gradients, let the transmission cool down until the display message disappears. Auxiliary Battery Malfunction (white display mes‐ sage) * There is a malfunction in the auxiliary battery. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Until then, always select park position j manually before you switch off the vehicle. # Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake. Auxiliary Battery Malfunction (red display message) * There is a malfunction in the auxiliary battery. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Until then, always select park position j manually before you switch off the vehicle. # Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 391 Brakes Display messages F (USA only) ! (Canada only) Parking Brake See Operator's Manual Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The yellow ! indicator lamp is lit. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. To apply: # Switch the vehicle off and switch it back on # Apply the electric parking brake manually (/ page 173). If it is not possible to apply the electric parking brake: Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Where necessary, also secure the parked vehicle against rolling away. * The yellow ! indicator lamp and the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp are lit. The elec‐ tric parking brake is malfunctioning. To release: # Switch the vehicle off and switch it back on # Release the electric parking brake manually (/ page 173). or # Release the electric parking brake automatically (/ page 173). If it is still not possible to release the electric parking brake: # Do not continue driving. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # 392 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The yellow ! indicator lamp is lit and the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp is flashing. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. The electric parking brake could not be applied or released. # Switch the vehicle off and switch it back on To apply: Release and then apply the electric parking brake manually (/ page 173). # To release: Apply and then release the electric parking brake manually. # If the electric parking brake cannot be applied or the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp continues to flash: # Do not continue driving. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Where necessary, also secure the parked vehicle against rolling away. * The yellow ! indicator lamp is lit and the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for approximately ten seconds after the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It then remains lit or goes out. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. If the state of charge is too low: # Charge the 12 V battery. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 393 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions To apply: Apply the electric parking brake manually. # If it is not possible to apply the electric parking brake: Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Where necessary, also secure the parked vehicle against rolling away. # To release: If the conditions for automatic release are fulfilled and the electric parking brake is not released automatically, release the electric parking brake manually (/ page 173). # If it is still not possible to release the electric parking brake: Do not continue driving. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # 394 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages F (USA only) ! (Canada only) Please Release Parking Brake Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The red F indicator lamp (USA only) or ! indicator lamp (Canada only) is flashing. The electric parking brake is applied while you are driving: R A condition for automatic release of the electric parking brake has not been fulfilled (/ page 173). R You are performing emergency braking using the electric parking brake (/ page 174). # # Check the conditions for automatic release of the electric parking brake. Release the electric parking brake manually. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 395 Display messages F (USA only) Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp is lit. You have attempted to release the electric parking brake with the vehicle switched off. # Switch on the vehicle. ! (Canada only) Switch on Vehicle to Release the Parking Brake $ (USA only) J (Canada only) Brake Immediately * A malfunction has occurred while the HOLD function was activated. A horn may also sound at regular intervals. You cannot start the vehicle system. # Immediately depress the brake pedal firmly until the display message disappears. You cannot start the vehicle system again. 396 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages $ (USA only) J (Canada only) Check Brake Fluid Level Check Brake Pads See Operator's Manual Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir. & WARNING Risk of an accident due to low brake fluid level If the brake fluid level is too low, the braking effect and the braking characteristics may be impaired. # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Do not add brake fluid. * The brakepads have reached the wear limit. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Driving systems Display messages ë Off Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The HOLD function is deactivated because the vehicle is slipping or a condition for activation is not fulfilled. # Reactivate the HOLD function later or check the activation conditions for the HOLD function (/ page 181). Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 397 Display messages é Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * ATTENTION ASSIST is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. ATTENTION ASSIST Inoperative é * ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue or an increasing lack of concentration on the part of the driver (/ page 182). # If necessary, take a break. h * Cruise control cannot be activated as not all activation conditions are fulfilled. # Observe the activation conditions for cruise control (/ page 184). Cruise Control Inoperative * Cruise control is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Cruise Control Off * Cruise control has been deactivated. If there is an additional warning tone, cruise control has been deactivated automatically (/ page 184). ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a Break! - - - mph 398 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages ç Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC cannot be activated as not all activation conditions are fulfilled. # Comply with the activation conditions of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 188). - - - mph ç * If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the setting of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, the system will switch to passive mode (/ page 186). ç * Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC was deactivated. If a warning tone also sounds, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC has deactivated automatically (/ page 188). Active Distance Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual * Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is temporarily unavailable. The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 186). As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again. # Drive on. or Suspended Off Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 399 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle. Active Distance Assist Inoperative * Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning. # Drive on. or # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop. Active Distance Assist Now Available * Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is operational again. # Switch on Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (/ page 188). Active Steering Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual * Active Steering Assist is temporarily unavailable. The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 193). As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again. # Drive on # Check the tire pressure if necessary. Active Steering Assist Inoperative * Active Steering Assist is malfunctioning. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC remains available. # Drive on or 400 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle. If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop. Ø * Active Steering Assist has reached the system limits (/ page 193). You have not steered independently for a considerable period of time. # Take over the steering and drive on in accordance with the traffic conditions. Active Steering Assist Currently Unavailable Due to Multiple Emergency Stops * Active Steering Assist is temporarily unavailable due to multiple emergency stops. # Take over the steering and stop in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Switch the vehicle off and switch it back on Active Steering Assist is available once more. Ø Beginning Emergency Stop Active Emergency Stop Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual * Your hands are not on the steering wheel. The Active Steering Assist will initiate an emergency stop (/ page 193). # Put your hands on the steering wheel. Information on canceling an emergency stop (/ page 195). * Active Emergency Stop Assist is temporarily unavailable. The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 195). As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again. # Drive on or Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 401 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle. * Vehicles without the Driving Assistance Package: Active Emergency Stop Assist is temporarily unavailable due to multiple emergency stops. # Take over the steering and stop in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Switch the vehicle off and switch it back on Active Emergency Stop Assist is available once more. # Active Emergency Stop Assist Inoperative * Active Emergency Stop Assist is malfunctioning. # Drive on. or # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop. Active Lane Change Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual * Active Lane Change Assist is temporarily unavailable. The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 197). As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again. # Drive on or # If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle. 402 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Active Lane Change Assist Inoperative * Active Lane Change Assist is malfunctioning. # Drive on or # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop. Active Stop & Go Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual * Active Stop-and-Go Assist is temporarily unavailable. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and Active Steering Assist are still available. The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 186). As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again. # Drive on. Active Stop & Go Assist Inoperative See Operator's Manual * Active Stop-and-Go Assist is malfunctioning. Active Stop-and-Go Assist has been deactivated. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and Active Steering Assist are still available. # Drive on. or # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 403 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Traffic Sign Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual * Traffic Sign Assist is temporarily unavailable. Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. # Drive on Traffic Sign Assist Inoperative * Traffic Sign Assist is malfunctioning. # Drive on or # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop. Blind Spot Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual * Blind Spot Assist is temporarily unavailable. The system limits have been reached (/ page 211). Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. # Drive on or # If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle. Blind Spot Assist Inoperative * Blind Spot Assist is malfunctioning. # Drive on or 404 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle. If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop. Active Blind Spot Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual * Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarily unavailable. The system limits have been reached (/ page 211). Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. # Drive on or # If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle. Active Blind Spot Assist Inoperative * Active Blind Spot Assist is malfunctioning. # Drive on or # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop. Active Lane Keeping Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual * Active Lane Keeping Assist is temporarily unavailable. The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 214). As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again. # Drive on Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 405 Display messages Active Lane Keeping Assist Inoperative Ø Beginning Emergency Stop Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * Active Lane Keeping Assist is malfunctioning. # Drive on or # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop. * Your hands are not on the steering wheel. The Active Lane Keeping Assist will initiate an emergency stop (/ page 214). # Put your hands on the steering wheel. Information on canceling an emergency stop (/ page 195). 406 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages ¸ ð ç Ä Temporarily Unavailable Sensors are Dirty Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * Front and corner radar sensors and/or lidar (hereafter "sensors") are malfunctioning. Possible causes: R The sensors are dirty or damaged R Heavy rain or snow R Extended country driving without other traffic, e.g. in the desert Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable. The brake system, steering and drive system will continue to function normally. # Drive on Once the causes of the problem are no longer present, the driving systems and driving safety systems will be avail‐ able again and the corresponding symbols will be switched off. If the display message does not disappear: # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Clean all sensor covers from the outside and check for damage (/ page 176). # Restart the vehicle. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 407 Display messages á ð Ä ¬ Ô Temporarily Unavailable Camera View Restricted Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The view of the multifunction camera is restricted. Possible causes: R Dirt on the windshield in the field of vision of the multifunction camera R Heavy rain, snow or fog R Condensation on the inside of the windshield: in certain weather conditions, condensation can form on the inside of the windshield during cold times of year in particular. % This condensation on the windshield will be removed automatically within a short time with the aid of a heater. The restriction is temporary. Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable. The brake system, steering and drive system will continue to function normally. # Drive on Once the causes of the problem are no longer present, the driving systems and driving safety systems will be avail‐ able again and the corresponding symbols will be switched off. If the display message does not disappear: # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Clean the windshield, especially in the position of the multifunction camera (/ page 176). # Restart the vehicle. 408 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Active Parking Assist Limited Availability of Maneuvering Assistance See Operator's Manual * Active Parking Assist’s maneuvering assistant is temporarily unavailable or only partially available. # Clean all sensors of the parking and camera system (/ page 298). # If the display message still appears, consult a qualified specialist workshop. PARKTRONIC Inoperative See Operator's Manual * Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is malfunctioning. Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. # Continue driving while paying attention to the vehicle's surroundings. or # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message still appears, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Active Parking Assist and PARKTRONIC Inoperative See Operator's Manual * Active Parking Assist and Parking Assist PARKTRONIC are malfunctioning. Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. # Continue driving while paying attention to the vehicle's surroundings. or # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message still appears, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 409 Driving safety systems Display messages ! ÷ Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * ABS and ESP® are temporarily unavailable. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be temporarily unavailable. The brake system will continue to operate normally. Braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situa‐ tion. & WARNING Risk of skidding if ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning The wheels may lock during braking and ESP® does not perform any vehicle stabilization. The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addi‐ tion, other driving safety systems are switched off. # Drive carefully on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 19 mph (30 km/h). # If the display message does not disappear, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Drive care‐ fully. 410 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages ! ÷ Inoperative See Operator's Manual ÷ Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning. The brake system will continue to operate normally. Braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situa‐ tion. & WARNING Risk of skidding if ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning The wheels may block during braking and ESP® does not perform any vehicle stabilization. The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addi‐ tion, other driving safety systems are switched off. # Drive on carefully. # Have ABS and ESP® checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. * ESP® is temporarily unavailable. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning. & WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP is malfunctioning® If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilization. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 411 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # # ÷ Inoperative See Operator's Manual Drive carefully on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 19 mph (30 km/h). If the display message does not disappear, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Drive care‐ fully. * ESP® is malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning. The brake system will continue to operate normally. Braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situa‐ tion. & WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® is malfunctioning If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilization. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off. # Drive on carefully. # Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop. 412 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages T ! ÷ Inoperative See Operator's Manual Active Brake Assist Functions Currently Limited See Operator's Manual Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * EBD, ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning. & WARNING Risk of skidding if EBD, ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning The wheels may block during braking and ESP® does not perform any vehicle stabilization. The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addi‐ tion, other driving safety systems are switched off. # Drive on carefully. # Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. * For vehicles with the Driving Assistance Package, the following functions may be temporarily unavailable or only partially available: R Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function R Evasive Steering Assist R PRE‑SAFE® PLUS Vehicles with Blind Spot Assist: PRE‑SAFE® PLUS is temporarily unavailable. The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (/ page 199). Vehicles without the Driving Assistance Package: Active Brake Assist is temporarily unavailable. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 413 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # Drive on. As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again. or # Active Brake Assist Functions Limited See Operator's Manual If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle. * For vehicles with the Driving Assistance Package, the following functions may be temporarily unavailable or only partially available: R Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function R Evasive Steering Assist R PRE‑SAFE® PLUS Vehicles without the Driving Assistance Package: Active Brake Assist is temporarily unavailable or only partially available. # Drive on or # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle. # If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop. 414 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Mercedes-Benz emergency call system Display messages G Inoperative Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The Mercedes-Benz emergency call system malfunctioning The Mercedes me connect system is also malfunction‐ ing. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Battery Display messages # Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The 12 V on-board electrical system is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. 12 V On-board Electrical System Service Required # Stop Vehicle See Operator's Manual * The 12 V battery is no longer being charged and the state of charge is too low. * NOTE Possible engine damage if you continue driving # Do not continue driving under any circumstances. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 415 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # # # # # Switch on vehicle to charge the 12 V battery # Stop vehicle To charge the 12 V battery do not switch off vehicle Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving. Switch off the vehicle. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. * The vehicle is off and the state of charge of the 12 V battery is too low. # Switch off electrical consumers that are not required. To charge the 12 V battery: Leave the vehicle running for a few minutes, or drive an extended distance. # * The 12 V battery charge level is too low. # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving. # Leave the vehicle running # If the display message disappears: drive on. # If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop. 416 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Û Stop Vehicle See Operator's Manual Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The 48 V on-board electrical system is malfunctioning. # Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving. # Switch off the engine. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Û * The 48 V on-board electrical system has function restrictions. Comfort functions may be restricted. # Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Ý * The 48 V battery is discharged. You have switched on the ignition while the 12 V battery was being charged with a suitable charger or while another vehicle was providing starting assistance. The discharged 48 V battery is charged automatically via the voltage converter. After a few minutes, the driver dis‐ play will show the Starting Possible Again display message. # Start the vehicle. # Drive the vehicle for a while to charge the 12 V battery and the 48 V battery after disconnecting the charger from the vehicle. 48 V Battery See Operator's Manual Please Wait Charging 48 V Battery… If the Starting Possible Again display message does not appear after a few minutes: Try to start the vehicle. # Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 417 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # If the vehicle does not start, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Cannot Start Vehicle See Operator's Manual * The state of charge of the 48 V battery is too low. You can no longer start the vehicle. # Switch off electrical consumers that are not required. # Connect a suitable charger approved for Mercedes-Benz with sufficient charge output to the jump-start connec‐ tion point of the 12 V battery (/ page 312). The 48 V battery is charged via the voltage converter in the vehicle. Starting Possible Again * The 48 V battery has been charged automatically via the voltage converter. # Start the vehicle and drive for a while to charge the 12 V battery and the 48 V battery. Tire pressure monitor Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Tire Press. Monitor Currently Unavailable * There is interference from a powerful radio signal source As a result, no signals from the tire pressure sensors are being received. The tire pressure monitoring system is temporarily unavailable. The tire pressure monitoring system will restart automatically as soon as the cause has been rectified. # Drive on. Tire Press. Monitor Inoperative * The tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning. 418 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions & WARNING There is a risk of an accident if the tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning The tire pressure monitoring system cannot issue a warning if there is pressure loss in one or more of the tires. Tires with insufficient tire pressure may impair the driving characteristics as well as steering and braking. # Have the tire pressure monitoring system checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Tire Pressure Monitor Inoperative No Wheel Sensors h Wheel Sensor(s) Missing h Check Tires * The wheels installed do not have suitable tire pressure sensors. The tire pressure monitoring system is deactivated. # Install wheels with suitable tire pressure sensors. * There is no signal from the tire pressure sensor of one or more wheels. No pressure value is displayed for the affec‐ ted tire. # Have the faulty tire pressure sensor replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. * The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly. The wheel position is displayed. A warning tone will also sound. & WARNING Risk of an accident due to insufficient tire pressure R R R The tires can burst. The tires can wear excessively and/or unevenly. The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking may be greatly impaired. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 419 Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions You could then lose control of the vehicle. # Observe the recommended tire pressures. # Adjust the tire pressure if necessary. # # Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions. Check the tire pressure (/ page 323) and the tires. h * The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires, or the difference in tire pressure between the individual wheels is too great. # Check the tire pressure and add air, if necessary. # When the tire pressure is correct, restart the tire pressure monitor (/ page 328). h * The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly. The wheel position will be displayed. Please Correct Tire Pressure Warning Tire Malfunction & WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with a flat tire R R The tires can overheat and be damaged. The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking characteristics may be greatly impaired. You could then lose control of the vehicle. Do not drive with a flat tire. # 420 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # # Do not exceed the maximum permissible driving distance in emergency mode and the maximum permissi‐ ble speed with a flat MOExtended tire. Observe the notes on flat tires. Notes in the event of a flat tire (/ page 302). Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions. # Check the tires. # Tires Overheated * At least one tire is overheating. The affected tires are displayed in red. At temperatures close to the limit value, the tires are displayed in yellow. & WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with overheated tires Overheated tires can burst. # Reduce speed so that the tires cool down. Decrease Speed * At least one tire is overheating. The affected tires are displayed in red. At temperatures close to the limit value, the tires are displayed in yellow. & WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with overheated tires Overheated tires can burst. # Reduce speed so that the tires cool down. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 421 Tire pressure loss warning system Display messages Check Tire Pressure Soon Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * Canada only: The tire pressure loss warning system has detected a significant loss of pressure. & WARNING Risk of an accident due to insufficient tire pressure R R R The tires can burst. The tires can wear excessively and/or unevenly. The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking may be greatly impaired. You could then lose control of the vehicle. # Observe the recommended tire pressures. # Adjust the tire pressure if necessary. # # # Check Tire Pressure Then Restart Run Flat Indicator Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions. Check the tire pressure (/ page 323) and the tires. When the tire pressure is correct, restart the tire pressure loss warning system (/ page 329). * Canada only: The tire pressure loss warning system generated a display message and has not been restarted since. # When the tire pressure is correct, restart the tire pressure loss warning system (/ page 329). 422 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages Run Flat Indicator Inoperative Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * Canada only: The tire pressure loss warning system is malfunctioning. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Engine oil Display messages 5 Check Engine Oil Level (Add 1 quart) 5 Engine Oil Level Reduce Oil Level Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level. * NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insufficient engine oil # # Avoid long journeys with insufficient engine oil. When next refueling, add 1.1 US qt (1 l) of engine oil (/ page 291). Notes on engine oil (/ page 361). * The engine oil level is too high. * NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with excess engine oil # # Avoid long journeys with excess engine oil. Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately and have the engine oil level reduced. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 423 Display messages 5 Engine Oil Level Stop Switch Off Vehicle Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The engine oil level is too low. * NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insufficient engine oil # # # # # 5 Engine Oil Pressure Stop Switch Off Vehicle Avoid long journeys with insufficient engine oil. Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving. Switch off the vehicle. Add 1.1 US qt (1 l) of engine oil (/ page 291). Check the engine oil level. Notes on engine oil (/ page 361). * The oil pressure is too low. * NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insufficient oil pressure # # # # Avoid driving with insufficient oil pressure. Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving. Switch off the vehicle. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. 424 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages 5 Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The electrical connection to the oil level sensor has been interrupted or the oil level sensor is faulty. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Engine Oil Level Cannot Be Measured Warning and indicator lamps Overview of indicator and warning lamps Driver display Ù Ù Ù Some systems will perform a self-test when the vehicle is switched on. Some indicator and warn‐ ing lamps may briefly light up or flash. This behavior is non-critical. These indicator and warning lamps indicate a malfunction only if they light up or flash after the vehicle has been star‐ ted or during a journey. ÿ ; # 8 Indicator and warning lamps: Restraint system (/ page 426) 6 Seat belt (/ page 426) ü F ! Power steering (yellow) (/ page 427) Power steering (red) (/ page 427) Rear axle steering (yellow) (/ page 427) Coolant temperature (/ page 428) Check Engine (/ page 428) Electrical malfunction (/ page 428) Reserve fuel with fuel filler flap loca‐ tion indicator (/ page 428) USA: electric parking brake (red) (/ page 432) Canada: electric parking brake (red) (/ page 432) Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 425 Electric parking brake (yellow) (/ page 432) USA: Recuperative Brake System é (/ page 432) Canada: brakes (yellow) J (/ page 432) USA: brakes (red) (/ page 432) $ Canada: brakes (red) (/ page 432) J L Distance warning (/ page 435) ABS (/ page 436) ! ÷ ESP®(/ page 436) å ESP® OFF (/ page 436) H Mercedes-Benz emergency call sys‐ tem (/ page 438) Tire pressure monitoring system h (/ page 439) Parking lights (/ page 119) T Low beam (/ page 119) L High beam (/ page 120) K #! Turn signal lights (/ page 120) Rear fog light (/ page 119) R ! 426 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Occupant safety Warning/indicator lamp 6 Restraint system warning lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The red restraint system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. The restraint system is malfunctioning (/ page 34). & WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as planned in an accident. # Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. # # # ü Seat belt warning lamp flashes Drive on carefully. Note the messages on the driver display. Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. * The red seat belt warning lamp flashes and an intermittent warning tone sounds. The driver or front passenger has not fastened his/her seat belt while the vehicle is in motion. # Fasten your seat belt (/ page 38). There are objects on the front passenger seat. # Remove the objects from the front passenger seat. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 427 Warning/indicator lamp ü Seat belt warning lamp lights up Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The red seat belt warning lamp lights up for six seconds once the vehicle has started. In addition, an intermittent warning tone may sound. The red seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger to fasten their seat belts. # Fasten your seat belt (/ page 38). If you have placed objects on the front passenger seat, the red seat belt warning lamp may remain lit. Vehicle Warning/indicator lamp Ù Power steering warning lamp (yellow) Ù Power steering warning lamp (red) Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The yellow power steering warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. The power assistance or the steering itself is malfunctioning. # Note the messages on the driver display. * The red power steering warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. The power assistance or the steering itself is malfunctioning. & WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired If the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardized. 428 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # # # Ù Rear axle steering warning lamp (yellow) Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Note the messages on the driver display. * The yellow rear axle steering warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. The rear axle steering is malfunctioning. # Note the messages on the driver display. Engine Warning/indicator lamp ÿ Coolant warning lamp (red) Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The red coolant warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. Possible causes: R The temperature sensor is malfunctioning R The coolant level is too low R The air supply to the radiator is obstructed Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 429 Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions R R The radiator fan is faulty The engine coolant pump is faulty If there is an additional warning tone, the coolant temperature has exceeded the maximum permissible temperature. & WARNING Risk of burns when opening the hood If you open the hood in the event of an overheated engine or fire in the engine compartment, the following situa‐ tions may occur: R You may come into contact with hot gases. R You may come into contact with other escaping hot operating fluids. # # # # Before opening the hood, allow the engine to cool down. In the event of a fire in the engine compartment, keep the hood closed and call the fire service. Stop immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions and switch off the vehicle. Do not continue driving. Note the messages on the driver display. If the coolant temperature display is at the lower end of the temperature scale: Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # If the coolant temperature display is at the upper end of the temperature scale: Exit the vehicle and keep a safe distance from it until the engine has cooled down. # 430 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # # # ÿ Coolant warning lamp (yel‐ low) * The yellow coolant warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. Possible causes: R The temperature sensor is malfunctioning R The charge air, transmission oil or battery cooling is faulty R The radiator shutters are blocked or defective # ; Engine diagnosis warning lamp Check the coolant level (/ page 292). Make sure that the air supply to the radiator is not obstructed. Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that the coolant temperature display remains below the red area. Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. * The yellow Check Engine warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. A malfunction has occurred in the engine, the exhaust system or the fuel system. The emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine may be in emergency mode. In some states, legal requirements stipulate that you must immediately consult a qualified specialist workshop as soon as the yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up. # Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 431 Warning/indicator lamp # Electrical malfunction warn‐ ing lamp 8 Fuel reserve warning lamp flashes Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The red electrical malfunction warning lamp is lit. There is a malfunction in the electrics. # Note the messages on the driver display. * The yellow fuel reserve warning lamp lights up while you are driving. There has been pressure loss in the fuel system. The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leak‐ ing. # Close the fuel filler cap. If the fuel filler cap has already been closed correctly: Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # 8 Fuel reserve warning lamp lights up * The yellow fuel reserve warning lamp lights up while the engine is running. The fuel supply has dropped into the reserve range. # Refuel. 432 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Brakes Warning/indicator lamp F Electric parking brake indi‐ cator lamp (red) (USA only) ! Electric parking brake indi‐ cator lamp (red) (Canada only) ! The electric parking brake (yellow) indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The red electric parking brake indicator lamp flashes or is lit. The yellow electric parking brake indicator lamp is also lit in the event of a malfunction. # Note the messages on the driver display. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 433 Warning/indicator lamp é Recuperative Brake System warning lamp (USA only) J Brakes warning lamp (yel‐ low) (Canada only) Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions *The yellow é warning lamp (USA only) or the yellow J brakes warning lamp (Canada only) is lit while the engine is running. & WARNING Risk of an accident due to a brake system malfunction If the brake system is malfunctioning, braking characteristics may be impaired. # Drive on carefully. # Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. # # # Adjust your speed and drive on carefully, leaving a suitable distance to the vehicle in front. If the driver display shows a display message, observe it. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. 434 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Warning/indicator lamp $ Brake warning lamp (USA only) J Brake system warning lamp (Canada only) Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The red brake system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. Possible causes: R The brake force boosting is malfunctioning and the braking characteristics may be affected. R There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir. # Note the messages on the driver display. & WARNING Risk of accident and injury if brake force boosting is malfunctioning If brake force boosting is malfunctioning, increased brake pedal force may be necessary for braking. The braking characteristics may be impaired. The braking distance can increase in emergency braking situations. # Stop in a safe location immediately. Do not continue driving. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. & WARNING Risk of an accident due to low brake fluid level If the brake fluid level is too low, the braking effect and the braking characteristics may be impaired. # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Do not add brake fluid. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 435 Driving systems Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Warning lamp for distance warning function * The red distance warning lamp lights up while the vehicle is in motion. The distance to the vehicle in front is too small for the speed selected. If there is an additional warning tone, you are approaching an obstacle at too high a speed. # Be prepared to brake immediately. # Increase the distance. Ä * The Active Brake Assist warning lamp is on. The system is restricted or unavailable. # Note the messages on the driver display. æ * The Active Brake Assist warning lamp is on. The system is switched off or restricted. # Observe the notes on Active Brake Assist. L Active Brake Assist warning lamp Active Brake Assist warning lamp Function of Active Brake Assist (/ page 199). 436 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Driving safety systems Warning/indicator lamp ! ABS warning lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running. ABS is malfunctioning. If an additional warning tone sounds, EBD is malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning. # Note the messages on the driver display. & WARNING There is a risk of skidding if EBD or ABS is malfunctioning The wheels may lock during braking. The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addi‐ tion, other driving safety systems are switched off. # Drive on carefully. # Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. ÷ ESP® warning lamp flashes * The yellow ESP® warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion. One or more wheels have reached their grip limit (/ page 179). # Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 437 Warning/indicator lamp ÷ ESP® warning lamp lights up Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The yellow ESP® warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running. ESP® is malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning. # Note the messages on the driver display. & WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® is malfunctioning If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilization. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off. # Drive on carefully. # Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop. å ESP® OFF warning lamp * The yellow ESP® OFF warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running. ESP® is deactivated. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be inoperative. & WARNING Risk of skidding when driving with ESP® deactivated ESP® does not act to stabilize the vehicle. The availability of further driving safety systems is also limited. # Drive on carefully. # Deactivate ESP® only for as long as the situation requires. 438 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions If ESP® cannot be activated, ESP® is malfunctioning. # Have ESP® checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. # Observe the notes on deactivating ESP® (/ page 179). Mercedes-Benz emergency call system Warning/indicator lamp H Mercedes-Benz emergency call system warning lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions *The Mercedes-Benz emergency call system is malfunctioning. The Mercedes me connect system is also malfunction‐ ing. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 439 Tire pressure monitor Warning/indicator lamp h Tire pressure monitoring system warning lamp flashes h Tire pressure monitoring system warning lamp lights up Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions *The yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) flashes for approximately one minute and then remains lit. The tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning. & WARNING There is a risk of an accident if the tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning The tire pressure monitoring system cannot issue a warning if there is pressure loss in one or more of the tires. Tires with insufficient tire pressure may impair the driving characteristics as well as steering and braking. # Have the tire pressure monitoring system checked at a qualified specialist workshop. * The yellow tire pressure monitoring system warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) is lit. The tire pressure monitoring system has detected tire pressure loss in at least one of the tires. & WARNING Risk of an accident due to insufficient tire pressure R R R The tires can burst. The tires can wear excessively and/or unevenly. The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking may be greatly impaired. You could then lose control of the vehicle. Observe the recommended tire pressures. # 440 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # # # Adjust the tire pressure if necessary. Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions. Check the tire pressure and the tires. Index 441 1, 2, 3 ... 4MATIC Function................................................ 165 12 V battery see Battery (vehicle) 48 V on-board electrical system Notes..................................................... 242 Operating safety...................................... 20 115 V socket see Socket (115 V) A A/C function Activating/deactivating (MBUX mul‐ timedia system)..................................... 141 ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)............... 178 Acceleration see Kickdown Accident and Breakdown Manage‐ ment Mercedes me connect........................... 273 Acoustic locking verification signal Activating/deactivating........................... 64 Activating a commuter route................... Active Blind Spot Assist Activating/deactivating......................... Brake application................................... Function................................................. System limitations................................. Active Brake Assist Function/notes..................................... Setting................................................... Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Active Emergency Stop Assist............... Active Lane Change Assist..................... Calling up a speed................................. Function................................................ Increasing/decreasing the speed.......... Route-based speed adaptation.............. Storing a speed..................................... Switching off/deactivating.................... Switching on/activating........................ System limitations................................. Active Emergency Stop Assist................. Active headlamps...................................... Active Lane Change Assist Activating/deactivating......................... 261 214 213 211 211 199 204 195 197 188 186 188 191 188 188 188 186 195 122 199 Function................................................ Active Lane Keeping Assist Activating/deactivating......................... Activating/deactivating the warning...... Function................................................. Setting the sensitivity............................ System limits......................................... Active Parking Assist Automatic braking function................... Cross traffic warning............................. Drive Away Assist.................................. Exiting a parking space......................... Function................................................ Maneuvering brake function.................. Parking.................................................. Pausing................................................. System limitations................................. Active Service System PLUS see ASSYST PLUS Active Speed Limit Assist Display................................................... Function................................................ Active Steering Assist Activating/deactivating......................... 197 216 216 214 216 214 234 235 234 233 229 236 231 233 229 190 190 195 442 Index Active Emergency Stop Assist............... Active Lane Change Assist..................... Function................................................ System limits......................................... Active Traffic Jam Assist Function................................................ Adaptive cruise control see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Adaptive Highbeam Assist Function................................................ Switching on/off................................... Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus Activating/deactivating......................... Function................................................ Additives Engine oil............................................... Fuel....................................................... Additives (engine oil) see Additives Additives (fuel) see Fuel After-sales service see ASSYST PLUS 195 197 193 193 193 126 127 129 127 361 360 Air bag Reduced protection................................. 42 Air conditioning menu Calling up............................................... 141 Air distribution Setting................................................... 138 Setting (MBUX multimedia system)....... 142 Air freshener system see Perfume atomizer Air inlet see Air-water duct Air pressure see Tire pressure Air vents Adjusting (front).................................... 146 Adjusting (rear)...................................... 146 Air vents see Air vents Air-conditioning system see Climate control Air-recirculation mode.............................. 143 Air-water duct Keeping free.......................................... 294 Airbag Activation................................................ 34 Front airbag (driver, front passenger)...... 39 Installation locations............................... 39 Knee airbag............................................. 39 Overview................................................. 39 PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp....... 44 Protection................................................ 40 Side airbag.............................................. 39 Window curtain airbag............................. 39 Airflow Setting................................................... 138 Alarm see Panic alarm Alarm system see ATA (anti-theft alarm system) All-wheel drive see 4MATIC Alternative route see Route Ambient lighting Setting (MBUX multimedia system)....... 130 Android Auto see Smartphone integration Index 443 Animals Pets in the vehicle................................... 62 Anti-lock braking system see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Anti-skid chains see Snow chains Anti-theft protection Immobilizer.............................................. 85 Anti-theft protection see ATA (anti-theft alarm system) Anticipatory occupant protection see PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occu‐ pant protection) see PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection plus) Apple CarPlay® see Smartphone integration Assistance systems see Driving safety system ASSYST PLUS Battery disconnection periods.............. 288 Displaying the service due date............. 287 Function/notes..................................... 287 Regular maintenance work.................... 287 Special service requirements................ 287 ATA (anti-theft alarm system) Activating/deactivating the interior motion sensor......................................... 88 Arming/disarming the tow-away alarm... 87 Deactivating the alarm............................ 86 Function.................................................. 86 Interior motion sensor function............... 87 The tow-away alarm function................... 87 ATTENTION ASSIST Function................................................ 182 Setting................................................... 184 System limitations................................. 182 Attention assistant see ATTENTION ASSIST Authorized Mercedes-Benz Center see Qualified specialist workshop Authorized workshop see Qualified specialist workshop Automatic co-driver airbag shutoff Function of co-driver airbag shutoff........ 42 Automatic distance control see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Automatic driving lights........................... 120 Automatic engine start see ECO start/stop function Automatic engine stop see ECO start/stop function Automatic front passenger front air‐ bag shutoff PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp....... 44 Automatic measures after an accident..... 48 Automatic mirror folding function Activating/deactivating......................... 137 Automatic seat adjustment Setting..................................................... 95 Automatic transmission DIRECT SELECT lever............................. 161 Drive program display............................ 160 Drive programs...................................... 159 DYNAMIC SELECT button...................... 159 Engaging drive position......................... 163 Engaging reverse gear........................... 162 Kickdown............................................... 165 Manual gearshifting............................... 164 Selecting park position.......................... 163 444 Index Steering wheel paddle shifters.............. 164 Transmission position display................ 161 Transmission positions........................... 161 B Back seat see Seats Bad weather light...................................... Bag hook..................................................... BAS (Brake Assist System)....................... Battery (SmartKey) Replacing................................................ Battery (vehicle) Charging................................................ Charging (Remote Online)...................... Notes.................................................... Notes (starting assistance and charging)................................................ Replacing............................................... Starting assistance................................ Belt see Seat belt 123 111 178 65 312 149 308 310 313 312 Blind Spot Assist Activating/deactivating......................... Function................................................. System limitations................................. Blower see Climate control Brake Assist System see BAS (Brake Assist System) Brake fluid Notes.................................................... Brake force distribution EBD (electronic brake force distribu‐ tion)....................................................... Brakes ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)............. Active Brake Assist................................ BAS (Brake Assist System).................... Breaking-in notes................................... Driving tips............................................ EBD (electronic brake force distribu‐ tion)....................................................... HOLD function....................................... Limited braking effect (salt-treated roads).................................................... 214 211 211 362 180 178 199 178 150 152 180 181 152 New/replaced brake linings/brake discs...................................................... 150 Post-collision brake................................. 48 Braking assistance see BAS (Brake Assist System) Breakdown Assistance overview................................ 14 Changing a wheel.................................. 346 Roadside Assistance............................... 20 Tow-starting........................................... 318 Towing away.......................................... 315 Transporting the vehicle........................ 316 Breakdown see Flat tire Breaking-in notes...................................... 150 C Calls Mercedes me........................................ 270 Camera see Dashcam see Rear view camera see Surround view camera Index 445 Car key see SmartKey Car wash see Care Car wash (care)......................................... Car-to-X-Communication Displaying hazard warnings................... Care Air-water duct........................................ Automatic car wash............................... Carpet................................................... Decorative foil....................................... Display.................................................. EASY-PACK trunk box............................ Exterior lighting..................................... Head-up Display.................................... Headliner............................................... Paint...................................................... Plastic trim............................................ Power washer........................................ Real wood/trim elements..................... Rear view camera.................................. Seat belt................................................ Seat cover............................................. 294 263 294 294 299 297 299 299 298 299 299 296 299 295 299 298 299 299 Sensors................................................. 298 Steering wheel...................................... 299 Surround view camera.......................... 298 Tailpipes................................................ 298 Washing by hand................................... 296 Wheels/rims......................................... 298 Windows................................................ 298 Wiper blades......................................... 298 Cargo tie-down rings.................................. 111 Carpet (Care)............................................. 299 Change of address...................................... 20 Change of ownership.................................. 20 Changing a wheel Preparation........................................... 346 Raising the vehicle................................. 347 Changing a wheel see Emergency spare wheel Changing gears Manually................................................ 164 Changing hub caps................................... 346 Charging Battery (vehicle)..................................... 312 Mobile phone (wireless)......................... 116 USB port................................................ 115 Child safety lock Rear doors............................................... 60 Rear side windows................................... 61 Child seat Attaching (notes)..................................... 52 Basic instructions.................................... 48 Front-passenger seat (notes)................... 58 LATCH-type (ISOFIX) (installing).............. 53 Notes on risks and dangers..................... 49 Securing on the front passenger seat...... 59 Securing on the rear seat........................ 57 Top Tether............................................... 55 Children Avoiding dangers in the vehicle............... 49 Basic instructions.................................... 48 Special seat belt retractor....................... 52 Chock Storage location.................................... 345 Chock see Chock City lighting............................................... 123 446 Index Cleaning see Care Climate control Activating/deactivating......................... Activating/deactivating (rear operat‐ ing unit)................................................. Activating/deactivating the A/C function (MBUX multimedia system)...... Activating/deactivating the fra‐ grance system....................................... Activating/deactivating the synchro‐ nization function (MBUX multimedia system).................................................. Activating/deactivating the synchro‐ nization function (rear operating unit)... Air-recirculation mode........................... Automatic control.................................. Calling up the air conditioning menu...... Control panel for 3-zone automatic climate control...................................... Control panel for dual-zone auto‐ matic climate control............................. Defrost................................................... Defrosting the windshield...................... 140 141 141 144 142 142 143 141 141 138 138 141 138 Filling capacity for refrigerant and PAG oil................................................... 365 Front air vents....................................... 146 Information on the windshield heater.... 145 Inserting/removing the flacon (fra‐ grance system)...................................... 144 Ionization............................................... 144 Note...................................................... 138 Rear air vents........................................ 146 Rear operating unit................................ 140 Refrigerant............................................ 364 Removing condensation from the windows................................................ 143 Residual heat......................................... 143 Setting (MBUX multimedia system)........ 141 Setting the air distribution..................... 138 Setting the airflow................................. 138 Setting the fragrance system................. 144 Setting the temperature........................ 138 Switching the rear window heater on/off................................................... 138 Ventilating the vehicle (convenience opening).................................................. 79 Co-driver airbag shutoff see Automatic co-driver airbag shutoff Cockpit Overview................................................... 6 Coffee cup symbol see ATTENTION ASSIST Collision detection (parked vehicle) Information............................................ 174 Combination switch.................................. 120 Control elements Touch-sensitive........................................ 19 Convenience closing................................... 79 Convenience opening.................................. 79 Coolant (engine) Capacity................................................ 363 Level check........................................... 292 Notes.................................................... 362 Cooling see Climate control Copyrights License.................................................... 31 Trademarks.............................................. 31 Cornering light........................................... 122 Index 447 Crosswind Assist Function/notes..................................... 180 Cruise control Activating.............................................. 184 Buttons.................................................. 184 Calling up a speed................................. 184 Deactivating.......................................... 184 Function................................................ 184 Requirements:....................................... 184 Selecting............................................... 184 Setting a speed..................................... 184 Storing a speed..................................... 184 System limitations................................. 184 Customer Assistance Center (CAC)........... 25 Customer Relations Department............... 25 D Dashboard see Cockpit Dashcam Notes.................................................... 265 Selecting a USB device......................... 265 Starting/stopping video recording........ 266 Data acquisition Vehicle.................................................... 27 Data protection rights Data storage............................................ 30 Data storage Data protection rights............................. 30 Electronic control units........................... 27 Online services........................................ 29 Vehicle.................................................... 27 Daytime running lamp mode see Daytime running lamps Daytime running lamps Activating/deactivating......................... 129 Deactivating the alarm (ATA)...................... 86 Dealership see Qualified specialist workshop Declaration of conformity Wireless vehicle components.................. 22 Decorative foil (cleaning instructions).... 297 Definitions (tires and loading)................. 339 Defrost function......................................... 141 Destination entry Entering a POI or address...................... 259 Detecting inattentiveness see ATTENTION ASSIST Diagnostics connection.............................. 23 Diesel Low outside temperatures..................... 360 Notes.................................................... 360 DIGITAL LIGHT Active headlamps.................................. 122 Assistance functions.............................. 124 Bad weather light.................................. 123 City lighting........................................... 123 Cornering light....................................... 122 Fog light (enhanced).............................. 123 Highway mode....................................... 123 Intelligent Light System......................... 122 Switching the Intelligent Light Sys‐ tem on/off............................................ 126 Topographical compensation................. 123 Digital Operator's Manual........................... 16 Dinghy towing see Tow-bar system 448 Index DIRECT SELECT lever Engaging drive position......................... Engaging neutral.................................... Engaging park position automatically.... Engaging reverse gear........................... Function................................................. Selecting park position.......................... Display (care)............................................. Display (driver display) Displays on the driver display................ Display (MBUX multimedia system) Home screen......................................... Operating.............................................. Display message Calling up (driver display)...................... Notes..................................................... Display messages ç - - - mph....................................... h - - - mph........................................ # 12 V On-board Electrical Sys‐ tem Service Required............................. 163 162 163 162 161 163 299 242 245 246 367 367 398 397 414 Û 48 V Battery See Operator's Manual................................................... 416 : Active Headlamps Inoperative...... 374 é ATTENTION ASSIST Inoperative.... 397 é ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a Break!.................................................... 397 : Automatic Headlamp Mode Inoperative............................................. 374 Ø Beginning Emergency Stop.. 400, 405 $ Brake Immediately....................... 395 $ Check Brake Fluid Level............... 396 + Check Coolant Level See Oper‐ ator's Manual........................................ 384 5 Check Engine Oil Level (Add 1 quart).................................................... 422 : Check Left Low Beam (example).. 373 h Check Tires................................... 418 ¥ Check Washer Fluid..................... 383 ÿ Coolant Stop Switch Off Vehicle.. 385 ! Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual................................ ÷ Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual................................. Á Don't Forget Your Key................... 5 Engine Oil Level Cannot Be Measured.............................................. 5 Engine Oil Level Reduce Oil Level...................................................... 5 Engine Oil Level Stop Switch Off Vehicle............................................ 5 Engine Oil Pressure Stop Switch Off Vehicle................................. 6 Front Left Malfunction Service Required (example)............................... 8 Fuel Filler Cap Open..................... ! Inoperative See Operator's Manual................................................... ÷ Inoperative See Operator's Manual................................................... 409 410 372 424 422 423 423 368 386 410 411 Index 449 T Inoperative See Operator's Manual................................................... G Inoperative.................................... Á Key Being Initialized Please Wait.. Á Key Not Detected (red display message)............................................... Á Key Not Detected (white dis‐ play message)........................................ 6 Left Window Airbag Malfunc‐ tion Service Required (example)............ : Malfunction See Operator’s Manual.................................................. Á Obtain a New Key......................... ç Off................................................ ë Off................................................ F Parking Brake See Operator's Manual.................................................. h Please Correct Tire Pressure........ F Please Release Parking Brake...... 412 414 372 372 371 368 373 371 398 396 391 419 394 Ý Please Wait Charging 48 V Bat‐ tery…..................................................... Ù Rear Axle Steering Currently Malfunctioning...................................... Ù Rear Axle Steering Malfunction Service Required................................... Ù Rear Axle Steering Malfunction Stop Immediately................................... _ Rear Left Backrest Not Latched (example)................................. Á Replace Key Battery..................... 6 Restraint System Malfunction Service Required................................... Ù Steering Malfunction Drive Carefully Service Required.................... Ù Steering Malfunction Increased Physical Effort See Operator's Manual.. Ù Steering Malfunction Stop Immediately See Operator's Manual..... 416 380 380 381 383 371 368 379 379 379 # Stop Vehicle See Operator's Manual................................................... Û Stop Vehicle See Operator's Manual................................................... # Stop vehicle To charge the 12 V battery do not switch off vehicle........ ç Suspended................................... : Switch Off Lights.......................... : Switch On Headlamps.................. # Switch on vehicle to charge the 12 V battery........................................... F Switch on Vehicle to Release the Parking Brake.................................. á Temporarily Unavailable Cam‐ era View Restricted............................... ¸ Temporarily Unavailable Sen‐ sors are Dirty........................................ d Vehicle Ready to Drive Switch the Ignition Off Before Exiting................ h Warning Tire Malfunction.............. 414 416 415 398 374 374 415 395 407 406 378 419 450 Index h Wheel Sensor(s) Missing............... Active Blind Spot Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual...... Active Blind Spot Assist Inoperative...... Active Brake Assist Functions Cur‐ rently Limited See Operator's Manual.... Active Brake Assist Functions Limi‐ ted See Operator's Manual.................... Active Distance Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual...... Active Distance Assist Inoperative........ Active Distance Assist Now Available.... Active Emergency Stop Assist Cur‐ rently Unavailable See Operator's Manual.................................................. Active Emergency Stop Assist Inop‐ erative................................................... Active Lane Change Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual....... 418 404 404 412 413 398 399 399 400 401 401 Active Lane Change Assist Inopera‐ tive........................................................ Active Lane Keeping Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual...... Active Lane Keeping Assist Inopera‐ tive........................................................ Active Parking Assist and PARKTRONIC Inoperative See Opera‐ tor's Manual.......................................... Active Parking Assist Limited Availa‐ bility of Maneuvering Assistance See Operator's Manual................................ Active Steering Assist Currently Unavailable Due to Multiple Emer‐ gency Stops........................................... Active Steering Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual...... Active Steering Assist Inoperative......... Active Stop & Go Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual...... 402 404 405 408 408 400 399 399 402 Active Stop & Go Assist Inoperative See Operator's Manual.......................... Adaptive Highbeam Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual....... Adaptive Highbeam Assist Inoperative.. Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus Cur‐ rently Unavailable See Operator's Manual.................................................. Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus Inop‐ erative................................................... Ambient Lighting Warning Support Inoperative............................................ Apply Brake To Park Service Required... Auxiliary Battery Malfunction (red display message)................................... Auxiliary Battery Malfunction (white display message)................................... Blind Spot Assist Currently Unavaila‐ ble See Operator's Manual.................... Blind Spot Assist Inoperative................. 402 375 375 375 376 382 387 390 390 403 403 Index 451 Cannot Start Vehicle See Operator's Manual........................................... 384, 417 Check Brake Pads See Operator's Manual.................................................. 396 Check Tire Pressure Soon..................... 421 Check Tire Pressure Then Restart Run Flat Indicator.................................. 421 Cruise Control Inoperative..................... 397 Cruise Control Off................................. 397 Decrease Speed.................................... 420 Depress Brake to Shift from P............... 386 Depress Brake to Shift to D or R........... 387 Depress Brake to Shift to R................... 387 DIGITAL LIGHT Functions Limited.......... 375 Drive Malfunction Stop Contact Dealer................................................... 390 Drive Malfunction Stop Restart Vehi‐ cle......................................................... 389 Drive Overheated Drive Carefully.......... 390 Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Operator's Manual................................ Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's Manual................................ Fuel Level Low....................................... Function Blocked by Center Backrest.... Hazard Warning Light Malfunction......... Head-up Display Brightness Cur‐ rently Reduced See Operator's Man‐ ual......................................................... Head-up Display Currently Unavaila‐ ble See Operator's Manual.................... Head-up Display Inoperative.................. N Automatically Activated Please Shift to Transmission Position Again..... PARKTRONIC Inoperative See Opera‐ tor's Manual.......................................... Place the Key in the Marked Space See Operator's Manual.......................... 369 369 385 382 376 378 378 378 388 408 373 PRE-SAFE Impulse Side Inoperative See Operator's Manual.......................... PRE-SAFE Inoperative See Opera‐ tor's Manual.......................................... Reversing Not Possible Service Required................................................ Risk of Vehicle Rolling Away Apply Brake to Park......................................... Risk of Vehicle Rolling Away Driver's Door Open Position P Not Selected....... Risk of Vehicle Rolling Away N Acti‐ vated Manually No Automatic Change to P........................................... Run Flat Indicator Inoperative............... Service Required Do Not Change Transmission Position............................ Shift to P Only When Vehicle Is Sta‐ tionary................................................... Starting Possible Again.......................... 370 370 389 387 387 388 422 389 386 417 452 Index Tire Press. Monitor Currently Unavailable............................................ Tire Press. Monitor Inoperative.............. Tire Pressure Monitor Inoperative No Wheel Sensors....................................... Tires Overheated................................... To Deselect P or N Depress Brake and Start Vehicle................................... To switch vehicle off, press and hold Start/Stop button for at least 3 sec‐ onds or press 3 times........................... Traffic Sign Assist Currently Unavail‐ able See Operator's Manual.................. Traffic Sign Assist Inoperative............... Transmission Malfunction Stop............. Windshield Wiper Malfunction............... Distance control see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC DISTRONIC see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC 417 417 418 420 386 384 403 403 389 383 Door Child safety lock (rear doors).................. 60 Locking/unlocking (emergency key)....... 70 Opening (from inside).............................. 67 Unlocking (from inside)............................ 67 Door control panel....................................... 12 DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)..... 335 Drawbar see Tow-bar system Drinking and driving.................................. 152 Drive Away Assist...................................... 234 Drive position Inserting................................................ 163 Drive program display............................... 160 Drive programs see DYNAMIC SELECT Driver display 48 V on-board electrical system............ 242 Displaying the service due date............. 287 Function/notes..................................... 238 Notes on menus.................................... 239 Operating.............................................. 238 Overview of displays.............................. 242 Warning/indicator lamps....................... Driver's seat see Seat Driving safety system ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)............. Active Brake Assist................................ BAS (Brake Assist System).................... Cameras................................................ EBD (electronic brake force distribu‐ tion)....................................................... ESP® Crosswind Assist.......................... Overview................................................ Radar and ultrasonic sensors................. Responsibility........................................ STEER CONTROL................................... Driving system see Active Blind Spot Assist see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC see Active Emergency Stop Assist see Active Lane Change Assist see Active Lane Keeping Assist see Active Parking Assist see Active Speed Limit Assist see Active Steering Assist see ATTENTION ASSIST 424 178 199 178 176 180 180 177 176 176 180 Index 453 see Blind Spot Assist see Cruise control see Driving safety system see HOLD function see Parking Assist PARKTRONIC see Rear view camera see Surround view camera see Traffic Sign Assist Driving tips Breaking-in notes................................... Drinking and driving.............................. General driving tips............................... Optimized acceleration.......................... Drowsiness detection see ATTENTION ASSIST Dynamic handling control system see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) DYNAMIC SELECT Calling up the fuel consumption indi‐ cator...................................................... Configuring drive program I................... Displaying engine data........................... Displaying vehicle data.......................... Drive program display............................ Drive programs...................................... Function................................................ Operating (DYNAMIC SELECT switch).... Selecting the drive program.................. 150 152 152 151 161 160 161 161 160 E E10............................................................. Easy entry feature Function/notes..................................... Setting................................................... Easy exit feature Function/notes..................................... Setting................................................... EASY-PACK trunk box Care...................................................... EBD (electronic brake force distribu‐ tion) Function/notes..................................... ECO Assist Function/notes..................................... ECO display Function................................................ 159 159 160 160 359 102 103 102 103 299 180 158 157 ECO start/stop function Switching off/on................................... 157 Electric parking brake Applying automatically........................... 172 Applying/releasing manually................. 173 Emergency braking................................ 174 Releasing automatically......................... 173 Electronic Stability Program see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) Emergency Assistance overview................................ 14 First-aid kit (soft sided)......................... 302 Reflective safety vest............................. 301 Removing the warning triangle.............. 301 Setting up the warning triangle............. 302 Emergency braking.................................... 174 Emergency braking see BAS (Brake Assist System) Emergency call see Mercedes-Benz emergency call system Emergency engine start............................ 318 Emergency key Locking/unlocking the doors.................. 70 454 Index Emergency operation mode Starting the vehicle............................... 148 Emergency release Trunk lid (from inside).............................. 76 Emergency spare wheel Notes..................................................... 351 Emergency Tensioning Devices Activation................................................ 34 Engine Engine number...................................... 355 Starting (emergency operation mode)... 148 Starting (Remote Online)....................... 149 Starting assistance................................ 312 Engine data Displaying.............................................. 161 Engine number.......................................... 355 Engine oil Additives................................................ 361 Capacity................................................ 362 Checking the oil level using the driver display......................................... 290 MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval................. 362 Quality................................................... 362 Refilling................................................. Error message see Display message ESC (Electronic Stability Control) see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) ESP® Crosswind Assist................................... ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) Activating/deactivating......................... Function/notes..................................... Exterior lighting Care...................................................... Exterior lighting see Lights Exterior mirrors Automatic mirror folding function.......... Folding in/out....................................... Operating the memory function............ Parking position..................................... Setting................................................... 291 180 180 179 298 137 134 104 136 134 F Fatigue detection see ATTENTION ASSIST Favorites Adding................................................... First-aid kit (soft sided)............................ Flacon Inserting/removing............................... Flat tire Changing a wheel.................................. MOExtended tires.................................. Notes.................................................... TIREFIT kit............................................. Flat towing see Tow-bar system Floor mats.................................................. Fog light (enhanced)................................. Foil covering Radar and ultrasonic sensors................. Fragrance see Perfume atomizer 250 302 144 346 303 302 304 117 123 176 Index 455 Fragrance system Activating/deactivating......................... 144 Adjusting the fragrance intensity........... 144 Free software............................................... 31 Frequencies Two-way radio....................................... 354 Front airbag (driver, front passenger)....... 39 Front passenger seat see Seat Fuel Additives............................................... 360 Diesel.................................................... 360 E10........................................................ 359 Fuel reserve........................................... 361 Gasoline................................................ 359 Low outside temperatures..................... 360 Quality (diesel)...................................... 360 Quality (gasoline).................................. 359 Refueling............................................... 166 Sulfur content....................................... 359 Tank content.......................................... 361 Fuel consumption indicator Calling up............................................... 161 Function seat see Door control panel Fuses Before replacing a fuse.......................... Dashboard fuse box.............................. Fuse assignment diagram...................... Fuse box in the engine compartment..... Fuse box in the front-passenger foot‐ well........................................................ Fuse box in the trunk............................. Notes..................................................... Fuses see Fuses G Garage door opener Clearing the memory............................. Resolving problems................................ Garage door openers Opening/closing the door..................... Programming buttons............................ Synchronizing the rolling code............... Gasoline..................................................... Gearshift recommendation...................... Genuine parts.............................................. 17 Glide mode................................................. 165 319 320 319 319 321 321 319 172 171 172 170 171 359 164 H Handbrake see Electric parking brake Handling characteristics (unusual)......... 322 HANDS-FREE ACCESS.................................. 74 Hazard warning lights............................... 121 Hazardous substances Information.............................................. 20 Head restraint Front (adjusting mechanically) (4-way).... 94 Front (adjusting mechanically) (twoway)......................................................... 93 Rear (removing/installing)....................... 95 Rear passenger compartment (adjusting)............................................... 94 Head-up Display Care...................................................... 299 Function................................................ 240 Operating.............................................. 240 Operating the memory function............ 104 456 Index Switching on/off.................................... 241 Headlamps see Automatic driving lights Headliner (care)......................................... 299 Heating see Climate control Help call see Mercedes-Benz emergency call system High beam Activating/deactivating......................... 120 High beam see Adaptive Highbeam Assist High-beam flasher..................................... 120 High-beam headlamps Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus............. 127 Highway mode........................................... 123 Hill start assist.......................................... 182 HOLD function Function/notes...................................... 181 Switching on/off................................... 181 Home screen (central display) Overview............................................... 245 Hood Opening/closing................................... 288 I Identification plate Engine................................................... 355 Refrigerant............................................ 364 Vehicle.................................................. 355 Ignition key see SmartKey Immobilizer.................................................. 85 Indicator lamp see Warning/indicator lamp Individual drive program Configuring............................................ 160 Selecting............................................... 160 Inside rearview mirror Anti-glare mode (automatic).................. 136 Inside rearview mirror see Outside mirrors Inspection see ASSYST PLUS Instrument cluster see Driver display Intelligent Light System Activating/deactivating......................... 126 Active headlamps.................................. 122 Adaptive Highbeam Assist..................... 126 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus............. 127 Assistance functions.............................. 124 Bad weather light.................................. 123 City lighting........................................... 123 Cornering light....................................... 122 Fog light (enhanced).............................. 123 Highway mode....................................... 123 Overview............................................... 122 Topographical compensation................. 123 Interior lighting Adjusting............................................... 130 Ambient lighting.................................... 130 Reading lamp......................................... 130 Switch-off delay time............................. 132 Interior motion sensor Activating/deactivating........................... 88 Function.................................................. 87 Index 457 Internet radio see TuneIn Ionization Activating/deactivating (MBUX mul‐ timedia system)..................................... 144 iPhone® see Smartphone integration J Jack Storage location.................................... 345 Jump-start connection General notes........................................ 310 K KEYLESS-GO Deactivating a function........................... 64 Locking/unlocking the vehicle................ 68 Problem................................................... 69 Unlocking setting.................................... 64 Kickdown Using..................................................... 165 Knee airbag.................................................. 39 L Labeling (tires) see Tire labeling Lamp see Interior lighting Lamp (driver display) see Warning/indicator lamp Lane detection (automatic) see Active Lane Keeping Assist Lane Keeping Assist see Active Lane Keeping Assist Language Notes.................................................... 256 Setting................................................... 256 LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat anchor Installing.................................................. 53 Light switch Overview................................................ 119 Lighting see Interior lighting see Lights Lights Active headlamps.................................. Adaptive Highbeam Assist..................... Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus............. Automatic driving lights......................... Bad weather light.................................. City lighting........................................... Combination switch............................... Cornering light....................................... Fog light (enhanced).............................. Hazard warning lights............................ High beam............................................. High-beam flasher................................. Highway mode....................................... Intelligent Light System......................... Light switch........................................... Low-beam headlamps............................ Parking lights......................................... Rear fog lamp......................................... Responsibility for lighting systems......... Setting the exterior lighting switchoff delay time........................................ Standing lights....................................... Switching the Intelligent Light Sys‐ tem on/off............................................ Switching the locator lighting on/off..... 122 126 127 120 123 123 120 122 123 121 120 120 123 122 119 119 119 119 119 129 119 126 129 458 Index Turn signal light..................................... 120 Limited Warranty Vehicle.................................................... 26 Live Traffic Information Switching the traffic information dis‐ play on.................................................. 263 Load index (tires)...................................... 337 Load-bearing capacity (tires)................... 337 Loading Bag hook................................................ 111 Cargo tie-down rings.............................. 111 Definitions............................................. 339 Notes..................................................... 105 Roof luggage rack.................................. 112 Loading guidelines.................................... 105 Loading information table........................ 330 Loads Securing................................................ 105 Locator lighting Activating/deactivating......................... 129 Locking/unlocking Emergency key........................................ 70 KEYLESS-GO........................................... 68 Switching the automatic locking fea‐ ture on/off.............................................. 69 Unlocking/opening the doors from the inside................................................. 67 Low-beam headlamps Switching on/off.................................... 119 Lubricant additives see Additives Luggage Securing................................................ 105 Lumbar support see Lumbar support (4-way) Lumbar support (4-way)............................. 92 M Maintenance Vehicle.................................................... 20 Maintenance see ASSYST PLUS Malfunction Restraint system..................................... 34 Maneuvering assistance Activating/deactivating......................... 236 Cross traffic warning............................. 235 Drive Away Assist.................................. 234 Maneuvering brake function.................. 236 Maneuvering brake function.................... 236 Manual gearshifting Setting................................................... 164 Map Displaying online map contents............ 263 Displaying weather information............. 263 Moving.................................................. 263 Selecting the map orientation............... 263 Setting the map scale............................ 263 Massage program Overview................................................. 96 Massage programs Resetting the settings.............................. 97 Selecting the front seats......................... 97 Maximum load rating................................ 336 Maximum permissible load Calculation example.............................. 332 Determining........................................... 331 Index 459 Maximum tire pressure............................ MBUX multimedia system Activating/deactivating standby mode.. Activating/deactivating the fra‐ grance system....................................... Collision detection (parked vehicle)....... Configuring drive program I................... Coupling the steering wheel heater to the seat heating................................. Home screen......................................... Notes..................................................... Operating the touchscreen.................... Overview............................................... Resetting (factory setting)..................... Setting route-based speed adaptation... Setting the air distribution..................... Setting the fragrance system................. Setting the rear climate control............. Switching ionization on/off................... MBUX multimedia system see Display (MBUX multimedia system) MBUX Voice Assistant Function................................................ Voice prompting.................................... 336 176 144 174 160 101 245 244 246 244 256 192 142 144 142 144 247 248 Mechanical key Inserting/removing................................. 65 Media Overview of the functions and sym‐ bols....................................................... 280 Medical aids................................................. 25 Memory function Function................................................ 103 Head-up Display — Calling up stored settings................................................. 104 Head-up Display — Storing settings....... 104 Operating.............................................. 104 Outside mirrors — Calling up stored settings................................................. 104 Outside mirrors — Storing settings........ 104 Seat — Calling up stored settings.......... 104 Seat — Storing settings.......................... 104 Steering wheel — Calling up saved settings................................................. 104 Steering wheel — Saving settings........... 104 Menus (driver display) Notes.................................................... 239 Mercedes me app Information............................................ 274 Mercedes me calls Arranging a service appointment........... Calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center................................................... Calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Center after automatic accident or breakdown detection............................. Information............................................ Making a call via the overhead con‐ trol panel............................................... Transferred data.................................... Mercedes me connect Accident and Breakdown Manage‐ ment...................................................... Information............................................ Transferred data.................................... Mercedes-Benz emergency call system Automatic emergency call..................... Information............................................ Information on data processing............. Manual emergency call.......................... Overview............................................... Message (driver display) see Display message 271 270 271 270 270 272 273 273 274 277 277 279 278 277 460 Index Message memory...................................... 367 Mirrors see Exterior mirrors Mobile phone see Smartphone integration see Telephone Model type see Vehicle identification plate MOExtended tires..................................... 303 Multimedia system see MBUX multimedia system N Navigation Notes..................................................... Overview............................................... Switching on.......................................... Navigation see Destination entry see Map see Route Neutral Engaging................................................ 257 258 257 162 O Occupant safety see Airbag see Automatic co-driver airbag shutoff see Automatic measures after an accident see Child seat see Pets in the vehicle see Post-collision brake see PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occu‐ pant protection) see PRE-SAFE® Impulse Side see PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection plus) see Restraint system see Seat belt Oil see Engine oil On-board diagnostics interface see Diagnostics connection Online services Data storage............................................ 29 Open-source software................................. 31 Opening the trunk lid using your foot HANDS-FREE ACCESS............................. 74 Operating fluids Additives (fuel)...................................... 360 Brake fluid............................................. 362 Coolant (engine).................................... 362 Engine oil............................................... 361 Fuel (diesel)........................................... 360 Fuel (gasoline)....................................... 359 Notes..................................................... 357 Refrigerant (air conditioning system)..... 364 Windshield washer fluid........................ 363 Operating safety 48 V on-board electrical system.............. 20 Declaration of conformity (wireless vehicle components)............................... 22 Information.............................................. 20 Operator's Manual Vehicle equipment................................... 18 Operator's Manual (digital)......................... 16 Optimized acceleration Activating............................................... 151 Outside mirrors Anti-glare mode (automatic).................. 136 Index 461 Overhead control panel Overview................................................. 10 P Paint (cleaning instructions).................... 296 Paint code.................................................. 355 Panel heating Setting..................................................... 98 Panic alarm Arming/disarming................................... 64 Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel see Sliding sunroof Park position Engaging................................................ 163 Selecting automatically......................... 163 Parking see Electric parking brake Parking aid see Parking Assist PARKTRONIC Parking Assist PARKTRONIC Activating.............................................. 228 Adjusting warning tones........................ 228 Function................................................ Switching off......................................... System limitations................................. Parking assistance systems see Active Parking Assist Parking brake see Electric parking brake Parking for an extended period................ Parking lights............................................. Parking position Exterior mirrors..................................... Storing the position of the frontpassenger outside mirror using reverse gear........................................... PASSENGER AIR BAG status display see Automatic front passenger front airbag shutoff Payload Calculation example.............................. Determining the maximum.................... Perfume see Perfume atomizer 225 228 225 175 119 136 137 332 331 Perfume atomizer Inserting/removing the flacon............... 144 Setting................................................... 144 Perfume vial see Perfume atomizer Period out of use Activating/deactivating standby mode.. 176 Standby mode function.......................... 175 Permitted towing methods....................... 314 Pets in the vehicle....................................... 62 Plastic trim (Care)..................................... 299 Post-collision brake..................................... 48 Power closing function Trunk lid................................................... 72 Power supply Switching on (start/stop button)........... 147 Power washer (care)................................. 295 PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant protection) Function.................................................. 46 PRE-SAFE® Sound................................... 46 Reversing measures................................ 47 462 Index PRE-SAFE® Impulse Side Activation................................................ 34 Function.................................................. 47 PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory occu‐ pant protection plus) Function.................................................. 47 Reversing measures................................ 47 Preventative occupant protection sys‐ tem see PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occu‐ pant protection) see PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection plus) Profile Notes..................................................... 249 Program see DYNAMIC SELECT Protecting the environment Notes....................................................... 17 Protection against collision see Drive Away Assist see Maneuvering brake function Pulling away see Driving tips Q QR code Rescue card............................................ 27 Qualified specialist workshop.................... 24 R Radar and ultrasonic sensors Damage................................................. Radio Overview of the functions and sym‐ bols....................................................... Rain-closing feature Sliding sunroof........................................ Reading lamp see Interior lighting Real wood (Care)....................................... Rear axle steering..................................... Rear climate control Setting (MBUX multimedia system)....... 176 282 83 299 155 142 Rear doors (child safety lock).................... 60 Rear fog lamp Switching on/off................................... 120 Rear seat see Seats Rear view camera Care...................................................... 298 Function................................................. 217 Opening the camera cover (surround view camera)......................................... 225 Rear window Roller sunblind........................................ 85 Rear window heater.................................. 138 Reflective safety vest................................ 301 Refrigerant (air conditioning system) Notes.................................................... 364 Refueling Refueling the vehicle............................. 166 Regulatory radio identification Indonesia.............................................. 355 Small components................................ 355 Regulatory radio information Installation clearances.......................... 355 Index 463 Remote Online Charging the starter battery.................. 149 Cooling/heating the vehicle interior...... 149 Starting the vehicle............................... 149 Reporting safety defects............................ 26 Rescue card................................................. 27 Reserve Fuel........................................................ 361 Reset function (MBUX multimedia system)...................................................... 256 Reset function (MBUX multimedia system) see Reset function (MBUX multime‐ dia system) Resetting (factory setting) see Reset function (MBUX multime‐ dia system) Residual heat............................................. 143 Restraint system Basic instructions for children................. 48 Function in an accident........................... 34 Functionality............................................ 33 Malfunction............................................. 34 Protection................................................ 33 Reduced protection................................. 33 Self-test................................................... 33 Warning lamp.......................................... 33 Reverse gear Engaging................................................ 162 Rims (care)................................................. 298 Roadside Assistance (breakdown)............ 20 Roll away protection see HOLD function Roller sunblind Rear window............................................ 85 Side windows.......................................... 84 Sliding sunroof........................................ 80 Roof load.................................................... 366 Roof luggage rack Loading.................................................. 112 Securing................................................. 112 Route Activating a commuter route................. 261 Calculating............................................. 261 Selecting a type..................................... 261 Selecting an alternative route................ 261 Route guidance with augmented real‐ ity Activating............................................... Activating/deactivating the traffic light view............................................... Displaying street names and house numbers................................................ Route-based speed adaptation Function................................................. Setting................................................... Run-flat characteristics MOExtended tires.................................. 261 208 261 191 192 303 S Safety systems see Driving safety system Satellite radio Logging in.............................................. 285 Setting music and sport alerts.............. 285 Seat 4-way lumbar support............................. 92 Adjusting (electrically)............................. 92 Adjusting (manually)................................ 89 Automatic adjustment............................. 95 464 Index Configuring settings................................ 95 Correct driver's seat position.................. 89 Folding back the backrest (rear passenger compartment)....................... 110 Locking the backrest (rear passenger compartment)........................................ 111 Massage program overview..................... 96 Operating the memory function............ 104 Panel heating.......................................... 98 Resetting the settings.............................. 97 Setting options........................................ 12 Workout program overview...................... 96 Seat belt Adjusting the height................................ 38 Care...................................................... 299 Fastening................................................. 38 Protection................................................ 35 Seat belt adjustment Activating/deactivating........................... 39 Function.................................................. 38 Seat belt warning see Seat belts Seat belts Activating/deactivating seat belt adjustment.............................................. 39 Reduced protection................................. 36 Releasing................................................. 39 Seat belt adjustment (function)............... 38 Warning lamp.......................................... 39 Seat cover (Care)....................................... 299 Seat heating Activating/deactivating........................... 97 Seat ventilation Activating/deactivating........................... 98 Seats Folding the backrest forwards (rear passenger compartment)...................... 108 Selecting a gear see Changing gears Selector lever see DIRECT SELECT lever Self-test Automatic front passenger front air‐ bag shutoff.............................................. 44 Sensors (care)........................................... 298 Service see ASSYST PLUS Service Center see Qualified specialist workshop Service interval display see ASSYST PLUS Setting a speed see Cruise control Setting the map scale see Map Shift paddles see Steering wheel paddle shifters Shifting gears Gearshift recommendation.................... 164 Side airbag................................................... 39 Side windows Child safety lock in the rear passenger compartment.......................... 61 Closing using the SmartKey.................... 79 Convenience closing............................... 79 Convenience opening.............................. 79 Opening with the SmartKey..................... 79 Opening/closing..................................... 77 Index 465 Problem................................................... 80 Roller sunblind........................................ 84 Size designation (tires)............................. 337 Sliding sunroof Automatic functions................................ 83 Closing.................................................... 80 Closing using the SmartKey.................... 79 Opening................................................... 80 Opening with the SmartKey..................... 79 Problem................................................... 83 Rain-closing feature................................. 83 SmartKey Acoustic locking verification signal......... 64 Battery.................................................... 65 Deactivating a function........................... 64 Energy consumption................................ 64 Function overview................................... 63 Key ring attachment................................ 65 Mechanical key........................................ 65 Panic alarm............................................. 64 Problem................................................... 67 Unlocking setting.................................... 64 SmartKey see SmartKey Smartphone see Smartphone integration see Telephone Smartphone integration Overview............................................... 275 Snow chains.............................................. 323 Socket (12 V) Using..................................................... 114 Socket (115 V) Rear passenger compartment................ 114 Software update System updates..................................... 253 Sound PRE-SAFE® Sound................................... 46 Wheels and tires.................................... 322 Sound menu Functions overview............................... 286 Spare wheel see Emergency spare wheel Special seat belt retractor.......................... 52 Specialist workshop see Qualified specialist workshop Speed index (tires).................................... Standby mode Activating/deactivating......................... Function................................................ Standing lights........................................... Start-off assist see Optimized acceleration Start/stop button Parking the vehicle................................ Starting the vehicle............................... Switching on the power supply/vehi‐ cle......................................................... Start/stop function see ECO start/stop function Starter battery Charging (Remote Online)...................... Starting see Vehicle Starting assistance see Jump-start connection Starting-off aid see Hill start assist 337 176 175 119 168 148 147 149 466 Index STEER CONTROL Function/notes..................................... 180 Steering Rear axle steering.................................. 155 Steering wheel Adjusting (electrically)........................... 100 Adjusting (manually)................................ 99 Care...................................................... 299 Operating the memory function............ 104 Steering wheel heater............................ 101 Steering wheel heater Activating/deactivating......................... 101 Coupling to seat heating........................ 101 Steering wheel paddle shifters................ 164 Storage areas see Storage space Storage compartments see Storage space Storage space Armrest................................................. 107 Center console...................................... 107 Door...................................................... 107 Glove box............................................... 107 Stowage areas see Loading Stowage compartments see Loading Street names and house numbers Displaying.............................................. Sulfur content........................................... Surround View see Surround view camera Surround view camera Button................................................... Care...................................................... Function................................................ Opening the camera cover (rear view camera)................................................. Selecting a view.................................... Switch-off delay time Exterior.................................................. Interior.................................................. Switching on the ignition see Vehicle 261 359 225 298 220 225 225 129 132 Synchronization function Activating/deactivating (MBUX mul‐ timedia system)..................................... Activating/deactivating (rear operat‐ ing unit)................................................. System settings Overview of the system settings menu..................................................... Reset function (MBUX multimedia system)................................................. System settings see Language T Tailpipes (care).......................................... Tank content Fuel........................................................ Reserve (fuel)........................................ Technical data Information............................................ Regulatory radio identification.............. Regulatory radio information................. Telephone Connecting a mobile phone (Passkey)... 142 142 252 256 298 361 361 353 355 355 269 Index 467 Connecting a mobile phone (Secure Simple Pairing)...................................... Function/notes...................................... Functions in the telephone menu.......... Notes.................................................... Operating modes................................... Telephone menu overview..................... Telephony operating modes Bluetooth® Telephony............................ Temperature.............................................. Temperature grade.................................... Through-loading feature see Seats TIN (Tire Identification Number).............. Tire and Loading Information placard..... Tire characteristics................................... Tire inflation compressor see TIREFIT kit Tire information table............................... Tire labeling Characteristics...................................... DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN).... 269 116 269 266 269 268 269 138 334 335 330 337 330 337 335 Load index............................................. Load-bearing capacity........................... Maximum tire load................................ Maximum tire pressure......................... Overview............................................... Speed rating.......................................... Temperature grade................................ Tire Quality Grading............................... Tire size designation.............................. Traction grade....................................... Tread wear grade................................... Tire load (maximum)................................. Tire pressure Checking (manually).............................. Checking (tire pressure monitoring system)................................................. Maximum.............................................. Notes.................................................... Restarting the tire pressure loss warning system..................................... Restarting the tire pressure monitor‐ ing system............................................. Tire pressure loss warning system (function)............................................... 337 337 336 336 334 337 334 334 337 334 334 336 326 327 336 323 329 328 329 Tire pressure monitoring system (function)............................................... Tire pressure table................................ TIREFIT kit............................................. Tire pressure loss warning system Function................................................ Restarting.............................................. Tire pressure monitor Checking the tire pressure.................... Checking the tire temperature.............. Function................................................ Restarting.............................................. Tire pressure table.................................... Tire Quality Grading.................................. Tire temperature Checking (tire pressure monitoring system)................................................. Tire pressure monitoring system (function)............................................... Tire tread................................................... Tire-change tool kit Overview............................................... 326 325 304 329 329 327 327 326 328 325 334 327 326 322 345 468 Index TIREFIT kit Storage location.................................... 304 Using..................................................... 304 Tires Characteristics...................................... 337 Checking............................................... 322 Checking the tire pressure (manually)... 326 Checking the tire pressure (tire pres‐ sure monitoring system)........................ 327 Definitions............................................. 339 DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN).... 335 Flat tire.................................................. 302 Installing................................................ 349 Load index............................................. 337 Load-bearing capacity........................... 337 Maximum tire load................................ 336 Maximum tire pressure......................... 336 MOExtended tires.................................. 303 Noise..................................................... 322 Notes on installing................................ 342 Overview of tire labeling........................ 334 Removing.............................................. 349 Replacing...................................... 342, 346 Replacing the wheel trim....................... 346 Restarting the tire pressure loss warning system..................................... Restarting the tire pressure monitor‐ ing system............................................. Rotating................................................. Selection............................................... Snow chains.......................................... Speed rating.......................................... Storing.................................................. Temperature grade................................ Tire and Loading Information placard.... Tire pressure (notes)............................. Tire pressure loss warning system (function)............................................... Tire pressure monitoring system (function)............................................... Tire pressure table................................ Tire Quality Grading............................... Tire size designation.............................. TIREFIT kit............................................. Traction grade....................................... Tread wear grade................................... Unusual handling characteristics.......... Toll system Windshield............................................. 329 328 344 342 323 337 345 334 330 323 329 326 325 334 337 304 334 334 322 137 Tool see Vehicle tool kit Top Tether.................................................... 55 Touch Control Driver display........................................ 238 Operating.............................................. 246 Touch-sensitive controls............................. 19 Touchscreen Operating.............................................. 246 Tow-away alarm Activating/deactivating........................... 87 Function.................................................. 87 Tow-bar system......................................... 236 Tow-starting............................................... 318 Towing away............................................... 315 Towing eye Installing................................................ 318 Storage location..................................... 317 Towing methods........................................ 314 Traction grade........................................... 334 Traffic information Switching on the display....................... 263 Index 469 Traffic Light Assistant Traffic light data service........................ 209 Traffic light data service Display in the driver's display................ 209 Traffic light view Activating/deactivating......................... 208 Information............................................ 208 Traffic Sign Assist Function/notes..................................... 205 Setting................................................... 208 System limits......................................... 205 Transmission Engaging neutral.................................... 162 Transmission position display.................. 161 Transporting Vehicle................................................... 316 Tread wear grade...................................... 334 Trim element (Care).................................. 299 Trunk lid Activating/deactivating the trunk lid opening height restriction....................... 77 Closing.................................................... 72 Emergency release (from inside).............. 76 HANDS-FREE ACCESS............................. 74 Locking separately................................... 76 Opening................................................... 71 Power closing function............................ 72 TuneIn Calling up.............................................. 284 Turn signal indicator................................. 120 Turn signal light Activating/deactivating......................... 120 Two-way radios Frequencies........................................... 354 Notes on installation............................. 353 Transmission output (maximum)........... 354 U Unlocking see Locking/unlocking Unlocking setting........................................ 64 Updates Important system updates.................... 253 USB port Front storage compartment................... 107 Rear passenger compartment................ 115 User profiles Adding a user........................................ 250 Selecting user options........................... 250 V Vehicle Activating/deactivating standby mode.. 176 Collision detection (parking).................. 174 Correct use.............................................. 24 Data acquisition...................................... 27 Data storage............................................ 27 Diagnostics connection........................... 23 Equipment............................................... 18 Limited Warranty..................................... 26 Locking (automatically)........................... 69 Locking/unlocking (emergency key)....... 70 Locking/unlocking (from inside)............. 68 Locking/unlocking (KEYLESS-GO)........... 68 Lowering............................................... 350 Maintenance........................................... 20 Medical aids............................................ 25 Parking for an extended period.............. 175 Problem notification................................ 25 QR code rescue card............................... 27 Qualified specialist workshop.................. 24 470 Index Raising................................................... 347 Standby mode function.......................... 175 Starting (emergency operation mode)... 148 Starting (Remote Online)....................... 149 Starting (start/stop button).................. 148 Switching off (start/stop button).......... 168 Switching on (start/stop button)........... 147 Towing................................................... 236 Ventilating (convenience opening)........... 79 Vehicle battery see Battery (vehicle) Vehicle camera Information............................................ 176 Vehicle data Displaying (DYNAMIC SELECT)............... 161 Roof load............................................... 366 Turning radius....................................... 365 Vehicle height........................................ 365 Vehicle length........................................ 365 Vehicle width......................................... 365 Wheelbase............................................. 365 Vehicle data storage Event data recorders............................... 30 MBUX multimedia system/Mercedes me connect............................................. 30 Vehicle dimensions................................... 365 Vehicle electronics Notes.................................................... 353 Two-way radios...................................... 353 Vehicle identification number see VIN Vehicle identification plate Paint code............................................. 355 VIN........................................................ 355 Vehicle interior Cooling or heating (Remote Online)....... 149 Vehicle maintenance see ASSYST PLUS Vehicle operation Outside the USA or Canada..................... 19 Vehicle sensors Information............................................ 176 Vehicle tool kit TIREFIT kit............................................. 304 Towing eye............................................. 317 Ventilating Convenience opening.............................. 79 Ventilation see Climate control Vents see Air vents VIN Identification plate................................ 355 Seat....................................................... 355 Windshield............................................ 355 Vision Removing condensation from the windows................................................ 143 Windshield heater.................................. 145 W Warning lamp see Warning/indicator lamp Warning system see ATA (anti-theft alarm system) Warning triangle Removing............................................... 301 Setting up.............................................. 302 Index 471 Warning/indicator lamp ! ABS warning lamp........................ Ä Active Brake Assist warning lamp...................................................... J Brake system warning lamp (Canada only)........................................ $ Brake warning lamp (USA only).... J Brakes warning lamp (yellow) (Canada only)........................................ ÿ Coolant warning lamp (red).......... ÿ Coolant warning lamp (yellow)..... ! Electric parking brake indicator lamp (red) (Canada only)....................... F Electric parking brake indicator lamp (red) (USA only)............................ # Electrical malfunction warning lamp...................................................... ; Engine diagnosis warning lamp.... å ESP® OFF warning lamp............... ÷ ESP® warning lamp flashes.......... 436 435 434 434 433 428 430 432 432 431 430 437 436 ÷ ESP® warning lamp lights up........ 8 Fuel reserve warning lamp flashes................................................... 8 Fuel reserve warning lamp lights up................................................. H Mercedes-Benz emergency call system warning lamp............................ Ù Power steering warning lamp (red)...................................................... Ù Power steering warning lamp (yellow).................................................. Ù Rear axle steering warning lamp (yellow)......................................... é Recuperative Brake System warning lamp (USA only)....................... 6 Restraint system warning lamp.... ü Seat belt warning lamp flashes.... ü Seat belt warning lamp lights up.. ! The electric parking brake (yel‐ low) indicator lamp................................ 437 431 431 438 427 427 428 433 426 426 427 432 h Tire pressure monitoring sys‐ tem warning lamp flashes..................... h Tire pressure monitoring sys‐ tem warning lamp lights up................... L Warning lamp for distance warning function................................... Overview............................................... Warning/indicator lamps PASSENGER AIR BAG.............................. Warranty...................................................... Washer fluid see Windshield washer fluid Washing by hand (care)............................ Water tank see Air-water duct Weather information................................. Web browsers Overview............................................... Wheel change Lowering the vehicle............................. Mounting a new wheel.......................... 439 439 435 424 44 26 296 263 275 350 349 472 Index Removing a wheel................................. 349 Removing/installing hub caps............... 346 Wheel rotation........................................... 344 Wheels Care...................................................... 298 Checking............................................... 322 Checking the tire pressure (manually)... 326 Checking the tire pressure (tire pres‐ sure monitoring system)........................ 327 Definitions............................................. 339 DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN).... 335 Flat tire.................................................. 302 Installing................................................ 349 Load index............................................. 337 Load-bearing capacity........................... 337 Maximum tire load................................ 336 Maximum tire pressure......................... 336 MOExtended tires.................................. 303 Noise..................................................... 322 Notes on installing................................ 342 Overview of tire labeling........................ 334 Removing.............................................. 349 Replacing...................................... 342, 346 Replacing the hub cap........................... 346 Restarting the tire pressure loss warning system..................................... Restarting the tire pressure monitor‐ ing system............................................. Rotating................................................. Selection............................................... Snow chains.......................................... Speed rating.......................................... Storing.................................................. Temperature grade................................ Tire and Loading Information placard.... Tire characteristics................................ Tire pressure (notes)............................. Tire pressure loss warning system (function)............................................... Tire pressure monitoring system (function)............................................... Tire pressure table................................ Tire Quality Grading............................... Tire size designation.............................. TIREFIT kit............................................. Traction grade....................................... Tread wear grade................................... Unusual handling characteristics.......... 329 328 344 342 323 337 345 334 330 337 323 329 326 325 334 337 304 334 334 322 Wi-Fi Configuring............................................ Window curtain airbag............................... Window lifter see Side windows Windows Care...................................................... Windows see Side windows Windshield Defrosting.............................................. Radio waves........................................... Replacing the wiper blades.................... Windshield see Windshield Windshield heater..................................... Windshield heater see Windshield heater Windshield washer fluid Notes.................................................... Windshield washer system Refilling................................................. 254 39 298 138 137 132 145 363 293 Index 473 Windshield wipers Replacing the wiper blades.................... 132 Switching on/off................................... 132 Winter operation Snow chains.......................................... 323 Wiper blades Care...................................................... 298 Replacing............................................... 132 Wireless charging Function/notes...................................... 116 Mobile phone......................................... 117 Wireless vehicle components Declaration of conformity........................ 22 Workout program Overview................................................. 96 Workshop see Qualified specialist workshop